68p02902w66-a-uk

CATEGORY 423INSTALLATION AND

CONFIGURATION

CATEGORY 523MAINTENANCEINFORMATION

CATEGORY 623PARTS INFORMATION

INDEXCATEGORY 323TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

Including:68P02902W67-A68P02902W68-A68P02902W69-A68P02902W70-A

Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Service ManualGSM-208-020

68P02902W66-A

68P02902W67-A68P02902W68-A68P02902W69-A68P02902W70-A

68P02902W66-A

Service M

anual

Ho

rizonm

acro 12 carriero

utd

oo

r

GS

M-208-020

Horizonmacro 12carrier outdoor

Including:

Pos

itin

mar

k fo

r TE

D s

pine

ServiceManual

29th May 02

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

68P02902W66-A i

GSM-208-020

Service ManualHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

E Motorola 2000-2002All Rights ReservedPrinted in the U.K.

GSM-208-020

29th May 02ii


68P02902W66-A

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

CopyrightsThe Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computerprograms stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and othercountries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including theexclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, anycopyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this documentmay not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or byimplication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications ofMotorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.

RestrictionsThe software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a licenseagreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited bylaw. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, storedin a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by anymeans, without prior written permission of Motorola.

AccuracyWhile reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorolaassumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the useof the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any productsdescribed herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise thisdocument and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify anyperson of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applicationor use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patentrights of others.

Trademarks

and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. Aspira, Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A iii

Contents

Issue status of this manual 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

First aid in case of electric shock 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reporting safety issues 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Warnings and cautions 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General warnings 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General cautions 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Devices sensitive to static 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motorola GSM manual set 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GMR amendment 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GMR amendment record 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 323Technical Description (Tech.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Overview and specifications i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment introduction and manual definition Tech. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor Tech. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Names and acronyms for enclosure equipment Tech. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the enclosure Tech. 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Names and acronyms for Horizonmacro indoor equipment Tech. 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . View of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet Tech. 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagram of Horizonmacro indoor Tech. 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure (optional) Tech. 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the ancillary enclosure Tech. 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding information in this manual Tech. 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Specifications – Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor Tech. 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to specifications Tech. 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Approval and safety Tech. 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental limits Tech. 1–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Tech. 1–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power specifications Tech. 1–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF power output Tech. 1–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensitivity Tech. 1–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup Tech. 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network transmission options Tech. 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Tech. 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights Tech. 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Tech. 1–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency capability Tech. 1–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhancements Tech. 1–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements Tech. 1–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure site dimensions Tech. 1–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02iv


68P02902W66-A

Specifications – ancillary enclosure Tech. 1–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to ancillary enclosure specifications Tech. 1–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specification compliance Tech. 1–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power specifications Tech. 1–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery specifications Tech. 1–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup duration Tech. 1–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses Tech. 1–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Tech. 1–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weight Tech. 1–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental limits Tech. 1–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure enhancements Tech. 1–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements Tech. 1–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site layout plan – ancillary enclosure with main enclosure Tech. 1–20 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Enclosure structure and components i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the enclosure Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure description Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the components within the enclosure Tech. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Alarm interface module (AIM) Tech. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description of the AIM Tech. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIM block diagram Tech. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIM connector locations Tech. 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIM connector pinouts Tech. 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIP switch settings on the AIM Tech. 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surge arrester holders Tech. 2–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Primary ac terminal box Tech. 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary ac terminal box location and function Tech. 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the primary ac terminal box Tech. 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fan tray Tech. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the fan tray Tech. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan tray description Tech. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the fan tray Tech. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Smoke detector Tech. 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the smoke detector Tech. 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enclosure lighting Tech. 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure lighting description Tech. 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Doors and hood Tech. 2–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door function Tech. 2–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the door locks Tech. 2–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood function Tech. 2–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood operation Tech. 2–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood view Tech. 2–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cable entry to the enclosure Tech. 2–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable entry overview Tech. 2–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low level cable entry Tech. 2–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable entry from beneath the enclosure Tech. 2–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional high level cable entry Tech. 2–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional cable shroud and cable termination bracket kits Tech. 2–24 . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A v

Chapter 3Enclosure power distribution equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AC power distribution Tech. 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC distribution description Tech. 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the ac power distribution unit Tech. 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC circuit breakers Tech. 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC distribution circuit diagram Tech. 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DC power distribution Tech. 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC distribution description Tech. 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the dc power distribution unit Tech. 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC circuit breakers Tech. 3–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC distribution circuit diagram Tech. 3–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC fuses Tech. 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The power control module Tech. 3–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the power control module Tech. 3–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel view Tech. 3–8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel controls and indicators Tech. 3–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm management Tech. 3–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs Tech. 3–10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm output signals Tech. 3–11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The rectifier module Tech. 3–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier module overview Tech. 3–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the rectifier module Tech. 3–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier functional description Tech. 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel LEDs Tech. 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier functional diagram Tech. 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Tech. 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection circuits Tech. 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thermal protection Tech. 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and alarm signals Tech. 3–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier module pinout connections Tech. 3–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The dc connector panel Tech. 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the dc connector panel Tech. 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the dc connector panel Tech. 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal battery backup Tech. 3–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the internal battery backup system Tech. 3–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the internal battery backup compartment Tech. 3–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery thermal charge compensation Tech. 3–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery connections Tech. 3–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02vi


68P02902W66-A

Chapter 4Heat management system i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the heat management system (HMS) Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the HMS Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the HMS Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board Tech. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the HMS Tech. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow through the HMS Tech. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the heater Tech. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HMS specifications Tech. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to HMS specifications Tech. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power requirements Tech. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection rating Tech. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical characteristics Tech. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Tech. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature range Tech. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan setpoints Tech. 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5Horizonmacro indoor cabinet structure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor Tech. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External cabinet view Tech. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of structure description Tech. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filled cabinet view Tech. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Empty cabinet and SURF harness Tech. 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SURF harness and cabinet attachment Tech. 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet view with installed SURF harness Tech. 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SURF harness view Tech. 5–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Top panel Tech. 5–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel description Tech. 5–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Top panel view Tech. 5–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA) Tech. 5–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBIA overview Tech. 5–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBIA and interface panel schematic view Tech. 5–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backplane and harness view Tech. 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBIA cage function and diagram Tech. 5–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBIA harness function Tech. 5–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBIA backplane function Tech. 5–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attachment of cage to cabinet Tech. 5–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface panel function Tech. 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface panel diagram Tech. 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface panel pinouts Tech. 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabinet door Tech. 5–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door function Tech. 5–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door external and internal view Tech. 5–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6Horizonmacro indoor temperature control i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor temperature control system Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of indoor temperature control system Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature shutdown sensors Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet restart after shutdown Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A vii

Indoor fans Tech. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor fan overview Tech. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan operation and reset Tech. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filter sheet option and effect on fans Tech. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7Horizonmacro indoor power supply i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply modules (PSMs) Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of PSM Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM location and redundancy Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM alarms Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM module view and LEDs Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM backplane protection Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MicroBCU power supply module (BPSM) Tech. 7–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the BPSM Tech. 7–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BPSM diagram Tech. 7–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional description Tech. 7–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Circuit breaker module (CBM) Tech. 7–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBM overview Tech. 7–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the CBM Tech. 7–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the CBM Tech. 7–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8RF modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF equipment detail Tech. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF equipment overview Tech. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF specifications Tech. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive (Rx) RF hardware Tech. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit (Tx) RF hardware Tech. 8–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rx/Tx single antenna duplexing Tech. 8–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RF overview and RF test function Tech. 8–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF overview Tech. 8–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF main component explanation Tech. 8–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF loopback purpose Tech. 8–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF loopback hardware Tech. 8–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF loopback software operation Tech. 8–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagram of RF Tech. 8–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of RF test modes Tech. 8–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compact transceiver unit (CTU) Tech. 8–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the CTU Tech. 8–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU internal boards Tech. 8–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm reporting Tech. 8–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the CTU Tech. 8–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU connectors and reset Tech. 8–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU input/output diagram Tech. 8–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU Tx connector Tech. 8–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU Rx function Tech. 8–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU Tx function Tech. 8–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU digital processing and control functions Tech. 8–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU uplink/downlink Tech. 8–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02viii


68P02902W66-A

CTU frequency hopping Tech. 8–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of CTU frequency hopping Tech. 8–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synthesizer Frequency Hopping (SFH) Tech. 8–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH example not through BCCH Tech. 8–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFH example hopping through BCCH carrier Tech. 8–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband frequency hopping (BBH) Tech. 8–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BBH example Tech. 8–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SURF module Tech. 8–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SURF module overview Tech. 8–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single band SURF module view Tech. 8–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single band SURF functional description Tech. 8–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single band SURF functional diagram Tech. 8–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band SURF module view Tech. 8–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band SURF functional description Tech. 8–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tx blocks overview Tech. 8–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Tx blocks Tech. 8–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screw retention in Tx block locations Tech. 8–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of basket for Tx blocks Tech. 8–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit block connectors Tech. 8–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of Tx block connectors Tech. 8–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Blanking plate Tech. 8–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of blanking plate Tech. 8–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of blanking plate Tech. 8–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Feedthrough plate Tech. 8–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of feedthrough plate Tech. 8–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of feedthrough plate Tech. 8–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedthrough plate connectors Tech. 8–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HCU plate Tech. 8–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCU overview Tech. 8–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCU view Tech. 8–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCU functional diagram Tech. 8–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HCU connectors Tech. 8–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TDF Tech. 8–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of TDF Tech. 8–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDF view Tech. 8–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDF functional diagram Tech. 8–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDF connectors Tech. 8–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dual band TDF Tech. 8–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of dual band TDF Tech. 8–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band TDF view Tech. 8–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band TDF functional diagram Tech. 8–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual band TDF connectors Tech. 8–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DCF Tech. 8–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCF overview Tech. 8–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCF view Tech. 8–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCF functional diagram Tech. 8–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DCF connectors Tech. 8–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A ix

DDF Tech. 8–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of DDF Tech. 8–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDF view Tech. 8–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDF functional diagram Tech. 8–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DDF connectors Tech. 8–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9Digital modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of digital modules Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview, locations and redundancy Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital module and BPSM locations Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCUF and NIU redundancy Tech. 9–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full size and half size modules Tech. 9–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital module and CTU connections Tech. 9–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of digital module and CTU connections Tech. 9–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MCUF Tech. 9–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCUF overview Tech. 9–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capability to replace MCU of M-Cell6 and M-Cell2 Tech. 9–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPROC, TSW and GLCK functions Tech. 9–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCUF module view Tech. 9–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCUF functional diagram Tech. 9–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link to redundant MCUF Tech. 9–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel interfaces Tech. 9–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel switches and indicators Tech. 9–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX interfaces Tech. 9–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DRAM, flash EPROM and code loading functions Tech. 9–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASIC functionality Tech. 9–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sync block functionality Tech. 9–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integral MCUF FMUX functionality Tech. 9–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NIU Tech. 9–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of NIU Tech. 9–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU locations Tech. 9–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU command identity number Tech. 9–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU view and LEDs Tech. 9–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU functionality Tech. 9–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU diagram Tech. 9–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control processor Tech. 9–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU/MCUF framing and clocks Tech. 9–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance measurement Tech. 9–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signalling links (RSLs) Tech. 9–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 NIU need to set link type Tech. 9–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

T43/BIB-NIU - E1/T1 mapping Tech. 9–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of T43/BIB-NIU connection Tech. 9–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NIU to T43 mapping and command ID Tech. 9–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of T43 connection to NIUs Tech. 9–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

FMUX module and function Tech. 9–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of FMUX module Tech. 9–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX module view Tech. 9–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX functional diagram Tech. 9–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMUX functional explanation Tech. 9–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02x


68P02902W66-A

Alarm module Tech. 9–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module overview Tech. 9–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module view Tech. 9–23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module functionality Tech. 9–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module replacement – effect on alarms Tech. 9–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm collection from extension cabinets Tech. 9–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm module display presentation Tech. 9–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10Ancillary enclosure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ancillary enclosure structure Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the ancillary enclosure Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical design Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure layout Tech. 10–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ancillary enclosure technical description Tech. 10–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit diagram Tech. 10–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The battery management module Tech. 10–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BMM connector pinouts Tech. 10–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm management Tech. 10–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The battery strings Tech. 10–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The heater unit Tech. 10–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC isolator switch Tech. 10–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smoke detector Tech. 10–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure lighting Tech. 10–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 423Installation & Configuration (Inst.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction to installation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to installation Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation instructions Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual scope Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact information Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tool kit requirements Inst. 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview for tool kit Inst. 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool kit list Inst. 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparation overview Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview to site preparation Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation procedures Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A xi

Site requirements and considerations Inst. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of requirements Inst. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment dimensions Inst. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weights Inst. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Inst. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power specifications Inst. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF power output Inst. 2–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensitivity Inst. 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup (internal) Inst. 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup (external) Inst. 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network transmission options Inst. 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Environmental requirements Inst. 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements (main enclosure) Inst. 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements (ancillary enclosure) Inst. 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure site plan Inst. 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure site plan Inst. 2–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Visiting the site Inst. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of site visit Inst. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before departure to site Inst. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arrival at all sites Inst. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at occupied sites Inst. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arriving at unoccupied sites Inst. 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Leaving site during installation and optimization Inst. 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rubbish on site Inst. 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rural sites Inst. 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On site safety Inst. 2–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the site Inst. 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to site preparation Inst. 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Base site structure Inst. 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site requirements Inst. 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site access Inst. 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site layout Inst. 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Earthing the site Inst. 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview Inst. 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing requirements Inst. 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth electrode system Inst. 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross bonding Inst. 2–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earthing procedure Inst. 2–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth electrode testing Inst. 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preparing the foundation Inst. 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of foundation preparation Inst. 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure foundation Inst. 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the foundation Inst. 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3Installing the enclosure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation overview Inst. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to installation Inst. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation sections Inst. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line testing Inst. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure components Inst. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment package units Inst. 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02xii


68P02902W66-A

Equipment delivery and packaging Inst. 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery and packaging overview Inst. 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging Inst. 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Weather conditions affecting unpacking/installation Inst. 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of weather considerations Inst. 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions Inst. 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance cover Inst. 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking and preparing the enclosure Inst. 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Inst. 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoiding condensation build up Inst. 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations Inst. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure access procedures Inst. 3–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure unpacking and preparation Inst. 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe disposal of packing material Inst. 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template Inst. 3–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting bolt anchor installation Inst. 3–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of template Inst. 3–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for marking bolt hole positions using the template Inst. 3–12 . . . . . . . . . Procedure for installing enclosure bolt anchors Inst. 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fitting the enclosure onto its base Inst. 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for fitting an enclosure Inst. 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Earthing and transient protection Inst. 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site earthing Inst. 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient and lightning protection Inst. 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the rectifiers Inst. 3–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to rectifier installation Inst. 3–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rectifier installation procedure Inst. 3–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the internal batteries Inst. 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installing the internal batteries Inst. 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for installing the internal batteries Inst. 3–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation diagrams Inst. 3–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing cables and connecting power Inst. 3–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of power and earth cabling Inst. 3–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable routeing Inst. 3–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure earthing points Inst. 3–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for connection Inst. 3–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable entry to the enclosure Inst. 3–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supply cable identification Inst. 3–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting 230 V 3-phase (star) ac power cables Inst. 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the primary ac terminal box Inst. 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting 230 V ac 3-phase (star) mains input cables Inst. 3–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 V ac 3-phase (star) wiring diagram Inst. 3–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting 230 V single phase ac power cables Inst. 3–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the primary ac terminal box Inst. 3–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting 230 V ac single phase mains input cables Inst. 3–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 V ac single phase wiring diagram Inst. 3–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A xiii

Checking default settings on the AIM Inst. 3–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIM DIP switch settings Inst. 3–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation overview Inst. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation sections Inst. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installation Inst. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet identification Inst. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet view Inst. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line testing Inst. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient and lightning protection Inst. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment delivery and unpacking Inst. 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery and packaging overview Inst. 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packaging crate Inst. 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment module packaging Inst. 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unpacking the equipment Inst. 4–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe disposal of packing material Inst. 4–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU allotted slot retention Inst. 4–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets Inst. 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the installation procedure Inst. 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eyebolt lifting positions Inst. 4–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for installing indoor cabinets Inst. 4–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet securing plates and brackets Inst. 4–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration of completed installation Inst. 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting RF cables and antennas Inst. 4–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of RF connections Inst. 4–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of RF connector Inst. 4–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables Inst. 4–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unused SMA connections Inst. 4–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque of RF connectors Inst. 4–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF connection principles Inst. 4–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rx/Tx duplexing on a single antenna Inst. 4–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suggested RF configurations Inst. 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of configuration diagrams Inst. 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Single cabinet configurations Inst. 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for omni 1 Inst. 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Omni 1 or 2 (with non-diversity) Inst. 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for omni 3 or 4 Inst. 4–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for omni 3 Inst. 4–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for omni 4 Inst. 4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for omni 5 or 6 Inst. 4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for sector 1/1 or 2/2 Inst. 4–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for sector 1/1 Inst. 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for single cabinet sector 3/3 Inst. 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for single cabinet sector 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/2 or 2/2/2 Inst. 4–23 . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02xiv


68P02902W66-A

Dual cabinet configurations Inst. 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 3/3 Inst. 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 4/4 Inst. 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 5/5 or 6/6 Inst. 4–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 2/2/2 Inst. 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 3/3/3 or 4/4/4 Inst. 4–27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 4/4/4 Inst. 4–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for dual band 1/1/1-3/3/3 Inst. 4–29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for dual band 3/3/3–1/1/1 Inst. 4–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting fibre optic cables Inst. 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of fibre optic connections Inst. 4–31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Care of fibres Inst. 4–32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting fibre optic link between BTS 0 and BTS 1 Inst. 4–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interface panel cabling Inst. 4–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface panel diagram and pinout overview Inst. 4–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface panel pinouts table list Inst. 4–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPS pinouts Inst. 4–35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RTC pinouts Inst. 4–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIB connections Inst. 4–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T43 connections Inst. 4–38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX inputs and outputs Inst. 4–39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICS pinouts Inst. 4–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External alarm pinouts Inst. 4–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Connecting power and earth cabling Inst. 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview to power and earth cabling Inst. 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable routeing Inst. 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet and ESP earthing points Inst. 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet dc connections Inst. 4–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power cable connection procedure Inst. 4–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5Installing the ancillary enclosure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation Inst. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation scenarios Inst. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure layout Inst. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation overview Inst. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety precautions Inst. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools required Inst. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structural requirements Inst. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling mounting holes prior to equipment arrival Inst. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure Inst. 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Avoiding condensation build up Inst. 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety considerations Inst. 5–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure access procedure Inst. 5–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures for unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure Inst. 5–6 . . . . . . Safe disposal of packing material Inst. 5–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template Inst. 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to mounting bolt anchor installation Inst. 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of ancillary enclosure template Inst. 5–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for marking ancillary enclosure bolt hole positions Inst. 5–9 . . . . . . . . . Procedure for installing ancillary enclosure bolt anchors Inst. 5–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A xv

Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base Inst. 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for fitting an ancillary enclosure Inst. 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Existing RF cable re-routeing Inst. 5–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing the ancillary enclosure on the left of the main enclosure Inst. 5–14 . . . . .

Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure Inst. 5–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure Inst. 5–15 . . . . Preparing the main enclosure Inst. 5–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC supply connection to the main enclosure Inst. 5–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the dc supply and alarm cables to the main enclosure Inst. 5–17 . . . . DIP switch settings on the AIM Inst. 5–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing the battery strings Inst. 5–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to battery string installation Inst. 5–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery installation safety precautions Inst. 5–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for installing the monoblocs Inst. 5–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6Horizonmacro interoperability i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to interoperability Inst. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mixed product sites Inst. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architectural constraints Inst. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BTS architectures and interoperability Inst. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cell6 and Horizonmacro architectures Inst. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example mixed site Inst. 6–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical issues Inst. 6–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receive path Inst. 6–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit path Inst. 6–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cell6 and Horizonmacro hardware equivalents Inst. 6–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further configuration information Inst. 6–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example configurations Inst. 6–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special hardware Inst. 6–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7Site commissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning overview and test equipment Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of commissioning Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC to MCUF cable pin connections Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment Inst. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-power up checks Inst. 7–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of pre-power up checks Inst. 7–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual inspection Inst. 7–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Request for connection Inst. 7–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Earth continuity check Inst. 7–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power system insulation check Inst. 7–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powering up the enclosure Inst. 7–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites Inst. 7–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC power up procedure Inst. 7–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DC power up procedure Inst. 7–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02xvi


68P02902W66-A

Testing the HMS units and the heater Inst. 7–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites Inst. 7–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS unit test procedure Inst. 7–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the heater Inst. 7–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powering up the Horizonmacro cabinets Inst. 7–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites Inst. 7–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power up procedure without code load Inst. 7–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power down of cabinet Inst. 7–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power up procedure with code load Inst. 7–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet and CBM views Inst. 7–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning the ancillary enclosure Inst. 7–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-power up checks Inst. 7–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power up sequence Inst. 7–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power down sequence Inst. 7–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8Site decommissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of decommissioning Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline of the procedure to decommission the equipment Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet Inst. 8–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting to decommission the indoor cabinet Inst. 8–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure to decommission an indoor cabinet Inst. 8–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmacro indoor cabinet checklist Inst. 8–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Decommissioning the enclosure Inst. 8–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting Inst. 8–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure to decommission the enclosure Inst. 8–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting the enclosure Inst. 8–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure checklist Inst. 8–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure Inst. 8–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before starting Inst. 8–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety precautions Inst. 8–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure to decommission the ancillary enclosure Inst. 8–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting the ancillary enclosure Inst. 8–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restoring the main enclosure to operational state Inst. 8–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure checklist Inst. 8–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 523Maintenance Information (Maint.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction to maintenance i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance information introduction Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Safety Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting faulty devices Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact information Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A xvii

Weather conditions affecting access Maint. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of weather considerations Maint. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weather conditions Maint. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance cover Maint. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2General maintenance procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance overview Maint. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to general maintenance Maint. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning agents Maint. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance support procedures for the enclosure Maint. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to procedures Maint. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door opening and closing Maint. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood opening and closing Maint. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance procedures for the enclosure Maint. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type of procedures Maint. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures - door and hood Maint. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning inlet and outlet grilles Maint. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking normal operation Maint. 2–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspection of cabinet, locks and hinges Maint. 2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Periodic check of the installation Maint. 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Return to service Maint. 2–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet Maint. 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routine maintenance intervals Maint. 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Maint. 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door opening and closing procedure Maint. 2–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indoor cabinet 6-monthly maintenance procedures Maint. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type of procedures Maint. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning air inlets and filter Maint. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking earth connections Maint. 2–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indoor cabinet 12-monthly maintenance procedures Maint. 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary of 12-monthly procedures Maint. 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and cleaning fans Maint. 2–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet modules in operational positions Maint. 2–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking normal operation Maint. 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annual check of the installation Maint. 2–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indoor cabinet 24-monthly maintenance procedures Maint. 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary of 24-monthly procedures Maint. 2–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical inspection of cabinet, locks and hinges Maint. 2–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Routine maintenance for the ancillary enclosure Maint. 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routine mainenance intervals Maint. 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assumptions Maint. 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening and closing the ancillary enclosure door Maint. 2–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ancillary enclosure 12-monthly maintenance procedures Maint. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary of 12-monthly procedures Maint. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking cable integrity Maint. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the operation of the heater Maint. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking normal operation Maint. 2–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Partial discharge test Maint. 2–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02xviii


68P02902W66-A

Ancillary enclosure 24-monthly maintenance procedures Maint. 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary of 24-monthly procedures Maint. 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical inspection of the enclosure Maint. 2–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3Enclosure FRU replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to enclosure FRU replacement procedures Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolating the enclosure Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU view of the enclosure Maint. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing non-FRU parts Maint. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing fuses Maint. 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to fuse replacement Maint. 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse replacement procedure Maint. 3–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a battery pack Maint. 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to battery pack replacement Maint. 3–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery pack replacement procedure Maint. 3–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a rectifier Maint. 3–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to rectifier replacement Maint. 3–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for a rectifier Maint. 3–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the power control module Maint. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to power control module replacement Maint. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power control module replacement procedure Maint. 3–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery float charge adjustment Maint. 3–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the heater Maint. 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to heater replacement Maint. 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heater replacement procedure Maint. 3–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a fan tray Maint. 3–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to fan tray replacement Maint. 3–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fan tray replacement procedure Maint. 3–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a HMS unit Maint. 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to HMS replacement Maint. 3–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS replacement procedure Maint. 3–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the alarm interface module Maint. 3–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to AIM replacement Maint. 3–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AIM replacement procedure Maint. 3–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4Indoor cabinet FRU replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of replacement procedures Maint. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Field replaceable units (FRUs) Maint. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolating the indoor cabinet Maint. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list Maint. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU view of cabinet Maint. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A xix

Additional replacement parts Maint. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Policy on non-FRU parts Maint. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of non-FRU parts Maint. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing non-FRU parts Maint. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CBIA attachment screws Maint. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM) Maint. 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for CBM replacement Maint. 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Views of CBM Maint. 4–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for CBM Maint. 4–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a power supply module (PSM) Maint. 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for PSM replacement Maint. 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of PSM Maint. 4–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for non-redundant PSM Maint. 4–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for redundant PSM Maint. 4–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a fan unit Maint. 4–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for fan replacement Maint. 4–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Views of 2-fan and 4-fan units Maint. 4–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identifying fan unit Maint. 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for fan units Maint. 4–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a CTU Maint. 4–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for CTU replacement Maint. 4–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the CTU Maint. 4–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for a CTU Maint. 4–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Preserving CTU calibration Maint. 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to preserving CTU calibration Maint. 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration data overview Maint. 4–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands used Maint. 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CINDY commissioning tool Maint. 4–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enabling the preserve CTU calibration data feature Maint. 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the preserve CTU calibration data feature Maint. 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling the preserve feature at the OMC-R Maint. 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabling the preserve feature at the BSC Maint. 4–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CTU calibration data exchange procedures Maint. 4–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to CTU calibration data exchange procedures Maint. 4–19 . . . . . . . . . . . Preserve CTU calibration data procedure Maint. 4–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU calibration procedures Maint. 4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTU recalibration procedures Maint. 4–22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02xx


68P02902W66-A

Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables Maint. 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to bay level offset tables calibration Maint. 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 4–24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands used Maint. 4–25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for bay level calibration Maint. 4–26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Branch 1 RX0A bay level calibration procedure Maint. 4–28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test frequency tables Maint. 4–30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Branch 1 RX1A bay level calibration procedure Maint. 4–33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Branch 1 RX2A bay level calibration procedure Maint. 4–34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900 (dual band) SURF Rx1800 1A bay level calibration procedure Maint. 4–35 . . . . Branch completion Maint. 4–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Branch 2 procedure Maint. 4–36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration check procedure Maint. 4–37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site restoration Maint. 4–40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a Tx block module or plate Maint. 4–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for Tx block replacement Maint. 4–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Views of Tx blocks Maint. 4–41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for Tx blocks Maint. 4–42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blanking plate, feedthrough plate or HCU replacement Maint. 4–43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a SURF module Maint. 4–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for SURF replacement Maint. 4–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the SURF module Maint. 4–44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement of a SURF module Maint. 4–45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm) Maint. 4–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to digital module replacement Maint. 4–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of digital modules Maint. 4–47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedures for digital modules Maint. 4–48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility Maint. 4–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of MCUF firmware compatibility Maint. 4–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking MCUF firmware compatibility Maint. 4–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating redundant MCUF firmware Maint. 4–50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing MCUF redundancy Maint. 4–53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK) Maint. 4–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to MCUF (GLCK) calibration Maint. 4–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When to calibrate the GCLK Maint. 4–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 4–54 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for GCLK calibration Maint. 4–55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GCLK calibration procedure Maint. 4–56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a door Maint. 4–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to door replacement Maint. 4–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Views of the door Maint. 4–59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a door Maint. 4–60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a cabinet heat sensor Maint. 4–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of heat sensors Maint. 4–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure for heat sensor replacement Maint. 4–61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5Ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to FRU replacement Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU view of the ancillary enclosure Maint. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A xxi

Replacing a battery string Maint. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to battery string replacement Maint. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal battery replacement procedure Maint. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing the heater unit Maint. 5–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to heater replacement Maint. 5–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for the heater Maint. 5–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a voltage sense board Maint. 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to voltage sense board replacement Maint. 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for a voltage sense board Maint. 5–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a voltage sense cable set Maint. 5–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to replacing voltage sense cables Maint. 5–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure Maint. 5–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing a fuse Maint. 5–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to fuse replacement Maint. 5–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse replacement procedure Maint. 5–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6Site verification procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to Horizonmacro verification procedures Maint. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of this chapter Maint. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CINDY commissioning tool Maint. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Test equipment, leads and plugs Maint. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to test equipment, leads and plugs Maint. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 6–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test leads required Maint. 6–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CTU VSWR and cell site offset information Maint. 6–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to output power calibration and VSWR check Maint. 6–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 6–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands used Maint. 6–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test stages Maint. 6–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for output power calibration and VSWR check Maint. 6–7 . . . . . . . . . . .

Normal CTU VSWR and cell site power calibration Maint. 6–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to normal VSWR and cell site power calibration Maint. 6–9 . . . . . . . . . . Automatic VSWR test procedure Maint. 6–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual VSWR test procedure Maint. 6–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VSWR reverse power test procedure Maint. 6–12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tx output power calibration procedure Maint. 6–13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site restoration Maint. 6–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF output power check Maint. 6–14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Returning the CTUs to call processing mode Maint. 6–15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the database equipage Maint. 6–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to checking the database Maint. 6–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 6–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands used Maint. 6–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for database checks Maint. 6–16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Database equipage check procedure Maint. 6–17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020

29th May 02xxii


68P02902W66-A

Checking the E1/T1 link Maint. 6–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to checking the E1/T1 link Maint. 6–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 6–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands used Maint. 6–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation for the E1/T1 link check Maint. 6–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 link test procedure Maint. 6–19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking PIX connections and alarms Maint. 6–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to checking the PIX connections and alarms Maint. 6–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment required Maint. 6–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commands used Maint. 6–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing for the PIX connections and alarms test Maint. 6–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PIX connection test procedure Maint. 6–21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Category 623Parts Information (Parts) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Enclosure parts list i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts information introduction Parts 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts list general information Parts 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure parts list Parts 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor cabinet parts list Parts 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure parts list Parts 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU items Parts 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering method Parts 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure FRUs Parts 1–2 . . . . . . . .

Parts for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure Parts 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure standard equipment Parts 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spares table Parts 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional equipment Parts 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Horizonmacro indoor cabinet parts list i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet Parts 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of Horizonmacro indoor cabinet FRUs Parts 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spares table Parts 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 3Ancillary enclosure parts list i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts for the ancillary enclosure Parts 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of the ancillary enclosure FRUs Parts 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure standard equipment Parts 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spares table Parts 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index I–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020 Issue status of this manual

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A 1

Issue status of this manual

Introduction

The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.

Versioninformation

The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue:

Manualissue

Date ofissue

Remarks

O 14th Sep 00 Original issue.

A 29th May 02 Includes redesigned component information (e.g.SURF, indoor cabinet internal fans andpackaging). Optimization information added.

Resolution ofServiceRequests

The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual:

ServiceRequest

GMRNumber

Remarks

N/A N/A

GSM-208-020General information

29th May 022


68P02902W66-A

General information

Importantnotice

If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will notbe updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSESONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support amajor software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically byMotorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).

Purpose

Motorola cellular communications manuals are intended to instruct and assistpersonnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Motorola cellularinfrastructure equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that allpersonnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.

WARNING Failure to comply with Motorola’s operation, installationand maintenance instructions may, in exceptionalcircumstances, lead to serious injury or death.

These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment trainingoffered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance theknowledge gained through such training.

About thismanual

The manual contains: technical description of the hardware elements,installation and configuration information, repair procedures and parts lists forthe Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure (including the Horizonmacroindoor cabinet) and the optional ancillary enclosure.

The objectives are to help the reader:

S Gain an overview of the equipment and interconnection of components.

S Understand the function and operation of all components.

S Recognize equipment configurations.

S Be aware of the warnings (potential for harm to people) and cautions(potential for harm to equipment) to be observed when working on theequipment.

S Understand how to install and commission the equipment.

S Understand how to inspect, maintain and repair the equipment.

S Have a clear, ready reference for all dedicated information in one manual.

GSM-208-020 General information

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A 3

Crossreferences

Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers andsection names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text.

This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, inturn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individuallynamed at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.

Textconventions

The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructuremanuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special keysequences.

Input

Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown likethis.

Output

Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, andenvironmental variables that appear on the screen are shown likethis.

Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:

CTRL–c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

ALT–f Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.

| Press the pipe symbol key.

CR or RETURN Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key isidentified with the ↵ symbol on both the PC andthe Sun keyboards. The keyboard Return keymay also be identified with the word Return.

GSM-208-020First aid in case of electric shock

29th May 024


68P02902W66-A

First aid in case of electric shock

Warning

WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until theelectric circuit is broken.Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself withdry insulating material and pull or push the victim clear ofthe conductor.

Artificialrespiration

In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificialrespiration. Send for medical assistance immediately.

Burns treatment

If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificialrespiration, carry out the following:

1. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn.

2. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required,cover the wound with a dry dressing.

3. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.

GSM-208-020 Reporting safety issues

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A 5

Reporting safety issues

Introduction

Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in allinstances. Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.

Procedure

Whenever a safety issue arises:

1. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power.

2. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment.

3. Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre,Swindon +44 (0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 68437733 (telephone) andfollow up with a written report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 orChina +86 10 68423633 (fax).

4. Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the CustomerNetwork Resolution Centre.

GSM-208-020Warnings and cautions

29th May 026


68P02902W66-A

Warnings and cautions

Introduction

The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual andin all manuals of this Motorola manual set.

Warnings

Definition of Warning

A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause lossof life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced duringmaintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as thoseinherent in the equipment.

Example and format

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/outconnectors. Laser radiation can come from either the datain/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cablesconnected to data in/out connectors.

Cautions

Definition of Warning

A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software orindividual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no dangerto personnel.

Example and format

CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibrationdue date when testing Motorola base stations.

GSM-208-020 General warnings

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A 7

General warnings

IntroductionObserve the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation andmaintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure tocomply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorolamanuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use ofthe equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to complywith these requirements.

Warning labelsPersonnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with anywarning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed,painted over or obscured in any way.

Specificwarnings

Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on theequipment and within the text of this manual. These must be observed by allpersonnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any otherwarnings given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.

High voltageCertain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 Vac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply which is potentially lethal.Therefore, the areas where the ac supply power is present must not beapproached until the warnings and cautions in the text and on the equipmenthave been complied with.

To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolatormust be set to off and locked.

Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of theElectricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific countrylegislation which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipmentis used.

RF radiationHigh RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base stationequipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off whenany antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmittersconnected to unterminated cavities or feeders.

Refer to the following standards:

S ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect toHuman Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to300 GHz.

S CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic FieldsHigh Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).

GSM-208-020General warnings

29th May 028


68P02902W66-A

Laser radiation

Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminatedfibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Liftingequipment

When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, thecompetent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities areavailable. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations.When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must be made to theManual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manualhandling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.

Do not ...... substitute parts or modify equipment.

Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substituteparts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorolaif in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.

Battery supplies

Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.

Toxic material

Certain equipment may incorporate components containing the highly toxicmaterial Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especiallyhazardous if:

S Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin,mouth, or a wound.

S The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled.

S Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.

Beryllium warning labels are fitted to equipment incorporating Beryllium orBeryllium Oxide. Observe all safety instructions given on warning labels.

Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator.Captive within the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, ifthe component should be broken open or burnt, the Beryllium Oxide, in the formof dust or fumes, could be released, with the potential for harm.

Lithiumbatteries

Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst and ignite. Defectivelithium batteries must not be removed or replaced. Any boards containingdefective lithium batteries must be returned to Motorola for repair.

GSM-208-020 General cautions

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A 9

General cautions

Introduction

Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance ofthe equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with thesecautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola manuals may resultin damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer’sfailure to comply with these requirements.

Caution labels

Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with anycaution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed,painted over or obscured in any way.

Specificcautions

Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the textof this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times whenworking with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on theillustrations and on the equipment.

Fibre optics

The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.

Static discharge

Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to staticdischarge. Although the damage caused by static discharge may not beimmediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due tostatic discharge caused by mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap whenadjusting or handling digital boards.

See Devices sensitive to static for further information.

GSM-208-020Devices sensitive to static

29th May 0210


68P02902W66-A

Devices sensitive to static

Introduction

Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thinlayer of insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Sucha charge applied to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.

These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing thehands into high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed solderingirons.

MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leadsshorted together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or byinserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shortedit is safe to handle the device.

Specialhandlingtechniques

In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced, observe thefollowing precautions when handling the replacement:

S Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostaticpoint (ESP) on the equipment.

S Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may benecessary to replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable thedevice to be fitted.

S Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. Acotton overall is preferable.

S If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic worksurfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.

S All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placedon an earthed surface.

S Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitivedevices. These components may be providing protection to the device.

When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normallyless susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled withcare, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should betransferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other wayaround) and never left exposed on the workbench.

GSM-208-020 Motorola GSM manual set

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A 11

Motorola GSM manual set

Introduction

The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install andmaintain the Motorola equipment.

Generic GSMmanuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manualsare release dependent:

Classificationnumber Name Order number

GSM-100-101 System Information: General 68P02901W01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-201 Operating Information: GSM System Operation 68P02901W14. . . GSM-100-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System

Administration 68P02901W19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-313 Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema 68P02901W34. GSM-100-320 Technical Description: BSS Implementation 68P02901W36. . . . . . . GSM-100-321 Technical Description: BSS Command Reference 68P02901W23. GSM-100-403 Installation & Configuration: GSM System

Configuration 68P02901W17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-423 Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization 68P02901W43. . . . GSM-100-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install 68P02901W47. . GSM-100-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at

the OMC-R 68P02901W26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-520 Maintenance Information: BSS Timers 68P02901W58. . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-521 Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions 68P02901W57GSM-100-523 Maintenance Information: BSS Field

Troubleshooting 68P02901W51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-503 Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics

Application 68P02901W56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-721 Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR 68P02901W72. . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R System 68P02901W74. . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020Motorola GSM manual set

29th May 0212


68P02902W66-A

Related GSMmanuals

The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:


GSM-001-103 System Information: BSS Equipment Planning 68P02900W21. . . . GSM-002-103 System Information: DataGen 68P02900W22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-002-703 Software Release Notes: DataGen 68P02900W76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-005-103 System Information: GSM Advance Operational

Impact 68P02900W25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-008-103 System Information: Network Health Analyst 68P02900W36. . . . . . GSM-008-703 Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst 68P02900W77. GSM-TOOLS-001 System Information: Cell Optimization (COP) 68P02900W90. . . . . GSM-TOOLS-002 System Information: Motorola Analysis and

Reporting System (MARS) 68P02900W94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-TOOLS-701 Software Release Notes: Cell Optimization (COP) 68P02900W69. GSM-TOOLS-702 Software Release Notes: Motorola Analysis and

Reporting System (MARS) 68P02900W68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-006-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System

Administration (OSI) 68P02901W10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-006-413 Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install 68P02901W39. . . . . GSM-006-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System 68P02901W70. . . .

Generic GPRSmanuals

The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manualsare release dependent:


GPRS-300-101 System Information: GPRS Overview 68P02903W01. . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-202 Operating Information: OMC-G System

Administration 68P02903W03. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-222 Operating Information: GSN System Administration 68P02903W37GPRS-300-313 Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema 68P02903W46. GPRS-300-321 Technical Description: GSN Command Reference 68P02903W18. GPRS-300-423 Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install 68P02903W47. . . . GPRS-300-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install 68P02903W04. GPRS-300-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at

the OMC-G 68P02903W19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-503 Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics

Application 68P02903W20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-722 Software Release Notes: GSN System 68P02903W76. . . . . . . . . . GPRS-300-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-G System 68P02903W70. . . . . . . .

Related GPRSmanuals

The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals:


GPRS-001-103 System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning 68P02903W02. . GPRS-005-103 System Information: GSN Advance Operational

Impact 68P02903W38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-020 Motorola GSM manual set

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A 13

BSS servicemanuals

The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manualsare not release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of servicemanual sets may vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals,but they can all be ordered using the overall catalogue number shown below:


GSM-100-020 Service Manual: BTS 68P02901W37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-100-030 Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR 68P02901W38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-105-020 Service Manual: M-Cell2 68P02901W75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-106-020 Service Manual: M-Cell6 68P02901W85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-201-020 Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ 68P02901W95. . . . . . . GSM-202-020 Service Manual: M-Cellaccess 68P02901W65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-203-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro 68P02902W36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-206-020 Service Manual: Horizoncompact 68P02902W15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-205-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor 68P02902W06. . . . . . . . . . . GSM-204-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor 68P02902W12. . . . . . . . . . GSM-207-020 Service Manual: Horizonoffice 68P02902W46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GSM-209-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 68P02902W61. GSM-208-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor 68P02902W66

GPRS servicemanuals

The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals includethe Packet Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSSfor GPRS:

GPRS-301-020 Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) 68P02903W05. . . . . GPRS-302-020 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) 68P02903W10. . . . . . .

Classificationnumber

The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. Forexample, manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx containoperating information.

Order number

The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.

Orderingmanuals

All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Officeor Representative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number.Motorola manual sets may also be ordered on CD-ROM.

GSM-208-020GMR amendment

29th May 0214


68P02902W66-A

GMR amendment

Introduction toGMRs

Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into themanual using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correctMotorola manuals as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as thetarget manual. Each GMR is identified by a number in a sequence that starts at01 for each manual at each issue. GMRs are issued in the form of loose leafpages, with a pink instruction sheet on the front.

GMR procedure

When a GMR is received, remove and replace pages in this manual, as detailedon the GMR pink instruction sheet.

GSM-208-020 GMR amendment record

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A 15

GMR amendment record

GMRinstructions

When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below iscompleted to record the GMR. Retain the pink instruction sheet thataccompanies each GMR and insert it in a suitable place in this manual for futurereference.

Amendmentrecord

Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:

GMR number Incorporated by (signature) Date

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

GSM-208-020GMR amendment record

29th May 0216


68P02902W66-A

CHAPTER 2ENCLOSURE STRUCTURE

AND COMPONENTS

CHAPTER 3ENCLOSURE POWER

DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

CHAPTER 4HEAT MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM

CHAPTER 5HORIZONMACRO INDOOR

CABINET STRUCTURE

CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW ANDSPECIFICATIONS


POWER SUPPLY

CHAPTER 8RF MODULES

CHAPTER 9DIGITAL MODULES

CHAPTER 10ANCILLARY ENCLOSURE

CHAPTER 6 HORIZONMACRO INDOORTEMPERATURE CONTROL

29th May 02

Technical Description: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

68P02902W67-A i

Category 323

Technical Description (Tech.)

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Category 323Technical Description (Tech.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Overview and specifications i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment introduction and manual definition Tech. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor Tech. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Names and acronyms for enclosure equipment Tech. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the enclosure Tech. 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Names and acronyms for Horizonmacro indoor equipment Tech. 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . View of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet Tech. 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagram of Horizonmacro indoor Tech. 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure (optional) Tech. 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the ancillary enclosure Tech. 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding information in this manual Tech. 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



Chapter 2Enclosure structure and components i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the enclosure Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure description Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the components within the enclosure Tech. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A








Chapter 3Enclosure power distribution equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A v

The power control module Tech. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the power control module Tech. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel view Tech. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel controls and indicators Tech. 3–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm management Tech. 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs Tech. 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm output signals Tech. 3–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




Chapter 4Heat management system i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the heat management system (HMS) Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the HMS Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the HMS Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board Tech. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the HMS Tech. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow through the HMS Tech. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the heater Tech. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Chapter 5Horizonmacro indoor cabinet structure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor Tech. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

External cabinet view Tech. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of structure description Tech. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filled cabinet view Tech. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-323

29th May 02vi


68P02902W67-A





Chapter 6Horizonmacro indoor temperature control i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indoor temperature control system Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of indoor temperature control system Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature shutdown sensors Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet restart after shutdown Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Chapter 7Horizonmacro indoor power supply i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply modules (PSMs) Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of PSM Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM location and redundancy Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM alarms Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM module view and LEDs Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM backplane protection Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A vii








GSM-208-323

29th May 02viii


68P02902W67-A








Chapter 9Digital modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of digital modules Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview, locations and redundancy Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital module and BPSM locations Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCUF and NIU redundancy Tech. 9–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full size and half size modules Tech. 9–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital module and CTU connections Tech. 9–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of digital module and CTU connections Tech. 9–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A ix






Chapter 10Ancillary enclosure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure structure Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to the ancillary enclosure Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical design Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure layout Tech. 10–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-323

29th May 02x


68P02902W67-A


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 1

Overview and specifications

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 1Overview and specifications i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Equipment introduction and manual definition Tech. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor Tech. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Names and acronyms for enclosure equipment Tech. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the enclosure Tech. 1–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Names and acronyms for Horizonmacro indoor equipment Tech. 1–4 . . . . . . . . . . . View of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet Tech. 1–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional diagram of Horizonmacro indoor Tech. 1–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure (optional) Tech. 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the ancillary enclosure Tech. 1–7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finding information in this manual Tech. 1–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Equipment introduction and manual definition

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–1

Equipment introduction and manual definition

Overview ofHorizonmacro12 carrieroutdoor

This section is designed to give the reader a basic understanding of theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor equipment and optional ancillary enclosure.

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor is a one to twelve carrier Base TransceiverStation (BTS). The enclosure can contain either one (for six carrier) or two (fortwelve carrier) Horizonmacro indoor BTS cabinets that have variants thatoperate in the following frequency bands: GSM850, GSM/EGSM900, DCS1800,and PCS1900.

The enclosure operates from a nominal 230 V, single phase or three phase acsupply. Temperature control within the enclosure is provided by two heatmanagement systems (HMS), one located on the inside of each enclosure door.

Figure 1-1 shows an external view of a standard Horizonmacro 12 carrieroutdoor enclosure.

Figure 1-1 External view of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

GSM-208-323Equipment introduction and manual definition

29th May 02Tech. 1–2


68P02902W67-A

Names andacronyms forenclosureequipment

The 12 carrier outdoor BTS consists of an enclosure (see Figure 1-2), whichcontains the following equipment:

S Heat Management System (HMS) – one mounted on the inside of eachdoor.

S Primary ac terminal box – mounted on the left side of the enclosure rearwall.

S Power Distribution Unit (PDU) racks for ac and dc power distribution –mounted in the lower part of the enclosure, one on the left (PDU B) andone on the right (PDU A).

S Power control module – mounted in PDU B.

S Rectifier module – these are mounted in PDU A, or both PDU A andPDU B. Two rectifier modules may be fitted in PDU A for a 1 to 6 carriersite and two additional modules may be fitted in PDU B for a 7 to 12carrier site. An additional rectifier may be fitted in PDU B to provideredundancy for the system.

S –48 V dc connector panel – mounted in PDU A, to the right of therectifiers.

S Horizonmacro indoor – one or two cabinets may be mounted in theenclosure, above the PDU racks. These take up the bulk of the space inthe enclosure.

S Alarm Interface Module (AIM) – mounted on the left side of the enclosure,above the backup battery compartment.

S Backup batteries – mounted on two shelves in a compartment on the leftside of the enclosure.

S Heater – one heater is mounted in PDU A, to the left of the rectifiers.

S Fan trays – one fan tray is mounted in the base of each side of theenclosure, below the rectifier modules.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–3

View of theenclosure

Figure 1-2 shows the location of components in the Horizonmacro 12 carrieroutdoor.

BACKUPBATTERIES

RECTIFIERS

HMS 1

HORIZONMACROINDOOR CABINET

(BTS 1)

AC AND DCPOWER

DISTRIBUTIONUNITS

POWERCONTROLMODULE

HEATER

6 U SPACE FORCUSTOMEREQUIPMENT

ALARM INTERFACEMODULE

PRIMARY ACTERMINAL BOX


(BTS 0)

RECTIFIERS(HIDDEN)

DC CONNECTORPANEL

(HIDDEN)

FANTRAY

FANTRAY

(HIDDEN)

LAPTOP COMPUTERSUPPORT BRACKET

Figure 1-2 Enclosure with major components identified(hood and right door removed)




68P02902W67-A

Names andacronyms forHorizonmacroindoorequipment

One or two –48 V Horizonmacro indoor cabinets (see Figure 1-3) can beinstalled in the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, on a shelf above the PDU racks. Ifonly one cabinet is installed (BTS 0), it must be fitted on the right side of theenclosure, above PDU A. A second cabinet (BTS 1) is installed on the left sideof the enclosure, above PDU B.

Each Horizonmacro indoor cabinet can contain the following equipment:

S A digital module shelf, located in the lower right side of the cabinet. Thiscontains master and optional redundant digital modules:

– Fibre optic Multiplexer (FMUX), master in BTS 0 and slave in BTS 1.A second FMUX can be fitted in each BTS to provide redundancy.

– Main Control Unit with dual FMUX (MCUF). A second MCUF can befitted in each BTS to provide redundancy.

– Network Interface Units (NIUs), four in total.

– An alarm board (no redundancy option).

– One or two (for redundancy) mBCU Power Supply Modules (BPSMs).

S Up to three –48 V Power Supply Modules (PSMs) and one Circuit BreakerModule (CBM) in the upper right side of the cabinet. The PSMs are loadsharing, with the third PSM providing optional redundancy.

NOTE The PSMs fitted in the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet mustbe of the –48 V type if the cabinet is to be installed in the12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

S Up to six Compact Transceiver Units (CTUs), located in the left side of thecabinet.

S Fan modules mounted in the bottom of the unit, two 2-fan modules andone 4-fan module.

S RF modules, mounted in the top panel, comprising transmit (Tx) blocks,and a receive (Rx) module, the Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end(SURF).

S Interface panel, mounted in the top panel, for customer power andcommunications connectors.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–5

View of theHorizonmacroindoor cabinet

Figure 1-3 shows the structure of an Horizonmacro indoor cabinet, with majorcomponents identified.

ig.128.rh

CIRCUITBREAKER

MODULE (CBM)

RF MODULES POWER SUPPLIES ANDCIRCUIT BREAKER

TEMPERATURECONTROL SYSTEM

DIGITALMODULES

T43/BIB

MCUF

ALARM MODULE

FMUX/NIU/BPSM(NOT VISIBLE)

TWO 2-FAN UNITS

ONE 4-FAN UNIT

SIX TRANSCEIVERS(CTUs)

THREE Tx BLOCKS(DCFs SHOWN AS EXAMPLE)

ONE SURF (Rx)

THREE PSMs

DC POWER IN

INTERFACEPANEL

CONNECTORS

Figure 1-3 Structure of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet (door removed)




68P02902W67-A

Functionaldiagram ofHorizonmacroindoor

Figure 1-4 shows the functional modules of a Horizonmacro indoor. Only onetransceiver and one Tx block have been shown, and the thermal managementsystem and power supplies are omitted for clarity.

Rx RxRx

MCUFFMUX

FMUX

FMUXTO TRANSCEIVERS OF

ANOTHER CABINET6

/

1

1

/

/

NIU

TO NETWORK

TO TRANSCEIVERS OFANOTHER CABINET

TO TRANSCEIVERS OFANOTHER CABINET

NIU

RFMODULES

DIGITALMODULES

UP TO SIX TRANSCEIVERS(CTUs)

UP TO THREETx BLOCKS

ANTENNAS (Tx and RxSEPARATE OR COMBINED)

SURF

Rx A Rx B

Tx

SWITCH (CONTROLLED BY CTU)

TO SURF OFSECOND INDOOR

CABINET(Rx 0A / 0B ONLY)

Tx FILTER

Rx FILTER

/1

RFLOOPBACK

NIU NIU

Figure 1-4 Functional diagram of Horizonmacro indoor cabinet components


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–7

Ancillaryenclosure(optional)

The ancillary enclosure is a customer option which is specifically designed toextend the battery backup capability of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoorenclosure (the main enclosure).

The ancillary enclosure can accommodate one, two, or three additional batterystrings, thus enabling battery backup time to be extended from 0.7 hours(available using the main enclosure internal battery string only) up to amaximum of 4.0 hours.

View of theancillaryenclosure

Figure 1-5 shows the ancillary enclosure with major components identified.

BATTERY MANAGEMENTMODULE

BATTERY STRING 3

BATTERY STRING 2

BATTERY STRING 1

ADJUSTABLE SHELVING

HEATER TEST BUTTON

LIGHT (NOT VISIBLE)

AC SUPPLYISOLATOR SWITCH

HEATER UNIT

Figure 1-5 Structure of the ancillary enclosure (door removed)




68P02902W67-A

Findinginformation inthis manual

This service manual comprises the four categories below:

S Category 323

Provides an introduction, specification, and technical description.

S Category 423

Provides information for installation and commissioning.

S Category 523

Provides information on maintenance and repair, with procedures tochange Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).

S Category 623

Provides the range of options and spares.

The Category 323 technical description is divided into chapters, based onfunctionality:

S Overview and specifications (this chapter).

S Enclosure structure, including:

The alarm interface module, primary ac terminal box, fan trays, lights,smoke detector, doors and hood, and cable entry methods.

S Enclosure power distribution, describing:

The ac and dc PDUs, the rectifier modules, power control module, dcconnector panel, and battery backup.

S Heat management system (HMS), describing:

HMS units mounted on the doors and the separate heater.

S Horizonmacro indoor cabinet structure, describing:

The internal structure and layout of the indoor cabinet.

S Horizonmacro indoor temperature control, describing:

The temperature control system, including sensors and fans.

S Horizonmacro indoor power supply, describing:

DC power distribution, including the PSM, BPSM, and CBM.

S Horizonmacro indoor RF modules, including:

CTU, SURF and Tx blocks.

S Horizonmacro indoor digital modules, including:

MCUF, NIU, T43/BIB connections, FMUX and alarm module.

S Ancillary enclosure (optional), describing:

The technical features of the optional ancillary enclosure.

Each category and chapter has a table of contents (TOC). Headings aredesigned to convey contents accurately, to enable manual search.

The index provides an alternative method of finding subsections of information.

This chapter provides a summary of the equipment to enable the reader tounderstand terminology, and thus locate information via the TOCs and index.

GSM-208-323 Specifications – Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–9

Specifications – Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Introduction tospecifications

Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor specifications are provided in this section.

Approval andsafety

The specification compliance for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor is shownin Table 1-1.

Table 1-1 Specification compliance

GSM/EGSM900 & DCS1800 GSM850 & PCS1900

Type ETS 301 502approval CFR47 Part 2

CFR47 Part 22 (850 only)CFR47 Part 24 (1900 only)

EMC EN301 489-8

CFR 47 Part 2 and 15CFR47 Part 22 (850 only)

CFR47 Part 24 (1900 only)

Safety EN 60215, IEC 60215, EN 60950, IEC 950,CSA 22.2 No. 950, UL 1950

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor is designed to comply with BS7671 (16thedition).

Environmentallimits

The environmental limits for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor equipment isshown in Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Environmental limits

Environment Temperature Relative Humidity

Operating –33 _C to +45 _Cplus a solar gain of1.2 kW/m2

5% to 100% relative humidity, not toexceed 30 g water / m3 air.

Storage –45 _C to +70 _C 8% to 100% relative humidity, not toexceed 30 g water / m3 air.

NOTE This specification is valid up to 3 km altitude,corresponding to an atmospheric pressure range of 648 to1048 millibars. The maximum ambient temperaturecorresponding to an atmospheric pressure of 648 millibarsis 40 _C.

GSM-208-323Specifications – Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor



68P02902W67-A

Softwarerequirements

The GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 BTSs require BSS and OMC-R softwarerelease GSR4 (or higher) in the network.

The GSM850 and PCS1900 BTSs require BSS and OMC-R software releaseGSR5.1 (or higher) in the network.

Powerspecifications

Enclosure input power supply requirements

The power requirements for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure areshown in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3 Main outdoor enclosure power requirements

Nominal Voltage Supply voltageand frequency

range

Current supplymaximum

230 V ac three phaseand neutral (star)

or230 V ac single phase

150 to 264 V acat 45 to 65 Hz

20 A per phase

60 A

Power consumption

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor power consumption figures are shown inTable 1-4.

Table 1-4 Power consumption of full enclosure (12 carriers)

Typical measured consumption Maximum power consumption

4054 W 6080 W

NOTE The maximum power consumption figures apply toextreme operating conditions (minimum operating ambienttemperature, heaters on, maximum RF output power,charging batteries and lowest module efficiencies, forexample).Typical power consumption is for the equipment running atfull RF output power, trickle battery charge and nominalmodule efficiencies.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–11

Maximum thermal dissipation

Thermal dissipation has to remove the energy of maximum power consumption,less RF power output of the 12 transceivers.

Maximum power consumption: 6080 W.

12 DCS1800 CTUs at full power at antenna: (12 x 16 = 192) approx. 200 W.

12 EGSM900 CTUs at full power at antenna: (12 x 20 = 240) approx. 250 W.

Maximum thermal dissipation, DCS1800: 6080 – 200 = 5880 W.

Maximum thermal dissipation, EGSM900: 6080 – 250 = 5830 W.

NOTE Thermal dissipation figures are not currently available forwhen 850 MHz or 1900 MHz CTUs are used.

RF poweroutput

The RF power output figures are shown in Table 1-5 and Table 1-6.

Table 1-5 RF power output at CTU Tx connector

GSM850 and EGSM900 DCS1800 and PCS1900

60 W (47.8 dBm) +/– 1.0 dB 50 W (47.0 dBm) +/–1.0 dB

Table 1-6 RF power output at indoor cabinet after Tx blocks

Tx block GSM850 EGSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900

TDF 40 W(46.0 dBm)

32 W(45.1 dBm)

DCF 20 W(43.0 dBm)

16 W(42.1 dBm)

DDF 8.5 W(39.3 dBm)

7 W(38.5 dBm)

Sensitivity

The receive sensitivity of the equipment is shown in Table 1-7.

Table 1-7 Rx sensitivity *

Frequency Band Without Duplexer With Duplexer

850 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm

900 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm

1800 MHz –108.5 dBm –107.5 dBm

1900 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm

* Guaranteed over all channel types, fading profiles, RF frequencies and operating conditions.




68P02902W67-A

Battery backup

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is fitted with limited batterybackup capability, as shown in Table 1-8.

Table 1-8 Backup power specifications

Location Capacity(per battery)

Typical powerduration

(12 carriers)

Internal batteries 100 Ah 40 minutes

Battery backup times can be extended by installing the optional ancillaryenclosure (see Table 1-15).

Networktransmissionoptions

Options exist for E1, T1 and HDSL (star and daisy chain) transmission.

Dimensions

The dimensions of the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure equipment are shown inTable 1-9. The shroud is optional and must be ordered separately.

Table 1-9 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor dimensions (in mm)

Cabinet type Height Width Depth

Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoorenclosure

1400 1900 (no shroud)

2150 (inc. shroud)

800

Horizonmacro indoor cabinet 750 700 430

Weights

The weights of cabinets are shown in Table 1-10.

Table 1-10 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor weights

Fully loaded enclosure Horizonmacro indoor cabinet(6 CTUs)

710 kg 110 kg (approx.)

Torque values

The torque values for Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor are listed in Table 1-11.

Table 1-11 Torque values for all cabinet screws/bolts and RF connectors

Size ofscrew/bolt

M4 M6 M8 M10 SMA N-type 7/16

Torque value 2.2 Nm 3.4 Nm 5 Nm 10 Nm 1 Nm 3.4 Nm 25 Nm


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–13

Frequencycapability

Frequency hopping

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor supports baseband frequency hopping(BBH) and synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH).

NOTE Baseband frequency hopping is not supported in theGSM850 and PCS1900 Horizonmacro variants.

Frequency band characteristics

BTS radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with thecharacteristics listed in Table 1-12 for GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 BTSs andin Table 1-13 for GSM850 and PCS1900 BTSs.

Table 1-12 Frequency band characteristics – GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800

GSM EGSM DCS1800

Transmit frequency band (MHz) 935 to 960 925 to 960 1805 to 1880

Receive frequency band (MHz) 890 to 915 880 to 915 1710 to 1785

Transmit/receive duplexseparation (MHz)

45 45 95

Channel width (kHz) 200 200 200

Number of channels 124 174 374

Transmit frequency guardbands (MHz)

935.0 to935.1

959.9 to960.0

925.0 to925.1

959.9 to960.0

1805.0 to1805.1

1879.9 to1880.0

Receive frequency guardbands (MHz)

890.0 to890.1

914.9 to915.0

880.0 to880.1

914.9 to915.0

1710.0 to1710.1

1784.9 to1785.0

Transmit channel centrefrequency (MHz)

Even 10thsof a MHz

from 935.2to 959.8

Even 10thsof a MHz

from 925.2to 959.8

Even 10ths ofa MHz from1805.2 to

1879.8

Receive channel centrefrequency (MHz)

Even 10thsof a MHz

from 890.2to 914.8

Even 10thsof a MHz

from 880.2to 914.8

Even 10ths ofa MHz from1710.2 to

1784.8




68P02902W67-A

Table 1-13 Frequency band characteristics – GSM850 and PCS1900

GSM850 PCS1900

Transmit frequency band (MHz) 869 to 894 1930 to 1990

Receive frequency band (MHz) 824 to 849 1850 to 1910

Transmit/receive duplexseparation (MHz)

45 80

Channel width (kHz) 200 200

Number of channels 124 299

Transmit frequency guardbands (MHz)

869.0 to 869.1893.9 to 894.0

1930.0 to 1930.11989.9 to 1990.0

Receive frequency guard bands(MHz)

824.0 to 824.1848.9 to 849.0

1850.0 to 1850.11909.9 to 1910.0

Transmit channel centrefrequency (MHz)

Even 10ths of aMHz from

869.2 to 893.8


1930.2 to 1989.8

Receive channel centrefrequency (MHz)


824.2 to 848.8


1850.2 to 1909.8

Enhancements

Colours

The enclosure and the optional shroud are painted in one of the followingcolours:

2-tone dark grey, NCS6010/NCS4010.M-Cell match, RAL7044/RAL9002.Dark brown, RAL8028.Dark green, RAL6028.Brick red, RAL2001.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–15

Structuralrequirements

There must be adequate clearance at the front of, and above, the enclosure foroperation and maintenance purposes. It is also recommended that there isadequate side clearance to open the doors to 120° (see Figure 1-6), and rearclearance of 150 mm is required to open the hood.

Enclosure ventilation entry is through vent panels in the doors, allowing acabinet to be placed close to a wall. However, a clearance of 150 mm isrequired for side cable entry (if used), between the cabinet and obstructions,such as a wall or another cabinet.

If an optional shroud is to be fitted, an additional 250 mm clearance is requiredon the left side of the enclosure.

Allow adequate clearance at the front and sides to allow for installation andmaintenance.

NOTE In seismically active areas, Motorola suggest using aqualified structural engineer to assess frame mountingrequirements, such as floor construction, mountinganchors and cell site construction.




68P02902W67-A

Enclosure sitedimensions

Figure 1-6 shows the site layout plan for a single enclosure.

NOTE The minimum clearance for side cable entry is notrequired if cable entry is through the base of theenclosure.

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ150 mm

FOR HOOD

1025 mmMINIMUMFRONT

CLEARANCE

1900 mm

800 mm

150 mm

1975 mm

OPTIONALSHROUD

250 mm

ENCLOSURE

Figure 1-6 12 carrier outdoor enclosure site layout plan view

GSM-208-323 Specifications – ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–17

Specifications – ancillary enclosure

Introduction toancillaryenclosurespecifications

The specifications for the optional ancillary enclosure are included in thissection.

Specificationcompliance

The ancillary enclosure is designed to comply with BS7671 (16th edition), andmeet the following specification requirements:

S EMC: ETS 300 342.

S Safety: EN 60950.

S Acoustic noise: ETS 300 753, class 4.1E.

S Environment: ETS 300 019–1–1, –1–2, –1–4 (–33 _C low air temp.), –2–4.

Powerspecifications

The power specifications for the ancillary enclosure are as follows:

Input voltage requirements

230 V ac (nominal) single phase, 5 A, 45 to 66 Hz. This is derived from the acpower distribution unit in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

Output voltage

–48 V dc, via Battery Management Module (BMM) to main enclosure.

Batteryspecifications

The specifications for the different monobloc types that can be used in theancillary enclosure are listed in Table 1-14.

Table 1-14 Ancillary enclosure monobloc types

Manufacturer Type Model No. Dimensions(H x W x D)

Weight(kg)

Hawker – SBS C11 255 x 105 x 395 30

Hawker Chloride Powersafe 6VF11 227 x 125 x 558 48

Yuasa Independence PL–110 238 x 127 x 542 48

GNB Marathon MV 12V100FT 238 x 110 x 511 37.5

All the above monobloc types are 100 Ah capacity, except for the Yuasa(110 Ah).

GSM-208-323Specifications – ancillary enclosure



68P02902W67-A

Battery backupduration

Typical extended battery backup nominal times available for the main enclosurewhen additional battery strings are installed in the ancillary enclosure are listedin Table 1-15. These times assume that 12 carriers are in use in the mainenclosure and the battery strings are fully charged.

Table 1-15 Battery backup times (nominal)

No. of battery strings Backup time

1 (in main enclosure) 0.7 hr

2 1.9 hr

3 2.8 hr

4 4.0 hr

NOTE Battery backup times are affected by the equipmentoperating temperature.

Fuses

Table 1-16 shows the fuses fitted in the BMM to protect individual circuits.

Table 1-16 Fuses

Designation Rating Circuit protected

FS1 8 A BMM internal supply

FS2 2 A Fan (not used)

FS3 100 mA Smoke alarm detector

FS4 2 A LVD contactor

FS5 4 A Customer equipment

Dimensions

The dimensions of the ancillary enclosure are as follows:

Height: 1400 mmWidth: 750 mmDepth: 850 mm

NOTE For the footprint measurements (width and depth), deduct50 mm from each.

Weight

The weight of the empty ancillary enclosure is 150 kg. When three batterystrings (12 monoblocs) are installed, the maximum weight is 750 kg.

GSM-208-323 Specifications – ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–19

Environmentallimits

Table 1-17 shows the environmental limits for the ancillary enclosure.


Operating –33 _C to +45 _C plus a solar gainof 1.2 kW/m2


Storage –45 _C to +70 _C 8% to 100% relative humidity, not toexceed 30 g water / m3 air.


Ancillaryenclosureenhancements

The ancillary enclosure is painted in one of the following colours:

Dark grey, NCS4010–R70B.M-Cell match, RAL7044.Dark green, RAL6028.Dark brown, RAL8028.Brick red, RAL8023.


There must be adequate clearance at the front of the ancillary enclosure foroperation and maintenance purposes.

The enclosure can be placed either on the right (recommended) or left side ofthe main enclosure. The minimum distance between the ancillary enclosure andthe main enclosure depends on the method of cable entry used for the mainenclosure and other factors, such as whether an optional cable shroud is fitted(only relevant if the ancillary enclosure is to be mounted to the left of the mainenclosure).


GSM-208-323Specifications – ancillary enclosure



68P02902W67-A

Site layout plan– ancillaryenclosure withmain enclosure

Figure 1-7 shows the site layout plan for the ancillary enclosure when installednext to a main enclosure.

NOTE The 85 mm minimum clearance between the enclosureand the ancillary enclosure is required for the flexiblecable conduits.

MAIN ENCLOSURE

1900 mm

800 mm

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ANCILLARYENCLOSURE

85 mm min.285 mm max.

700 mm

250 mm

OPTIONALSHROUD

NOTE For the true width and depth of the enclosure, add 50 mmto allow for the overhang at the top of the enclosure.The cables from the ancillary enclosure will not reach theirconnection points in the main enclosure if the distancebetween the right side of the main enclosure and the leftside of the ancillary enclosure exceeds 285 mm.

Figure 1-7 Ancillary enclosure site layout plan view

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 2

Enclosure structure and

components

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 2Enclosure structure and components i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the enclosure Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure description Tech. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the components within the enclosure Tech. 2–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .








GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–1

Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure

Introduction tothe enclosure

This chapter provides information about the enclosure structure and itscomponents. All components, except the power distribution equipment, HeatManagement System (HMS) and indoor cabinet, are described here.

Enclosuredescription

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is essentially a metal box, withfront opening doors and hood for access. This provides a controlledenvironment for one or two Horizonmacro indoor BTS cabinets in an outdoorlocation, through the use of a Heat Management System (HMS).

Additional cooling for the power system is provided by two fan trays. One tray ismounted at the base of each side of the enclosure, below the rectifier modules.These provide cooling by blowing air directly over the chassis of each rectifier.

Cable entry to the enclosure is low level, through the left or right side of thebase or from beneath. An optional high level cable entry kit is available if highlevel cable entry is required.

Internally, the enclosure can be conveniently divided into six functional areas(see Figure 2-1) for:

S AC supply and interface cabling.

S Battery backup.

S AC and dc power distribution (PDU B).

S Power distribution and customer equipment (PDU A).

S Horizonmacro cabinet (BTS 0).

S Horizonmacro cabinet (BTS 1).


(BTS 1)

HORIZONMACROMASTER INDOOR

CABINET(BTS 0)

BATTERYBACKUP

AC SUPPLYAND

INTERFACECABLING

AC AND DC POWERDISTRIBUTION

(PDU B)

POWER DISTRIBUTION ANDCUSTOMER EQUIPMENT

(PDU A)

Figure 2-1 Functional areas within the enclosure

GSM-208-323Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure



68P02902W67-A

View of thecomponentswithin theenclosure

Figure 2-2 shows an internal view of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoorenclosure, showing components.

NOTE Only items in bold text, plus the doors (not shown inFigure 2-2), are discussed in this chapter.


ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

SPACE FORCUSTOMEREQUIPMENT


(BTS 1)

HORIZONMACROMASTER INDOOR

CABINET(BTS 0)

ALARMINTERFACE

MODULE

BACKUPBATTERIES

RECTIFIERSPOWER

CONTROLMODULE

AC POWERDISTRIBUTION

UNIT

DC POWERDISTRIBUTION

UNIT

RECTIFIERS

HEATER

–48 V DC CONNECTORPANEL (FOR CUSTOMER

EQUIPMENT)

SMOKEDETECTOR

ANDTHERMOSTATS

LIGHTS

HOOD

FAN TRAY(NOT VISIBLE)

FAN TRAY(NOT VISIBLE)

Figure 2-2 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure (fully equipped)

GSM-208-323 Alarm interface module (AIM)

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–3

Alarm interface module (AIM)

Functionaldescription ofthe AIM

The AIM provides the interface between alarms for equipment fitted as part ofthe enclosure and the Horizonmacro master indoor cabinet. Alarm signals arerelayed from the BTS 0 ALARM connector on the AIM to the EXTERNALALARMS connector on the interface panel on the top of the BTS. PIX0 andPIX1 connectors on the AIM connect to the corresponding PIX connectors onthe BTS interface panel.

The AIM also provides termination and line overvoltage protection for six 2 Mbit120 ohm twisted pair lines.

In addition to the above, the AIM provides the interface for alarm signals fromthe optional ancillary enclosure (see Chapter 10 for details of the ancillaryenclosure).

AIM blockdiagram

Figure 2-3 shows an interconnection block diagram for the AIM.

BTS 1SLAVE

BTS 0MASTER

LINETERMINATION

UNIT(OPTIONAL)

HMS 0

HMS 1

POWERSYSTEM

ENCLOSURETHERMOSTATS

SMOKEDETECTOR

HOODCONTACT

J1

BTS 0 BIB

SW 1

DOOR 1CONTACT

DOOR 2CONTACT

J2 J3 J4J5 J6

ALARM INTERFACEMODULE (AIM)

J7J8

J9J1

0J1

1J1

2J1

3

J14J15J16J17J18J19J20J21J22J23J24

J25

J26

J27

J28

SW 2

INTERFACE

BTS 0ALARM 0

BTS 0 PIX1

BTS 0 PIX0

TH

ER

MA

L S

EN

SO

RS

SM

OK

E A

LAR

M

HO

OD

SW

ITC

H

BT

S 0

RE

LAY

4

BT

S 0

RE

LAY

3

BT

S 0

RE

LAY

2

BT

S 0

RE

LAY

1

BT

S 0

EX

T. A

LAR

MS

4

BT

S 0

EX

T. A

LAR

MS

3

BT

S 0

EX

T. A

LAR

MS

2

BT

S 0

EX

T. A

LAR

MS

1

ANC. CAB.OVERRIDE

ALARMOVERRIDE

HM

S 0

BT

S 0

HM

S 1

BT

S 0

PO

WE

R

AN

CIL

LAR

YC

AB

INE

T

INT

ER

NA

LB

AT

TE

RY

SE

NS

OR

EA

RT

H

EARTHBAR

SY

ST

EM

2 M

BIT

LIN

E 1

2 M

BIT

LIN

E2

2 M

BIT

LIN

E 3

2 M

BIT

LIN

E 4

2 M

BIT

LIN

E 5

2 M

BIT

LIN

E 6

2 M

BIT

EA

RT

H

J41

EX

TE

RN

AL

BA

TT

ER

Y A

LAR

M

J40

INT

ER

NA

LB

AT

TE

RY

ALA

RM

ANCILLARYENCLOSURE

Figure 2-3 AIM interconnection block diagram

GSM-208-323Alarm interface module (AIM)



68P02902W67-A

AIM connectorlocations

Figure 2-4 shows the physical locations of the connectors, DIP switch blocksand pin positions on the AIM.

J7

J12

J13

J10J11

J8

J9

J25

J21 J20 J19 J18

J15 J14

J17 J16

SW 1

SW 2

J4 J1 J22

J23 J2 J24

J26

J5

J27

J28

SK1

SK2

SK3

SK4

SK5

SK6SK7

SK8

SK9

SK10

SK11

SK12

J3

J6

1

14 20

11

20

1 20 1 20

NO

NC

CO

M

NO

NC

CO

M

NO

NC

CO

M

NO

NC

CO

M

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

4

1

7

1

1 41 4

1 41 4

1

4

1

4

1

41

4

1

4

1

4

J404

1J41

4

1

13

1 6

1 6

Figure 2-4 Connector locations on the AIM


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–5

AIM connectorpinouts

Table 2-1 to Table 2-24 list the pinouts for all the connectors on the AIM.

Table 2-1 J1: HMS 0 BTS 0

Pin Signal description Pin Signal description

1 HMS 0 fail – BTS 0 3 BTS 0 door 2 open

2 HMS 0 fail return – BTS 0 4 BTS 0 door 2 link 1

Table 2-2 J2: HMS 1 BTS 0


1 HMS 1 fail – BTS 0 3 BTS 0 door 2 link 1

2 HMS 1 fail return – BTS 0 4 BTS 0 door 2 link 2

Table 2-3 J3: Power system


1 AC 1 fail 14 AC 1 fail return

2 Smoke alarm 15 Smoke alarm return

3 O/T shutdown 16 O/T shutdown return

4 ANC smoke alarm trip 17 ANC smoke alarm trip return

5 – 18 –

6 Low voltage alarm 19 Low voltage alarm return

7 Rectifier 1 fail 20 Rectifier 1 fail return


9 BTS smoke alarm 22 BTS smoke alarm return

10 Temperature sensor 23 Temperature sensor return

11 – 24 Aux supply 0 V

12 – 25 –

13 Aux supply 24 V




68P02902W67-A

Table 2-4 J4: Ancillary enclosure


1 ANC smoke alarm trip return 7 Smoke alarm return

2 ANC smoke alarm trip 8 Smoke alarm return link

3 BTS 0 door 2 link 3 9 Temperature sensor return

4 BTS 0 door 2 open return 10 ANC temperature sensor

5 ANC enclosure overtemp.return

11 O/T shutdown return link

6 ANC enclosureovertemperature

12 O/T shutdown return

Table 2-5 J5: Internal battery sensor


1 INT temperature sensor 3 Earth

2 Temperature sensor return

Table 2-6 J6 and J7: Earth and 2 Mbit earth


– All pins run to earth

Table 2-7 J8 to J13: 2 Mbit lines 6 to1


1 Rx+ 3 Tx+

2 Rx– 4 Tx–

NOTE In Table 2-7, J13 = 2 Mbit line 1, J12 = 2 Mbit line 2 .... J8= 2 Mbit line 6.

Table 2-8 J14: BTS 0 Ext. alarms 1

Pair Signal description Pair Signal description

1 BTS0_Ext1_1 3 BTS0_Ext3_1

BTS0_Ext1_2 BTS0_Ext3_2




29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–7



















Table 2-12 J18: BTS 0 relay 1


1 BTS0_Relay 1 NO 3 BTS0_Relay 1 COM

2 BTS0_Relay 1 NC




2 BTS0_Relay 2 NC




68P02902W67-A




2 BTS0_Relay 3 NC




2 BTS0_Relay 4 NC

Table 2-16 J22: Hood switch


1 – 3 BTS 0 door 2 link 2

2 – 4 BTS 0 door 2 link 3

Table 2-17 J23: Smoke alarm


1 Aux supply –24 V 4 –

2 Aux supply 0 V 5 Smoke alarm

3 – 6 Smoke alarm return link

Table 2-18 J24: Thermal sensors


1 O/T shutdown 3 Cabinet overtemperature

2 O/T shutdown return link 4 Cabinet overtemperature return


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–9

Table 2-19 J25: BTS 0 BIB interface


1 Tx1+ 20 Tx1–

2 Rx1+ 21 Rx1–

3 Earth 22 Earth

4 Tx4+ 23 Tx4–

5 Rx4+ 24 Rx4–

6 Earth 25 Earth

7 Tx2+ 26 Tx2–

8 Rx2+ 27 Rx2–

9 Earth 28 Earth

10 Tx5+ 29 Tx5–

11 Rx5+ 30 Rx5–

12 Earth 31 Earth

13 Tx3+ 32 Tx3–

14 Rx3+ 33 Rx3–

15 Earth 34 Earth

16 Tx6+ 35 Tx6–

17 Rx6+ 36 Rx6–

18 Earth 37 Earth

19 Earth




68P02902W67-A

Table 2-20 J26: BTS 0 Alarm 0


1 AC 1 fail 20 Rectifier 1 fail return

2 AC 1 fail return 21 Rectifier 2 fail

3 Linked to pin 4 22 Rectifier 2 fail return

4 Linked to pin 3 23 Linked to pin 24

5 HMS 0 fail – BTS 0 24 Linked to pin 23

6 HMS 0 fail return – BTS 0 25 BTS 0 door 2 open

7 HMS 1 fail – BTS 0 26 BTS 0 door 2 open return

8 HMS 1 fail return – BTS 0 27 BTS smoke alarm

9 – 28 BTS smoke alarm return

10 – 29 ANC enclosureovertemperature

11 Linked to pin 12 30 ANC enclosure overtemp.return

12 Linked to pin 11 31 –



15 Low voltage alarm 34 –

16 Low voltage alarm return 35 –

17 Linked to pin 18 36 Cabinet overtemperature

18 Linked to pin 17 37 Cabinet overtemperature return

19 Rectifier 1 fail


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–11

Table 2-21 J27: BTS 0 PIX1


1 BTS0_Ext9_1 19








9 – 27 BTS0_Ext16_2

10 – 28 –

11 – 29 –

12 – 30 –

13 – 31 –

14 – 32 –

15 – 33 –

16 – 34 –

17 – 35 –

18 – 36 –




68P02902W67-A

Table 2-22 J28: BTS 0 PIX0


1 BTS0_Ext1_1 19 –








9 – 27 BTS0_Ext8_2

10 – 28 –

11 BTS0_Relay 1 NO 29 BTS0_Relay 1 NC


13 BTS0_Relay 2 NC 31 BTS0_Relay 2 COM

14 BTS0_Relay 3 NO 32 BTS0_Relay 3 NC


16 BTS0_Relay 4 NC 34 BTS0_Relay 4 COM

17 – 35 –

18 – 36 –

Table 2-23 J40: Internal battery alarm



2 BTS0_Ext15_1 5 BTS0_Ext15_link

3 BTS0_Ext16_1 6 BTS0_Ext16_link

Table 2-24 J41: External battery alarm



2 BTS0_Ext15_link 5 BTS0_Ext15_2

3 BTS0_Ext16_link 6 BTS0_Ext16_2


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–13

DIP switchsettings on theAIM

DIP switch blocks SW1 and SW2 on the AIM allow certain alarm signals to beoverridden. Table 2-25 and Table 2-26 describe the DIP switch settings for SW1and SW2 on the AIM (closed (1) = alarm overridden).

Table 2-25 SW1: ANC enclosure override

SwitchNo.

Defaultposition

Pin Signal description

1 Closed 1

12 ANC smoke alarm override

2 Closed 2

11 Door alarm

3 Closed 3

10 ANC overtemperature alarm

4 Closed 4

9 ANC overtemperature shutdown

5 Closed 5

8 Internal battery temperature sensor

6 Open 6

7 External battery temperature sensor

Table 2-26 SW2: Alarm override

SwitchNo.

Defaultposition


1 Open 1

12 Overtemperature shutdown

2 Open 2

11 Overtemperature alarm

3 Closed 3

10 Internal battery alarm

4 Closed 4

9 Internal battery auxiliary alarm

5 Closed 5

8 External battery alarm

6 Closed 6

7 External battery auxiliary alarm




68P02902W67-A

Surge arresterholders

Table 2-27 shows the designations of the surge arrester holders on the AIM (seeFigure 2-4 for locations).

Table 2-27 Surge arrester holders (SK1 to SK12)


SK1 1 Tx1+ SK7 1 Tx4+

2 Earth 2 Earth

3 Tx1– 3 Tx4–

SK2 1 Rx1+ SK8 1 Rx4+

2 Earth 2 Earth

3 Rx1– 3 Rx4–

SK3 1 Tx2+ SK9 1 Tx5+

2 Earth 2 Earth

3 Tx2– 3 Tx5–

SK4 1 Rx2+ SK10 1 Rx5+

2 Earth 2 Earth

3 Rx2– 3 Rx5–

SK5 1 Tx3+ SK11 1 Tx6+

2 Earth 2 Earth

3 Tx3– 3 Tx6–

SK6 1 Rx3+ SK12 1 Rx6+

2 Earth 2 Earth

3 Rx3– 3 Rx6–

GSM-208-323 Primary ac terminal box

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–15

Primary ac terminal box

Primary acterminal boxlocation andfunction

The primary ac terminal box is mounted vertically on the rear wall of theenclosure, on the left side. It provides the connection point for the incoming acsupply to the equipment contained in the enclosure.

From left to right, the terminals are designated as follows: earth connection toPrincipal Ground Bar (PGB); earth (PE), linked to PGB terminal; neutral (N);phase 1 (L1); phase 2 (L2); phase 3 (L3).

If required, single phase operation is achieved by linking together the inputs toterminals L1, L2 and L3 (the link bar is supplied).

View of theprimary acterminal box

The terminal box houses six terminal connectors, as shown in Figure 2-5.

AC SUPPLY CABLEINPUT

TO PGB

Figure 2-5 The primary ac terminal box

GSM-208-323Fan tray



68P02902W67-A

Fan tray

Introduction tothe fan tray

Two fan trays are mounted in the base of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoorenclosure, one on the left side (for PDU B), and one on the right side (for PDUA). The purpose of the fan trays is to provide cooling for the rectifiers, which aremounted above them.

Fan traydescription

The left fan tray comprises two rows of three fans, and a control board. The rightfan tray comprises two rows of two fans. The fan trays are powered by –48 V dcand are independently fused at the dc power distribution unit.

Each fan tray is linked to the rectifier fail alarm circuits on the power controlmodule, so a failure of one or more fans will be signalled to the AIM through thepower control module.

View of the fantray

Figure 2-6 shows the right fan tray used in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoorenclosure. The left fan tray is similar but wider, to accommodate three fans ineach row.

CONTROL BOARD

FAN

POWERCONNECTOR

Figure 2-6 The right fan tray

GSM-208-323 Smoke detector

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–17

Smoke detector

Operation of thesmoke detector

A smoke detector is mounted vertically in the enclosure, behind the verticalsupport bracing. Its function is to shut down the equipment in the event ofsmoke being detected within the enclosure. It provides an alarm via the BTSapproximately 30 seconds before the system is shut down.

The smoke detector is powered by 24 V dc from the power control module.Once an alarm condition is detected, the smoke detector sends a smoke alarmtrip signal to the AIM. The AIM forwards the signal to both BTS 0 and the powercontrol module. On receiving the signal, the power control module inhibits theoperation of the rectifiers and disables LVD A and LVD B, thus isolating the BTScabinet(s) and the backup batteries.

The smoke alarm trip signal can only be cleared by removing and reapplying acpower, or pressing the RESET button on the front of the power control module.

GSM-208-323Enclosure lighting



68P02902W67-A

Enclosure lighting

Enclosurelightingdescription

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure has two internal fluorescenttube lights mounted in the roof panel, one on each side. The lights are poweredby 230 V ac from the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker on the ac powerdistribution unit, and each light includes a 230 V Euro-type service outlet socketbuilt into the left side of the tube holder.

Additionally, each light is activated by a proximity switch, so movement withinthe left or right side of the enclosure causes the left or right light to switch onautomatically.

A 3-position slider switch is mounted on the underside of each light fitting. Thisallows each light to be manually switched on or off, or left in the automatic(proximity switch controlled) position.

Under normal operating conditions, the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breakershould be left switched on and the enclosure light switches should be in theautomatic position.

NOTE The AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker also supplies acpower to the optional ancillary enclosure.

GSM-208-323 Doors and hood

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–19

Doors and hood

Door function

The doors have the following functions:

S Provide physical security and environmental protection.

S Assist in heat management due to a Heat Management System (HMS)being mounted on the inside of each door.

S Provide EMC shielding.

The door stays enable the doors to to be latched open at the 90° or 120°position. Each door is fitted with a striker for individual door open alarmmicroswitches.

Both doors overlap the lip of the hood. This means that the hood cannot belifted unless both doors are open.

Operation of thedoor locks

The left and right door handles operate in a similar manner. Both doors have aspring loaded locking handle and operate as follows:

1. Slide open the two lock protective covers.

2. Insert the key into the left lock and turn clockwise until the spring loadedhandle releases.

3. Turn the handle a quarter turn to the left to open the door.

4. Insert the key into the right lock and turn anticlockwise until the springloaded handle releases.

5. Turn the handle a quarter turn to the right to open the door.

6. Open both doors to the 120_ locking position.

NOTE A door open alarm is generated if the equipment is active.This means that the green STATUS OK LED on the frontof the power control module will NOT be illuminated whenthe doors are opened.

7. To close the doors, press down on the orange locking clip on the centre ofthe gas strut on each door, close doors firmly and turn the handles aquarter turn anticlockwise (for the left door) or clockwise (for the right door)and push in until the handles are flush with the doors. The doors lockautomatically.

NOTE The key is not required to lock the enclosure. Turning theleft handle back to the vertical position when both doorsare closed causes the doors to lock automatically.

GSM-208-323Doors and hood



68P02902W67-A

Hood functionThe hood has the following functions:

S Provides physical security.

S Provides environmental protection.

Hood operationThe hood can only be opened and closed when the doors are open. A lip on thefront edge of the hood is overlapped by the top edge of the doors, thuspreventing the hood from being lifted while the doors are closed. Also, the hoodis secured in the closed position by four screws and two latches. The screwsmust be removed and the hood unlatched before it can be opened. The latchesmust be closed and the screws refitted when the hood is closed.

A gas strut is fitted to either side of the hood to assist in opening and closing. Apull strap is provided on the underside of the hood to assist in closing. Once thehood starts to close, the gas struts ensure that the hood lowers gently to theclosed position.

A microswitch is fitted to the top lip of the enclosure, and is in contact with thehood when the hood is in the closed position. This generates an alarm signalwhen the hood is raised.

Hood viewFigure 2-7 shows the hood of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor.

ENVIRONMENTALSEAL

GAS STRUT

PULL STRAP

GAS STRUT

HOOD

HOOD LATCH

Figure 2-7 Detailed view of the enclosure hood

GSM-208-323 Cable entry to the enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–21

Cable entry to the enclosure

Cable entryoverview

Cable entry to the enclosure is normally low level or from beneath the enclosure,depending on customer requirements. High level cable entry (on the left sideonly) is possible using an optional high level cable entry kit. Each type of cableentry is catered for in the enclosure design.

Low level cableentry

Low level cable entry to the enclosure can be from either the left or right side ofthe base of the enclosure.

Two blanking plates are fitted on each side of the base of the enclosure.Separate power/comms and RF cable plates are supplied for fixing in positionwhen the blanking plates are removed. Only one power/comms plate issupplied, whereas four RF plates (each split into two) are supplied. Two of theRF plates have a hole radius of 14.5 mm and two have a radius of 20 mm, sothat the most common RF cable sizes can be accommodated.

Figure 2-8 shows an example of how the low level cable entry plates can befitted.

POWER/COMMSPLATE

RF PLATE(2 HALVES)

POWER CABLEHOLE

COMMS CABLEHOLES (x 4)

ENCLOSUREEARTH STUD

Figure 2-8 Low level cable entry plates (right side shown)

GSM-208-323Cable entry to the enclosure



68P02902W67-A

Cable entryfrom beneaththe enclosure

For certain installation types (on a rooftop, for example), it may be possible toroute the cables into the enclosure from beneath. Figure 2-9 shows an exampleof how this might be achieved.

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

CABLES FED TOENCLOSURE FROM

BENEATH

ENCLOSUREMOUNTED ON

SUITABLESUPPORT FRAME

ACCESS PANELS INBATTERY

COMPARTMENT

ROOF

Figure 2-9 Cable entry to the enclosure from beneath


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–23

Optional highlevel cable entry

High level cable entry is from the left side of the enclosure only. Three blankingplates are fitted to the enclosure as standard. These are removed to enable thethree cable entry plates supplied in the optional high level hardware kit to beinstalled.

NOTE Use of this kit also requires the optional high level feedercable kits.

One power/comms plate and two RF cable plates are supplied in the kit, andeach of these may be installed in any of the three positions to suit the requiredconfiguration.

Each cable hole in the cable entry plate has a plug fitted. These plugs areremoved as required when the cables are installed.

Figure 2-10 shows a typical high level cable entry plate arrangement for theenclosure.

POWER/COMMSPLATE

RF PLATES

Figure 2-10 Typical high level cable entry plate arrangement




68P02902W67-A

Optional cableshroud andcableterminationbracket kits

Cable shroud kit

An optional cable shroud kit is available for use with the high level cable entrykit. It is suitable for use with antenna feeder cables of up to 1/2 inch diameter.

The kit comprises a shroud and two cable securing brackets (see Figure 2-11).The brackets screw onto the left side of the enclosure, and the antenna feedcables attach to them using cable ties. The shroud also screws onto the side ofthe enclosure, and provides additional environmental protection for the cables atthe point of entry to the enclosure through the high level cable entry plates.

CABLESECURINGBRACKETS

SHROUD

Figure 2-11 The optional cable shroud kit


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–25

Cable termination bracket kit

The cable termination bracket kit is designed for use with the high level cableentry kit and the cable shroud kit. It enables larger diameter antenna feedercables (of between 1/2 inch and 15/8 inch) to be used with the high level cableentry plates.

The kit comprises two plates. The inner plate, containing seven cabletermination holes, screws to the side of the enclosure. The outer plate,containing five cable termination holes, screws onto the first plate and also ontothe shroud (see Figure 2-12).

The antenna feeder cables connect to the underside of the plates. Link cables(not supplied) connect the feeder cables to the high level cable entry plates.

NOTE The two brackets supplied with the shroud kit are notrequired when the cable termination bracket kit is used.

OUTER PLATE

SHROUD

INNER PLATE

Figure 2-12 The optional cable termination bracket kit




68P02902W67-A

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 3

Enclosure power distribution

equipment

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 3Enclosure power distribution equipment i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the power distribution equipment Tech. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



The power control module Tech. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the power control module Tech. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel view Tech. 3–8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front panel controls and indicators Tech. 3–9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm management Tech. 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm inputs Tech. 3–10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm output signals Tech. 3–11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Overview of the power distribution equipment

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–1

Overview of the power distribution equipment

Introduction tothe powerdistributionequipment

This chapter describes the power distribution equipment which is factory fitted inthe enclosure.

Operation of thepowerdistributionequipment

Power distribution within the enclosure is handled by the equipment identified inTable 3-1.

Table 3-1 Power distribution equipment within the enclosure

Rackdesignation

Equipment

PDU A Rectifier module (x 2)

DC connector panel (for customer equipment)

PDU B AC power distribution unit (2 panels)

DC power distribution unit

Power control module

Rectifier module (x 3 max.) – two plus one for systemredundancy

AC power distribution

Three phase or single phase ac input power is supplied through the primary acterminal box to the 4-pole circuit breaker (AC ISOLATION SWITCH) on theupper panel of the ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU). This circuit breaker is theprimary isolator for all the equipment contained in the enclosure.

When the circuit breaker is closed, ac power is fed from the breaker to a mainsfilter and then through MCBs or an RCBO to the following equipment:

S The rectifier modules in PDU A and PDU B.

S The enclosure heater (mounted in the base of PDU A), via a thermostatswitch.

S The cabinet lights and built-in 230 V ac service outlet sockets.

S The 230 V service power outlets (AUX 1, AUX 2 and HEATER AUX) onthe lower ac power distribution panel.

GSM-208-323Overview of the power distribution equipment



68P02902W67-A

DC power distribution

DC power is derived from the rectifier modules and is fed through MCBs in thedc power distribution unit to the following equipment:

S Horizonmacro indoor BTS 0.

S Horizonmacro indoor BTS 1.

S HMS 0.

S HMS 1.

S COMMS 0 to COMMS 3 (on the dc connector panel in PDU B).

DC power from the rectifiers is fed to the Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD)contactors, the fan trays in PDU A and PDU B, and the power control module.

View of thepowerdistributionequipment

Figure 3-1 shows the power distribution equipment in PDU A and PDU B.

RECTIFIERS

AC POWERDISTRIBUTION

UNIT

DC POWERDISTRIBUTION

UNITRECTIFIERS

–48 V DC CONNECTORPANEL (FOR CUSTOMER

EQUIPMENT)

PDU APDU B

POWERCONTROLMODULE

Figure 3-1 Power distribution equipment

GSM-208-323 AC power distribution

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–3

AC power distribution

AC distributiondescription

The ac supply to the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor may be either 230 Vnominal three phase (star configuration) or single phase. The ac power issupplied to the ac power distribution unit from the primary ac distribution box(see Chapter 2) through a fixed 5-core three phase power cable (3P + N + E).For single phase operation, the three phases are linked at their inputs to theprimary ac distribution box (links are supplied).

The ac power distribution unit filters the incoming ac supply and provides theprimary power isolation, in the form of a 4-pole circuit breaker (labelled ACISOLATION SWITCH). The status of each phase of the ac supply is indicated byLEDs on the front panel.

NOTE For single phase operation, all LEDs will be lit when the acsupply is connected or unlit when the ac supply isdisconnected.

The ac supply power distribution unit supplies ac power directly to each rectifiermodule, the heater, the lights and the 230 V service outlet sockets throughsingle pole circuit breakers on the front panel.

CB2/4 supplies ac power to the optional ancillary enclosure through a wired-inextension to AUX 1.

View of the acpowerdistribution unit

Figure 3-2 shows a detailed view of the ac power distribution unit front panel.

HEATER AUX

AC ISOLATION SWITCHCB1

HEATERINT

HEATERAUX

CB2/2 CB2/3CB2/4

RECT 0CB1/1

RECT 1CB1/2

RECT 2CB2/1

RECT 3CB3/1

RECT 4CB3/2

AUXILIARIES

Figure 3-2 AC power distribution unit front panel

GSM-208-323AC power distribution



68P02902W67-A

AC circuitbreakers

Table 3-2 shows details of the ac power distribution circuit breakers.

Table 3-2 AC circuit breakers

Phase Reference Function Rating Trip type

1 CB 1/1 Rectifier 0 16 A C

CB 1/2 Rectifier 1 16 A C


CB 2/2 Heater Int 10 A C

CB 2/3 Heater Aux (not used) 10 A C

CB 2/4 Aux 1, Aux 2, service auxiliaries 10 A RCBO


CB 3/2 Rectifier 4 16 A C

AC distributioncircuit diagram

Figure 3-3 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the ac power distribution.

RCBO

CB 11

2

3

N

EX1 X2 X3 XN

1 2 3 N E

1 2 3 N E

CB 1/1

CB 1/2

CB 2/4

CB 2/1

CB 3/1

CB 3/2

CB 2/2

CB 2/3

THERMOSTAT

RECTIFIER0

RECTIFIER1

RECTIFIER2

RECTIFIER3

RECTIFIER4

HEATERINT

HEATERAUX

AUX 1

AUX 2

SERVICEAUX

LINE FILTER

Figure 3-3 AC distribution circuit diagram

GSM-208-323 DC power distribution

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–5

DC power distribution

DC distributiondescription

The –48 V dc output from the rectifiers is fed to the dc power distribution unit.This provides circuit breaker or fuse protected –48 V dc power outlets to the twoBTS cabinets, the two HMS units, the dc connector panel in PDU A, the powercontrol module, and the fan trays. The dc power for the smoke detector (–24 V)is derived from the power control module.

The dc supply to the BTS cabinets is fed through a low voltage disconnectcontactor (LVD A). The backup batteries are float charged through a second lowvoltage disconnect contactor (LVD B).

The dc supply to the BTS cabinets is monitored through the power controlmodule. LVD A monitors the dc supply from the backup batteries to the BTSsand disconnects the dc supply if the voltage level drops to 41 V (+/–0.25 V),thus preventing deep discharge of the batteries. LVD B disconnects thebatteries from the system if the voltage level drops further to 39.5 V (+/–0.25 V).The control circuitry ensures that the contactors are only reset when the acsupply is restored and the batteries have recharged to a safe level.

The status of the LVD contactors is displayed on the power control module frontpanel. The front panel also contains switches which allow manual control of thecontactors (see The power control module section in this chapter for furtherinformation).

View of the dcpowerdistribution unit

Figure 3-4 shows a detailed view of the dc power distribution unit front panel.

CB B0CB B1CB B2CB B3CB B4CB B5CB A0

ALM SUPPLY ALM SENSE

LVD A LVD B

FAN 1 FAN 2

FS1 T2AH FS2 T2AH

FS3 T2AH FS4 T2AH

FS5 T2AH FS6 T2AHCB A1

Figure 3-4 DC power distribution unit front panel

GSM-208-323DC power distribution



68P02902W67-A

DC circuitbreakers

Table 3-3 shows details of the dc power distribution circuit breakers.

Table 3-3 DC circuit breakers

Breaker bank /DC bus

Reference Function Rating Trip type

A CB A0 BTS 0 63 A Long delay

A CB A1 BTS 1 63 A Long delay

B CB B0 Comms 0 4 A Long delay




B CB B4 HMS 0 10 A Motor start

B CB B5 HMS 1 10 A Motor start

DC distributioncircuit diagram

Figure 3-5 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the dc power distribution.

CB A0BTS 0

LVD ACONTROL

CB A1BTS 1

CB B4HMS 0

CB B5HMS 1

CB B0Comms 0

CB B1

CB B2

CB B3

THERMAL CHARGECOMPENSATION

BATTERYRETURN

REFERENCE

(M8 stud for connectionto principal ground bar)

LVD BCONTROL

Comms 1

Comms 2

Comms 3

LVD A

LVD B

–48 V DC

0 V DC

RECTIFIERV TRIM

BATTERYTHERMALSENSOR

BATTERY

Figure 3-5 DC distribution circuit diagram

GSM-208-323 DC power distribution

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–7

DC fuses

A fuse panel is mounted on the dc power distribution unit front panel. The fusesprotect the circuits shown in Table 3-4.

Table 3-4 DC fuses

Fuse no. Circuit protected Rating / Type

FS 1 Power control module supply 2 A / HRC

FS 2 Power control module negative sense 2 A / HRC

FS3 LVD A supply 2 A / HRC

FS 4 LVD B supply 2 A / HRC

FS 5 Fan tray in PDU A 2 A / HRC

FS 6 Fan tray in PDU B 2 A / HRC

GSM-208-323The power control module



68P02902W67-A

The power control module

Overview of thepower controlmodule

The power control module provides the following functions for the powerdistribution system:

S Monitoring.

S Control.

S Alarms interface.

The power control module monitors the ac and dc supply and takes appropriateaction should a fault condition occur. Faults are indicated on the module frontpanel by the associated LED being unlit and alarm conditions are signalled tothe alarm interface module (see Chapter 2). A reset button is provided to resetthe system and clear alarm conditions.

The module automatically controls the operation of the LVD contactors, althoughthese can be controlled manually using the BYPASS switch. It alsoautomatically controls the battery float charge voltage (54.5 V at 20 °C),although this can also be adjusted manually using the VOLT ADJ potentiometer.

In addition to the above, the power control module provides a 24 V dc supplyrequired to power the enclosure smoke alarm.

Front panelview

Figure 3-6 shows a detailed view of the power control module front panel.

Figure 3-6 The power control module front panel

GSM-208-323 The power control module

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–9

Front panelcontrols andindicators

Table 3-5 describes the controls and indicators on the power control module.

Table 3-5 Power control module front panel control and indicator functions

Legend Type Normal/Alarmstate

Function

O.T. OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether the overtemperaturealarm is functioning correctly.

SMOKE OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether the smoke alarm isfunctioning correctly.

LVD OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether both LVD units areoperational and the contactors are beingdriven at the correct levels.

REC ATT LED Off/Red Indicates whether the REC ATT buttonhas been pressed and the equipment is inthe receiving attention state.

CONT OFF LED Off/Red Indicates whether the BATT ON/OFFbutton has been pressed and the batterycontactor (LVD B) is off.

AC OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether ac power is present onat least one phase.

STATUS OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether the equipment status isok, no alarms are present and theequipment is not in the receiving attentionstate.

BATTON/OFF

Button – / – Toggles LVD B on or off.

REC ATT Button – / – Puts the equipment in the receivingattention state. Any alarms present aremasked for maintenance purposes.

RESET Button – / – Resets the power control module.

VOLT ADJ. Pot. – / – This is used to adjust the nominal floatvoltage level.

BYPASSED LED Off/Red Indicates whether the bypass switch hasbeen set to ON.

BCA ON LED Green/Off Indicates whether the BTS contactor (LVDA) is on.

BCB ON LED Green/Off Indicates whether LVD B is on.

BYPASS ONSwitch – / –

If set to ON, automatic control of thecontactors is overridden and both are heldBYPASS OFF Switch – / – contactors is overridden and both are heldin the on position to enable the powercontrol module to be “hot swapped”.

GSM-208-323The power control module



68P02902W67-A

Alarmmanagement

The power control module provides the connection between the power systemalarms and the alarm interface module (AIM) through a 25-way D-typeconnector. The alarm signal cable connects between J1 on the power controlmodule and J3 on the AIM.

The pinouts on J1 are shown in Table 3-6.

Table 3-6 J1: Power system alarms


1 AC 1 fail 14 AC 1 fail return

2 Smoke alarm 15 Smoke alarm return

3 O/T shutdown 16 O/T shutdown return

4 ANC smoke alarm trip 17 ANC smoke alarm trip return

5 – 18 –

6 Low voltage alarm 19 Low voltage alarm return



9 BTS smoke alarm 22 BTS smoke alarm return

10 Temperature sensor 23 Temperature sensor return

11 – 24 Aux supply 0 V

12 – 25 –

13 Aux supply 24 V

Alarm inputs

The alarm input signals accepted by the power control module are describedhere.

Overtemperature shutdown

The overtemperature shutdown signal causes the power control module toinhibit the rectifiers and disable both LVD contactors, thus removing all dc powerto the BTS cabinets and communications equipment. The signal causes thepower control module to generate an ANC smoke alarm trip signal.

The overtemperature alarm signal is generated if the temperature reaches 70 °Cand shutdown of the equipment occurs if the temperature rises further to 80 °C.

The overtemperature shutdown alarm can only be reset by removing andre-applying ac power or pressing the recessed reset button on the front of thepower control module (see Figure 3-6).

GSM-208-323 The power control module

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–11

Smoke alarm shutdown

The smoke alarm shutdown signal operates in a similar manner to theovertemperature shutdown signal, except that there is a 30 second delay beforedc power is removed. This signal also causes the power control module togenerate an ANC smoke alarm trip signal.

Like the overtemperature shutdown alarm, the smoke alarm shutdown alarmcan only be reset by removing and re-applying ac power or pressing therecessed reset button on the front of the power control module (see Figure 3-6).

BTS disable

If the dc supply to the BTS has been disabled due to an ac power failure andlow voltage disconnect condition, the BTS will not restart if the temperaturewithin the enclosure is below the minimum specified for BTS operation.

The dc supply is restored automatically when the temperature reaches anacceptable level.

Alarm outputsignals

The alarm output signals generated by the power control module are describedhere.

AC 1 fail alarm

The power control module combines the ac status monitor signal from eachrectifier and provides a single “AC 1 fail” alarm signal if the ac supply fails.

Rectifier 1 fail alarm

The power control module provides a non critical “Rectifier 1 fail” alarm signal ifone rectifier or rectifier cooling fan fails.

Rectifier 2 fail alarm

The power control module provides a critical “Rectifier 2 fail” alarm signal if morethan one rectifier or rectifier cooling fan fails.

Low voltage alarm

The power control module provides a “Low voltage” alarm signal if the backupbatteries have discharged to a voltage level where low voltage disconnect of theBTS cabinet(s) is imminent (voltage < 43.0 V, +/–0.25 V). This initiates acontrolled shutdown of the equipment. The BTS cabinet(s) are disconnected ifthe voltage falls to 41 V (+/–0.25 V), and the batteries are disconnected at avoltage level of 39.5 V (+/–0.25 V).

ANC smoke alarm trip

The power control module provides a control signal to trip the circuit breakers inan external equipment cabinet when an overtemperature shutdown or smokealarm shutdown signal has been received.

GSM-208-323The rectifier module



68P02902W67-A

The rectifier module

Rectifiermoduleoverview

This section describes the rectifier modules used in the Horizonmacro 12 carrieroutdoor enclosure.

Five rectifiers provide adequate operating power for all the modules within theenclosure and full battery charging (including external extended battery backup).Under normal operating conditions, four rectifiers provide sufficient power todrive two Horizonmacro indoor BTS units and float charge the batteries. Thefifth rectifier then provides system redundancy.

View of therectifier module

Figure 3-7 shows a view of the rectifier module.

Figure 3-7 The rectifier module

GSM-208-323 The rectifier module

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–13

Rectifierfunctionaldescription

The rectifier is a power factor-corrected, wide input, ac power supply module.Each module is a switching type ac/dc power converter with the followingregulated dc output:

S –55 V at 23.5 A (maximum output current).

S 1200 W (nominal).

The ac supply is fed to the rectifiers through circuit breakers on the ac powerdistribution unit.

The regulated dc output is fed through circuit breakers on the dc powerdistribution unit to the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets (via a low voltagedisconnect contactor), the HMS units, and the dc connector panel in PDU B.

The outputs of each rectifier are connected in parallel and all rectifiers in thesystem actively share the load.

Front panelLEDs

There are four LEDs mounted on the front of each rectifier, which indicate thefollowing:

S I/P HEALTHY (yellow) - lit when the input voltage is present and withinspecified limits (150 to 264 V ac).

S OVERVOLTAGE (red) - lit when the rectifier has shut down due to anoutput voltage in excess of –59.9 V dc.

S I/LIMIT (red) - lit when the rectifier is in current limit and delivering acurrent in the range 22 A to 24 A. The LED is normally unlit, but when litdoes not necessarily indicate the existence of a fault as this may be due torecharging of the batteries after an ac supply interruption.

S O/P HEALTHY (green) - lit when the output voltage is present and withinspecified limits (–39 to –59.9 V dc).




68P02902W67-A

Rectifierfunctionaldiagram

Figure 3-8 shows a functional diagram of the rectifier module.

I/P HEALTHY

OUTPUT FAIL

INPUT FAIL

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

REDLED

YELLOWLED

VIN (88 V to 264 V)

POWERCONVERTER

ANDSYSTEM

MONITOR

VOLTAGE TRIM

VOUT (–55 V)

ENABLE IN

O/P HEALTHY

OVERVOLTAGE

I/LIMITREDLED

GREENLED

POWERCONTROLMODULE

CURRENT SHARE OTHERRECTIFIERS

AUXILIARY SUPPLY (12V)

ENABLE OUTRELAY 1 ON RECTIFIER

PCB

POWERCONTROLMODULE

Figure 3-8 Functional diagram of the rectifier module

Monitoring

Internal

Internal circuits monitor for the following:

S –55 V output voltage regulation.

S The –55 V output is also regulated to provide temperature compensationfor the float charging of the internal batteries (battery backup) in the range–52.88 V at 40 _C to –56.72 V at 0 _C.

S Overvoltage protection. This provides shutdown if the output voltageexceeds –59.9 V.

S Overcurrent protection. This provides constant current limiting at 22 A to24 A, unless the output voltage drops below 39.6 V, when the outputcurrent will fold back to between 3 A and 8 A.

S Enable control of the rectifier module from the power control module.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–15

External

The power control module monitors common alarm signals generated by thechangeover relays fitted within the rectifier modules. The possible alarms are:

S AC input fail - This alarm is active if all the rectifier modules lose their inputsupply or the input drops below their operating minimum value.

S DC output fail - This alarm is active if the output from one or more rectifiermodules fails, or goes outside the preset tolerance level.

Alarm conditions generated by the rectifier module may be detected by one ofthe red LEDs being lit, or by the dc output fail and mains input healthy LEDsbeing unlit.

Protectioncircuits

Activation of the protection circuits causes the rectifier module to shut down.During a shutdown, the output circuits of the malfunctioning module are isolatedand its output healthy LED is switched off. The malfunctioning module informsthe power control module of the shutdown condition. An alarm signal is alsoactivated and sent to the power control module if all rectifier modules detect lossof ac input voltage. After an alarm condition has ceased, normal operation of therectifier module is restored automatically.

Thermalprotection

The rectifier module is provided with additional internal thermal protection. Itshuts down if its ambient temperature exceeds a safe level, causing an alarmmessage to be sent to the power control module. Normal operation of therectifier module resumes after the temperature returns to a safe level.




68P02902W67-A

Control andalarm signals

The following signals are associated with rectifier module control and alarms:

S Enable out.

An independent –55 V output from each rectifier module commonedtogether and connected to the dc power distribution unit.

S Enable in.

This signal, fed from the individual circuit breakers on the dc powerdistribution unit, enables the rectifier output.

S Voltage trim.

A variable voltage signal, generated by the power control module, used toregulate the rectifier output in order to produce a temperaturecompensated battery charging voltage, to ensure that the internal orexternal batteries are not overcharged.

S Current share

A signal representing the average current for the total system. Eachrectifier module compares its output current with the average current andadjusts its output voltage so as to equalize its output current with theaverage system current.

S Auxiliary supply

A 12 V supply independent of the rectifier output, but referenced to it,used to power the power control module circuitry when the rectifier outputis inhibited.

S Input healthy

The normally open contact of the isolated changeover relay used toindicate that the input is within specification.

S Output healthy

The normally closed contact of the isolated changeover relay used toindicate that the output is within specification.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–17

Rectifiermodule pinoutconnections

Table 3-7 lists the rectifier module pinout connections.

Table 3-7 Rectifier module pin connections (29-way Elcon)

PinNo.

Signal/Description PinNo.

Signal/Description

1 +0 V output 16 Relay N/C(rectifier output healthy)

2 –55 V output 17 Relay N/O

(rectifier ac input healthy)

3 Not connected 18 Not connected


5 Voltage trim 20 Not connected

6 Link enable input 21 Opto input

7 Not connected 22 Forced current share


9 Link enable output 24 Not connected

10 Not connected 25 Opto common

11 Not connected 26 Earth


13 +12 V auxiliary supply 28 AC input (neutral)

14 Not connected 29 AC input (live)

15 Relay common

GSM-208-323The dc connector panel



68P02902W67-A

The dc connector panel

Description ofthe dcconnector panel

The dc connector panel is mounted in PDU A, to the right of the rectifiers. Itprovides four –48 V dc sockets for customer communications equipment, whichcan be mounted in the 6 U of rack space available in PDU A.

Power for the dc connector panel is supplied from the dc power distribution unit.Power to each connector on the panel is controlled via a separate MCB on thefront of the dc power distribution unit (COM 0 to COM 3).

View of the dcconnector panel

Figure 3-9 shows the detail on the dc connector panel.

ESP BONDING POINT

COMMS 0

ESP

COMMS 1

COMMS 2

COMMS 3

GND0V–48V

GND0V–48V

GND0V–48V

GND0V–48V

Figure 3-9 The dc connector panel

GSM-208-323 Internal battery backup

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–19

Internal battery backup

Overview of theinternal batterybackup system

The left side of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is fitted with aclosed two shelf compartment for backup batteries. Four 12 V monoblocs areinstalled in the compartment and connected in series to provide a –48 V dcsupply in the event of a failure of the ac supply. The backup batteries can power12 carriers under full load conditions for up to 40 minutes.

The batteries are connected to the enclosure dc supply through an isolatorswitch mounted on the top of the battery compartment and the LVD B contactor.The circuit breaker enables the backup batteries to be isolated from the systemfor maintenance purposes.

View of theinternal batterybackupcompartment

Figure 3-10 shows the internal battery backup compartment.

COMPARTMENTCOVER

BACKUPBATTERIES

BATTERY ISOLATORSWITCH

Figure 3-10 View of the internal battery backup compartment

GSM-208-323Internal battery backup



68P02902W67-A

Battery thermalchargecompensation

A thermal probe is connected to the positive battery terminal on the right batteryin the upper shelf, via an M8 copper ring terminal. This provides thermal chargecompensation by monitoring the battery temperature and adjusting the rectifierbattery charge voltage to the optimal level, thus maximizing the charge rate andbattery life, and minimizing battery gas discharge.

The thermal compensation is set at 4 mV/cell/_C, but is voltage clamped at thevalues for 0 _C and 40 _C to prevent battery overcharge at temperatureextremes.

The thermal probe connects to J5 on the AIM (see Figure 2-3), and the signalfrom it then passes to J1 on the power control module via J3 on the AIM.

Batteryconnections

The connections for the internal batteries are shown in Figure 3-11.

+VE CONNECTION(BLACK CABLE) TOISOLATOR SWITCH

BATTERY LINK

BATTERY LINK

–VE CONNECTION(BLUE CABLE) TO

ISOLATOR SWITCH

THERMAL PROBECONNECTS HERE

Figure 3-11 Internal backup battery connections

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 4

Heat management system

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 4Heat management system i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of the heat management system (HMS) Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the HMS Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the HMS Tech. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMS control board Tech. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View of the HMS Tech. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Airflow through the HMS Tech. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation of the heater Tech. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Overview of the heat management system (HMS)

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 4–1

Overview of the heat management system (HMS)

Introduction tothe HMS

The equipment installed in the enclosure emits heat, which must be removed inorder to maintain the correct working temperature.

The heat management system maintains the internal temperature of theenclosure within the operational range of the installed equipment, provided theexternal ambient temperature is within the range of –33 °C to +45 °C.

A BTS alarm is generated if the return air temperature from the enclosurereaches 70 °C, and the equipment shuts down if the temperature rises further to80 °C.

The HMS comprises the following equipment:

S HMS 0, mounted on the right door.

S HMS 1, mounted on the left door (fitted with a laptop computer supportbracket).

S A heater, mounted on a panel in PDU A (below the space allocated forcustomer communications equipment).

HMS 0 and HMS 1 each contain four fans and a heat exchanger for aircirculation and heat dissipation, and a control board.

Operation of theHMS

Under normal operating conditions, hot air from the equipment in the enclosureis drawn into the top of each HMS unit by two radial fans. This air passesdownwards through a heat exchanger, and the cooled air returns to the inside ofthe enclosure through a grille at the bottom of the HMS.

Two radial fans draw cool air into the HMS through the lower grille on theoutside of the door. The air passes through the heat exchanger and the heatedair is expelled through the upper grille on the outside of the door.

The speed of the fans is temperature controlled. This means that if thetemperature within the enclosure (measured at the heat exchanger) rises abovea predetermined level, the speed of all the fans increases to boost the airflowthrough the heat exchanger, thus increasing the cooling rate.

NOTE The fans on the door (ambient air) side of the HMS do notswitch on until the air temperature at the heat exchangerreaches 45 °C. These fans switch off if the temperaturefalls below 43 °C.

Power for each HMS is supplied separately through a 13 pin D-type connectorfitted on the top panel. This also carries the alarm signal for notifying the BTS inthe event of fan failure within the HMS. A 9 pin D-type connector is also fitted onthe top panel for test purposes.

GSM-208-323Overview of the heat management system (HMS)



68P02902W67-A

HMS controlboard

An HMS control board is mounted within each HMS, and has the followingfunctions:

S Distributes –48 V dc to each of the four internal fans.

S Controls the speed of each of the fans according to temperature.

S Sends a summary alarm signal to the AIM in the case of fan failure,internal temperature exceeding 70 °C, or if the door is opened.

View of the HMS

Figure 4-1 shows the main components of the HMS (HMS 0 and the right doorare omitted for clarity).

HMS 1

HEATER

HOT AIRINLETS

COOL AIROUTLET

DOOR SEAL

POWER ANDSIGNAL

CONNECTOR

LOCATION OF TESTCONNECTOR

BRUSHSEAL

Figure 4-1 View of HMS 1 and the heater

GSM-208-323 Overview of the heat management system (HMS)

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 4–3

Airflow throughthe HMS

Figure 4-2 shows the airflow through the HMS.

ENCLOSUREINTERIOR

DOOR HMS

RADIAL FAN

HEATEXCHANGER

AMBIENT AIR(COOL)

OUTLET AIR(HOT)

RADIAL FAN

HOT AIR

COOLED AIR

DOOR GRILLE

DOOR GRILLE HEATER

WARMED AIR

IN COLD CONDITIONS

BRUSH SEAL

Figure 4-2 Cross sectional view of airflow through the HMS

Operation of theheater

The heater is powered directly from the ac power distribution unit through acircuit breaker (HEATER INT) and a control thermostat. A heater test switch isprovided on the ac distribution unit front panel.

The purpose of the heater is to prevent the enclosure air temperature fromdropping too low. If the temperature of the air circulating within the enclosuredrops to 5 °C, the heater switches on automatically to warm the air. Once the airtemperature within the enclosure reaches 8 °C, the heater switches off.

The controlling thermostat for the heater is mounted in the base plate of the acpower distribution unit.

GSM-208-323HMS specifications



68P02902W67-A

HMS specifications

Introduction toHMSspecifications

The specifications for each door mounted HMS used in the Horizonmacro 12carrier outdoor enclosure are described in this section

Powerrequirements

The power requirement for each HMS is –48 V dc at 7.6 A (max.).

Protectionrating

The protection rating for the HMS cabinet is IP55.

Physicalcharacteristics

The physical characteristics for the HMS are as follows:

Height:Width:Depth:Weight:

1050 mm495 mm180 mm35 kg (approx.)

Performance

The HMS performance figures are as follows:

Specific thermal output:Output per fan:

120 W/K100 W

Temperaturerange

The HMS operates over a temperature range of –33 °C to +45 °C.

GSM-208-323 HMS specifications

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 4–5

Fan setpoints

The fan speed (percentage) temperature setpoints are as follows:

Internal fan:

External fan:

45% at < 40 °C.45% to 100% at between 40 °C and 57 °C (linear increase).Off at < 45 °C, 35% at 45 °C (switch off at 43 °C).35% to 100% at between 45 °C and 60 °C (linear increase).

Figure 4-3 shows a graphical representation of the relationship between fanspeed and temperature.

Temp. (°C)

% Speed

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

10 20 30 40 50 60 70

574543

35

45

INTERNALFAN

EXTERNALFAN

Figure 4-3 Relationship between HMS fan speed and temperature

GSM-208-323HMS specifications



68P02902W67-A

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 5

Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

structure

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 5Horizonmacro indoor cabinet structure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor Tech. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External cabinet view Tech. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of structure description Tech. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filled cabinet view Tech. 5–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .





GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–1

Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor

External cabinetview

Figure 5-1 shows an external view of an indoor cabinet with the door open.

ig.231.rh

Figure 5-1 Horizonmacro indoor cabinet with door open

GSM-208-323Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor



68P02902W67-A

Overview ofstructuredescription

The equipped cabinet is shown in Figure 5-2. The cabinet is designed forminimum maintenance and maximum ease of module replacement, and hasaccess only from the front and the top.

This chapter describes the cabinet structure and inner connections to assistunderstanding of the cabinet functions. There should be no need to dismantlethe cabinet beyond Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) level.

The cabinet structure components are explained in the following sections:

Empty cabinet and SURF harness

This section describes the empty cabinet and the SURF harness connectionsbetween the SURF, the backplane and the transceivers.

Top panel

This section describes the bare top panel, with all modules removed.

Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)

This section describes the CBIA. It also describes the backplane connectionsbetween all modules, and the harness from the backplane to the interface toppanel connectors.

Door

This section describes the structure and function of the door.

GSM-208-323 Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–3

Filled cabinetview

Figure 5-2 shows a cabinet with maximum number of modules installed. Furtherinformation is contained in the later chapters of this technical description.

ig.128.rh

CIRCUITBREAKER

MODULE (CBM)



DIGITALMODULES

T43/BIB

MCUF

ALARM MODULE


TWO 2-FAN UNITS

ONE 4-FAN UNIT



ONE SURF (Rx)THREE PSMs

DC POWER IN

INTERFACEPANEL

CONNECTORS

Figure 5-2 Cabinet, without door, showing main components

GSM-208-323Empty cabinet and SURF harness



68P02902W67-A

Empty cabinet and SURF harness

SURF harnessand cabinetattachment

The SURF harness is fitted on the back wall of the cabinet, as shown inFigure 5-3. The chassis of the SURF harness supports the SURF module.

The SURF harness provides:

S Three connectors to the SURF, for RF and power.

S One RF connector to each CTU, consisting of three inputs, one each forRx1, Rx2 and RF loopback test, as shown in Figure 5-4. The RFconnectors are free floating to ensure fitting of CTU modules.

S One connector to the backplane, for power from the PSMs.

Cabinet viewwith installedSURF harness

Figure 5-3 shows the SURF harness installed in an empty cabinet with, forclarity, SURF harness cables not shown.

ig.232.rh

SURF HARNESS

EARTH CABLE FOR MAIN CAGE

Figure 5-3 SURF harness installed in empty cabinet

GSM-208-323 Empty cabinet and SURF harness

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–5

SURF harnessview

Figure 5-4 shows the SURF harness with connectors indicated.

ig.233.rh

CONNECTOR FOREACH CTU

POWER CONNECTOR TOBACKPLANE

SLOT FOR SURFMODULE

LOCATING PINS

Rx A

RF LOOPBACKTEST PORT (L)

Rx B

Rx A X 6

Rx B X 6

RF LOOPBACK X 6

CTU 0

CTU 5

THREE CONNECTORSTO SURF

Figure 5-4 SURF harness with connectors indicated

GSM-208-323Top panel



68P02902W67-A

Top panel

Top paneldescription

The top panel provides:

S A basket to hold up to three Tx blocks. This includes three holes to enableconnection of CTU Tx cables to the underside of each Tx block. The holesalso allow cooling of the Tx blocks from underneath.

S A slot for insertion of the SURF module.

S A location hole for the interface panel.

S An area for ventilation purposes above the PSMs.

S A cable hole for fibre optic extension cables from the MCUF FMUX to anFMUX of another cabinet.

Top panel view

Figure 5-5 shows a top panel with major features labelled.

ig.235.rh

SLOT FOR SURF MODULE

LOCATION HOLEFOR INTERFACE

PANEL

VENTILATION PANEL(LOCATED ABOVE PSMs)

BASKET TO HOLDTHREE Tx BLOCKS

HOLE FOR ONE Tx BLOCKCTU CONNECTIONS CABLE HOLE FOR FIBRE

OPTIC EXTENSION CABLES

Figure 5-5 Top panel with major features labelled

GSM-208-323 Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–7

Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)

CBIA overview

The CBIA provides a platform for module installation and power and digitalsignal interconnection to cabinet modules. The CBIA consists of:

S The main cage - provides compartments for fans, CTUs, digital modules,BPSMs, PSMs and CBM.

S The backplane - routes power and signals for all cage modules and powerto the SURF.

S The harness - links the backplane to the interface panel.

S The interface panel - contains the T43/BIB and the required power andcommunications connectors.

CBIA andinterface panelschematic view

Figure 5-6 shows the CBIA main cage and the interface panel.

ig.236.rh

DIGITAL MODULESECTION OF CAGE

INTERFACEPANEL

MAINCAGE

BACKPLANEATTACHED TOENTIRE BACK

OF CAGE

HARNESS LINKSBACKPLANE

CONNECTORS TOUNDERSIDE OF

INTERFACE PANEL

Figure 5-6 View of CBIA cage and the interface panel

GSM-208-323Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)



68P02902W67-A

Backplane andharness view

Figure 5-7 shows the CBIA harness linking the interface panel and thebackplane at the rear of the main cage. Each backplane harness connector isidentified. The door switch and heat sensors are also identified.

ig.237.rh

ICS J26

DOOR SWITCH

THREE HEATSENSORS

DOOR SWITCHCONNECTOR J55

SIX CTUCONNECTORHOLES FOR

SURFHARNESS

POWERCONNECTOR

FOR SURFHARNESS

NIU to T43/BIBJ21

INTERFACEPANEL

EXTERNALALARMS J23

GPS J22(IF FITTED)

RTC J32

PIX J25

T43/BIB

Figure 5-7 Rear view of CBIA showing backplane and harness


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–9

CBIA cagefunction anddiagram

The main cage holds the modules and supports the backplane. Eachcompartment contains guides for easy insertion of the modules. Figure 5-8shows the module compartments of the cage.

CIRCUIT BREAKER MODULE

MAIN CAGE

TRANSCEIVERS (CTUs)

HOLES IN BACK PANEL OF CAGE FORBACKPLANE FAN CONNECTORS

FULL SIZEDIGITAL

MODULES(MCUFs

ANDALARM)

HALF SIZE DIGITALMODULES (FMUX,NIUs AND BPSM)

POWER SUPPLY MODULES(PSMs)

HALF SIZE DIGITALMODULES (FMUX,NIUs AND BPSM)

2-FAN 2-FAN 4-FAN

Figure 5-8 Front view of CBIA cage showing where modules fit

CBIA harnessfunction

The harness provides cables to link connectors on the backplane withconnectors on the underside of the interface panel.

GSM-208-323Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)



68P02902W67-A

CBIA backplanefunction

The backplane is a multilayered printed circuit board with attached connectorson front and back. The backplane has the following functions:

S Routes power and digital signals throughout the cabinet.

S Provides connectors for the harness cables linking to the interface panel.

S Provides connectors for plug-in modules.

S Provides power to the SURF harness, when the main cage is inserted intothe cabinet.

S Provides a connector for the door switch cable.

S Provides connectors for three heat sensors in the main cage, above theCTUs.

Attachment ofcage to cabinet

The CBIA is installed in the cabinet in the factory and must not be removed.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–11

Interface panelfunction

The interface panel provides all connection points to the required power sourcesand telecommunications links. All connectors are linked to the backplane via theCBIA harness. Plastic connector covers, supplied by Motorola, keep unusedconnectors protected from damage by static or foreign matter, and should beretained.

Interface paneldiagram

Figure 5-9 shows the locations of the interface panel connectors.

ig.239.rh

T43/BIB

AC POWERSOCKET INPUT

DC POWERINPUT

GPS(if fitted)

CCB(not used)

PIX 0

EXTERNAL ALARMS

PIX 1ICS

VENTILATIONGRID

Figure 5-9 Interface panel connector locations

Interface panelpinouts

Interface panel pinouts are detailed in Installation and Configuration:Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor (GSM-208-423), Interface panel cabling ofthis service manual.

GSM-208-323Cabinet door



68P02902W67-A

Cabinet door

Door function

The cabinet is fitted with a door which has the following functions:

S Protects modules from damage.

S Ensures correct air ventilation.

S Provides EMC shielding.

The door has a ventilation grid with internal honeycomb grid, a verticalaluminium air baffle, and a horizontal door stop bracket. The door stop bracketenables the door to open to 95° or 130°, though when installed within the 12carrier outdoor enclosure opening is restricted.

The lock is a trigger latch, opened (if unlocked) by pressing the middle button.There is also a door alarm bracket, which operates the cabinet door alarmswitch.

Door externaland internalview

Figure 5-10 shows both sides of the cabinet door.

ig.266.rh

VENTILATIONGRILLE

EXTERNAL VIEW

TRIGGERLATCH

INTERNAL VIEW

VERTICAL AIRBAFFLE

DOOR ALARMBRACKET

HONEYCOMBVENTILATION

DOOR STOPBRACKET

Figure 5-10 External and internal view of cabinet door

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 6

Horizonmacro indoor temperature

control

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 6Horizonmacro indoor temperature control i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indoor temperature control system Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of indoor temperature control system Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature shutdown sensors Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet restart after shutdown Tech. 6–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Indoor temperature control system

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 6–1

Indoor temperature control system

Overview ofindoortemperaturecontrol system

The heat management system (HMS) of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoorenclosure maintains the internal enclosure temperature within the operatinglimits required by the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet.

The indoor cabinet internal temperature is maintained within normal operationallimits by internal fans. The fans draw in air from beneath the cabinet, and the airis expelled through the door and top cabinet vents. The speed of each fan iscontrolled by a heat sensor mounted on the fan hub.

If the cabinet overheats, a temperature sensor provides a warning. Dualsensors, set at a higher temperature threshold, activate shutdown of the cabinetPSMs. The cabinet is restarted when the sensors are reset by a substantial fallin temperature.

The external rectifiers and internal CTUs have their own shutdown responses tooverheating.

The CTUs shutdown at 92 _C. 850/900 MHz CTUs also have an internal 4 dBpower reduction response to overheating at 85 _C. 1800/1900 MHz CTUs havea 0.6 dB cut back at 70 _C, in addition to the 4 dB power reduction at 85 _C.

The CTU shutdown response to overheating provides a second level of cabinetprotection, independent of the cabinet heat sensors.

Temperatureshutdownsensors

The three cabinet temperature sensors are located above the CTU shelf (seeFigure 5-7) and consist of the following:

S One 70 _C sensor provides a cabinet overtemperature alarm when thecabinet temperature exceeds planned level. The alarm is processed bythe alarm board and MCUF, and sent on to the OMC-R via the BSC.

S Two 85 _C sensors shut down the PSMs to protect the cabinet equipmentfrom heat damage. Both sensors must detect excess temperature for theshutdown to take place; this reduces the risk of an unnecessary shutdown.No prior notification of shutdown is given to the OMC-R, except for theoriginal 70 _C sensor alarm. This is because the MCUF and CTUsimmediately lose power and functionality.

Cabinet restartafter shutdown

The cabinet is restarted when the two 85 _C temperature sensors reset at55 _C. This re-establishes an earth point for the PSM internal detectorsconnected to the cabinet heat sensors, which then reactivate the PSM outputs.The MCUF then reboots as a normal power up.

GSM-208-323Indoor fans



68P02902W67-A

Indoor fans

Indoor fanoverview

The indoor cabinet operating temperature is maintained by three sets of fans:

S One 4-fan unit (referred to as FAN0), located in front and beneath thedigital module shelf.

S Two identical 2-fan units (FAN1 and FAN2), located beneath the CTUshelf.

Figure 6-1 shows the two types of fan unit.

RESET BUTTONS(ONE PER FAN)

2-FANUNIT

4-FANUNIT

SLIDE LATCH FORMODULE REMOVAL

Figure 6-1 View of 2-fan and 4-fan units

Fan operationand reset

The fans run continuously, and respond to temperature changes to ensureadequate air flow.

Each fan has a reset button, for use if a fan has stopped or cannot start. Eachreset button is marked FRONT or REAR to identify the appropriate fan.

Filter sheetoption andeffect on fans

Filters are an option and not essential in a clean environment. The single filter ismounted under all the fan units. If clogged, fan airflow may be reduced, causingstrained fan motors and increased fan noise.

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 7

Horizonmacro indoor power

supply

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 7Horizonmacro indoor power supply i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power supply modules (PSMs) Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of PSM Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM location and redundancy Tech. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM alarms Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM module view and LEDs Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSM backplane protection Tech. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .



GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Power supply modules (PSMs)

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 7–1

Power supply modules (PSMs)

Overview ofPSM

When the indoor cabinet is installed within a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, thesupply provided by the enclosure is –48 V dc. The dc power supply modules(PSMs) used within the indoor cabinet must therefore be –48 V dc (positiveearth input).

NOTE Other PSM types (+27 V dc and 230 V ac) are availablefor the standard Horizonmacro indoor cabinet. These areNOT suitable for use when the cabinet is installed withinthe 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. All PSMs have the sameexternal appearance and are located in the samepositions. Different types are identified only by front panellabels.

The PSMs are fed from a backplane connector, and use pulse width modulationto generate output supply. A front panel switch (shown in Figure 7-1), disablesthe output, reducing the input current as shown in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Input currents for power supply module

Type of PSM Output voltagefull load

Input currentfull load

Input load whenoutput switch off

–48 V nominal dc +27 V 18 A 0.5 A

NOTE There are several manufacturers of the PSMs. Each isfully compatible with the same type of PSM of a differentmanufacturer.

PSM locationand redundancy

The PSMs are located above the digital shelf and circuit breaker module. Thereare three slots, two for maximum cabinet configuration and one for redundancy.Table 7-2 shows the recommended number of PSMs for different operationalconfigurations.

Table 7-2 PSM operational configurations

Number ofPSMs fitted

Maximum load capability

1 Complete operation of cabinet for up to three CTUs.

2 Complete operation of cabinet for up to six CTUs.

3 Redundancy and power load sharing (further enhancingreliability by reducing temperature of operation).

GSM-208-323Power supply modules (PSMs)



68P02902W67-A

PSM alarmsThere are three alarms for each PSM, indicated by a combination of two LEDs:

S Output fail.

S Input fail.

S Overtemperature.

PSM moduleview and LEDs

Figure 7-1 shows a view of the PSM with LEDs identified.

AIR VENTS ONENTIRE TOP ANDBOTTOM PANELS GREEN LED

ACTIVE

RED LEDALARM

OUTPUT DISABLESWITCH

M4 MODULE ATTACHMENTSCREWS

Figure 7-1 View of PSM with LEDs identified

The LEDs function with the properties shown in Table 7-3.

Table 7-3 Power supply module LED functions

Green LEDACTIVE

Red LEDALARM

Indication

OFF OFF 1. Cabinet power supply off, or

2. Output disable switch off, or3. Module not connected.

ON OFF Normal operation.

OFF ON Alarm condition with module unable to supplypower.

ON ON Internal problem (such as overtemperature), butstill able to maintain supply.

PSM backplaneprotection

If a power track on the backplane is broken or short circuited, the PSM detectsthe fault and shuts down to prevent further damage.

GSM-208-323 MicroBCU power supply module (BPSM)

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 7–3

MicroBCU power supply module (BPSM)

Introduction tothe BPSM

This section describes the mBCU power supply module (BPSM). The BPSM,located in the digital shelf of the main cage, supplies regulated dc power to thedigital modules.

A single (master) BPSM, mounted in the lower half of the digital module shelf,can provide sufficient power for:

S One MCUF.

S One FMUX.

S Two NIUs.

S The alarm module.

An optional second BPSM can be fitted in the upper half of the digital moduleshelf to supply any or all of the following:

S Backup power to the alarm module, which is the only digital modulepowered by both BPSMs (for redundancy).

S Optional redundant MCUF and associated FMUX (fitted in the upper halfof the digital module shelf).

S To meet a requirement for two additional NIUs (fitted in the upper half ofthe digital module shelf).

During normal operation, with all the outputs within their regulation limits, agreen LED located on the front panel is illuminated. No alarms are generated bythe BPSM.

BPSM diagramFigure 7-2 shows a BPSM.

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GREEN LED

Figure 7-2 The BPSM module

GSM-208-323MicroBCU power supply module (BPSM)



68P02902W67-A

Functionaldescription

The BPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet+27 V dc power to the following dc outputs:

S +3.3 V ± 1 % at 10 A (full load current)

S +5 V ± 2 % at 10 A (full load current).

S +12 V ± 5 % at 4 A (full load current).

S –12 V ± 5 % at 2 A (full load current).

Internal BPSM circuits monitor the +3.3 V, +5 V, +12 V and –12 V outputs for thefollowing purposes:

S Output voltage regulation.

S Overvoltage protection – provides shutdown if output voltage exceeds 1.1to 1.2 times the rated output.

S Overcurrent protection – maximum output current has the following limits:

– 1.1 to 1.8 times full load rating of +3.3 V output.

– 1.1 to 1.8 times full load rating of +5 V output.

– 1.25 to 2 times full load rating of +12 V and –12 V outputs.

Circuit protection

Additional internal circuitry protects the BPSM:

S Input dc reverse polarity protection, achieved by an input series diode.

S Thermal protection by automatic BPSM shutdown. Normal BPSMoperation resumes after the BPSM temperature reduces to a safe level.

S A 10 A fuse is located near the backplane connector.

LED display

An active (green) LED mounted on the front of the BPSM is lit when all outputvoltages are present and within specified limits. A functional diagram is shown inFigure 7-3.

VOUT (3.3 V)

VOUT (–12 V)

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

GREENLED

VIN (+27 V)

VOUT (+12 V)

VOUT (+5 V)

POWERCONVERTER ANDSYSTEM MONITOR

Figure 7-3 BPSM functional diagram

GSM-208-323 Circuit breaker module (CBM)

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 7–5

Circuit breaker module (CBM)

CBM overview

The CBM provides circuit protection and manual isolation for all parts of thecabinet, except the PSMs. The CBM is located above the digital module shelfand below the PSMs. The honeycomb casing permits cabinet ventilationthrough the module.

The CBM is connected to the backplane, providing isolator switches andoverload protection for the equipment indicated in Figure 7-4.

View of the CBM

Figure 7-4 shows views of the CBM with circuit breaker buttons identified.

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

6 CTUs (0 TO 5)

FRONT VIEW

(12 A)(2 A)

(7 A)


CCBs (0 AND1)(not used)

SURF

FANS

BPSMs (A AND B)(7 A)

HANDLE BAFFLE

Figure 7-4 Views of CBM with circuit breaker buttons identified

GSM-208-323Circuit breaker module (CBM)



68P02902W67-A

Operation of theCBM

Power for each module is supplied via the appropriate circuit breaker switch.Overload of any circuit results in the appropriate front panel circuit breakerbutton tripping to the off (out) position. The button can be pressed to the on (in)position when overload problem has been corrected.

CTUs, BPSMs, SURF and fans can be isolated by pressing and releasing theappropriate button to the off (out) position. Power is restored by pushing theappropriate button to the on (in) position.

NOTE The two buttons marked CCB0 and CCB1 isolate power tocavity combining blocks (CCBs) if used in a standardHorizonmacro indoor installation. CCBs cannot be used inthe 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and both CCB0 andCCB1 should be switched off (out).

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 8

RF modules

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii








GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A








GSM-208-323 RF equipment detail

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–1

RF equipment detail

RF equipmentoverview

This chapter describes the functional operation of radio frequency (RF) modulesused in the cabinet. All descriptions are presented at a block diagram level.

RF modules described

The following equipment is described:

S Compact Transceiver Unit (CTU).

S Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (SURF) module (for receivepath), both single and dual band variants.

S Several types of transmit block (Tx block). Tx blocks are used for variousconfigurations of transmit path, depending on number of antennas, CTUsand functionality, including potential shared receive path.

RF general information and loopback test function

The following additional information is presented in this chapter:

S General definition of transmit and receive functions in this RF equipmentdetail section.

S An RF overview and RF test function description in the next section.

S An explanation of CTU frequency hopping in a section immediately afterthe CTU section.

These descriptions are intended to assist the reader in understanding theinformation on the RF modules.

RFspecifications

All equipment meets or exceeds ETSI regulations. Frequency information islisted in the Specifications part of this manual.

Receive (Rx) RFhardware

Receiver RF hardware consists of the SURF module and optional Tx blockreceive path, and the receive section of the CTU.

The SURF module provides bandpass filtering and low-noise amplification for upto three sectors, with diversity receive antenna signals, together with switchingto CTUs.

GSM-208-323RF equipment detail



68P02902W67-A

CTU Rx role

The CTU provides the following receive functions:

S Receiver tuning (on a timeslot basis) to any receive channel frequency.

S Demodulation and equalization of the receive channel signal.

S Measurement of the received signal strength indication (RSSI) and signalquality.

S Recovery of received data from the demodulated radio channel.

S Channel decoding of the received data and processing of the recoveredsignal. Traffic data is passed on to the MCUF for routeing to the MSC.

S Digital interface to the SURF module, which controls selection by theSURF switch of the receive signals from the appropriate antenna.

S Comparison and processing of an additional receive path from a secondantenna input to support diversity.

Transmit (Tx)RF hardware

Transmit RF hardware consists of Tx blocks in appropriate combinations to meetrequirements of antenna sharing for the transceivers.

CTU Tx role

The CTU provides the following transmit functions:

S Transmit tuning (on a timeslot basis) for generation of any transmitchannel RF frequency.

S Encoding transmit data output.

S Digital modulation of transmit data onto the transmit radio channel signal.

S Final RF power amplification and output power level control of the transmitradio channel RF signal.

S Channel encoding of the data to be transmitted, interleaving signal andtraffic channel data, as defined by ETSI.

Rx/Tx singleantennaduplexing

Duplexers allow a single antenna to be used for both transmit and receiveoperations. Duplexers exist within several of the transmit blocks. Normally,duplexed RF signals are used through one antenna, with a second receiveantenna to provide diversity.

CAUTION If a single antenna (non-diversity) is required, the duplexantenna RF receive cable from the transmit block must beconnected to the RxA path at the SURF. Simply switchingoff diversity at the OMC-R without the correct SURFconfiguration will cause a loss of reception.

GSM-208-323 RF overview and RF test function

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–3

RF overview and RF test function

RF overviewThis section explains the RF functional blocks and additional RF loopback testcapability.

The terminology, functionality and optional capabilities are set out, as a basis forunderstanding more detailed descriptions in RF module sections of this chapter.

RF maincomponentexplanation

The following description should be read in conjunction with Figure 8-1.

The RF equipment consists of three main blocks:

S The CTU.

S The SURF module.

S The Tx block.

CTU

The CTU can operate at 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz or 1900 MHz,depending on the BTS variant ordered. It can receive two inputs, RxA and RxB,from the SURF. These inputs are converted into digital voice/data. The two Rxsignals provide diversity of the Rx function from the MS (uplink).

The CTU also generates a Tx data signal, translated from received digitalvoice/data, which is transmitted by cable to the Tx block for antennatransmission to the MS (downlink).

The third (middle) port provides an RF loopback test signal capability, forautomatic transmission of RF test signals to the SURF.

SURF module

One of six variants of the SURF module can be installed in the Horizonmacroindoor cabinet:

S Single band 850 MHz SURF.


S Dual band 900 MHz SURF.

S Single band 1800 MHz SURF

S Dual band 1800 MHz SURF.


The single band SURF modules accept up to three pairs of antenna inputs, andthe dual band SURF modules accept up to four pairs of antenna inputs. TheSURF switches the inputs to the appropriate CTUs under the control of thedatabase via the MCUF. There are two inputs to each CTU for Rx diversity.

The SURF also contains loopback test circuitry, connecting with a test signalfrom each CTU.

GSM-208-323RF overview and RF test function



68P02902W67-A

Tx block

There are up to three Tx blocks, each block serving two CTUs.

Tx blocks filter the transmit signal for the required Tx band. Tx blocks also usefilters to enable the Rx frequency signal to be passed to the SURF, if oneantenna is used for both Tx and Rx signals.

RF loopbackpurpose

The loopback test function is primarily used to identify faults when the RFsystem has failed. The loopback test function enables a diagnostic capability atthe OMC-R, by creating a test signal to identify if the fault is either:

S Software (that the OMC-R can correct).

S Particular hardware (CTU or SURF).

The result is a reduction in site assessment visits, and avoidance ofunnecessary visits when hardware is functioning correctly.

NOTE The RF loopback test feature available on theHorizonmacro, is not available on previous generations ofequipment.

RF loopbackhardware

The RF loopback test function is essentially a hardware capability built into theCTU and the SURF. Software instructions activate the test hardware, to routetest signals through the RF system.

RF loopbacksoftwareoperation

When provided with suitable software, GSR5 or later, the OMC-R can operatethe loopback test functions, and receive the results of the tests.

GSM-208-323 RF overview and RF test function

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–5

Functionaldiagram of RF

Figure 8-1 shows the basic RF and loopback/VSWR test functions. For clarity,only one CTU and one Tx block is shown, and part of the SURF.

RxA RxB

B

AA B

B

SURF

connected to SURF)

Figure 8-1 RF functional diagram

GSM-208-323RF overview and RF test function



68P02902W67-A

Description ofRF test modes

The following description should be read in conjunction with Figure 8-1.

NOTE The RF test capability described requires software loadGSR5 or later.

The loopback test hardware picks up an attenuated signal by coupled link fromthe normal CTU transmit signal.

The signal is mixed down to the receive band for testing the Rx functionality ofthe SURF and CTU. Power to the loopback circuitry is automatically turned offwhen the radio is in normal operation.

SURF test mode

The loopback signal is injected into the antenna receive path of the SURF bycoupled link. This tests the complete SURF and CTU Rx system path.

Test of CTU Rx circuitry

The loopback signal is injected directly internally into the Rx input of the CTU.This tests the receive portion of the CTU.

VSWR test mode

The test signal, at Rx frequency, is injected into the antenna port throughcoupled link on the SURF. Reflected power is monitored by the receive systemto calculate VSWR. Detection of a high VSWR may indicate the presence of acable or antenna fault.

GSM-208-323 Compact transceiver unit (CTU)

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–7

Compact transceiver unit (CTU)

Overview of theCTU

This section provides the technical description of the compact transceiver unit(CTU).

NOTE The CTU may be an 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz or a1900 MHz transceiver, depending on requirements. Thefunctionality of the CTU is the same for all variants.

The CTU:

S Generates the RF frequencies required to perform the transmit andreceive functions.

S Contains the digital circuits required for eight timeslots of channelequalization, encoding and decoding, and transceiver control logic.

The CTU provides the air interface between a BSS and MSs, with the followingfeatures:

S Capability of diversity reception (input from two antennas) which improvesthe quality reception in the presence of multipath fading and interference.

S Frequency change on a timeslot basis for frequency hopping andequipment sharing.

S Transmit power control.

CTU Tx RF output specification

For Tx RF output, see Technical Description: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor(GSM-208-323) Overview and specifications.

Location and requirements

The CTU shelf is next to the digital module shelf, in the base of the cabinet.

The cabinet can contain six CTUs. A minimum of one CTU must be fitted ineach cabinet.

CTU internalboards

The CTU is a single field replaceable unit (FRU), which contains:

S CTU transceiver (XCVR) board.

S Power amplifier (PA) board.

S Power supply unit.

GSM-208-323Compact transceiver unit (CTU)



68P02902W67-A

Alarm reporting

The CTU status is indicated by LEDs on the front panel, as shown in Figure 8-2and described in Table 8-1. Major sub-systems, such as synthesizers and RFamplifiers, are monitored, with alarm signals as necessary.

Table 8-1 CTU front panel status indicators

Indicator LED When the LED is CTU status

RADIO OFF Module off.STATUS Flashing green Code required or being loaded.

Green Normal operational mode.

Flashing yellow Test mode.

Yellow Radio inhibited.

Red Alarm condition.

Transmit (Tx) OFF Transmitter is off.STATUS Yellow Transmitter is keyed on.

RADIOSTATUS AND

TRANSMIT(Tx) STATUS

Both LEDs flashingrapidly

Non-volatile memory boot codeupgrade.

Do not remove power or reset(see CAUTION below).

CAUTION When both LEDs are flashing, the boot code isdownloading into non-volatile memory for softwareupgrade. Do not remove power or reset the cabinet untildownloading has been completed, otherwise thenon-volatile memory will be corrupted.If the boot code is corrupted, contact the MotorolaCustomer Network Resolution Centre, requesting the bootcode restoration procedure and the appropriate boot codefile.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–9

View of the CTU

Figure 8-2 shows the CTU with main features identified.

Tx OUTCONNECTOR

Tx STATUS LED

HANDLE

M4 MODULE ATTACHMENTSCREW


TTY INTERFACECONTROL

PROCESSOR

TEST INTERFACE

RADIO STATUS LED

RECESSED MANUAL RESET BUTTON(IF FITTED)

RxA

RxB

LOOPBACKTEST PORT (L)

BACKPLANE POWER ANDSIGNAL CONNECTOR

Figure 8-2 View of CTU showing main external features




68P02902W67-A

CTU connectorsand reset

The TTY RS-232 serial port has three serial links onto the 9-way connector:

S Radio subsystem (RSS).

S Equalizer and control processor (EQCP).

S Channel coder control processor (CCCP).

A test interface port on the CTU front panel provides access to critical testpoints for factory alignment and maintenance.

Pressing the reset button (if fitted) causes a processor hard reset, which initiatesa normal power-up sequence. If a reset button is not fitted, a reset is achievedby switching power off and on again using the appropriate CBM button.

Figure 8-3 shows the front panel and Table 8-2 shows connector functions.

Tx OUT CONNECTOR

TTY INTERFACE

TEST INTERFACE

Tx STATUS LED

RADIO STATUS LED


Figure 8-3 CTU front panel

Table 8-2 CTU front panel connectors

Front panel legend Function Connection to

Tx OUT Transmitter RF output Tx Block

TTY INTERFACE Test access to processor Three RS-232s

TEST INTERFACE Factory use Test equipment


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–11

CTUinput/outputdiagram

Figure 8-4 shows a block diagram for the operation of the CTU.

RF TxOUTPUT

POWERAMPLIFIER

BOARD

Rx

Rx SYNTH SEL

LOCK ALARMS

Tx SYNTH SEL

13 MHz REF IN SYNTHESIZER

2.048 Mbit/s DATA INPUTAND 2.048 MHz CLOCK INPUT

2.048 Mbit/s DATA OUTPUTAND 2.048 MHz CLOCK OUTPUT

Tx CLK

Tx SYNC

Tx DATA (MODULATOR)

Tx KEY

PWR CONTROL DATA

I2 DATA

Q2 DATA

AGC DATA

CHANNEL A RECEIVE RF IN

I1 DATA

Q1 DATA

Tx

(FROM SURF)

POWER SUPPLY UNITFOR ALL BOARDS IN

CTU

DIGITALCONTROL AND

SIGNALPROCESSING

XCVR BOARD

SYNTH DATA

CHANNEL B RECEIVE RF IN

27 V

PSU ALARMS

CCB DATA

Tx ALARMS

Rx ALARMS

LOOPBACK RECEIVERF OUT (TO SURF)

RFLOOPBACK

RSSI

(MANCHESTER ENCODED DATA FROM MCUF)

(MANCHESTER ENCODED DATA TO MCUF)

TEMPERATUREAND PA

DETECTOR(ANALOGUE

SIGNAL)

Tx PA DETECTOR AND TEMPERATUREREADING (DIGITAL SIGNAL)

Tx RAMP CONTROL

Figure 8-4 CTU block diagram




68P02902W67-A

CTU Txconnector

The CTU Tx connector is a short SMA to SMA link to the base of theappropriate Tx block or feedthrough plate.

NOTE The Tx cable has a 90° SMA connector at one end, and astraight SMA connector at the other end. The 90° end isdesigned for connection to the Tx port of a CTU.

CTU Rxfunction

The receiver part of the CTU accepts two amplified and filtered receive antennasignals from the SURF module. These two signals are applied to inputs (branchA and branch B) of the CTU transceiver board. Figure 8-5 shows a CTU receiverfunctional diagram for one branch.

The input from the SURF module is filtered, amplified and down converted toensure the signal level and frequency range are correct for the next stage.

RSSI data (applicable only to GPRS and RACH bursts) is used for automaticgain control (AGC) to ensure signal strength is correct for the intermediatefrequency (IF) stage.

AGC DATA

ADC I DATA

Q DATA

Rx INPUT

ADC

RSSI

IF

Figure 8-5 CTU receiver functional diagram for one branch

The primary function of the IF is to filter and amplify the incoming signal.

The path is demodulated into quadrature signals and filtered by basebandanalogue filters. These signals are then digitized (I1/I2 data and Q1/Q2 data)and made available to the equalizer for the purposes of receive synchronizationand data recovery.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–13

CTU Tx function

IQ modulator

IQ modulator data for eight timeslot channels is applied to the modulator statemachine. This data is encoded, serial-to-parallel converted and split intoquadrature components. The quadrature components are D/A converted andapplied to a quadrature modulator to create a Gaussian minimum shift keyed(GMSK) carrier at an intermediate frequency (IF).

Figure 8-6 shows a functional diagram of the IQ modulator.

IQMODULATOR

DATA

MODULATORSTATE

MACHINE

AMPLIFIERDAC

DAC

Figure 8-6 IQ modulator functional diagram

IF and exciter stages

The low level modulated carrier is applied to a combination of analogue anddigital attenuators for RF power control. The power control data comes from thedigital sections of the XCVR. The output of the power control elements is furtheramplified by an exciter chain to drive the power amplifier.

The GMSK modulated IF is filtered and applied to the input of a controlled gainamplifier for transmitter pulse sloping (ramped). The ramped signal is filteredand then mixed with the main transmitter injection and is upconverted to thefinal transmit channel frequency.

Figure 8-7 shows a functional diagram of the IF and exciter stages.

DISTRIBUTED GAIN ANDPOWER CONTROL

EXCITERMIXER

FILTER RAMPING FILTER

Figure 8-7 IF and exciter functional diagram




68P02902W67-A

Power amplifier board

Figure 8-8 shows a functional diagram of the power amplifier (PA). The PAboard provides amplification and a forward power detector. The isolator protectsthe PA board amplifiers. The detected output is used to adjust the final CTU RFpower output level by the digital sections of the XCVR.

The PA board consists of six functional blocks:

S RF power amplifier.

S RF forward power directional coupler.

S RF forward power detector.

S Temperature sensor.

S CCB control.

S RF loopback circuit.

The isolator performs two functions:

S Isolates multiple transmitters to reduce intermodulation distortion.

S Protects the RF power amplifier from possible damage resulting from loadmismatches.

LOAD

RF OUTPUT

ISOLATOR

RF POWERAMPLIFIERS

TEMPERATURESENSOR CCB

DATAINJECT

LOOPBACKRF FORWARDPOWER

DETECTOR

DIRECTIONALCOUPLER

RF LOOPBACKDIRECTIONAL

COUPLER

PA BOARD

Figure 8-8 Power amplifier board functional diagram


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–15

CTU digitalprocessing andcontrolfunctions

The CTU digital processing and control function provides control and RFprocessing for that CTU. These functions include:

S 2.048 Mbit/s links which interface with up to two MCUFs for redundancy.

S A software processing platform for the radio sub system (RSS)

S A digital signal processor (DSP) for radio control and channel equalization(EQCP).

S A DSP for channel coding, data routeing, and baseband hopping (CCCP).

S Control of RF systems: diversity receiver, transmitter, and power amplifier.

S Alarm monitoring of internal devices and external cabinet elements.

S Control of external modules including CCBs, and SURF.

S Maintenance ports for processor TTY, test point sub system, and CTU testconnections.

Figure 8-9 shows a CTU digital functional diagram.

TDMINTERFACE CCCP DSP

RSSPROCESSING EQCP DSP

CTU INTERFACEFUNCTION

Rx INTERFACETx INTERFACESYNTHESIZER INTERFACEPA INTERFACE

TPSTRAU DATA

REDUNDANT2.048 Mb LINK

TTY TO ALLPROCESSORS

HDLC LINK PCIBACKBONE

Figure 8-9 CTU digital functional diagram

2 Mbit/s TDM LinksThe CTU interfaces to the redundant MCUF are by 2.048 Mbit/s links on thebackplane (or FMUX modules in extension cabinets). These links areManchester encoded, thus providing both clock and data in a single connection.The recovered clock provides a frequency reference for the CTU. The Rx andTx circuitry supports FMUX fibre optic lengths of up to 1 km.

The TDM links are formatted into 32 x 64 kbit/s timeslots to provide:

S Downlink and uplink TRAU speech data.

S Downlink baseband hopping data to be routed to/from other CTUs.

S Cell site air interface synchronization.

S HDLC channel for control information between RSS and MCUF.

S Baseband routeing information to indicate source of downlink basebandhopping data.




68P02902W67-A

RSS processor

The RSS processor function communicates with:

S The MCUF via dedicated 64 kbit/s timeslots in the TDM link.

S The rest of the digital control functions by the peripheral communicationsinterface (PCI) bus.

S A dual port interface for communication with the CCCP.

A TTY interface is also provided for user support.

The RSS processor memory includes flash EPROM and 8 Mbytes of DRAM.Flash EPROM is used for code storage.

EQCP processor

The EQCP processor handles all radio control functions and the channelequalizer function. The EQCP controls the Rx and Tx function via the CTUcontrol function on a per timeslot basis. These EQCP functions include:

S Alarm management.

S Downlink burst building and modulator control.

S Transmitter power control.

S Synthesizer channel control.

S RF frequency hopping.

S Receiver front end and remote tune combiner control.

S Uplink synchronization and equalization.

S Diversity receiver control.

S Receiver automatic gain control (AGC).

S Receive signal strength (RXLEV) calculation.

S Timing advance calculation.

S Support of front panel indicators.

The EQCP communicates with the rest of the digital control functions via thecommon PCI bus interface. A TTY interface is provided for radio levelcalibration, system monitoring, and CTU level test.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–17

CCCP processor

The CCCP processor handles all the GSM specified layer 1 channel encodingand decoding functions for speech and control data associated with the airinterface. In addition, it manages the routeing of TRAU frames and basebandhopping (BBH) data, via the TDM interface, to and from the MCUF. The CCCPfunctions include:

S Uplink channel decoding.

S Downlink channel encoding.

S GSM specified encryption algorithms.

S Baseband frequency hopping (not supported in GSM850 or PCS1900BTS variants).

S TRAU frame collection and synchronization.

S Alarms management.

The CCCP communicates with the rest of the digital control functions via thecommon PCI bus interface. A dual port RAM (DPR) is also used in the downlinkdirection for communications from RSS. In addition to the TDM function, a seriallink is provided to support uplink and downlink TRAU data.

CTU interface function

The CTU interface function provides the air interface timing and radio controlcircuitry required for Rx (uplink) and Tx (downlink) control functions. A commonPCI bus allows all the processing elements including the RSS processor, EQCP,and CCCP to communicate with the various CTU functions. The CTU interfaceincludes:

S Master GSM air interface timing function.

S Independent Rx gain control interface for each diversity receiver branch.

S Baseband Rx data interface for each diversity receiver branch.

S Receiver front end and CCB control.

S Tx data interface including GMSK modulator which provides basebanddata to the transmitter.

S Tx and power amplifier power control interface.

S Rx and Tx frequency synthesizer control which supports RF frequencyhopping.

S CTU and cabinet alarm data collection.

S Alarms sampling and multiplexing.




68P02902W67-A

CTUuplink/downlink

Downlink traffic data flow

Downlink TRAU data from the MCUF is received by the TDM function thenrouted to the CCCP function where it is encoded (cyclic, block, andconvolutional), interleaved, and encrypted to GSM recommendations. Signallingmessages are also received from the RSS processor and encoded. These trafficand control messages are built into air interface frames and then routed back tothe MCUF via the TDM function for baseband hopping. The CCCP calculates aBBH routeing word, which informs the MCUF of the radio link to be the source ofits post hopped data. The post hopped data is then once again sent back downto the appropriate CTU where it is received by the TDM function and passed tothe EQCP function. The EQCP inserts midamble and guard bits to the data bitsand forwards the data on to the modulator for transmission. The EQCP alsoprograms the CTU for the correct RF channel and transmit power level for thistransmitted burst.

Uplink traffic data flow

Baseband uplink traffic and control data messages are received by the CTUinterface function and sent to the EQCP where they are equalized. The EQCPalso calculates timing advance and RXLEV information, which is forwarded tothe RSS process. The recovered data bits are forwarded into the CCCPprocess, where it is de-interleaved, decoded, and decrypted into TRAU frames.Control messages are passed to the RSS function, while TRAU frames are sentto the MCUF via the TDM interface.

GSM-208-323 CTU frequency hopping

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–19

CTU frequency hopping

Overview ofCTU frequencyhopping

The CTU supports two types of frequency hopping, Synthesizer FrequencyHopping (SFH) and Baseband Frequency Hopping (BBH). This section providesan explanation of both types. In both cases, the MS switches channels afterevery transmit/receive (Tx/Rx) burst pair. The difference between SFH and BBHis in the method by which channel switching is achieved at the BTS.

SynthesizerFrequencyHopping (SFH)

SFH uses the frequency agility of the CTU to change Tx/Rx frequency on anytimeslot (TS), without affecting other timeslots.

SFH can only be used with wideband combining.

With SFH, each TS is allocated a number of frequencies (max 64) over which toperform the hopping. When determining the hardware requirement for CTUsusing SFH the following rules apply:

S A minimum of two CTUs are required per cell due to BCCH requirements.Timeslot 0 of CTU 0 is used for the BCCH carrier as shown in Figure 8-10.CTU 0 cannot use SFH. Only CTU 1 and additional CTUs can use SFH.

S Hopping through the BCCH carrier (using the BCCH carrier frequency asone of the SFH frequencies) is permitted except for timeslot 0. However,the corresponding timeslot for the BCCH CTU will be switched off for thisperiod.

01234567

1234567

CTU 0(BCCH)

CTU 1(USED FOR SFH)

0 (BCCH)

Figure 8-10 Minimum SFH requirement

GSM-208-323CTU frequency hopping



68P02902W67-A

SFH examplenot throughBCCH

CTU 0

In this example of SFH, CTU 0 provides the BCCH and cannot frequency hop.CTU 0 has to transmit at maximum cell site power to meet the BCCHrequirement. Timeslots are used as shown below:

S TS 0 = Combined BCCH TS (BCCH/CCCH/DCCH). Transmitted atmaximum cell site power.

S TS 1-7 = Traffic channels, all non-hopping. All traffic channels transmit atmaximum cell site power.

CTU 1 and additional CTUs

CTU 1 and any additional CTUs provide SFH traffic channels as shown below:

S TS 0-7 = Frequency hopping traffic channels. The frequency allocated tothe BCCH of CTU 0 cannot be used for frequency hopping purposes.

SFH examplehoppingthrough BCCHcarrier

CTU 0

In this example of SFH, CTU 0 provides the BCCH and cannot frequency hop.CTU 0 has to transmit at maximum cell site power to meet the BCCHrequirement. Timeslots are used as shown below:

S TS 0 = Combined BCCH timeslot (BCCH/CCCH/DCCH). Transmitted atmaximum cell site power.

S TS 1-7 = Unused timeslots transmitting dummy bursts for BCCH. Allchannels transmit at maximum cell site power.

CTU 1 and additional CTUs

CTU 1 and any additional CTUs provide SFH traffic channels as shown below:

S TS 0 = Frequency hopping traffic channel, but prevented from usingBCCH frequency.

S TS 1-7 =Frequency hopping traffic channels, using all availablefrequencies, including BCCH.

When the SFH selects the BCCH frequency, the CTU transmits at maximum cellsite power and the corresponding TS on CTU 0 is switched off for this period.

GSM-208-323 CTU frequency hopping

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–21

Basebandfrequencyhopping (BBH)

BBH requires all eight timeslots of the CTU Tx (downlink) at the same frequency.In the Rx (uplink) direction, the frequency agility of the CTU is used to changetimeslot frequencies on a timeslot basis. The BCCH frequency is alwaystransmitted at maximum cell site power.

BBH can use either Tx blocks or CCB Tx combining equipment. The mainreason for using BBH instead of SFH is to enable frequency hopping whenusing CCBs (not be used in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor), because themechanical tuning of CCBs is too slow for SFH.

The number of CTUs required to support BBH is the same as the number offrequencies used.

NOTE BBH is not supported on GSM850 or PCS1900 BTSs.

BBH exampleIn Figure 8-11 MSs A, B and C are using TS 5 of CTUs 0, 1 and 2 respectively.

01234567

01234567

CTU 0 (BCCH)ARFCH=10

01234567

A B C

CTU 1ARFCH=20

CTU 2ARFCH=30

CTU 0AT MAXPOWER

Figure 8-11 Diagram of BBH example using three CTUs

If the MSs are using cyclic hopping across ARFCNs 10, 20, 30 (an exampleusing EGSM900), each MS must transmit a burst of information each TDMAframe (4.615 ms) on a different frequency. The data for the burst is received byeach CTU in turn (ARFCN 10, 20, 30), as shown in Table 8-3.

Table 8-3 BBH sequence example (EGSM900)

Burst Sequence Steps CTU 0Tx Rx

CTU 1Tx Rx

CTU 2Tx Rx

1 A10 A10 B20 B20 C30 C30

2 C10 A20 A20 B30 B30 C10

3 B10 A30 C20 B10 A30 C20

4 (same as 1) A10 A10 B20 B20 C30 C30

5 (same as 2) C10 A20 A20 B30 B30 C10

6 (same as 3) B10 A30 C20 B10 A30 C20

In the uplink direction the controlling CTU (for example CTU 0 for MS A inFigure 8-11) tunes TS 5 in accordance with the frequency expected from the MSfor that particular burst.

GSM-208-323CTU frequency hopping



68P02902W67-A

Transmit

The transmit process is described by the following, as shown in Figure 8-12:

1. Traffic data from the network is passed through the NIU to the MCUF.Within the MCUF an ASIC switches the data to CTU 0 (the dedicated CTUfor this particular MS call example).

2. The CTU, having processed the data (channel coding, interleaving,encryption and routeing information) then passes the data back to theASIC.

3. The ASIC follows the BBH routeing information to direct the data to thenext Tx CTU in the sequence of Table 8-3.

NOTE BBH differs from normal and SFH CTU Tx procedures, inthat the data is directed to CTUs in a cyclic sequence atstage 3. Without BBH, stage 3 always routes data to theoriginal CTU.

NIU

3

CTU 2

MCUF

ASIC

CTU 1 CTU 0

3

3

1

2

Tx CYCLESTHROUGH CTU

SEQUENCE

Figure 8-12 Schematic of Base Band Hopping (BBH) example

Receive

Data from the MS is received by one CTU allocated to that MS (in this caseCTU 0). The CTU will synthesize hop to the Rx signal. This ensures that thehandover and equalizers within only one CTU will be connected to a particularMS.

GSM-208-323 SURF module

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–23

SURF module

SURF moduleoverview

The sectorized universal receiver front end (SURF) module is located in avertical slot at the rear of the cabinet top panel. Three connectors on theunderside of the module connect to the SURF harness which providesconnectivity to up to six compact transceiver units (CTUs). Antenna connectionsare located on the top of the unit.

There are six types of SURF module available for the Horizonmacro indoor BTS,depending on the frequency variant:

S 850 (MHz) single band SURF.


S 900 (MHz) dual band SURF.


S 1800 (MHz) dual band SURF.


The single band SURFs contains three amplifier sections for connection to threepairs of receive antenna inputs providing reception at the appropriate frequency.

The 900 dual band SURF contains three amplifier sections for connection tothree pairs of antennas providing 900 MHz reception and, being dual band, afurther amplifier section for connection to a pair of 1800 MHz receive antennas.

The 1800 dual band SURF similarly contains three amplifier sections forconnection to three pairs of antennas providing 1800 MHz reception and afurther amplifier section for connection to a pair of 900 MHz receive antennas.

Each amplifier section provides two receive outputs which may be directed toany of the six CTUs, by the switch section. There are three connections to eachCTU; RxA, RxB and loopback test (L).

The two receive outputs from amplifier 0 are split and may be used asextensions to other cabinets if required. These act as extended antennaconnections from antenna 0. The extension cables are connected to thereceive antenna connection ports on the SURF of the extension cabinet (whichis able to respond to each amplified signal as if it were a normal antenna input).

NOTE The 900 MHz and 1800 MHz single and dual band SURFsmay vary slightly in appearance, depending on when theBTS was manufactured.Later single band SURFs have blanked out holes in thepositions where the second frequency N-type connectorsare fitted in dual band variants (see Figure 8-13).Later dual band SURFs have slightly different labelnumbering for the second frequency connectors. Thesewere originally numbered 0A and 0B, but are nownumbered 1A and 1B respectively. This later numberingconvention is used throughout the remainder of thismanual.

GSM-208-323SURF module



68P02902W67-A

Single bandSURF moduleview

Figure 8-13 shows a later type single band SURF module, with featuresidentified. An earlier type single band SURF module is shown in Figure 8-14.

RX-Pn1B

RX-Pn2B

GUIDES FORINSERTION

SIX N-TYPE RECEIVE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS(2 PER DLNB EQUIVALENT)

EXTENSION PORTSTO OTHERCABINETS

3 CONNECTORS ONUNDERSIDE TO SURF

HARNESS

HANDLE FORMODULEREMOVAL

RX-Pn0A

RX-Pn1ARX-Pn

2A

RX-Pn0B

SURFMODULE

M6 MODULEATTACHMENT

SCREWS

Figure 8-13 Single band SURF module (later type) with features identified

NOTE Where RX-Pn appears in Figure 8-13, the n may be 850,900, 1800 or 1900, depending on the frequency of theSURF module.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–25

RXn1B

RXn2B

GUIDE RAIL FORINSERTION


EXTENSION PORTS TOOTHER CABINETS

3 CONNECTORS ON UNDERSIDETO SURF HARNESS

HANDLE FORMODULEREMOVALM6 MODULE

ATTACHMENTSCREWS

RXn0A

RXn1A

RXn2A

RXn0B

SURFMODULE

Figure 8-14 Single band SURF module (earlier type) with features identified




68P02902W67-A

Single bandSURF functionaldescription

The single band SURF provides front end filtering, amplification, and matrixcontrol of the RF receive signal between the antenna and the CTU

The single band SURF functional sections (Figure 8-15) consist of loopback,filtering, amplification, splitting, digital processing and power selection.

Each section is duplicated for the second diversity path except for the digitaland dc power section which is shared by the two diversity paths. There arethree antenna pair inputs (ANT 0, ANT 1 and ANT 2) for each of the twodiversity branches (Branch A and Branch B). There are six outputs to the CTUfor each of the two diversity branches as well as one input from the CTU for theloopback (LPBK) signal. There is also an output for an expansion cabinet forANT 0 on each branch.

The software database must be configured at the OMC-R to accept CTUs of thesame frequency as the single band SURF module in the cabinet.

The digital section swich, under the control of the database (signalled throughthe MCUF and CTUs), routes the six amplifier outputs to the appropriate CTUs.The digital and power supply section is also responsible for loopback switchcontrol, manual overrides, alarms and dc voltages.

The RF loopback test function is described in RF overview and RF testfunction in this chapter.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–27

Single bandSURF functionaldiagram

Figure 8-15 shows a functional diagram of the single band SURF module.

ANTENNACONNECTIONS

SURF

RF LOOPBACKSPLITTER

RF LOOPBACKCOMBINER

TO NEXTCABINETANTENNA

CONNECTIONS

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

SURF HARNESS

RxBRxA RxA RxA RxA RxA RxA RxBRxBRxB RxB RxB

Rx1/Rx2/LOOPBACK CONNECTIONS TOSIX CTUs VIA SURF HARNESS

AMPLIFIER 2

SWITCH

AMPLIFIER 1 AMPLIFIER 0

ANT 0ANT 1ANT 2

FILTER ANDFILTER ANDFILTER AND

DIGITAL SECTION AND POWER SUPPLYLOOPBACK

CONTROL

DC

POWER

BR ABR BBR ABR BBR ABR B

Figure 8-15 Functional diagram of the single band SURF module




68P02902W67-A

Dual bandSURF moduleview

Figure 8-16 shows a later type dual band SURF module with features identified.Both the 900 and 1800 variants are similar in appearance.

DUAL BANDSURF

EIGHT N-TYPE RECEIVE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS(2 PER DLNB EQUIVALENT)

SECONDFREQUENCY RX-S 1B

MAIN FREQUENCY

RX-P 1BRX-P 2B

RX-P 0B

SECONDFREQUENCY RX-S 1A

RX-P 0A

RX-P 1A

RX-P 2AMAIN FREQUENCY

GUIDES FORINSERTION


M6 MODULEATTACHMENT

SCREWS


HARNESS

EXTENSIONPORTS TO OTHER

CABINETS

Figure 8-16 Later type dual band SURF module with features identified

NOTE Second frequency labelling on earlier types of dual bandSURF differs slightly from that shown in Figure 8-16.1A and 1B are labelled 0A and 0B on earlier SURFs.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–29

Dual bandSURF functionaldescription

The dual band SURF modules provide front end filtering, amplification, andmatrix control of the RF receive signal between the antenna and the CTU. Thedual band SURFs each have three antenna pair connections providingreception on the primary frequency, and one antenna pair providing receptionon the secondary frequency. The two types of dual band (DB) SURF enable 900CTUs to be mixed with 1800 CTUs in any combination, up to the maximum totalof six CTUs per cabinet.

The dual band SURF functional sections (Figure 8-17) consist of loopback,filtering, amplification, splitting, digital processing and power selection.

Each section is duplicated for the second diversity path, except for the digitaland dc power section, which is shared by the two diversity paths. There are fourantenna pair inputs (ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2 and ANT DB) for each of the twodiversity branches (branch A and branch B). There are six outputs to the CTUfor each of the two diversity branches, as well as one input from the CTU for theloopback (LPBK) signal. There is also an output for an expansion cabinet forANT 0 on each branch.

The software database has to be configured at the OMC-R to accept 1800CTUs and 900 CTUs in the appropriate cabinet locations.

Digital codes are transmitted from the 900 CTUs and 1800 CTUs to the digitalsection. The digital codes are different, so that 900 or 1800 CTUs can berecognized and appropriate switching can be made to the required antenna fortransmission and reception.

The digital and power supply section is also responsible for loopback switchcontrol, manual overrides, alarms and dc voltages.

The RF loopback test function is described in RF overview and RF testfunction in this chapter.




68P02902W67-A

ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

RF LOOPBACKSPLITTER

RF LOOPBACKCOMBINER

TO NEXTCABINETANTENNA

CONNECTIONS

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇSURF HARNESS

RxBRxA RxA RxA RxA RxA RxA RxBRxBRxB RxB RxB

Rx1/Rx2/LOOPBACK CONNECTIONS TOSIX CTUs VIA SURF HARNESS

AMPLIFIER 2

SWITCH

AMPLIFIER 1 AMPLIFIER 0

ANT 0ANT 1ANT 2

FILTER ANDFILTER ANDFILTER AND

DIGITAL SECTION AND POWER SUPPLY

LOOPBACK

CONTROL

FILTER AND

AMPLIFIER 3

ANT DB

PRIMARYFREQUENCY

DC

POWER

BR ABR BBR ABR BBR ABR BBR ABR B

SURF

PRIMARYFREQUENCY

PRIMARYFREQUENCY

SECONDARYFREQUENCY

Figure 8-17 Functional diagram of the dual band SURF module

GSM-208-323 Tx blocks overview

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–31

Tx blocks overview

Introduction toTx blocks

Transmit (Tx) blocks are located in three positions in the basket above theCTUs. There are four types of transmit (Tx) blocks, three of which are availableas 850, 900, 1800 or 1900 variants, and one dual band variant (for use with900 MHz or 1800 MHz BTSs only).

CAUTION Unused Tx block locations must be covered with ablanking plate for correct airflow and EMI shielding.

S TDF (850, 900, 1800 or 1900) = Twin duplexed filter.

S Dual band TDF (900/1800) = Dual band twin duplexed filter.

S DCF (850, 900, 1800 or 1900) = Duplexed combining bandpass filter.

S DDF (850, 900, 1800 or 1900) = Dual-stage duplexed combining filter.

These Tx blocks are cooled by airflow from beneath. The DDF has fins, whereasthe TDF, dual band TDF and DCF do not.

Three types of plate can be located in the basket:

S Blanking plate. This ensures proper airflow and EMI shielding for anunused basket Tx block location.

S Feedthrough plate. This converts two SMA connectors to two N-typeconnectors, used for connecting Tx cables to DDFs.

S Hybrid combining unit (HCU). This combines two SMA connectors toone N-type, enabling two additional CTUs to be connected to a DDF.

Screw retentionin Tx blocklocations

The plates are attached to the base of the top panel basket using six M4screws.

Tx blocks are attached to the top surface of the top panel using two M6 screws.

It is important to ensure that all unused M6 Tx block screw locations have ascrew in place and tightened to the correct torque. This is to ensure maximumquality of EMC and general containment.

GSM-208-323Tx blocks overview



68P02902W67-A

View of basketfor Tx blocks

Figure 8-18 shows the top panel and basket which holds the Tx blocks.

ig.235.rh

SLOT FOR SURF MODULE

LOCATION HOLEFOR INTERFACE

PANEL

VENTILATION PANEL(LOCATED ABOVE PSMs)

BASKET TO HOLDTHREE Tx BLOCKS

HOLE FOR ONE Tx BLOCKCTU CONNECTIONS CABLE HOLE FOR FIBRE

OPTIC EXTENSION CABLES

Figure 8-18 View of top panel showing Tx block basket

Transmit blockconnectors

The transmit block connectors are of the following types:

S SMA connectors for cables to transceivers.

S 7/16 connectors to antennas.

S N-type connectors used for cables from SURF modules and also for HCUand feedthrough connections.

The SMA connectors are underneath the Tx block (for ease of connection to theCTUs), and the other connectors are on top, as shown in Figure 8-19.

NOTE All unused SMA inputs to DCF, DDF and HCU modulesmust be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.

GSM-208-323 Tx blocks overview

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–33

View of Tx blockconnectors

Figure 8-19 shows a typical Tx block with connector locations.

SMA Tx CONNECTORSFROM CTUs

SIDE VIEW

ISOMETRIC VIEW

7/16 CONNECTOR TOANTENNA

N-TYPE CONNECTORTO SURF

HOLE FOR TOPPANEL BASKETATTACHMENT

7/16 CONNECTOR TOANTENNA

N-TYPE CONNECTORTO SURF

SMA Tx CONNECTORSFROM CTUs

Figure 8-19 Typical Tx block

GSM-208-323Blanking plate



68P02902W67-A

Blanking plate

Purpose ofblanking plate

The blanking plate is fitted in locations where a Tx block is not required. Theblanking plate ensures correct air flow through the cabinet.

The plate is attached to the base of the top panel basket using six M4 screws.

NOTE It is important to ensure that all unused Tx block screwlocations have a screw in place and tightened to thecorrect torque. This is to ensure maximum quality of EMCand general containment.

View ofblanking plate

Figure 8-20 shows a view of the blanking plate.

M4 HOLES FORATTACHMENT

Figure 8-20 View of the blanking plate

GSM-208-323 Feedthrough plate

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–35

Feedthrough plate

Purpose offeedthroughplate

The feedthrough plate converts the normal SMA connector from the CTU to anN-type connector. Each feedthrough plate has a pair of these converters, onefor each of two CTUs. The top N-type connectors are used to connect with the(optional) third Tx port on the top of a DDF Tx block.

The plate is attached to the base of the top panel basket using six M4 screws.

View offeedthroughplate

Figure 8-21 shows a top view of a feedthrough plate.

N-TYPECONNECTORS FOR

DDF USE

SMA CONNECTORS BENEATHFROM CTUs


Figure 8-21 View of the feedthrough plate

Feedthroughplateconnectors

Each feedthrough plate connects to:

S The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors.

S The Tx inputs of DDFs, using N-type connectors.

GSM-208-323HCU plate



68P02902W67-A

HCU plate

HCU overview

The hybrid combining unit (HCU) combines two CTU Tx signals.

There are six holes for attachment to the bottom of the Tx block basket.

HCU view

Figure 8-22 shows the HCU plate with connectors identified:

N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO DDF

SMA TRANSMIT CONNECTORSBENEATH HCU MODULE FROM CTUs


Figure 8-22 HCU plate view showing connectors

HCU functionaldiagram

Figure 8-23 shows a functional diagram of the HCU.

LOAD

INPUT TO DDF

SMACONNECTORSTx Tx

3 dB TYPICALLOSS ACROSS

COMBINER

SECOND CTUFIRST CTU

N-TYPECONNECTOR

HCU

Figure 8-23 HCU functional diagram

GSM-208-323 HCU plate

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–37

HCUconnectors

Each HCU connects to:

S The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors.

S The Tx input of a DDF, using an N-type connector.

NOTE All unused SMA inputs to HCU modules must be fittedwith 50 ohm load terminations.

GSM-208-323TDF



68P02902W67-A

TDF

Overview ofTDF

The purpose of the twin duplexed filter (TDF) Tx block is to enable eachantenna to serve one CTU for both Tx and Rx.

The TDF has two identical sections, each providing a single path from a CTU toa separate antenna. There is no combining in the TDF.

The TDF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached to the topsurface of the top panel using two M6 screws.

TDF view

Figure 8-24 shows the TDF Tx block with connectors identified:

HOLES FOR TOP PANELBASKET ATTACHMENT

7/16 CONNECTORSTO ANTENNAS

TWO SMA TxCONNECTORS BENEATH

TDF (FROM CTU)

N-TYPECONNECTORS

TO SURF

Figure 8-24 View of TDF Tx block with connectors identified

GSM-208-323 TDF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–39

TDF functionaldiagram

Figure 8-25 shows a functional diagram of the TDF.

Rx BANDPASSFILTER

Rx TO SURF

N-TYPECONNECTOR

Rx FROMANTENNA

Tx BANDPASSFILTER

Rx BANDPASSFILTER

N-TYPECONNECTOR

Rx FROMANTENNA

Tx BANDPASSFILTER

Rx TO SURF

Tx TOANTENNA

Tx TOANTENNA

TDF

FIRST CTU SECOND CTU

Tx TxSMA

CONNECTORS

7/16CONNECTOR

7/16CONNECTOR


TDF

Figure 8-25 TDF functional diagram

TDF connectors

Each TDF connects to:

S The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors. The two connectorsare underneath the TDF.

S Two antennas, each for both Rx and Tx, using 7/16 connectors. Theseconnectors are on top of the TDF.

S The SURF, using two N-type connectors. These connectors are on top ofthe TDF.

GSM-208-323Dual band TDF



68P02902W67-A

Dual band TDF

Overview ofdual band TDF

The purpose of the dual band twin duplexed filter (dual band TDF) Tx block is toenable one 900 MHz antenna to serve one EGSM900 CTU for both Tx and Rx,and an 1800 MHz antenna to serve one DCS1800 CTU for both Tx and Rx.

NOTE The dual band TDF for the GSM850 and PCS1900 BTSvariants is not currently available.

The dual band TDF is essentially a TDF with one section providing a path for900 MHz signals and another section providing a path for 1800 MHz signals.There is no combining in the dual band TDF.

The dual band TDF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached tothe top surface of the top panel using two M6 screws.

Dual band TDFview

Figure 8-26 shows the dual band TDF Tx block with connectors identified.

7/16 CONNECTOR TO1800 MHz ANTENNA

(ANT. DCS 1800)

SMA Tx CONNECTORBENEATH DUAL BAND TDF

(FROM 1800 CTU)

N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO1800 MHz SURF CONNECTION

N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO900 MHz SURF CONNECTION

7/16 CONNECTOR TO900 MHz ANTENNA(ANT. EGSM 900)

SMA Tx CONNECTORBENEATH DUAL BAND TDF

(FROM 900 CTU)

Figure 8-26 View of dual band TDF Tx block with connectors identified

GSM-208-323 Dual band TDF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–41

Dual band TDFfunctionaldiagram

Figure 8-27 shows a functional diagram of the dual band TDF.

Rx BANDPASSFILTER

Rx TO 900SURF

N-TYPECONNECTOR

Rx FROM900

ANTENNA

Tx BANDPASSFILTER

Rx BANDPASSFILTER

N-TYPECONNECTOR

Rx FROM1800

ANTENNA

Tx BANDPASSFILTER

Rx TO 1800SURF

Tx TO 900ANTENNA

Tx TO 1800ANTENNA

DualbandTDF

900 CTU 1800 CTU

Tx TxSMA

CONNECTORS

7/16CONNECTOR

7/16CONNECTOR


DUAL BANDTDF

Figure 8-27 Dual band TDF functional diagram

Dual band TDFconnectors

Each dual band TDF connects to:

S The Tx output of one 900 CTU and one 1800 CTU, using SMAconnectors. The two connectors are underneath the dual band TDF.

S One 900 MHz antenna and one 1800 MHz antenna. Each antenna is usedfor both Rx and Tx, and each is connected to the dual band TDF using7/16 connectors. These connectors are on top of the dual band TDF.

S A SURF module with dual band capability. Two N-type connectors, locatedon top of the dual band TDF, connect one receive path to the SURF’s900 MHz input and one receive path to the SURF’s 1800 MHz input.

GSM-208-323DCF



68P02902W67-A

DCF

DCF overview

The purpose of the duplexed combining bandpass filter (DCF) Tx block is toenable each antenna to serve two CTUs for both Tx and Rx.

The DCF combines two Tx inputs, dissipating half the power within an internalload.

The signal then passes through a bandpass filter and out to the antenna.

A receive bandpass filter passes only the Rx signal to the SURF module.

The DCF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached to the topsurface of the top panel using two M6 screws.

DCF view

Figure 8-28 shows a DCF with connectors identified.


N-TYPE CONNECTOR TOSURF

7/16 CONNECTORTO ANTENNA

TWO SMA Tx CONNECTORSBENEATH DCF (FROM CTU)


Figure 8-28 DCF Tx block view with connectors identified

GSM-208-323 DCF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–43

DCF functionaldiagram

Figure 8-29 shows a functional diagram of the DCF.

Rx BANDPASSFILTER

LOAD

Tx TOANTENNA Rx TO SURF

N-TYPECONNECTOR

SMACONNECTORS

Rx FROMANTENNA

Tx Tx

Tx BANDPASSFILTER


DCF

SECOND CTUFIRST CTU

DCF

7/16CONNECTOR

Figure 8-29 Functional diagram of DCF

DCF connectors

Each DCF connects to:

S The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors. The two connectorsare underneath the DCF.

S A single antenna for both Rx and Tx, using a 7/16 connector. Thisconnector is on top of the DCF.

S The SURF, using an N-type connector. This connector is on top of theDCF.

NOTE All unused SMA inputs to DCF modules must be fitted with50 ohm load terminations.

GSM-208-323DDF



68P02902W67-A

DDF

Overview ofDDF

The dual-stage duplexed combining filter (DDF) differs from the DCF in having asecond stage of combining to allow a third CTU Tx input. This third CTU Txinput is connected to either:

S A feedthrough plate connector for a single additional CTU, or

S An HCU plate connector for combining two additional CTUs.

The DDF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached to the topsurface of the top panel using two M6 screws.

DDF view

Figure 8-30 shows a view of the DDF Tx block with connectors identified.


N-TYPE CONNECTOR TOSURF

TWO SMA Tx CONNECTORSBENEATH DDF (FROM CTU)

7/16 CONNECTORTO ANTENNA

N-TYPE CONNECTORFROM CTU BY

FEEDTHROUGH PLATEOR HCU


COOLING FINS

Figure 8-30 DDF Tx block view with connectors identified

GSM-208-323 DDF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–45

DDF functionaldiagram

Figure 8-31 shows a functional diagram of the DDF.

Rx BANDPASSFILTER

FIRST CTU

LOAD

Tx TOANTENNA Rx TO SURF

N-TYPECONNECTOR

SMACONNECTORS

Rx FROMANTENNA

Tx Tx

Tx BANDPASSFILTER

7 dB TYPICALLOSS

ACROSS DDF

THIRD (OR COMBINEDTHIRD/FOURTH) CTU

LOAD

SECOND CTU

N-TYPECONNECTOR

DDF

7/16CONNECTOR

Tx

Figure 8-31 Functional diagram of the DDF

DDF connectors

Each DDF connects to:

S The Tx outputs of three or four CTUs, using:

Two SMA connectors underneath the DDF.

An N-type connector on top of the DDF for connection to a feedthroughplate (for a third CTU) or HCU plate (for combined third/fourth CTUs).

S A single antenna for both Rx and Tx, using a 7/16 connector. Thisconnector is on top of the DDF.

S The SURF, using an N-type connector. This connector is on top of theDDF.

NOTE All unused SMA inputs to DDF modules must be fitted with50 ohm load terminations.

GSM-208-323DDF



68P02902W67-A

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 9

Digital modules

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 9Digital modules i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of digital modules Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview, locations and redundancy Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital module and BPSM locations Tech. 9–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MCUF and NIU redundancy Tech. 9–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full size and half size modules Tech. 9–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital module and CTU connections Tech. 9–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagram of digital module and CTU connections Tech. 9–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .






GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Overview of digital modules

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–1

Overview of digital modules

Overview,locations andredundancy

Digital modules provide the Horizonmacro indoor equivalent of M-Cell6 microBase Control Unit (microBCU) functionality. They are located in the bottom rightside of the cabinet, and are electronically interconnected through the backplane.Fibre optic connections are at the front of the appropriate modules.

Each digital module is assigned A (master) or B (redundant), with one BPSM(microBCU Power Supply Module) for A and one BPSM for B. The alarm moduleis not assigned to A or B, as it is supplied by both BPSMs for redundancy.

The master MCUF is assigned to A, and the redundant MCUF to B, each withan associated FMUX.

The four NIUs are used by the operational MCUF, but two NIUs are powered byBPSM A and two NIUs by BPSM B.

All slots are annotated with the legend of the appropriate module and located asshown in Figure 9-1.

Digital moduleand BPSMlocations

Figure 9-1 shows the position of modules within the digital module shelf.

ig.322.rh

ALARMMODULE

NIU B0NIU B1

BPSM

BPSM

FMUX

FMUX

MCUF A

MCUF B

NIU A0

NIU A1

REDUNDANT (B)

MASTER (A)

DIGITALMODULE SHELF

Figure 9-1 Digital and BPSM module locations, including optional redundancy

GSM-208-323Overview of digital modules



68P02902W67-A

MCUF and NIUredundancy

The digital module shelf can:

S Support two MCUFs at a BTS site, one master, one slave (forredundancy).

S Enable a master MCUF failure to result in a slave MCUF becoming themaster after a reset.

S Enable the OMC-R operator to initiate a master/slave MCUF swap.

S Configure the CTUs by the master MCUF.

All four NIUs operate from the master MCUF, but each pair of NIUs depend on aBPSM for power. All NIUs configure to the master MCUF clock.

NOTE When fitting a replacement redundant MCUF, care mustbe taken to ensure firmware compatibility with the masterMCUF. Firmware incompatibility may result in a loss ofcommunication between the two MCUFs so that theredundant MCUF is not in a position to take control in theevent of a failure of the master MCUF.

Full size andhalf sizemodules

Modules are full size and half size, as shown in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1 Full size and half size digital modules

Full size modules Half size modules

Main control unit with dual FMUX (MCUF) Network interface unit (NIU)

Alarm module Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX)

BPSM (microBCU powersupply module)

GSM-208-323 Overview of digital modules

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–3

Digital moduleand CTUconnections

The MCUF is connected to the CTUs in the same cabinet through thebackplane. Optional connection to CTUs in up to three additional cabinets (sixCTUs per cabinet) is by fibre optic links. FMUXs, two internal to the MCUF andone half size module, convert the electronic data stream into a fibre optic signal.An FMUX module in each extension cabinet converts the fibre optic signal backto electronic data stream, for transmission to CTUs via the backplane.

The NIU modules convert signals for terrestrial E1 or T1 lines.

Diagram ofdigital moduleand CTUconnections

Figure 9-2 shows a block diagram of the digital module and CTU connections.

MCUF

FMUX

NIUA0

TRANSCEIVER

2

E1/T1

TO EXTENSIONCABINET FOR SIXTRANSCEIVERS

FMUXFMUX2

2



TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER

TRANSCEIVER2

2

2

2

2

2

(CO

NN

EC

TIO

NS

VIA

BA

CK

PLA

NE

)

E1/T1

NIUA1 NIUB0 NIUB1

Figure 9-2 Digital module and CTU connections

GSM-208-323MCUF



68P02902W67-A

MCUF

MCUF overview

The main control unit with dual FMUX (MCUF) provides the site processingfunctions, apart from RF functions of the transceiver. The MCUF also providesswitching for up to six network interfaces (via four NIUs) and up to 24transceivers.

Two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets, BTS 0 and BTS 1, may be installed withinthe 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. BTS 0 is designated as the master cabinet andfitted with two MCUF modules, one for redundancy. Each MCUF module has anelectronic ID for remote identification. BTS 1 is designated as an extensioncabinet and is not equipped with MCUF modules. A fibre optic link connects themaster cabinet MCUF to an FMUX in the extension cabinet.

The MCUF provides the following functions:

S Maintenance and operational/control processing.

S Call processing (for example resource management and switching ofbaseband hopping data).

S Switching of traffic and control information.

S Timing reference and network/BTS master clock synchronization.

S The functionality of two FMUX (see FMUX module and FMUX function inthis chapter).

S Support for up to six transceivers via the backplane in the master cabinetand up to an additional 18 transceivers via FMUX connections to othercabinets.

S Support of up to six E1 or T1 circuits, via NIU modules.

S Support of the CSFP function via the PCMCIA flash memory card.

Capability toreplace MCU ofM-Cell6 andM-Cell2

The MCUF combines the MCU function of M-Cell6 with two FMUX modules. Ifthe MCUF is installed in an M-Cell6 or M-Cell2, the MCUF automatically revertsto the functionality of an MCU and the internal FMUX devices no longer operate.In M-Cell2, reverting to MCU mode includes the ability to directly connect to twotransceivers by modified use of the front panel FMUX fibre optic connections.

NOTE This capability to use MCUF in M-Cell6 and M-Cell2 is onlypossible with GSR4 software release or later.

GSM-208-323 MCUF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–5

GPROC, TSWand GLCKfunctions

The MCU section of the MCUF module combines functions of older generationequipment:

S The BTP (Base Transceiver Processor) functions and CSFP (CodeStorage Facility Processor) functions (provided PCMCIA card fitted),formerly achieved by generic processor boards (GPROCs).

S The timeslot switch (TSW).

S The generic clock (GCLK).

MCUF moduleview

Figure 9-3 shows an MCUF module.

(FULL - REMOVES SOFTWARE FROM MEMORYCPU – RESETS MCUF CPU)

PCMCIACARD SLOT

STATUS LEDS (RED & GREEN)

CAL PORT

TTY MMI

PROCESSORS

OSCILLATOR

DEBUG PORT

BDM PORT

RESET BUTTONS

PCMCIA EJECTBUTTON

INTERNAL FMUXFIBRE OPTIC

CONNECTIONS

BACKPLANECONNECTORS

Figure 9-3 View of the MCUF

GSM-208-323MCUF



68P02902W67-A

MCUFfunctionaldiagram

Figure 9-4 shows a functional diagram of the MCUF.

16/32 MbyteDRAM

FAST FLASHEEPROM

SLOW FLASHEEPROM

ADDRESS

RESET

RS232

ASIC

V.28

3

CONTROLDATA

PCMCIA

MMI GPS(IF USED)

3

4

SIGNAL CONNECTOR TO BACKPLANE

2

RESET ANDWARM RESET

SWITCHES

TTYINTERFACE

NIU

REDUNDANTMCUF

GPS 1PPS(IF USED)

EXTERNALCLOCK

PCMCIAINTERFACE

6

4

EXTERNALSITE ID

RED LED

GREEN LED

6

PIXOUTPUT

EXTERNALFMUX

MODULE

CTU x 6IN SAMECABINET

MAINPROCESSORS

FMUX

CTU x 6 VIAFMUX INOTHER

CABINETS

FIBRE OPTICCONNECTORS

DEBUG PORT

BDM PORT

2

SYNCBLOCK

6

6FMUX

2

2

6

2

FLASHEPROM

RAM

(OR TCU x 6VIA FMUX IN

M-CELL6CABINETS)

Figure 9-4 Functional diagram of MCUF in MCUF mode

GSM-208-323 MCUF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–7

Link toredundantMCUF

The link to the redundant MCUF is similar to a transceiver link, but does nothave the BBH capability, or the link delay measurement and compensationfacility. The 6.12 s, and 60 ms signals, are inserted into timeslots 8 and 16.

When the MCUF is in slave mode, timeslot and E1/T1 clock information isextracted from the MCUF link and passed to the sync block.

The main processor HDLC link to the redundant MCUF can be routed in anyunused timeslot(s) of this link.

The ASIC can switch any timeslot on the redundancy link to any timeslot on anyof the other links connected to it such as the transceiver links, network links,redundancy link or processor links.

Front panelinterfaces

TTY interface

A standard TTY interface is provided on the front panel, of 9.6 kbit/s (8 bits, Noparity, 1 stop bit (8 N 1)). A local maintenance terminal can be attached to thisport to use the MMI (Man Machine Interface) of the MCUF.

Debug and BDM ports

Two front panel ports are for Motorola factory and development use only:

S The debug port, consists of a TTY connection to the sync processor toaccess sync firmware, together with other connections to the ASIC andmain processors.

S The Background Debug Mode (BDM) port is used for low level debuggingof the main processors.

FMUX fibre optic connections

There are fibre optic connections from the MCUF internal FMUX modules. Thefibre optic connectors enable connection to FMUX modules in other cabinets foradditional transceivers.

CAL port

The CAL port on the front panel of the MCUF can be used to calibrate the syncblock clock via MMI commands. The 8 kHz reference output is used in theGCLK calibration procedure (see Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK) in Category523 Maintenance Information: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor (GSM-208-523)later in this manual).

GSM-208-323MCUF



68P02902W67-A

PCMCIA interface

The PCMCIA card is located on the front panel of the MCUF, and is used for:

S Code Storage Facility Processor (CSFP) memory.

S Rapid site initialization.

The PCMCIA socket is an industrial standard 68 pin single socket, fitted with anejector. The PCMCIA interface supports rev 2.1 type I and II cards.

The 20 Mbyte card can be write enabled, for upgrade of site information, ordisabled to protect card use for other sites or secure the site code.

Front panelswitches andindicators

The front panel of the MCUF module has two reset switches as shown inFigure 9-3:

S FULL is a hard reset (power up - removes software from the memory).

S CPU is a soft reset (this resets the MCUF main processors, but thesoftware remains in RAM).

A hard reset results in the software being reloaded to the DRAM in the sameway as normal power up.

NOTE During the CPU (soft) reset, pressing CPU reset again willperform a hard reset. Double pressing of the CPU resetthus has the same effect as a hard reset.

The MCUF has two front panel LEDs (one green and one red) as shown inFigure 9-3, with indications as shown in Table 9-2.

CAUTION When red and green LEDs are flashing, the boot code isdownloading into non-volatile memory for softwareupgrade. Do not remove power or reset the cabinet untildownloading has been completed, as this will corrupt thenon-volatile memory. If boot code is corrupted, contact theMotorola Customer Network Resolution Centre, requestingthe boot code restoration procedure and the appropriateboot code file.

Table 9-2 MCUF front panel LED indication

Red Green Status

Off Off Board not powered up or in rest cycle

Off On Normal operation

On Off Fault condition

Flashing Flashing Non-volatile memory boot code upgrade

(Do not remove power nor reset – see CAUTION)

GSM-208-323 MCUF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–9

PIX interfaces

The MCUF provides four PIX outputs on the backplane, driven at V.28 levels.The four PIX outputs, routed to the cabinet alarm board, enable relay contactcontrol of external customer equipment.

DRAM, flashEPROM andcode loadingfunctions

DRAM

The 16 Mbyte DRAM provides operational code and data storage for the mainprocessors. There is also a SIMM socket in the circuit board, enabling theaddition of a further 16 Mbytes if required. After software initialization, the DRAMuses ECC protection. Memory protection is provided by the main processors.

Fast flash EPROM

The fast flash 1 Mbyte bank (256k x 32) is used for bootcode and executiveprocess code. It has a fast access time (<75 ns) , enabling direct execution.The bootcode is factory set, and reprogrammed only in major softwareupgrades.

Slow flash EPROM

The slow flash 0.5 Mbyte bank (256k x 16) is used for non-volatile data storageof diagnostic data and module ID information.

Code loading

The boot and executive code, held in the fast flash EPROM, initiates the MCUFon power up or reset. If a PCMCIA memory card is fitted, operational code maybe obtained and copied to the DRAM for execution. If no card or code isavailable, the operational code is obtained from the BSC.

Before execution, the operational code held in DRAM is checked with code heldat the BSC. The BSC downloads any changed code objects to the DRAM.

After successful checking of the DRAM operational code, the code is executed,and the PCMCIA memory card updated with any changed objects.

CSFP code loading

If a PCMCIA memory card is available, then a code storage facility processor(CSFP) function can be supported. A new software load can be downloaded inbackground, without any reduction in service, and stored on the PCMCIA card.

Once the complete load has been transferred to the PCMCIA card, a code swapcan be initiated. The site is reset and the new software brought into service (<10minutes). As a precaution, the old version is held on the PCMCIA card tosupport a roll back to the original version if required.

GSM-208-323MCUF



68P02902W67-A

ASICfunctionality

The Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) provides central switchingcapabilities for the MCUF. It is capable of supporting up to 24 transceivers,together with up to six network interfaces and two links to the on-boardprocessors, one link to the sync processor and a link to the redundant MCUF.The link to the sync processor is used for code loading purposes only. TheASIC supports baseband hopping across the 24 transceiver links.

The ASIC provides interface features associated with the transceiver links,these include synchronization features to allow for delay in the link to thetransceivers, and the necessary framing and encoding to support the link.

All of the serial links into the ASIC are internal lines (I lines), 125 ms framed,with 32 eight bit timeslots per frame.

ASIC transceiver link features

The ASIC interfaces to a maximum of 24 transceiver links. The ASIC can switchany timeslot on any of the transceiver links to any timeslot on other linksconnected to the ASIC; transceiver links, network links, MCUF redundancy linkor processor links.

The ASIC provides the following features associated with the transceiver links:

S Link advance/delay compensation.

The ASIC will continually measure the round trip delay on each transceiverlink to calculate a timing advance for each link. The link advance isapplied, and can be adjusted by the main processor via the processorparallel interface.

S BBH data switching.

BBH switching is performed automatically on any timeslot configured asBBH data. A single timeslot from the transceiver is selected for BBHrouteing information, and defines which transceiver link (0-23) should beused for downlink.

S Timing reference insertion.

The ASIC receives timing pulses from the sync block and inserts theappropriate bits into the transceiver downlink synchronization and framingtimeslots. The sync block will provide a version of the 6.12 s and 60 mssignals that is advanced by 125 ms for this purpose.

S Manchester coding/decoding.

The transceiver links are all Manchester coded/decoded by the ASIC.This function can be switched on or off (default on) on a per link basis.The disable feature is for applications outside of the MCUF module.

GSM-208-323 MCUF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–11

ASIC/network and processor link switching

The ASIC supports a maximum of six network links and two main processorlinks. The data to/from these links can be switched to/from any timeslot on otherlinks connected to the ASIC.

The two links to the main processor allow it to route HDLC and other links to theappropriate place:

S 24 HDLC timeslots for the BCF RSS channel to each transceiver.

S Four timeslots for NIU control channels (two local, two redundant).

S Sync processor code load channel.

S Two channels for RSL links.

S One HDLC channel occupying up to three timeslots to the redundantMCUF.

Sync blockfunctionality

The sync block is controlled via the parallel interface of the main processors.The sync block is responsible for site synchronization functions. It generates allrequired local references from a high stability local clock source. This clocksource may also be locked to the incoming network clocks.

The sync clock source is in the form of a crystal oscillator (OCXO) which warmsup for phase locking in 4 minutes, and achieves frequency stabilization in 15minutes.

Site frame reference generation and re-timing includes:

S 2.048 MHz – For serial communications.

S 16.384 MHz – For FMUX communications.

S 125 ms – For NIU framing and transceiver framing.

S 60 ms – For transceiver GSM timing.

S 6.12 s – For GSM superframe.

The reference clocks available to the sync block are:

S Six network extracted clocks (E1/T1 source via NIUs). Any of the NIUmodules under control of the MCUF can extract a reference clock from anE1/T1 link and pass to the Sync block.

S CAL port. The CAL port can be used to calibrate the sync block clock viaMMI commands. The reference output provides a monitoring point.

S Redundant MCUF link.

GSM-208-323MCUF



68P02902W67-A

Phase lock loop (PLL) operating modes

The PLL uses the selected reference signal as the loop reference clock. Itincludes an OCXO accurate to 0.05 ppm, a phase comparator and a loop filter.The PLL has the following operating modes:

S Warm-up

The PLL is open loop and using the calibration frequency, but the OCXOis not yet warmed up.

S Set frequency

The PLL is open loop and using the calibration frequency, and the OCXOis warmed up.

S Fast tune

Closed loop with wide filter for coarse locking to the reference (extractedfrom network clock).

S Fine tune

Closed loop with narrow filter for accurate locking to the reference(extracted from network clock).

When in fine tune closed loop mode, the accuracy is 0.01 ppm.

Sync block code load

The sync block controller has a dedicated 2.048 Mbit/s serial link into the ASICenabling a 64 kbit/s HDLC channel to the main processors for code loading.

The sync block includes 256 k of flash EPROM used to store:

S Boot code.

S Operational code.

The boot code, which cannot be altered, queries the main processors on thecurrent version of the sync operational code.

If the stored operational code is the correct version, the boot code will move theoperational code to RAM and execute the code.

If the query results in the need for new operational code, the sync processor willdownload the operational code from the main processors via the ASIC to theRAM in the sync block.

After a successful download, the boot code programmes the flash EPROM withthe new operational code and runs the operational code in RAM.

GSM counters

The following counters are provided:

S GSM frame incremented every 4.615 ms, range 0 - 1325.

S GSM superframe incremented every 6.12 s, range 0 - 2047.

GSM-208-323 MCUF

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–13

Integral MCUFFMUXfunctionality

The equivalent function of two FMUX modules exists integral to the MCUF,enabling two extension cabinets to be connected. To enable total of fourcabinets to be joined together as one BTS site, an FMUX module is alsorequired in the master cabinet to connect the third extension cabinet. A singlecabinet site has no need for the FMUX functionality, because the MCUFconnects with the cabinet CTUs through the backplane.

Each fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX) function multiplexes and demultiplexes six,full duplex, transceiver links to one (TX/Rx) pair of fibre optic cables. Thisenables up to six transceivers in a single extension cabinet (eitherHorizonmacro or M-Cell6) to be linked to the master cabinet.

Each FMUX fibre optic link is full duplex 16.384 Mbit/s. The FMUX optical link iscapable of driving up to 1 km.

For functional description of FMUX see FMUX module and FMUX function inthis chapter.

GSM-208-323NIU



68P02902W67-A

NIU

Overview of NIU

The network interface unit (NIU) module provides two E1 or two T1 terminationlinks to the terrestrial network. The NIU E1/T1 outputs are connected to a T43 orBIB board, depending on the impedance matching requirement of the customerterrestrial circuits.

There are two types of NIU board, one for E1, one for T1. The NIU layout iscommon to both E1 and T1, the only differences being in the associated crystaloscillators and line matching resistor values.

An on-board NIU control processor provides network interface configuration andsupervision, controlled by the MCUF.

NIU locations

The cabinet may contain up to four NIU modules in the digital module shelf, asshown in Figure 9-1. Two NIUs are located in the master (lower) part of theshelf. Two NIUs are in the redundant (upper) part of the shelf, though theseupper NIUs are also used for non-redundant purposes.

An NIU in slot A0 supports two E1/T1 links.

An NIU in slot A1 supports one E1/T1 link.

An NIU in slot B0 supports two E1/T1 links.

An NIU in slot B1 supports one E1/T1 link.

NIU commandidentity number

Each NIU is identified in the database by an identity number, from 0 to 3.Table 9-3 shows the NIU slots and equivalent identity number.

Table 9-3 NIU slot and equivalent command identity

NIU (MSI) identity numberused in commands

NIU slot

0 A0

1 B0

2 A1

3 B1

GSM-208-323 NIU

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–15

NIU view andLEDs

Figure 9-5 shows an NIU module.

RESET/DISABLESWITCH

NIU GREEN LED

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

NIU RED LED

Figure 9-5 View of the NIU module

The NIU status is indicated by the two front panel LEDs, one green and one red,controlled by the on-board processor, as shown in Table 9-4.

Table 9-4 NIU LED display

Red LED Green LED Status of NIU board

Off Off NIU not powered up, or in reset cycle.

Off On Normal operation.

Flashing Flashing NIU undergoing system code download.

On On NIU self testing following switch on orreboot.Red LED extinguishes after 20 seconds, orafter 50 seconds following a reboot due tocode download.

NIUfunctionality

The NIU provides two E1/T1 interfaces into the network (link 0 and link 1) aswell as LAPD encoding/decoding and clock recovery from a selected E1/T1 link.The second E1/T1 interface (link 1) is not used for NIUs placed in positions NIUA1 and NIU B1, as shown in Figure 9-1.

An NIU control processor provides network interface configuration andsupervision, controlled by the MCUF. The NIU control processor maintains twoindependent control links in the redundant configuration (one to each MCUF),each using timeslot 0 of MCUF link 0.

GSM-208-323NIU



68P02902W67-A

NIU diagram

Figure 9-6 identifies the functional blocks in the NIU.

BACKPLANE CONNECTORS

CONTROLPROCESSOR

DRAM

DATA

ADDRESS

RS232

BDMCONNECTION

XTAL

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

FRAMER TIMESLOT

MULTIPLEXER

REF 125 msREF 6.12 s

MUXDEMUX

REF 2.048 MHz

RESET

NETWORKE1/T1 LINK 0

RESETSWITCH

RED LED

GREEN LED

LIU

CONNECTION

REDUNDANTMCUF LINK 0

EXTRACTEDCLOCK 0

REDUNDANTMCUF LINK 1

MASTER MCUFLINK 0

MASTER MCUFLINK 1

NETWORKE1/T1 LINK 1

LIU

FRAMER

EXTRACTEDCLOCK 1

FLASHEEPROM

Figure 9-6 Functional diagram of NIU module

GSM-208-323 NIU

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–17

Controlprocessor

The control processor interfaces to timeslot 0 of link 0 from each connectedMCUF.

The processor uses 512 Kbytes of flash EPROM for boot code. operationalcode storage and module ID. Code is executed directly from the flash EPROM.The boot code can be overwritten under control of the MCUF, if required.

The processor also has an on-chip 1 Mbyte of DRAM.

TTY Ports

The processing section provides two TTY ports for Motorola debuggingpurposes only.

Resets

The processor is capable of soft resetting itself. The front panel reset causes ahard reset of the entire board. Power-on also resets the processor.

The MCUF is able to reset the NIU via a message on the HDLC link.

NIU/MCUFframing andclocks

The control processor is supplied with a clock from an on-board crystaloscillator, which has an output enable pad for test purposes. The framerdevices also have their own crystal oscillators on-board.

The framer devices provide the decoded and jitter attenuated receive data, forpassing to the MCUF.

The framer devices also extract a clock signal from an E1/T1 link, which is thenpassed to the MCUF synchronization circuit. At the MCUF, this signal is used tophase lock a local 16.384 MHz clock signal. Once phase locked, three referenceclock signals are provided for NIU use:

S REF 2.048 MHz clock signal.

S REF 6.12 s clock signal.

S REF 125 ms clock signal.

The NIU transmit and receive framing is controlled by this 125 ms referencepulse received from the MCUF.

GSM-208-323NIU



68P02902W67-A

Distancemeasurement

The NIU provides the ability to perform network distance delay measurement oneither of the two network links. Measurement can only be performed on one linkat a time.

Three modes of operation are possible:

S Mode 1. A pattern is transmitted in a selected network timeslot and thecorresponding receive timeslot is monitored for its return. The delay ismeasured to an accuracy of ± 488 ns. The pattern is transmitted on the6.12 second reference signal.

S Mode 2. The receive link is monitored for the pattern. When received thepattern is transmitted back in the next frame. The time between receiptand transmission of the pattern is measured to an accuracy of ± 488 ns.

S Mode 3. The receive link is monitored for the pattern. When it is detecteda strobe is generated for the MCUF sync block.

Radio signallinglinks (RSLs)

The radio signalling links (RSLs) to the BSC from the main processor on theMCUF are 64 Kbit/s LAPD links. The LAPD encoding of this RSL data isperformed on the NIU by the NIU control processor.

The RSL links between the MCUF and NIU must be sent as follows:

S RSL link 1 is embedded in the NIU control link; that is, it will be in timeslot0 of link 0 to the NIU. This link is important for initialization.

NOTE When the NIU is on a network link to a BSC or anotherBTS, the RSL can be placed on either link on any defaulttimeslot other than zero.

S RSL link 2 is on a different timeslot from that used for the networkconnection

The NIU will support a maximum of two RSL links. The RSL links may both beon a single network link or shared between the two network links.

The NIU hardware supports switching for 64 k and 16 k LAPD channels.

T1 NIU need toset link type

T1 NIUs and E1 NIUs cannot be interchanged. A T1 link line consists of 24timeslots as opposed to 32 timeslots for an E1 link line. A T1 link generatesspecific T1 alarms, referred to as Red alarms. A T1 NIU supports the same MSItype of device transitions as an E1 NIU.

The OMC-R operator should set the link type or it will default the site to an E1system. In ROM it is set by a ROM-only MMI command. In RAM it is a databaseparameter set by a chg_element command.

The RSL default timeslots are the same for a T1 NIU and an E1 NIU. The basicmechanism for communicating and configuring is also the same.

GSM-208-323 T43/BIB-NIU - E1/T1 mapping

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–19

T43/BIB-NIU - E1/T1 mapping

Overview ofT43/BIB-NIUconnection

The NIU network interface (E1/T1) links connect to a single CIM (T43) or BIM(BIB) board on top of the cabinet by a single backplane connector and cable.

NIU to T43mapping andcommand ID

Only six network interfaces are used: three pairs connect to the master NIUmodules, and three pairs connect to the redundant NIU modules. Each NIU isidentified in the database by an identity number, from 0 to 3, as shown in thefinal column of Table 9-5.

NOTE The redundant NIU modules are only redundant in thesense of being supplied by a different BPSM, and canthus continue to operate if the master BPSM fails. All NIUsare available for separate use.

Table 9-5 defines the mapping from the T43/BIB connector to NIU boards.

Table 9-5 T43/BIB connector to NIU boards

T43 networkside

connector

37-way D-typeconnections

(BIB)

NIU location NIU identity (MSI)used in commands

J1 1,20 NIU A0 - Tx1 MSI(NIU) 0

J2 2,21 NIU A0 - Rx1

J7 7,26 NIU A0 - Tx2 MSI(NIU) 0

J8 8,27 NIU A0 - Rx2

J13 13,32 NIU A1 - Tx1 MSI(NIU) 2

J14 14,33 NIU A1 - Rx1

J4 4,23 NIU B0 - Tx1 MSI(NIU) 1

J5 5,24 NIU B0 - Rx1

J10 10,29 NIU B0 - Tx2 MSI(NIU) 1

J11 11,30 NIU B0 - Rx2

J16 16,35 NIU B1 - Tx1 MSI(NIU) 3

J17 17,36 NIU B1 - Rx1

GSM-208-323T43/BIB-NIU - E1/T1 mapping



68P02902W67-A

Diagram of T43connection toNIUs

Figure 9-7 shows a diagram of T43 connection to NIUs.

NIU A0

12

78

1314

J0

T43

J

45

10

1617

11

NIU A1

NIU B0

NIU B1

J

Figure 9-7 Diagram of T43 connection to NIUs

GSM-208-323 FMUX module and function

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–21

FMUX module and function

Overview ofFMUX module

The fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX) module multiplexes and demultiplexes six,full duplex, transceiver links to one (TX/Rx) pair of fibre optic cables. Thisenables up to six transceivers in a single extension cabinet (eitherHorizonmacro or M-Cell6) to be linked to the master cabinet.

The FMUX has two modes of operation:

S Working in conjunction with the MCUF to multiplex transceiver links to/froman extension cabinet.

S Operating in the extension cabinet to supply the transceivers in thatcabinet.

Two FMUX modules may be fitted in the digital module shelf, one to the masterMCUF, and one to the slave. An extension cabinet only requires one FMUX toconnect to six transceivers within the cabinet (plus one for redundancy ifrequired).

Each FMUX fibre optic link is full duplex 16.384 Mbit/s. The FMUX optical link iscapable of driving up to 1 km.

FMUX moduleview

Figure 9-8 shows an FMUX module.

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROMANOTHER MCUF/FMUX INANOTHER CABINET AT THE SITE

FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TOANOTHER MCUF/FMUX INANOTHER CABINET AT THE SITE

Figure 9-8 View of FMUX module

GSM-208-323FMUX module and function



68P02902W67-A

FMUXfunctionaldiagram

Figure 9-9 shows a block diagram of the FMUX module.

FIBRE OPTICRECEIVER

FIBRE OPTICTRANSMITTER

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR

RxDATA

TxDATA

SELECTCONTROL

(FROM MCUF)

6MUX /

DEMUX2:1

SELECTTO MCUF (IF

MAINCABINET)

MANCHESTERENCODED

Tx/Rx

6

FROMMCUF/FMUXIN ANOTHER

CABINET

TOMCUF/FMUXIN ANOTHER

CABINET

TO CTUs ORTCUs (IF

EXTENSIONCABINET)

Figure 9-9 Functional diagram of FMUX module

FMUXfunctionalexplanation

The MCUF transmits and receives a 2.048 Mbit/s data stream link to eachoperational transceiver. In the master cabinet this is achieved by the backplane,without using an FMUX.

If the transceiver is in an extension cabinet, the master cabinet FMUX combinesthe data stream with up to five others (see Figure 9-9), and then converts theelectronic signal to fibre optic, for onward transmission to the extension cabinet.

At the extension cabinet, another FMUX converts the fibre optic signal back toelectronic form, for transmission to the transceivers.

The data stream return from the extension cabinet is a reverse of the above.

The multiplexer/demultiplexer can support up to six transceiver links. It uses a16.384 Mbit/s Manchester encoded serial data link, organized as 256 x eight bittimeslots in a 125 ms frame. Manchester coding is used to detect errors,indicated at timeslot zero for each transceiver, enabling error correction at theother FMUX.

GSM-208-323 Alarm module

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–23

Alarm module

Alarm moduleoverview

The alarm module is located in the digital module shelf, adjacent to the MCUFs.It provides the cabinet equipment with an external alarm system to reportoperational status. The alarm module:

S Collects all cabinet alarms (received from the backplane).

S Provides current sensing for 16 customer inputs, referred to as sitealarms. These inputs are provided by the PIX connectors PIX0 and PIX1.

S Controls up to four relay driven outputs linked to customer equipment.(Changeover contacts 30 V 1 A maximum.) These outputs are provided bythe PIX0 connector.

S Transmits alarm information to all CTUs in the same cabinet.

Alarm moduleview

Figure 9-10 shows an alarm module.

BACKPLANECONNECTOR

5 LED PAIRS

Figure 9-10 Alarm module view

GSM-208-323Alarm module



68P02902W67-A

Alarm modulefunctionality

The alarm module receives inputs from:

S Cabinet PSMs (identifying type, manufacturer and slot number).

S Environmental control devices.

S Customer defined alarms.

The alarm board receives these inputs, encodes them, and then passes thecode word to all CTUs in the cabinet via the backplane.

Alarm modulereplacement –effect on alarms

The alarm module can be replaced while the cabinet system is running (hotreplacement). This will temporarily interrupt alarms, with the OMC-R receivingan additional alarm module out of service alarm, which automatically clearsupon correct insertion of the replacement module.

Alarm collectionfrom extensioncabinets

Extension cabinet alarms are sent from the extension cabinet alarm module tothe extension cabinet CTUs. The CTUs transmit the alarms to the main cabinet,by using the normal FMUX connection, for transmission to the MCUF.

GSM-208-323 Alarm module

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–25

Alarm moduledisplaypresentation

All alarms LEDs are green or off when equipment is functioning correctly, andred when equipment is faulty. The LED designations are shown in Table 9-6.

Table 9-6 Alarm module LED list

LEDlocation

Normal/Alarmstate

Fault indicated by alarm state (LED is red)

1 (top) Off/Red AC supply fail.

2 Off/Red Rectifier fail.

3 Off/Red Indoor cabinet door open.

4 Off/Red Enclosure door/hood open.

5 Off/Red Low voltage disconnect (LVD) alarm (batterybackup option).

6 Green/Red Fan Tray 0 faulty (4-fan tray).



9 Off/Red HMS 1 fan fail.

10 (bottom) Off/Red HMS 0 fan fail.

GSM-208-323Alarm module



68P02902W67-A

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A i

Chapter 10

Ancillary enclosure

GSM-208-323

29th May 02ii


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A iii

Chapter 10Ancillary enclosure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Ancillary enclosure structure Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to the ancillary enclosure Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical design Tech. 10–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure layout Tech. 10–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-208-323

29th May 02iv


68P02902W67-A

GSM-208-323 Ancillary enclosure structure

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–1

Ancillary enclosure structure

Introduction tothe ancillaryenclosure

The ancillary enclosure is a customer option for extending the battery backupcapability of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor from 0.7 hours up to amaximum of 4.0 hours.

Mechanicaldesign

The ancillary enclosure matches the appearance of the main enclosure. A singlelockable door opens to the right and provides access to the enclosure. Thehood is fixed and does not open.

Cable entry to the enclosure is provided by two lengths of flexible conduit,preinstalled on the left side. The conduits are designed for connection to the lowlevel cable entry holes on the main enclosure. The –48 V dc output and thealarm signal cable are carried in one conduit, and the 230 V ac supply and earthcables are carried in the other.

Most of the enclosure interior space is used to provide adjustable shelving toaccommodate various monobloc types. Each of the three shelves can containfour 12 V monoblocs (one –48 V battery string).

A Battery Management Module (BMM) is mounted at the top of the enclosure.This provides the following facilities:

S Battery circuit protection.

S Power monitoring.

S Battery monitoring.

S –48 V dc auxiliary power.

S Alarm interface to the main enclosure.

A 230 V ac heater unit is mounted in the base of the enclosure to prevent theinternal temperature from dropping below 0 °C. This heater unit is of the samedesign as the one used in the main enclosure.

The following alarm sensing equipment is also installed in the ancillaryenclosure:

S Smoke detector.

S Overtemperature alarm thermostat.

S Overtemperature shutdown thermostats (two).

S Door closure sensor.

Interior lighting for the enclosure is provided and is powered from the 230 V acsupply.

GSM-208-323Ancillary enclosure structure



68P02902W67-A

Ancillaryenclosurelayout

Figure 10-1 shows the internal layout of the ancillary enclosure.


BATTERY STRING 3

BATTERY STRING 2

BATTERY STRING 1

ADJUSTABLE SHELVING

HEATER TEST BUTTON

LIGHT (NOT VISIBLE)


HEATER UNIT

Figure 10-1 Ancillary enclosure machanical layout (door removed)

GSM-208-323 Ancillary enclosure technical description

29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–3

Ancillary enclosure technical description

Circuit diagram

Figure 10-2 shows a circuit diagram for the ancillary enclosure.

BLOC 412 V

CB 3

ENCLOSURETHERMOSTATS

– + – +

0 V DC–48 V DC

– + – +

– + – + – + – +

– + – + – + – +

CB 2 CB 1

BATTERYMONITOR

1

THERMOSTAT

COMPARTMENTLIGHT AND

SERVICE OUTLET

HEATER

80 °COpen on

rise

J6

J7

J1

J2

J3

FS5

J8

J5

FS2

FS3

J9

J4

FS1 FS4

STRING 3A100

3

3

3

3

J1

J2

J3

J1

J0

B100

B102

B107

B103 B104 B105 B106

B108 B109 B110

B113 B114 B115

B111

B116B112

8

8

2

2

D101

D102

D103

D104

D105

D100

AC CIRCUIT

70 °COpen on

rise

SMOKEDETECTOR

TEMPERATURESENSOR

CURRENTSENSE

CONTROLUNIT

LVD

VOLTAGESENSE

DOORSENSOR

BATTERYMONITOR

2

BATTERYMONITOR

3

–48 V DC0 V DC

BLOC 312 V

BLOC 212 V

BLOC 112 V

BLOC 412 V

BLOC 312 V

BLOC 212 V

BLOC 112 V

BLOC 412 V

BLOC 312 V

BLOC 212 V

BLOC 112 V

8

8

A10

2

A10

1

ALARMAND

CONTROLSIGNALS

FAN(NOT USED)

CUSTEQPMTD106

B101

C100 C101

STRING 2

STRING 1

Figure 10-2 Ancillary enclosure circuit diagram

GSM-208-323Ancillary enclosure technical description



68P02902W67-A

The batterymanagementmodule

The BMM provides all the dc power, control and monitoring facilities for theancillary enclosure, as described below:

Battery circuit protection

The BMM houses three circuit breakers / isolators, one for each of the batterystrings. The circuit breakers connect the battery strings to a single output feed tothe main enclosure, and are equipped with auxiliary contacts and a shunt coil fortrip alarms and remote shutdown.

Battery monitoring

The BMM monitors the voltage of each 12 V monobloc in the enclosure throughvoltage sense cables, connected between the monobloc terminals and the BMM(connectors J1, J2 and J3). A single summary alarm is generated if a sustainedvoltage imbalance of >10% is detected between monoblocs in the same batterystring.

The BMM front panel (Figure 10-3) houses LEDs to indicate the condition ofeach monobloc in the enclosure. This enables easy identification of whichmonobloc has failed.

Figure 10-3 Battery monitoring facilities on the BMM front panel

Auxiliary power

The BMM provides two fused –48 V dc auxiliary power outlets. One outlet ismounted on the rear panel and can be used to power an enclosure fan (notrequired). The other outlet is mounted on the front panel and can be used forthe connection of customer equipment.

The auxiliary power is taken from the dc feed to the main enclosure and is fed tothe outlets through a Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) circuit. This circuit alsoprovides dc power for the smoke detector.

Power monitoring

Two pairs of 4 mm test sockets are provided on the BMM front panel. One pairis for voltage monitoring, and the other pair is for current monitoring.


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–5

Alarm interfaceThe BMM provides inputs for the following alarms:

S Smoke alarm.

S Enclosure overtemperature alarm and overtemperature shutdown.

S Door open.

S Battery fail.

The alarm signals are routed from the BMM to the Alarm Interface Module (AIM)in the the main enclosure via a single 25-way cable.

NOTE The BMM also accepts ANC smoke alarm trip signals andbattery monitor alarm reset signals from the mainenclosure.

BMM front panel

Figure 10-4 shows the front panel of the BMM.

Figure 10-4 BMM front panel detail

BMM rear panel

Figure 10-5 shows the connectors on the BMM rear panel.

0 VTO

STR 1

ANDERSON SBS175CONNECTOR

(TO MAIN ENCLOSURE)

0 VTO

STR 2

0 VTO

STR 3

–48 VTO

STR 1

–48 VTO

STR 2

–48 VTO

STR 3

+ –

Figure 10-5 BMM rear panel detail




68P02902W67-A

BMM connectorpinouts

Table 10-1 to Table 10-6 list the pinouts for the connectors on the BMM.

Table 10-1 J4: Internal battery temperature sensor


1 Earth 3 Temperature sensor return

2 Temperature sensor

Table 10-2 J5: Comms power


1 –48 V 3 Earth

2 0 V

Table 10-3 J6: Main enclosure signal cable


1 ANC smoke alarm trip return 14 Batt fail alarm

2 ANC smoke alarm trip 15 Batt fail alarm return

3 Door switch return 16 Batt monitor reset

4 Door switch 17 Batt monitor reset return

5 ANC enclosure overtempreturn

18 Aux alarm

6 ANC enclosureovertemperature

19 Aux alarm return

7 Smoke alarm return 20 –

8 Smoke alarm 21 –

9 Temperature sensor return 22 –

10 ANC temperature sensor 23 –

11 O/T shutdown return 24 –

12 O/T shutdown 25 –

13 –


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–7

Table 10-4 J7: Smoke/overtemperature alarm


1 Smoke dc –ve 6 O/T shutdown

2 Smoke dc +ve 7 O/T shutdown return

3 Smoke alarm 8 ANC enclosureovertemperature

4 Smoke alarm return 9 ANC enclosure overtempreturn

5 –

Table 10-5 J8: Fan power/alarm (not used)


1 –48 V 3 Fan fail

2 0 V 4 Fan fail return

Table 10-6 J9: Door alarm


1 Door switch 2 Door switch return




68P02902W67-A

Alarmmanagement

All alarm signals to and from the ancillary enclosure are handled by the batterymanagement module. The BMM connects directly to the Alarm Interface Module(AIM) in the main enclosure through a 25-way signal cable. This connectsbetween J6 on the rear panel of the BMM and J4/J41 on the AIM.

Alarm signals from the BMM to the AIM can be overridden, depending on theposition of DIP switches on SW1 in the AIM.

The pinouts for J6 on the BMM are shown in Table 10-3 (see BMM connectorpinouts).

Alarm and control inputs

S ANC smoke alarm trip and O/T shutdown

Smoke alarm and overtemperature signals are fed directly from thesensors in the ancillary enclosure, through the BMM, to the AIM in themain enclosure. The power control module then processes the signals andissues an ancillary enclosure shutdown signal to the BMM. The BMM thenuses a 12 V dc control signal to trip all the circuit breakers in the ancillaryenclosure.

NOTE An overtemperature or smoke alarm signal generated bythe sensors located within the main enclosure itself alsocauses an ancillary enclosure shutdown signal to begenerated.

S Batt monitor reset

The default settings for the battery monitors are non-latching. If the batterymonitors are set to latch on fail, the battery monitor reset function can becontrolled remotely via site output relay 4 from BTS 0 in the mainenclosure.

Alarm and control outputs

S Batt fail

Each monobloc is monitored by the BMM and any voltage imbalance, orfailure of the battery monitoring circuit, results in a single summary alarmbeing sent to the AIM.

S Aux alarm

The BMM sends an Aux alarm to the AIM when one of the battery circuitbreakers has tripped (or if the fan fails – not used).


29th May 02


68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–9

The batterystrings

A maximum of 12 monoblocs can be installed in the ancillary enclosure,arranged in three –48 V strings of four 12 V monoblocs. The dc voltage fromeach string is fed to a single pair of dc supply cables to the main enclosurethrough separate circuit breakers / isolators on the BMM front panel (seeFigure 10-2).

Under normal circumstances, the monoblocs in the ancillary enclosure are floatcharged from the main enclosure. However, if an interruption to the main acsupply occurs, power for the main enclosure and the ancillary enclosure isautomatically supplied from the monoblocs with no interruption. The LVD in thepower system automatically disconnects the monoblocs if the output voltagedrops below 39.5 V (+/–0.25 V) to prevent deep discharge.

The shelving for the monoblocs is adjustable to accommodate monobloc typesfrom different battery manufacturers (see Table 1-14 in Battery specificationsin Chapter 1 of this category).

The extended battery backup times available for the main enclosure whenadditional battery strings are installed in the ancillary enclosure vary between1.9 hours when one string is installed, up to 4.0 hours when three strings areinstalled.

The heater unit

The heater unit is mounted in the base of the ancillary enclosure. It switches onat low temperature to prevent the internal temperature from dropping below0 °C.

A test button, mounted next to the ac isolator switch, is provided to test theoperation of the heater.

The heater is powered by 230 V ac from the ac distribution unit in the mainenclosure.

AC isolatorswitch

An ac isolator switch is installed in the ancillary enclosure, to the right of theheater unit. This allows the ac supply for the heater and light/service outletsocket to be isolated locally from the ac powered equipment in the enclosure,avoiding the need to open the main enclosure to isolate the supply externally.

Smoke detector

A vertically mounted smoke detector is installed near the top of the back wall, onthe left side of the enclosure, behind the BMM.

The smoke detector is powered by 24 V dc from the BMM. On detection ofsmoke, the smoke detector sends an alarm signal to the AIM in the mainenclosure via the BMM. This causes the power control module in the enclosureto send an ancillary enclosure shutdown signal to the BMM, resulting in all thebattery string circuit breakers on the BMM being tripped.




68P02902W67-A

Enclosurelighting

Enclosure lighting is provided by a single fluorescent tube light, mountedcentrally in the roof panel. The light is powered from the same 230 V ac supplyfrom the main enclosure as the heater.

The light is of a similar type to that used in the main enclosure and is activatedby a proximity sensor.

CHAPTER 2SITE PREPARATION

CHAPTER 3INSTALLING THE

ENCLOSURE

CHAPTER 4INSTALLING THE INDOOR

CABINET

CHAPTER 5INSTALLING THE

ANCILLARY ENCLOSURE

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO

INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 7SITE COMMISSIONING

CHAPTER 8SITE DECOMMISSIONING

CHAPTER 6INTEROPERABILITY

29th May 02

Installation & Configuration: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

68P02902W68-A i

Category 423

Installation & Configuration (Inst.)

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii

Category 423Installation & Configuration (Inst.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction to installation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installation Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation instructions Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual scope Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact information Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Chapter 2Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation overview Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview to site preparation Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation procedures Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A












GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A v






Chapter 4Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation overview Inst. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation sections Inst. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installation Inst. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet identification Inst. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet view Inst. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line testing Inst. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient and lightning protection Inst. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-208-423

29th May 02vi


68P02902W68-A







Chapter 5Installing the ancillary enclosure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation Inst. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation scenarios Inst. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure layout Inst. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A vii










GSM-208-423

29th May 02viii


68P02902W68-A

Chapter 7Site commissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning overview and test equipment Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of commissioning Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC to MCUF cable pin connections Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment Inst. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .






Chapter 8Site decommissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of decommissioning Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline of the procedure to decommission the equipment Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . .



GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A ix


GSM-208-423

29th May 02x


68P02902W68-A

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A i

Chapter 1

Introduction to installation

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii

Chapter 1Introduction to installation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to installation Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation instructions Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual scope Inst. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software requirements Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety instructions Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact information Inst. 1–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423 Introduction to installation

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 1–1

Introduction to installation

Installationinstructions

General installation instructions for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet areincluded within every cabinet shipped.

This document specifically describes the installation of Horizonmacro indoorcabinets within a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

NOTE It is important to follow the instructions given within thisdocument when installing Horizonmacro indoor equipmentwithin the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. Generalinstallation instructions received as part of theHorizonmacro indoor consignment should be removed anddiscarded.

Manual scope

This category (GSM-208-423) covers installation and commissioning for theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure (complete with two Horizonmacroindoor cabinets) and the optional ancillary enclosure. The information isarranged in the following chapters:

Chapter 1 Introduction to installation

General information, safety instructions and information about tools needed toinstall the equipment.

Chapter 2 Site preparation

Describes the procedures to be followed for initially preparing the site andinstalling the necessary ducting and base.

Chapter 3 Installing the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

All procedures necessary to install the enclosure in preparation for theinstallation of one or two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets.

Chapter 4 Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

All procedures necessary to install one or two Horizonmacro indoor cabinetsready for operation, together with suggested RF configuration options.

Chapter 5 Installing the ancillary enclosure

Describes the procedures for installing the optional ancillary enclosure toprovide additional battery backup for the main enclosure.

Chapter 6 Horizonmacro interoperability

Supplementary information, describing how M-Cell BTSs can be connected toHorizonmacro BTSs.

GSM-208-423Introduction to installation

29th May 02Inst. 1–2


68P02902W68-A

Chapter 7 Site commissioning

All procedures necessary to enable the site to be fully operational.

Chapter 8 Site decommissioning

All procedures necessary to decommission the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets,the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, and the optional ancillary enclosure.

Softwarerequirements

The GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 BTSs require BSS and OMC-R softwarerelease GSR4 (or higher) in the network.

The GSM850 and PCS1900 BTSs require BSS and OMC-R software releaseGSR5.1 (or higher) in the network.

Safetyinstructions

The following safety instructions must be observed when installing theequipment described in this manual:

S The installation and configuration procedures described in this manualmust only be carried out by suitably trained personnel.

S Installation and commissioning must comply with all relevant national andregional regulations.

S The enclosure(s) must be bolted down.

Contactinformation

Contact the Motorola local office if problems are encountered when carrying outany installation procedures described in this manual.

GSM-208-423 Tool kit requirements

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 1–3

Tool kit requirements

Overview fortool kit

This section describes the recommended tools required for installing,commissioning and maintaining the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure,the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets, and the optional ancillary enclosure.

Tool kit listTable 1-1 lists the contents of the tool kit.

Table 1-1 Installation tool list

Quantity Description

1 pair Safety goggles

1 Hard hat

1 Dust mask

1 pair Ear defenders

1 Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead

1 Antistatic mat

1 Marker pen

1 Torch

1 Socket set (A/F/metric 13 mm sq drive)

1 250 mm adjustable spanner

1 200 mm adjustable spanner

1 each Combination spanners metric: 8 mm to 25 mm

1 Ratchet ring spanner (15 mm x 13 mm)

1 Torque spanner (12 mm)

1 Torque wrench (1 to 25 Nm)

1 Torxdriver set (T10 to T30) and security Torxdriver set (T10 to T30)

1 M6 Torx spanner (for SMA Tx block connectors)

1 Security allen key set

1 Claw hammer

1 Pipe cutter

1 Junior hacksaw

1 300 mm hacksaw

1 pair 150 mm side cutters

1 pair 150 mm heavy duty side cutters

1 pair Flush cut wire cutters

GSM-208-423Tool kit requirements



68P02902W68-A


1 pair Light duty cable cutters

1 pair Cable shears

1 Knife with retractable blade

1 pair General purpose pliers

1 pair Snipe nose pliers

1 pair Industrial scissors

1 pair GP serrated jaw pliers

1 Set of jeweller’s screwdrivers

1 Screwdriver set (including flat and cross-head blades)

1 Isolating transformer (suitable for site use)

1 Piston drill (suitable for drilling concrete and capable of acceptingan M20 drill bit)

1 M20 drill bit

1 Drill bit set

1 6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet)

1 Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder

1 Coaxial cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable)

1 Hand crimp tool

1 Crimp tool for type 43 connectors

1 BNC crimp tool with inserts

1 Telephone plug crimp tool

1 50 mm crimp tool

1 Cable tie gun

1 1.5 m wooden step ladder

1 Table vice

1 250 mm vice grips

1 7.5 m tape measure

1 300 mm steel rule

1 Spirit level (1 m)

1 Centre punch

1 Pocket scriber

1 250 mm half round file

1 pair Straight point tweezers

1 Null modem

GSM-208-423 Tool kit requirements

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 1–5


1 RS232 mini tester

1 M to M gender changer

GSM-208-423Tool kit requirements



68P02902W68-A

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A i

Chapter 2

Site preparation

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii

Chapter 2Site preparation i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation overview Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview to site preparation Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-installation procedures Inst. 2–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .






GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423 Preparation overview

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–1

Preparation overview

Overview to sitepreparation

This chapter contains:

S Information that should be read for initial planning.

S Information that should be read for safe completion of procedures.

S Pre-installation procedures to be followed to prepare the site beforebeginning the installation.

Pre-installationprocedures

Pre-installation for the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure comprises the sections listedin Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Pre-installation sections in this chapter

Section Description

Site requirements andconsiderations

Details mechanical, electrical and structuralparameters to be taken into account when selectinga site.

Visiting the site Defines the site operating procedures.

Preparing the site Details general site construction parameters.

Earthing the site Earthing techniques.

Preparing thefoundation

Details the procedures for laying the enclosurefoundations.

NOTE The information contained here also applies to theoptional ancillary enclosure, unless stated otherwise.

GSM-208-423Site requirements and considerations



68P02902W68-A

Site requirements and considerations

Overview ofrequirements

The base site area, where the equipment is to be installed, must meet:

S Structural requirements, allowing space for all conditions, includingmaintenance, expansion and associated cables.

S Allowance for enclosure height. including allowance for open lid.

S Weight, allowing for potential additions on expansion.

S Width and height, allowing door to be opened beyond 90°.

S Environmental and power requirements, as defined in manualspecifications.

Equipmentdimensions

The dimensions of the 12 carrier outdoor equipment are shown in Table 2-2.The shroud and ancillary enclosure are optional and must be orderedseparately.

Table 2-2 Equipment dimensions (in mm)

Cabinet type Height Width Depth

Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoorenclosure

1400 1900 (no shroud)

2150 (inc. shroud)

800

Horizonmacro indoor cabinet 750 700 430

Ancillary enclosure 1400 700 * 800 *

* Add 50 mm to allow for the overhang at the top of the enclosure.

Weights

The equipment weights are shown in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3 Equipment weights

Equipment Weight (kg)

12 carrier outdoor enclosure 710 kg

Indoor cabinet (6 CTUs fitted) 110 kg (approx.)

Ancillary enclosure 150 kg (empty)

750 kg max. (3 battery strings installed)

GSM-208-423 Site requirements and considerations

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–3

Torque values

The torque values for Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor are listed in Table 2-4.


Size ofscrew/bolt



Powerspecifications

Main enclosure input power supply requirements

The power requirements for the main enclosure are shown in Table 2-5.

Table 2-5 Main outdoor enclosure power requirements


range


230 V ac three phaseand neutral (star)

or230 V ac single phase

150 to 264 V acat 45 to 65 Hz

20 A per phase

60 A

Ancillary enclosure input power supply requirements

The power requirements for the ancillary enclosure are shown in Table 2-6.

Table 2-6 Ancillary enclosure power requirements


range


230 V ac single phase(derived from the ac powerdistribution unit in the main

enclosure)

150 to 264 V acat 45 to 65 Hz

5 A

Output voltage from the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure is –48 V dc.




68P02902W68-A

Power consumptionThe power consumption figures for the main enclosure are shown in Table 2-7.

Table 2-7 Power consumption of full enclosure (12 carriers)

Typical measured consumption Maximum power consumption

4054 W 6080 W

NOTE The maximum power consumption figures apply toextreme operating conditions (minimum operating ambienttemperature, heaters on, maximum RF output power,charging batteries and lowest module efficiencies, forexample).Typical power consumption is for the equipment running atfull RF output power, trickle battery charge and nominalmodule efficiencies.

Maximum thermal dissipationThermal dissipation has to remove the energy of maximum power consumption,less RF power output of the 12 transceivers.

Maximum power consumption: 6080 W.

12 DCS1800 CTUs at full power at antenna: (12 x 16 = 192) approx. 200 W.

12 EGSM900 CTUs at full power at antenna: (12 x 20 = 240) approx. 250 W.

Maximum thermal dissipation, DCS1800: 6080 – 200 = 5880 W.

Maximum thermal dissipation, EGSM900: 6080 – 250 = 5830 W.

NOTE Thermal dissipation figures are not currently available forwhen 850 MHz or 1900 MHz CTUs are used.

RF poweroutput

The RF power output figures are shown in Table 2-8 and Table 2-9.

Table 2-8 RF power output at CTU Tx connector

GSM850 and EGSM900 DCS1800 and PCS1900

60 W (47.8 dBm) +/–1.0 dBm 50 W (47.0 dBm) +/– 1.0 dBm

Table 2-9 RF power output at indoor cabinet after Tx blocks

Tx block GSM850 EGSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900

TDF 40 W(46.0 dBm)

32 W(45.1 dBm)

DCF 20 W(43.0 dBm)

16 W(42.1 dBm)

DDF 8.5 W(39.3 dBm)

7 W(38.5 dBm)


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–5

SensitivityThe receive sensitivity of the equipment is shown in Table 2-10.

Table 2-10 Rx sensitivity *

Frequency Band Without Duplexer With Duplexer

850 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm

900 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm

1800 MHz –108.5 dBm –107.5 dBm

1900 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm

* Guaranteed over all channel types, fading profiles, RF frequencies and operating conditions.

Battery backup(internal)

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is fitted with limited batterybackup.

Table 2-11 Backup power specifications

Location Capacity(per battery)

Typical power duration(12 carriers)

Internal batteries 100 Ah 40 minutes

Battery backup times can be extended by installing the ancillary enclosure (seebelow).

Battery backup(external)

Typical extended battery backup nominal times available for the main enclosurewhen additional battery strings are installed in the ancillary enclosure are listedin Table 2-12. These times assume that 12 carriers are in use in the mainenclosure and the battery strings are fully charged.

Table 2-12 Battery backup times (nominal)

No. of battery strings Backup time

1 (in main enclosure) 0.7 hr

2 1.9 hr

3 2.8 hr

4 4.0 hr

NOTE Battery backup times are affected by the equipmentoperating temperature.

Networktransmissionoptions

Options exist for E1, T1 and HDSL (star and daisy chain) transmission.




68P02902W68-A

Environmentalrequirements

Table 2-13 shows the environmental limits for both the main enclosure and theoptional ancillary enclosure.


Environment Temperature Relative Humidity

Operating –33 _C to + 45 _Cplus a solar gain of1.2 kW/m2


Storage –45 _C to +70 _C. 8% to 100% relative humidity, not toexceed 30 g water / m3 air.


Structuralrequirements(mainenclosure)

There must be adequate clearance at the front of, and above, the enclosure foroperation and maintenance purposes. It is also recommended that there isadequate side clearance to open the doors to 120° (see Figure 2-1), and rearclearance of 150 mm is required to open the hood.

Enclosure ventilation entry is through vent panels in the doors, allowing acabinet to be placed close to a wall. However, a clearance of 150 mm isrequired for side cable entry (if used), between the cabinet and obstructions,such as a wall or another cabinet.

If an optional shroud is to be fitted, an additional 250 mm clearance is requiredon the left side of the enclosure.

Allow adequate clearance at the front and sides to allow for installation andmaintenance.



29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–7

Structuralrequirements(ancillaryenclosure)

There must be adequate clearance at the front of the ancillary enclosure foroperation and maintenance purposes.

The ancillary enclosure can be placed either on the right (recommended) or leftside of the main enclosure. The minimum distance between the ancillaryenclosure and the main enclosure depends on the method of cable entry usedfor the main enclosure and other factors, such as whether an optional cableshroud is fitted (only relevant if the ancillary enclosure is to be mounted to theleft of the main enclosure).

Enclosure siteplan

Figure 2-1 shows the site layout plan for a single enclosure.

NOTE The minimum clearance for side cable entry is notrequired if cable entry is through the base of theenclosure.

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ150 mm

FOR HOOD

1025 mmMINIMUMFRONT

CLEARANCE

1900 mm

800 mm

150 mm

1975 mm

OPTIONALSHROUD

250 mm

ENCLOSURE

Figure 2-1 Outdoor enclosure site layout plan view




68P02902W68-A

Ancillaryenclosure siteplan

Figure 2-2 shows the site layout plan for the optional ancillary enclosure wheninstalled next to a main enclosure.

NOTE The 85 mm minimum clearance between the mainenclosure and the ancillary enclosure is required for theflexible cable conduits.

MAIN ENCLOSURE

1900 mm

800 mm

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ

ANCILLARYENCLOSURE

85 mm min.285 mm max.

700 mm

250 mm

OPTIONALSHROUD

NOTE For the true width and depth of the ancillary enclosure,add 50 mm to allow for the overhang at the top of theenclosure.The cables from the ancillary enclosure will not reach theirconnection points in the main enclosure if the distancebetween the right side of the main enclosure and the leftside of the ancillary enclosure exceeds 285 mm.

Figure 2-2 Ancillary enclosure site layout plan view

GSM-208-423 Visiting the site

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–9

Visiting the site

Overview of sitevisit

When preparing to do work at a site and upon arrival, follow the instructionsprovided in this section.

Beforedeparture tosite

Before departing to the site:

1. Ensure that team members have adequate test equipment, tools, andhardware to carry out the task. Check for any special requirements.

2. Contact the person in charge of the site to advise of the team’s estimatedtime of arrival and the expected duration of their stay on the site. This willusually have been dealt with previously, but it is always advisable to makesure that the information has been passed on.

3. Ensure that the team read the site access details on each visit to a site aslocal regulations may change.

Arrival at allsites

When entering any site:

1. Do not enter the site until contact has been made with the OMC-R orMSC. Contact the local OMC-R and local MSC to announce the team’sarrival before entering the site.

2. Enter the site and check for site alarms, for example intruder alarms, thatmay have been activated by entry.

3. Read any local instructions.

Arriving atoccupied sites

In any exchange or occupied building, contact the person in charge or caretakerof the site, who will explain local regulations. This person may also advise teamson parking, rubbish removal, and canteen facilities.

GSM-208-423Visiting the site



68P02902W68-A

Arriving atunoccupiedsites

When entering an unoccupied site:

1. Do not enter the site until contact has been made with the OMC-R orMSC. Contact the local OMC-R and local MSC to announce the team’sarrival before entering the site.

2. Enter the site and check for site alarms, for example intruder alarms, thatmay have been activated by entry.

3. Advise the local OMC-R or MSC that the team is on site and indicate theexpected duration of time on site.

4. Arrange with the OMC-R or MSC to check the 2 Mb links as soon aspossible.

Leaving siteduringinstallation andoptimization

When leaving a site:

1. Contact the local OMC-R or MSC to announce the team’s departure.

2. Out of hours, if an alarm is fitted and the local MSC staff have gone home,contact the Network Control Centre or OMC-R and inform them of theteam’s departure.

3. Sign out of the site as necessary.

Rubbish on siteClear rubbish from the site on completion of the job, unless otherwise indicatedby the customer.

WARNING Do not burn rubbish, as packaging might give off toxicgases.

Rural sitesIt is the responsibility of the senior member of the team to ensure that allpersonnel on site are aware of the country code and, especially with respect towater authority sites, any relevant health regulations.

Adhere to these points of The Country Code:

S Guard against all risk of fire.

S Fasten all gates (remember site visits could be traced back if a complaintis made).

S Leave no litter.

S Drive carefully on country roads and observe speed restrictions at alltimes.

S Keep to the paths/tracks across farm land.

GSM-208-423 Visiting the site

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–11

On site safety

All personnel must:

S Ensure that under no circumstances should anyone move the enclosure(s)or cabinets without assistance. The enclosure(s) and cabinets must besafely positioned at all times.

S Wear supplied safety helmets when antenna or overhead work is inprogress, and when local regulations require them.

S Wear supplied safety goggles and dust masks when drilling. This isparticularly important when drilling overhead ironwork.

S Wear supplied ear protectors while drilling is in progress.

S Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.

Stop any work that you are supervising should any person in your team not beproperly protected, or be unaware of safety requirements.

When installing cable ties, even temporarily, cut the excess or tail properly. Thisis to prevent sharp edges inflicting injury when not cut flush with the lockingedge.

GSM-208-423Preparing the site



68P02902W68-A

Preparing the site

Introduction tosite preparation

This section provides a general overview on the preparation of a site, and siterequirements. For specific sites, refer to the site-specific documentation.

Base sitestructure

The base site structure should be designed to meet accepted cellular systemspecifications. Additionally, the site must meet the environmental and electricaloperating criteria detailed previously in Site requirements and considerations.

Siterequirements

The customer should provide secure access from unauthorized personnel,ample protection from fire, and adequate lighting and clearance at the front andrear of the equipment for operation and maintenance. Additionally, four cableducts with sufficient space for communications cables, power cables, earthcables, and antenna RF cables should be provided.

Site access

The site access road and equipment receiving area must be constructed ofasphalt, concrete, or other suitable load bearing aggregate capable ofsupporting the transportation vehicle and a fully equipped enclosure. The areaavailable, and the overhead clearance, must be sufficient to accommodateturning or reversing of the transportation vehicle and must allow the vehicle todepart after unloading.

Ensure there is a minimum overhead clearance of 6 m to enable heavyequipment to be lifted from the transport vehicle. Take special care if the liftingoperation is in the vicinity of overhead cables.

NOTE Ensure the area is clear of standing water, fallen leaves,mud, and building debris.

Site layout

The site layout plans are provided in Site requirements and considerations.Figure 2-1 shows the site layout plan with dimensions for an outdoor enclosureonly. Figure 2-2 shows a typical site layout plan for an outdoor enclosure withan optional ancillary enclosure.

GSM-208-423 Earthing the site

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–13

Earthing the site

Overview

The following provides information on suggested earthing procedures for anoutdoor site.

The separate earth systems must be isolated from each other to facilitateperiodic testing of the earth systems. Earth inspection pits are provided for thispurpose.

Earthingrequirements

Each enclosure site external earth must be assessed on an individual site basis,as conditions will vary considerably depending on local soil conditions and sitetopography. It is essential that a site survey and soil resistance test beperformed before installation. The site architect defines the site and foundationearthing requirements to ensure a resistance of less than 10 ohms. A typical siteearthing plan is shown in Figure 2-3.

FOUNDATION

ENCLOSURE

COPPERTAPE

EARTH CONDUCTORINTO ENCLOSURE

VIA PVC PIPE

CROSS BONDING

MAST BONDING (ONESHOWN FOR CLARITY)

FOUNDATIONMETALWORK BONDING

FOUNDATIONMETALWORK BONDINGFOUR PLACES MINIMUM

FOUNDATIONMETALWORK

TESTCONNECTIONINSPECTION

BOX

EARTH RODS WITHINSPECTION BOXES FOR

SYSTEM TEST

CROSSBONDING TESTCONNECTIONINSPECTION

BOX

MAST

Figure 2-3 Typical site earthing plan for open field site

Earth electrodesystem

The earth electrode system consists of a series of interconnected earthelectrodes (minimum of four) that are located outside the foundation reinforcingmetalwork. Refer to Figure 2-3 for details. The earth rods should be connectedtogether using TCO30 solid tape conductors, avoiding any sharp bends; aminimum bend radius of 250 mm is recommended.

GSM-208-423Earthing the site



68P02902W68-A

Cross bonding

Foundation metalwork must be connected to the earth electrode network. Theearth system must also be cross-bonded to an adjacent antenna mast, with twoconnections made between the two systems. All earth cable terminations mustbe crimped, clamped or welded; soldered joints are not permitted.

Earthingprocedure

The main enclosure must be earthed as detailed in this procedure. Makeprovision for routeing the earth cables into the site and to the enclosure beforebeginning installation of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets into the enclosure.

NOTE The optional ancillary enclosure does not have a separateearth. It is earthed through the Principal Ground Bar(PGB) in the main enclosure.

Excavate the site to accommodate the foundation to a depth determined by thesite architect. For the earth components to be used, refer to Figure 2-3 andproceed as follows:

1. Drive a minimum of four copper earth rods 2.4 m long below the surface,and connect these rods together with 70 mm Cross Sectional Area (CSA)solid conductor.

2. Connect the earth rods to the cabinet earth busbar via a 70 mm CSA solidconductor.

3. Check that the earth electrode installation resistance is less than 10 ohms.If the resistance is greater than 10 ohms, install more earth rods to bringthe resistance within specification.

4. Cross-bond the earth system to the adjacent antenna mast earth withconductors of 70 mm CSA, buried at a depth of not less than 500 mm.

5. Bond equipment such as fences, fuel tanks, metal buildings, or steelbuilding skids associated with the site to the closest earthing rod orbonding wire.

GSM-208-423 Earthing the site

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–15

Earth electrodetesting

Three methods of earth electrode test (earth mat) are used and should betested as detailed in BS7671 16th Edition (or equivalent country regulations):

S Fall of potential.

S 61.8% rule.

S Slope method.

The method of test to be used at a specific site is determined by the siteconditions, the extent of the earth system and the limitations of the siteboundaries. The method used at the site is to be determined from the earthelectrode compliancy certificate and repeated annually. Before proceeding withthe test, ensure that the resistance of the test leads is less than 0.05 ohms.

Fall of potential

This method of testing is used for measuring resistance of earth electrodes butis only practical on single earth electrode systems.

Drive the current test spike and potential spike into the ground as shown inFigure 2-4. Perform the three resistance tests and check that the average of thethree tests is less than 10.0 ohms.

61.8% Rule

This method applies when the three electrodes (earth, potential and current) canbe positioned in a straight line, the soil is homogenous and also when singleelectrode systems are being used.

Set up the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-4 with the potential spike placedat a distance of 61.8% of the distance from the earth electrode to the currenttest spike. A greater accuracy can be achieved by increasing the number ofreadings.

GSM-208-423Earthing the site



68P02902W68-A

Slope method

This method applies to large earth systems. Refer to Figure 2-4, but insert thepotential spike at a number of points between the earth system and the currentspike. A minimum of six readings must be taken to plot a graph and this graphcompared to published tables to calculate the resistance.

On completion of testing, complete and sign the earth electrode testdocumentation (Forms of Completion and Inspection Certificate).

PAT Tester

C2 P2 C1/P1

(Test 2)

3 m

(Test 3)

25 m

Potentialspike

Earth electrode

50 m

(Test 1)

Current testspike

3 m

Figure 2-4 Earth electrode test setup

GSM-208-423 Preparing the foundation

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–17

Preparing the foundation

Overview offoundationpreparation

NOTE The information contained here also applies to foundationpreparation for the optional ancillary enclosure.

The enclosure must be installed on a separate concrete base of sufficient sizeand strength to accommodate the enclosure containing two fully equippedHorizonmacro indoor cabinets and (if applicable), the optional ancillaryenclosure. Concrete base requirements to be determined by the structuralengineer.

WARNING Excavations exceeding 1.2 m in depth must be adequatelyshored to prevent land slip or trench collapse. Excavatedearth must not be placed within 1 m of the excavationedge.

The foundation depth is determined by a soil survey performed by the sitearchitect, but must be of sufficient strength to withstand a maximum grossweight of 710 kg and 105 knot (120 mph) winds on the enclosure front or rear.

If an ancillary enclosure is to be installed with the main enclosure, thefoundation must be able to withstand the combined maximum gross weight ofboth enclosures (1460 kg).

NOTE Refer to Site requirements and considerations in thischapter for details of equipment weights.

GSM-208-423Preparing the foundation



68P02902W68-A

Enclosurefoundation

The following cross-sectional diagram in Figure 2-5 shows a typical foundationfor the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure or the ancillary enclosure(bolts and anchors not to scale).

CONCRETEFOUNDATION

M12 ANCHOR

M12 BOLTS USED TO SECUREENCLOSURE

Figure 2-5 Typical enclosure foundation

Preparing thefoundation

To prepare the foundation:

1. Excavate the foundation (refer to Figure 2-5).

WARNING Do not place excavated earth within 1 m of the excavationedge.

2. Erect concrete shuttering to produce the required base.

3. Position the cable ducts (if low level cable entry method is in use). Ensurethat they are positioned so that they face towards the required cable entrypoint on the enclosure.

4. Make the foundation from 20 mm mix concrete with the cable ducts (Ifused) mounted in position. If required, locally thicken the areas around thefoundation bolts.

CAUTION Ensure the concrete is laid to give a water run off withtapered edges. Where a field site, other than an alreadypermanent hard standing, is laid, the foundation musthave a bevelled finish.To avoid overstressing the enclosure, use a spirit level ortheodolite to check that the concrete base surface is levelto 3 mm across diagonals.

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A i

Chapter 3

Installing the enclosure

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii












GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A




GSM-208-423 Installation overview

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–1

Installation overview

Introduction toinstallation

This chapter provides the information required to install the Horizonmacro 12carrier outdoor enclosure and its internal and external interfaces.

CAUTION Ensure that all site associated equipment is completelyinstalled before carrying out commissioning.

NOTE Some site equipment may not be produced by Motorola(antennas, for example). Refer to site-specificdocumentation and non-Motorola vendor instructions.

Before starting an installation, ensure the site has been prepared according tothe description summarised in Chapter 2, Site preparation, Preparationoverview, and the site-specific documentation.

Installationsections

Installation comprises the sections shown in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Installation sections in this chapter

Section Description

Equipment deliveryand unpacking

Information on delivery packaging, and how tounpack the equipment.

Fitting enclosure ontobase

Provides procedure for securing enclosure toprepared base.

Earthing and transientprotection

Describes site earthing procedures and enclosureinternal earths.

Installing the rectifiers Describes the procedure for installing the rectifiers inthe enclosure.

Installing the internalbatteries

Describes the procedure for connecting up theinternal batteries.

Installing cables andconnecting power

Describes installing RF, power, and comms cables.Also describes installing the optional high level cableentry plates and shroud.

Connecting inputpower

Provides detailed descriptions for connecting power.

E1/T1 linetesting

If an E1/T1 line has been provided, contact the local MSC and, at the earliestopportunity, arrange to test the line back to the MSC.

GSM-208-423Installation overview



68P02902W68-A

Enclosurecomponents

Figure 3-1 shows a filled enclosure with main components identified. The rightdoor and hood are omitted for clarity.

BACKUPBATTERIES

RECTIFIERS

HMS 1


(BTS 1)

AC AND DCPOWER

DISTRIBUTIONUNITS

POWERCONTROLMODULE

HEATER

6 U SPACE FORCUSTOMEREQUIPMENT

ALARM INTERFACEMODULE



(BTS 0)

RECTIFIERS(HIDDEN)

DC CONNECTORPANEL

(HIDDEN)

FANTRAY

FANTRAY

(HIDDEN)

LAPTOP COMPUTERSUPPORT BRACKET

LOCATION OFLEFT HOOD LATCH

Figure 3-1 Enclosure with components identified


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–3

Equipmentpackage units

Most of the enclosure equipment is supplied already fitted into the 12 carrieroutdoor enclosure. The only exceptions to this are itemized in the following list:

S Rectifiers.

S Battery pack (4 monoblocs).

S Horizonmacro indoor cabinet(s).

These items are packed separately. The battery pack must not be installed untilafter the enclosure is sited in position.

The following ancillary items required during installation are packed separatelywithin the enclosure:

S Low level cable entry plates.

S Spreader plates.

S Cover plates for mounting access holes.

S Connecting cable for monoblocs.

S Grommets for power and comms cables.

Optional equipment which may also be supplied separately is as follows:

S High level hardware kit.

S Cable shroud kit (for use with high level hardware kit).

S Antenna feeder cable termination bracket kit (for use with high levelhardware and shroud kits).

S Ancillary enclosure (refer to Chapter 5 for installation information).

GSM-208-423Equipment delivery and packaging



68P02902W68-A

Equipment delivery and packaging

Delivery andpackagingoverview

Before the enclosure equipment arrives, installation personnel should designatean area at the site where the equipment can be unloaded. This area should alsobe suitable for unpacking the equipment, if necessary. Consult with the heavyfreight or moving company and the owners of the site to select this area.

CAUTION The enclosure equipment should be delivered to the sitewhile still contained in its packaging. This is to protect theenclosure from damage and moisture whilst in transit.

The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company,along with the necessary moving dollies and padding. Use the dollies andpadding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.

NOTE Retain all paperwork supplied with the enclosure.

Packaging

The equipment enclosure is shipped in packaging similar to that shown inFigure 3-2.

CARDBOARDDELIVERY

BOX

METAL SECURINGBAND WOODEN PALLET

ENCLOSURE

CARDBOARD LID(TEMPLATE PRINTED ON UNDERSIDE)

METAL SECURINGBAND

Figure 3-2 Typical shipping packaging (front of delivery box removed for clarity)

GSM-208-423 Weather conditions affecting unpacking/installation

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–5

Weather conditions affecting unpacking/installation

Overview ofweatherconsiderations

Before beginning the unpacking/installation process, it is important to read andtake into account the following information concerning the climatic conditions atthe intended site.

Weatherconditions

WARNING Due consideration should be given to the hazards of windand other inclement weather conditions when installing theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. This isespecially important when using a ladder to gain access.Use discretion at all times. Do not climb a ladder,scaffolding, or use some other similar method ofaccess, if you feel unsafe to do so under theseweather conditions. Do not attempt to open the enclosure doors if the windspeed exceeds 25 knots (30 mph).

Maintenancecover

Motorola recommend the use of a maintenance cover for access to theenclosure during inclement weather conditions.

NOTE The maintenance cover is not supplied with theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and should beprovided by the customer, if required.

Installation procedures for the enclosure are dependent on the weatherconditions. There are three situations where the recommended guidelinesshould be considered before commencing work:

S No access.

S Access with maintenance cover.

S Access without maintenance cover.

GSM-208-423Weather conditions affecting unpacking/installation



68P02902W68-A

No access

Access should not be attempted to the enclosure during the following actual orimminent inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance cover:

S Winds in excess of 25 knots (30 mph).

S Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.

S During an electrical storm.

Access with maintenance cover

Access may be made to the enclosure under the following conditions with theuse of the maintenance cover:

S Wind speeds of less than 25 knots (30 mph).

S Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.

S Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause aproblem.

Access without maintenance cover

Access may be made under the following conditions without the use of themaintenance cover:


S No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.

Under these conditions the cover of the enclosure may be removed.

GSM-208-423 Unpacking and preparing the enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–7

Unpacking and preparing the enclosure

Tools

Use these tools to unpack, prepare and install the enclosure:

Claw hammer (or similar levering device).Knife.Screwdriver set.Spirit level.Socket set.280 mm adjustable spanner.Torque wrench.Lifting straps and 4 x M16 eyebolts (swivel head preferred) and suitablehydraulic lifting gear. If fixed eyebolts are used, they must be of thecollared type.

Avoidingcondensationbuild up

Do not unpack the enclosure until power is available and ready to be connected.Condensation can build up inside the enclosure if it is unpacked and leftstanding without being switched on.

GSM-208-423Unpacking and preparing the enclosure



68P02902W68-A

Safetyconsiderations

For each enclosure to be installed, consider the following safety information:

WARNING Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosures are fitted withfour lifting points, designed to accommodate M16 swivelhead eyebolts, built into the enclosure base. If swivel headeyebolts are used to lift the enclosure, they must bemanufactured to CE conformity, and must have a safeweight load of 710 kg each.Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually checkeach one for damage. If any damage is apparent, DONOT USE. The eyebolts must not be overtightened; handtight is sufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the liftingpoint so that no thread is left exposed.Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosures are heavyand should not be installed without the use of liftingequipment unless sufficient personnel are available toensure that Health and Safety regulations are notbreached.Even before the installation of Horizonmacro indoorcabinets, the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure can weigh up to490 kg. When fully equipped with two indoor cabinets,weight increases to 710 kg. Handle the enclosure withextreme caution, and in accordance with any local healthand safety regulations.Motorola recommend the use of slings in conjunction withhydraulic lifting apparatus for moving and positioning theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure andassociated indoor cabinets.In addition to these points, refer to and comply with anylocal regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment.

For the subsequent use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that governthe use of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. Ifthe eyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.

The installation support procedures are described in the following sections.

GSM-208-423 Unpacking and preparing the enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–9

Enclosureaccessprocedures

Enclosure access procedures include:

S Door and hood opening and closing.

Door opening and closing

Both doors have a spring loaded locking handle and operate as follows:



3. Turn the handle a quarter turn to the left to open the door.




NOTE When the equipment is active, a door open alarm isgenerated. The alarm can be cancelled by taping downthe door microswitch buttons.

7. To close the doors, press down on the orange locking clip on the centre ofthe gas strut on each door, close doors firmly and turn the handles aquarter turn anticlockwise (for the left door) or clockwise (for the right door)and push in until the handles are flush with the doors. The doors lockautomatically.

Hood opening and closing

NOTE The hood can only be opened and closed when bothdoors are open.

The hood is opened as follows:

1. Ensure both enclosure doors are open.

2. Remove the four hood securing screws from the front lip of the hood.

3. Release the two internal hood latches (one on each side – seeFigure 3-1).

4. Lift the hood to its maximum height, as defined by the two gas struts.

To close the hood, pull the strap attached to the centre of the hood inner panel.The hood will lower gently to the horizontal position. Ensure the hood strap isstowed neatly inside the enclosure. Secure the hood using the two latches andfour securing screws.

GSM-208-423Unpacking and preparing the enclosure



68P02902W68-A

Enclosureunpacking andpreparation

The following describes the procedure for unpacking the equipment.

NOTE It is recommended that the installer reads through thefollowing procedure before starting to unpack and installthe equipment.

Dismantling the shipping packaging and obtaining templateTo dismantle the shipping packaging and obtain template:

1. Cut the plastic banding that secures the packaging.

2. Lift the lid free of the box.

3. Deliver the lid (template printed on the underside) to the site forpositioning on the concrete base.

4. Undo the taped fastening on the box side.

5. Unwrap the box from around the enclosure.

The enclosure is now ready to be prepared for lifting.

Preparing the enclosure for lifting

WARNING Even before the installation of Horizonmacro indoorcabinets, the enclosure can weigh up to 490 kg. Handlewith extreme caution and in accordance with local healthand safety regulations.

To prepare the enclosure for lifting and remove it from the wooden deliverybase:

CAUTION Take care to avoid damaging the enclosure in any way,especially by scratching the outer surfaces.

1. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of anydamage to the transport company.

NOTE If required (for rooftop installation, for example), theHorizonmacro indoor cabinet(s) can be installed at thistime before lifting the enclosure. Refer to Chapter 4 forinstallation information.

2. Ensure the enclosure hood and doors are closed securely.

3. Refer to local regulations regarding the lifting of heavy objects and refer toSafety considerations described earlier in this chapter before lifting theenclosure.

The enclosure can now be lifted gently and manoeuvred to the concrete base.

Safe disposal ofpackingmaterial

The packing material used by Motorola is non-returnable, and should bedisposed of safely.

GSM-208-423 Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–11

Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template

Introduction tomounting boltanchorinstallation

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is supplied with a drillingtemplate printed on the inside of the packaging lid. The template is laid down onthe concrete base and pilot holes are drilled through the cardboard and into theconcrete in the positions indicated for the enclosure mounting bolt anchors.

NOTE Mounting bolt anchors are not required if the enclosure isto be mounted above ground level, for example on acustom made support frame. In such cases, the templateis used to mark the drilling positions on the support framefor the mounting bolts.

View oftemplate

Figure 3-3 shows how the cardboard lid is marked to provide a drilling templatefor the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

DRILL POSITIONMARKER

Figure 3-3 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor drilling template

GSM-208-423Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template



68P02902W68-A

Procedure formarking bolthole positionsusing thetemplate

The procedure for marking the position of the mounting holes for the M12anchor bolts is as follows:

1. Lay the cardboard enclosure template centrally on the concrete base.

WARNING Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes.

CAUTION Drilling concrete flooring produces cement dust, which isharmful to equipment and wiring. Protect the enclosureand any nearby equipment from dust. Use a tarpaulin,cloth, or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment.Clean up any accumulated debris from the anchorinstallation carefully before exposing the equipment. Usedrilling equipment suitable for cutting steel reinforcedconcrete.

2. Using a 6 mm drill bit, drill four pilot holes through the cardboard and intothe concrete in the positions shown on the template. Remove thetemplate.

3. Check that the distances between the pilot holes are correct (seeFigure 3-3) before starting the procedure to install the enclosure anchorbolts.

NOTE If the optional ancillary enclosure is being installed at thesame time as the main enclosure, the mounting holepositions for this can also be marked out at this point (seeChapter 5 for further details).


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–13

Procedure forinstallingenclosure boltanchors

The pilot holes in the concrete base must be drilled out to accept the M12anchor bolts. Mounting washers are supplied with the enclosure, but bushesand M12 steel bolts must be supplied by the customer.


CAUTION Drilling concrete flooring produces cement dust, which isharmful to equipment and wiring. Protect the cabinets andany nearby equipment from dust. Use a tarpaulin, cloth, orplastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Clean upany accumulated debris from the anchor installationcarefully before exposing the equipment. Use drillingequipment suitable for cutting steel reinforced concrete.

1. Using the four pilot holes as a guide, drill the concrete base to a depth andclearance for the M12 anchor bolts using a suitable drill bit.

2. Insert the M12 mounting anchors in the holes in the base.

3. Fit the supplied washers to the anchor bolts. Insert the anchor bolts intothe anchor.

4. Place the supplied spreader plates against each anchor bolt and tensionup the anchor bolts to expand the anchors.

5. Partially unscrew the M12 bolts from the anchors so that approximately25 mm is protruding above the base (the bolts will act as a guide for theholes in the enclosure base). Remove the spreader plates and retain forsecuring the enclosure to the base.

GSM-208-423Fitting the enclosure onto its base



68P02902W68-A

Fitting the enclosure onto its base

Procedure forfitting anenclosure

To fit the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure onto the concrete base:

WARNING Even without the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets, a 12carrier outdoor enclosure can weigh up to 490 kg. Whenfitted with two fully equipped indoor cabinets, this weightincreases to 710 kg.Observe proper lifting precautions and handle eachenclosure with extreme caution to avoid tipping.

1. Lift and then lower the enclosure onto the concrete base, ensuring that themounting holes in the enclosure base line up with the anchor bolts in theconcrete base.

2. For each anchor bolt, insert the supplied spreader plate through theaccess hole in the base so that it butts up against the anchor bolt (seeFigure 3-4).

3. Tighten up the anchor bolts to the correct torque while holding thespreader plate in position. (See Chapter 2, Site preparation, Siterequirements and considerations for torque values.)

4. Remove each of the eyebolts from their threaded holes (located on thebase of the enclosure), and return the eyebolts to the tool kit for futureuse.

5. Fit the supplied cover plates over the mounting access holes that will notbe used for low level cable entry and secure in position.

ANCHOR BOLT

SPREADER PLATE

Figure 3-4 Fitting the spreader plate to the anchor bolt

GSM-208-423 Earthing and transient protection

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–15

Earthing and transient protection

Site earthing

This part of the manual summarizes general procedures for earthing the site.Refer to the Grounding guidelines for cellular radio installations instructions,provided in Cellular system engineering guide 68P81150E62, for detailedearthing information.

WARNING Each enclosure must be earthed separately. Enclosuresmust not be daisy chained together.

S The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth pointas its power source).

S Provision should be made for earthing the site before beginning theinstallation of the enclosure. See Chapter 2, Site preparation, Earthingthe site.

S An M12 earthing terminal (stud) is located on either side of the enclosurebase.

S Refer to the site-specific documentation for detailed site earthinginformation.

Transient andlightningprotection

All E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transientprotection as part of the BIB or T43 board. Ensure the receive and transmitantenna connections to the enclosure are fed through coaxial electromagneticprotection (EMP) devices.

GSM-208-423Installing the rectifiers



68P02902W68-A

Installing the rectifiers

Introduction torectifierinstallation

The rectifiers must be ordered separately from the enclosure and indoorcabinets. For this reason, they are packed separately and must be installed afterthe enclosure has been installed in position.

A minimum of two and a maximum of five rectifiers may be installed in theenclosure. Table 3-2 shows the configuration options for the rectifiers.

Table 3-2 Rectifier configurations

No. of rectifiers Configuration

2 Single BTS, no redundancy option.

3 Single BTS, redundancy provided.

4 Two BTSs, no redundancy option.

5 Two BTSs, redundancy provided.

Figure 3-5 shows an illustration of the rectifier module.

Figure 3-5 The rectifier module

GSM-208-423 Installing the rectifiers

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–17

Rectifierinstallationprocedure

CAUTION Handle the rectifier with care; the module weighs 4.6 kg.

To install the rectifiers, proceed as follows:

1. Open the doors of the enclosure and identify the mounting positions forthe rectifiers, depending on how many are to be installed (see Figure 3-6).For single BTS installations, install rectifiers 0 and 1. For two BTSinstallations, install rectifiers 0 to 3. Rectifier 4 is for system redundancy(one or two BTS installations).

2. Carefully unpack the rectifiers and inspect for signs of damage.

3. Insert each rectifier in position in the rack. Ensure that each rectifier ispushed fully home into its connector on the backplane before tighteningthe two M6 screws. Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm.

The procedure for installing the rectifiers is now complete.

NOTE The rectifiers are all connected to a common supply railand could therefore be installed in any slot. However, theyMUST be installed as shown in Figure 3-6 to correspondwith the circuit breaker designations on the front of the dcdistribution panel.

RECTIFIER 0RECTIFIER 1RECTIFIER 2

RECTIFIER 3RECTIFIER 4

PDU APDU B

Figure 3-6 Rectifier identification

GSM-208-423Installing the internal batteries



68P02902W68-A

Installing the internal batteries

Introduction toinstalling theinternalbatteries

For safety reasons the internal batteries, consisting of four 12 V monoblocs, aresupplied separately from the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. Thebatteries must be installed and connected as soon as the enclosure is securedin its permanent location. Straps are provided in the enclosure to secure themonoblocs in position and prevent any movement after installation.

Procedure forinstalling theinternalbatteries

NOTE If cable entry to the enclosure is through the base, installthe cables before the monoblocs as removal of the accessplates at the rear of the battery compartment may berequired (see Installing cables and connecting power).Also, if the optiional ancillary enclosure is being installedat the same time as the main enclosure, do not install themonoblocs in the main enclosure until after the ancillaryenclosure has been installed (see Chapter 5 for ancillaryenclosure installation details).

The procedure for installing the internal monoblocs is as follows:

1. Ensure the battery isolator switch located on the top of the batterycompartment is OFF.

2. Remove the battery compartment protective cover by undoing the tensecuring screws.

3. Thread the four battery retaining straps through the slits in the base of thetwo shelves in the battery compartment (see Figure 3-7).

4. Remove the monoblocs from their packaging. Position two monoblocs oneach shelf and secure in place with the straps provided. Lifting straps areprovided on the front and rear of each monobloc. Smear light grease onthe monobloc terminals.

5. Using the links and cable provided, connect the monobloc terminals inseries as shown in Figure 3-8. Connect the thermal probe from J5 on theAIM to the positive terminal of the right monobloc on the upper shelf.

NOTE All inter-shelf cabling must run up the front of the uppershelf (see Figure 3-8), otherwise the compartment coverwill not fit properly.

GSM-208-423 Installing the internal batteries

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–19

6. Undo the two protective cover securing screws on the underside of theisolator switch and remove the cover. Connect the blue (–) isolator switchcable to the negative terminal on monobloc No. 4. Connect the black (+)cable to the positive terminal on monobloc No. 1. Connect the free ends ofthese cables to the isolator switch. Refit the switch protective cover.

7. Refit the battery compartment cover.

Batteryinstallationdiagrams

Figure 3-7 shows the battery retaining straps in position on a shelf.

Figure 3-7 Fitting the battery retaining straps in the battery compartment

Figure 3-8 shows the cable connections for the batteries. Battery retainingstraps are removed for clarity.


BATTERY LINK

BATTERY LINK


ISOLATOR SWITCH


Figure 3-8 Battery terminal connections

GSM-208-423Installing cables and connecting power



68P02902W68-A

Installing cables and connecting power

Overview ofpower and earthcabling

On delivery, the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is configured for a230 V ac three phase (star connected) power supply. The possible alternativeconfiguration of ac power is 230 V single phase.

This section describes the procedures for connecting power and earth cabling tothe enclosure.

WARNING Do not daisy chain together earths from differentenclosures.Do not make ac input power connections at the ac supplyto the enclosure at this time. Connecting input power isthe final installation procedure in this chapter.Enclosures must be earthed with a conductor capable ofcarrying the full fault current of the overcurrent protectiondevice.

Power specifications can be found in Chapter 2, Site preparation, Siterequirements and considerations.

Cable routeing

CAUTION Ensure that covers are fitted to any unused connectors onthe enclosure interconnection panel. The covers protectthe connectors from damage by static electricity or foreignmatter.

Adequate means should be provided for routeing cables from the main powersource to the equipment, such as a cable trough or conduit.

NOTE The current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuousservice is affected by all of the following factors(references: IEC 364, BS7671):– Ambient temperature.– Grouping.– Partial or total enclosure in thermal insulating material.– Frequency (ac only).

GSM-208-423 Installing cables and connecting power

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–21

Enclosureearthing points

The main earth connection point is located on the side of the enclosure base.M12 earthing studs are fitted to both sides for optional connection to the right orleft side of the enclosure. The connection is for protective earthing, lightningprotection and functional earthing of the enclosure.

Within the enclosure, a copper earth bar, the Principal Ground Bar (PGB), isconnected to the base and provides earth connections for all internalequipment. The PGB is electrically insulated from the enclosure structure.

Preparing forconnection

To prepare for connecting ac power cables to the outdoor enclosure:

1. Position the screened power cable, complete with earth, in a conduit.

2. Route the conduit to the ac power cable entry point on the appropriateside of the enclosure.

Cable entry tothe enclosure

There are several methods of cable entry to the enclosure. If required, cablesmay be installed using a combination of the methods listed below.

NOTE Installation of the optional ancillary enclosure may affectthe cable entry options available.

The normal methods of cable entry to the enclosure are as follows:

S Low level, left side.

S Low level, right side.

S From beneath the enclosure (requires the enclosure to be mounted off theground).

The following optional methods of cable entry are also possible, provided therequired kit has been ordered:

S High level (left side only).

S High level, using the optional shroud kit.

S High level, using the optional shroud kit and the optional cable terminationbracket kit.




68P02902W68-A

Low level cable entry

Low level cable entry to the enclosure is through the base, on the left or rightside, or both sides.

NOTE Low level RF link cable kits are not available for thisequipment. If low level cable entry to the enclosure isrequired, custom length RF link cables must be suppliedby the customer.

The following procedure describes how to install the power, comms and RFcables on the right side of the enclosure using the low level cable entry plates(see Figure 3-9). The procedure for installing cables on the left side is similar(and recommended if an optional ancillary enclosure is also to be installed).Differences between the two methods are described at the appropriate places inthe text.

1. Undo the 12 screws that secure each of the two access plates to the floorof the enclosure and remove the plates (see Figure 3-10). If cable accessfrom the left side of the enclosure only is required, it is not necessary toremove the right hand access plate.

2. Select the correct diameter cable entry plate for the RF feeder cables andscrew the lower half of the plate to the base. Mount the feeder cables inthe lower half of the plate, fit the upper half and screw in position.

3. Measure the length of RF link cable required and, referring to Figure 3-10,feed the link cable down the channel behind the battery compartment andacross the base of the enclosure to the appropriate feeder cable. Repeatthe process for each RF cable.

NOTE If access is required to the channel behind the batterycompartment, remove the compartment cover and thenremove the two access covers mounted vertically at therear of the compartment.

4. Working through the access hole in the base of the enclosure, connect thelink cables to the feeder cables. M6 studs are provided on the inside of theaccess hole for earth connections (see Figure 3-10). If required, lightningprotection devices can be installed here.

Make the connections between the RF link cables and the SURF/Txblocks as soon as the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets have been installed(see Chapter 4).

5. Screw the power/comms cable entry plate to the base of the enclosure.

6. Select suitably sized grommets from those supplied with the enclosure. Fitthem onto the power and comms cables before feeding the cables throughthe holes in the cable entry plate to the appropriate equipment in theenclosure. Fix the grommets in position on the cable entry plates.

7. Refit all access plates.


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–23

POWER/COMMSPLATE

RF PLATE(2 HALVES)

POWER CABLEHOLE

COMMS CABLEHOLES (x 4)

ENCLOSUREEARTH STUD

Figure 3-9 Low level cable access plates (right side shown)

EARTH STUDS(COVER PLATE REMOVED)

ACCESS COVERPLATE

RF FEEDERCABLE

RF PLATE

RF LINKCABLE PATH

CHANNEL ATREAR OFBATTERY

COMPARTMENT

Figure 3-10 Example of low level RF cable routeing through the enclosure




68P02902W68-A

Cable entry from beneath the enclosure

If the enclosure is mounted above ground level (on a custom made supportframe, for example), the cables can be fed directly into the left side of theenclosure from below. The cables are then connected as if they were fed intothe enclosure through the low level cable entry plates on the left side of theenclosure.

Figure 3-11 shows an example of how cable entry through the base of theenclosure is achieved.

EARTH STUDS(COVER PLATE REMOVED)

RF FEEDERCABLE

RF LINKCABLE PATH

CHANNEL ATREAR OFBATTERY

COMPARTMENT

CUSTOMSUPPORT

FRAME

Figure 3-11 Cable entry example through the base of the enclosure


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–25

High level cable entry (requires high level hardware kit SVLN1440)

The high level hardware kit comprises three cable entry plates: two RF platesand one power/comms plate. The plates can be fitted in any order on the leftside of the enclosure to meet different customer requirements.

Proceed as follows to install the power, comms and RF cables using the highlevel cable entry plates:

1. Undo the eight screws that secure each outer wall cover plate to the leftside of the enclosure and remove the cover plates.

2. Open the enclosure doors, undo the four hood retaining screws and lift thehood to access the inner wall cover plates. Remove and discard the innerwall cover plates to expose the cable entry holes.

3. Connect an earth cable to the inside face of each cable entry plate usingan M6 nut and spring washer (see Figure 3-12).

4. Determine which plate is to be fitted in which hole position. From theoutside of the enclosure, feed the earth cable through the hole and placethe plate in position over the hole. Secure the plate in place using theeight screws previously used to secure the blanking plate.

5. Repeat the installation procedure for the remaining two plates. Connectthe three earth cables to the PGB inside the enclosure.

6. Determine which holes in which plates are to be used and remove theappropriate blanking plugs. These have the same nut fixing as 7/16bulkhead connectors.

7. Connect the external RF feeder cables to the connectors on the RF cableentry plates. Earth studs are provided on each RF cable entry plate forearth connections.

8. Connect the RF link cables between the SURF module or Tx blocks(depending on requirements) and the RF cable entry plates as soon as theHorizonmacro indoor cabinets have been installed (see Chapter 4).

NOTE A high level RF link cable kit (one required for each sector)is available for connecting between the high level cableentry plates and the SURF module or Tx blocks on theindoor cabinet. The kit number is SVLN1283.

9. Feed the power and comms cables through the holes in the power/commscable entry plate. Select suitably sized grommets from those supplied withthe enclosure, fit them onto the cables and fix in position on the cableentry plate.

10. Make the internal connections to the appropriate equipment in theenclosure.

Figure 3-12 shows the detail of the high level cable entry plates. Figure 3-13shows the side of the enclosure with the plates installed.




68P02902W68-A

POWER/COMMS PLATE

RF PLATE (x 2)

OUTSIDE FACE INSIDE FACE

OUTSIDE FACE INSIDE FACE

POWER CABLEBLANKING PLUG

COMMS CABLEBLANKING PLUG

(x 4)

GASKETM6 NUT

SPRING WASHERPLAIN WASHER

EARTH CABLE

GASKETM6 NUT

SPRING WASHERPLAIN WASHER

EARTH CABLE

RF CABLEBLANKING PLUG

(x 6)EARTH STUD

(x 6)

Figure 3-12 Detail drawing of the high level cable entry plates

POWER/COMMSPLATE

RF PLATES

Figure 3-13 High level cable entry plates fitted in position


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–27

High level cable entry using the optional shroud kit

The shroud kit (number SVLN1442 – 1446) is an option for use only with thehigh level cable entry kit, and provides additional environmental protection.

The kit comprises a shroud and two cable securing brackets, and is suitable foruse with antenna feeder cables of up to 1/2 inch diameter.

The following procedure for installing the shroud kit assumes that the high levelhardware kit has already been installed.

1. Screw each of the two cable securing brackets to the left side of theenclosure using four screws supplied with the kit (see Figure 3-14).

2. Connect the antenna feeder cables to the connectors on the high level RFcable entry plates.

3. Feed the power and comms cables through the power/comms cable entryplate, as described previously in High level cable entry.

4. Secure all cables to the cable securing brackets using cable ties.

5. Fit the shroud over the cables and fix to the enclosure using six screws.

CABLESECURINGBRACKETS

SHROUD

Figure 3-14 Fitting the shroud kit to the enclosure




68P02902W68-A

High level cable entry using the optional cable termination bracketkit

NOTE The optional cable termination bracket kit can only befitted in conjunction with the optional high level cable entryand shroud kits.

The cable termination bracket kit (number SVLN1483) is an option for use onlywith the high level cable entry kit and the shroud kit. It allows antenna cables ofvarious sizes to be connected to the enclosure

The kit comprises two cable termination plates, and is suitable for use withantenna feeder cables of between 1/2 inch and 15/8 inch diameter .

The following procedure for installing the cable termination bracket kit assumesthat the high level hardware kit has already been installed.

1. Screw the inner plate to the side of the enclosure using eight screwssupplied with the kit (see Figure 3-15).

2. Connect up to seven antenna feeder cables to the plate.

3. Connect link cables between the antenna feeder cables and the high levelRF plates.

4. Screw the outer plate to the inner plate, as shown in Figure 3-15.

5. Connect up to five antenna feeder cables to the plate.

6. Connect link cables between the antenna feeder cables and the high levelRF plates.

7. Route the power and comms cables up the side of the inner or outer plate,as required (see Figure 3-16). Feed the power and comms cables throughthe power/comms cable entry plate, as described previously in High levelcable entry.

8. Mount the shroud over the cable termination brackets and secure to theside of the enclosure using six screws (see Figure 3-17). Take care not totrap the power/ comms cables between the angled edges of the two platesand the side of the shroud.

9. Secure the outer plate to the shroud rear panel using two screws.

NOTE To improve clarity, antenna feeder cables andpower/comms cables are not shown in Figure 3-15,Figure 3-16 or Figure 3-17.


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–29

OUTER PLATE INNER PLATE

Figure 3-15 Fitting the cable termination bracket kit to the enclosure

SPACE FOR POWER ANDCOMMS CABLES

SPACE FOR POWER ANDCOMMS CABLES

SHROUD

CABLE TERMINATIONBRACKET KIT

Figure 3-16 Plan view of the cable termination bracket kit (shroud fitted)




68P02902W68-A

OUTER PLATE

SHROUD

INNER PLATE

Figure 3-17 Completed cable termination bracket kit installation


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–31

Supply cableidentification

To connect an outdoor enclosure to the main ac power source, observe thefollowing rules.

Three-phase supply

For three-phase ac connections:

S The phase L1 power cable is labelled No. 1.



S The neutral cable is blue.

S The earth cable is green and yellow.

Single-phase supply

For single-phase ac connections:

S The line power cable is brown or red.

S The neutral cable is blue or black.

S The earth cable is green and yellow.

GSM-208-423Connecting 230 V 3-phase (star) ac power cables



68P02902W68-A

Connecting 230 V 3-phase (star) ac power cables

Configuring theprimary acterminal box

WARNING Ensure that the mains input isolator is set to position O(off) and the source is isolated before proceeding.

On delivery the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is configured for a230 V ac three phase (star connected) power supply.

Connecting230 V ac3-phase (star)mains inputcables

Proceed as follows to connect the earth, 3-phase (star), and neutral powercables to the primary ac terminal box:

CAUTION Some countries may use an alternative colour codingscheme for 3-phase cables. Equivalent colours for thisscheme are shown in brackets.

1. Connect the green/yellow ac supply earth cable to terminal 2 (PE) of theprimary ac terminal box.

2. Check that terminal 1 of the primary ac terminal box is connected to theenclosure earth (PGB).

3. Connect the blue neutral cable to terminal 3 (N) of the primary ac terminalbox.

4. Connect the phase 1 cable labelled No. 1 to terminal 4 (L1) of the primaryac terminal box.



7. Check the security of all connections within the primary ac terminal box.

GSM-208-423 Connecting 230 V 3-phase (star) ac power cables

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–33

230 V ac3-phase (star)wiring diagram

Figure 3-18 shows the wiring diagram for the primary ac terminal box whenconfigured for a 230 V ac 3-phase and neutral (star) power supply.

1

PE L2L1N L3

GREEN/YELLOW

BLUE

No. 1

No. 3

No. 2

GREEN/YELLOW

AC SUPPLY INPUTEARTH CONNECTION FROM

PGB

PRIMARY AC TERMINAL BOX

2 3 4 5 6

Figure 3-18 Wiring diagram for 230 V ac 3-phase (star)

GSM-208-423Connecting 230 V single phase ac power cables



68P02902W68-A

Connecting 230 V single phase ac power cables

Configuring theprimary acterminal box

WARNING Ensure that the mains input isolator is set to position O(off) and source is isolated before proceeding.

On delivery, the Horizonmacro12 carrier outdoor enclosure is configured for a230 V ac three phase (star) power supply. If connecting to a single phase 230 Vac supply, then all three live input terminals must be linked together at theprimary ac terminal box. A link bar is provided for this purpose.

Connecting230 V ac singlephase mainsinput cables

To connect a 230 V earth, live, and neutral power cable to the primary acterminal box:

1. Connect the ac power input earth cable (green/yellow) to terminal 2 (PE)in the primary ac terminal box, and check the connection of the enclosureearth cable to terminal 1.

2. Connect the live ac cable (brown or red) to terminal 4 (L1) in the primaryac terminal box.

3. Using the link bar provided, link terminals 4, 5 and 6 (L1, L2 and L3) in theprimary ac terminal box, as shown in Figure 3-19.

4. Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black) to terminal 3 in the primary acterminal box.

5. Check the security of all connections within the primary ac terminal box.

GSM-208-423 Connecting 230 V single phase ac power cables

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–35

230 V ac singlephase wiringdiagram

Figure 3-19 shows the wiring diagram for the primary ac terminal box whenconfigured for a 230 V ac single phase power supply.

PE L2L1N L3

GREEN/YELLOW

BLUE ORBLACK

BROWNOR RED

LINK BAR

GREEN/YELLOW

AC SUPPLY INPUTEARTH CONNECTION FROM

PGB

PRIMARY AC TERMINAL BOX

1 2 3 4 5 6

Figure 3-19 Wiring diagram (230 V ac single phase)

GSM-208-423Checking default settings on the AIM



68P02902W68-A

Checking default settings on the AIM

AIM DIP switchsettings

DIP switch blocks SW1 and SW2 on the AIM allow certain alarm signals to beoverridden. Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 show the default DIP switch settings whenan optional ancillary enclosure is not connected.


Switchno.

Defaultposition


1 Closed 1


2 Closed 2

11 Door alarm

3 Closed 3


4 Closed 4


5 Closed 5


6 Open 6



Switchno.

Defaultposition


1 Open 1


2 Open 2


3 Closed 3


4 Closed 4


5 Closed 5


6 Closed 6


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A i

Chapter 4

Installing the Horizonmacro indoor

cabinet

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii

Chapter 4Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation overview Inst. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installation sections Inst. 4–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to installation Inst. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet identification Inst. 4–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet view Inst. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 line testing Inst. 4–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transient and lightning protection Inst. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A





29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–1


Installationsections

Horizonmacro indoor cabinet installation comprises the sections shown inTable 4-1.

Table 4-1 Installation sections in this chapter

Section Description

Installation overview An overview of the installation procedure andidentification of main cabinet components.

Equipment deliveryand unpacking

Information on delivery packaging, and how tounpack the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet.

Installing theHorizonmacro indoorcabinets

Provides procedure for installing Horizonmacroindoor cabinet(s) into a prepared 12 carrier outdoorenclosure.

Connecting RF cablesand antennas

Describes cables and connectors used forconnection to RF modules.

Suggested RFconfigurations

Describes suggested RF configurations for single ordual cabinet installations to meet specific operationalrequirements.

Connecting fibre opticcables

Identifies fibre optic connections and describeshandling considerations.

Interface panelcabling

Describes interface panel connections.

Connecting powerand earth cabling

Describes power and earth cable connections.




68P02902W68-A

Introduction toinstallation

This chapter provides the information required to install one or twoHorizonmacro indoor cabinets, together with their internal and externalinterfaces, within the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

CAUTION Ensure that all site associated equipment is completelyinstalled before commissioning the cabinet for operation.

NOTE Some site equipment may not be produced by Motorola(antennas, for example). Refer to site-specificdocumentation and non-Motorola vendor instructions.

Ensure installation of the enclosure has been completed before commencinginstallation of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets. Refer to Chapter 3 of thismanual, Installing the enclosure, for details of enclosure installation.

NOTE Each Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is supplied with abooklet entitled, Installation & configuration,Horizonmacro indoor, which describes the standardinstallation in an indoor environment. When installing theHorizonmacro indoor cabinet in a 12 carrier outdoorenclosure, the standard installation booklet must beremoved from the packaging and destroyed.Instructions for installing the Horizonmacro indoorequipment into a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure are fullycovered in this document.

Connections to antennas and E1/T1 data links are made at the Horizonmacroindoor cabinet interface panel. External cables enter the 12 carrier outdoorenclosure from the right or left side of the enclosure via cable access plates.

Cabinetidentification

The two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets are designated BTS 0 and BTS 1.

BTS 0 is mounted in the right side of the enclosure and configured as themaster cabinet. All E1/T1 lines and external alarms are connected to BTS 0.

BTS 1 is mounted in the left side of the enclosure and configured as anextension cabinet. BTS 1 is not equipped with an MCUF module, and is insteadconnected to the MCUF of BTS 0 via an FMUX module and a fibre optic link.

NOTE If the enclosure is to be equipped with only oneHorizonmacro indoor cabinet then it must be installed asBTS 0.


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–3

Cabinet view

Figure 4-1 shows the main components of a fully equipped Horizonmacro indoorcabinet.

CIRCUITBREAKER

MODULE (CBM)



DIGITALMODULES

T43/BIB

MCUF

ALARM MODULE


TWO 2-FAN UNITS

ONE 4-FAN UNIT



ONE SURF (Rx)THREE PSMs

DC POWER IN

INTERFACEPANEL

CONNECTORS

Figure 4-1 Cabinet with components identified (door removed)

E1/T1 linetesting

If an E1/T1 line has been provided, contact the local MSC and, at the earliestopportunity, arrange to test the line back to the MSC.




68P02902W68-A

Transient andlightningprotection

All E1/T1 data lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transientprotection as part of the BIB or T43 board.

Ensure the receive and transmit antenna connections to the enclosure are fedthrough coaxial electromagnetic protection (EMP) devices.

GSM-208-423 Equipment delivery and unpacking

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–5

Equipment delivery and unpacking

Delivery andpackagingoverview

Before the cabinet equipment arrives, installation personnel should designatean area at the site where the equipment can be unloaded. This area should alsobe suitable for unpacking the equipment. Consult with the heavy freight ormoving company and the owners of the building (if applicable) to select thisarea.

CAUTION The cabinet equipment should be delivered to the sitewhile still contained in its packaging. This is to protect thecabinet in transit and from moisture.

The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company,along with the necessary moving dollies and padding. Use the dollies andpadding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.

NOTE With the single exception of the booklet entitled,Installation & configuration, Horizonmacro indoor, allpaperwork attached to packaging, or found inside thecabinet should be collected and retained.The Installation & configuration, Horizonmacro indoorbooklet must be removed and destroyed. Complete detailsfor the installation and configuration of the Horizonmacroindoor cabinet in a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure arecontained in this document.

GSM-208-423Equipment delivery and unpacking



68P02902W68-A

Packaging crate

The cabinet equipment is shipped in a crate of a similar construction to thatshown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2 Typical shipping crate detail

Equipmentmodulepackaging

The equipment modules are supplied already fitted into the cabinet. The plinth ispacked upside down on top of the cabinet.

NOTE When the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is to be installedinside a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, the plinth base isnot required and may be stored away safely for future use.

GSM-208-423 Equipment delivery and unpacking

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–7

Unpacking theequipment


NOTE It is recommended that the installer read through thefollowing procedure before starting to unpack and installthe equipment.

Tools

Use the following tools to dismantle the crate and unpack the cabinet.

S Claw hammer (or similar levering device).

S Knife.

Obtaining plinth base

The plinth base is not required when the indoor cabinet is to be installed within a12 carrier outdoor enclosure. The plinth base should be removed from the crateand stored away for future use, if required.

To obtain the plinth base:

1. Cut the plastic banding that secures the crate.

2. Remove the crate lid and take out the plinth base.

3. Refit the crate lid and secure.

Delivery and dismantling of shipping crate

To deliver and dismantle the shipping crate:

1. Deliver remaining cabinet equipment to site in its original packaging.

NOTE The packing material used by Motorola is non-returnableand should be disposed of safely.

2. Lift the lid free of the crate.

3. Lift out the cardboard protective pieces.

4. Lift the box over the cabinet.

GSM-208-423Equipment delivery and unpacking



68P02902W68-A

Removing the cabinet from the crate base

WARNING The cabinet can weigh up to 110 kg if fully equipped.Handle each cabinet with extreme caution, and inaccordance with local health and safety regulations.

To remove the cabinet from the crate base:

CAUTION Care must be taken to avoid damaging the cabinet in anyway, especially by scratching the outer surfaces.

1. Carefully cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the cabinet.

2. Use straps attached to the plywood base holding the cabinet, to lift cabinetover the delivery base and foam.

3. Remove the desiccant bag from the cabinet.


The cabinet is now unpacked.


The packing material used by Motorola is non-returnable, and should bedisposed of safely.

CTU allottedslot retention

CTUs are supplied already fitted in the cabinet, with Tx cable correctly attachedby Motorola. CTUs must remain in the allotted slots for Motorola calibrations tobe valid.

GSM-208-423 Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–9

Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets

Overview of theinstallationprocedure

One or two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets may be installed within a single 12carrier outdoor enclosure. The right shelf of the enclosure is for BTS 0 and theleft shelf is for BTS 1. If only one cabinet is to be installed then it must beinstalled as BTS 0 in the BTS 0 shelf.

WARNING A fully equipped Horizonmacro indoor cabinet weighsapproximately 110 kg. Handle each cabinet with extremecaution, and in accordance with local health and safetyregulations. Eyebolts are available for use with liftingequipment.

GSM-208-423Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets



68P02902W68-A

Eyebolt liftingpositions

Eyebolts must be fitted into the four designated cabinet top panel locations,shown in Figure 4-3. These locations are identified with an eyebolt symbol andthe word LIFT.

Figure 4-3 also shows the location of the earth connection point on the indoorcabinet.

BRACKETSECURING SCREW

EYEBOLT POSITIONS

EYEBOLTPOSITIONS

REAR OF CABINET

EARTH STUD

BRACKETSECURING

SCREW

Figure 4-3 Eyebolt and earth stud positions


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–11

Procedure forinstalling indoorcabinets

The 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is designed to allow the installation ofHorizonmacro indoor cabinets from above, through the hood aperture.

Before beginning any lifting operation, ensure that the shelf area within theenclosure is free from obstructions, and all cables are safely secured so thatthey do not interfere with the cabinet installation. Also ensure that the door ofthe Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is closed and secured.

NOTE If only one cabinet is to be installed then it must beinstalled as BTS 0, on the right shelf.

The installation procedure is as follows:

1. Open the enclosure doors, then open the hood as far as possible.

2. Unscrew and remove the two L-shaped cabinet securing brackets (for BTS0 or BTS 1 as required) from the enclosure chassis (see Figure 4-4).Retain for later use.

3. Unscrew and remove the two cabinet retaining plates located at the frontof the shelf (see Figure 4-4).

4. Using suitable lifting equipment, lift the cabinet into position above theenclosure and gently lower it onto the enclosure shelf. Carefully adjust theposition of the cabinet on the shelf so that the front of the cabinet is flushwith the front of the shelf. Remove the eyebolts.

5. Secure the cabinet in place using the two cabinet retaining plates locatedon the enclosure chassis next to both front corners of the shelf (seeFigure 4-4).

6. Remove the two bracket retaining screws from the rear of the cabinet toppanel (see Figure 4-3).

7. Align the L-shaped securing brackets into position on the cabinet toppanel. Attach brackets to the top panel by re-inserting the bracketretaining screws, and attach to the enclosure chassis using the screwsremoved in step 2.

8. Connect the enclosure earth lead from the PGB to the earth stud on theindoor cabinet interface panel (see Figure 4-3).

9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 for a second cabinet, if required.

GSM-208-423Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets



68P02902W68-A

Cabinetsecuring platesand brackets

Figure 4-4 shows the location of the cabinet securing plates and the L-shapedsecuring brackets. There are two plates and two brackets for each cabinetthough one plate and one bracket for BTS 0 are obscured from view.

L-SHAPED CABINETSECURING

BRACKETS (BTS 0)L-SHAPEDCABINET

SECURINGBRACKETS

(BTS 1)

CABINETRETAINING

PLATES(BTS 0)

CABINETRETAINING

PLATES(BTS 1)

Figure 4-4 Location of cabinet securing plates and brackets


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–13

Illustration ofcompletedinstallation

Figure 4-5 shows two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets installed as BTS 0 and BTS1 within a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. The enclosure doors have beenremoved for clarity.


(BTS 1)


(BTS 0)

Figure 4-5 Installed Horizonmacro indoor cabinets

GSM-208-423Connecting RF cables and antennas



68P02902W68-A

Connecting RF cables and antennas

Overview of RFconnections

The components shown in Figure 4-6 provide all the RF connections to andfrom the cabinet.

ig.128.rh

SIXTRANSCEIVERS

(CTUs)

SURF

THREETRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS

(Tx BLOCKs)

Figure 4-6 Location of RF components

All RF connections internal to the cabinet, (ie. those between CTUs, Tx blocks,SURF and earth/connector plates), are cabled correctly at production, for thecabinet configuration supplied. Only antenna cable connections, RF cableconnections and fibre optic connections between adjacent cabinets need to becompleted by the installer.

GSM-208-423 Connecting RF cables and antennas

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–15

Types of RFconnector

Table 4-2 lists the RF module connectors with their destinations.

Table 4-2 RF module connectors and destinations

RF Module Type of connector Destination

CTU transceiver SMA Tx block (underneath)

Tx block SMA CTU transceiver

N-type SURF

7/16 Antenna

SURF N-type Rx N-type of Tx block

SURF/Tx blockinterconnectingcables

Table 4-3 lists cable types used for SURF/Tx block interconnections.

Table 4-3 SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables

Part number Description Use

3086225N01 34.5 cm coaxial cable terminated at eitherend with straight N-type plugs.

Tx block to SURF

3086225N02 28 cm coaxial cable terminated at one endwith a straight N-type plug, and at theother end with a right-angle N-type plug.

Tx block to Txblock

3086225N03 2.25 m coaxial cable terminated at eitherend with straight N-type plugs.

SURF to SURF

3086225N04 2.25 m coaxial cable terminated at oneend with a straight N-type plug, and at theother end with a right-angle N-type plug.

Tx block to Txblock

Unused SMAconnections

Ensure that any unused SMA inputs to DCF, DDF or HCU modules are fittedwith 50 ohm termination loads.

Torque of RFconnectors

For correct torque of connectors, see Chapter 2, Site requirements andconsiderations, Site preparation.

CAUTION Care should be taken when tightening SMA connectors toavoid damage by excessive force.

GSM-208-423Connecting RF cables and antennas



68P02902W68-A

RF connectionprinciples

The primary receive path is connected to the A branch of the SURF module,either directly, or from the Rx connector on the Tx block in non diversityconfigurations. The diversity receive path is connected to the B path on theSURF. this is normally duplexed with the transmit signal on a single antenna,and fed to the SURF from the Rx connector on the Tx block. Within any singlecabinet, the lowest numbered sector is normally connected to amplifier 0connections, and higher numbered sectors to amplifiers 1 and 2 as appropriate.For example, sector 1 is connected to SURF connectors 0A and 0B, sector 2 to1A and 1B and sector 3 to 2A and 2B. However, if a sector is split between twocabinets, the split sector antennas must be connected to amplifier 0 (this is theonly path with a connection to the extension ports). Extension ports must beconnected to the correct branch at the destination cabinet.

The transmit path feeds from the CTUs to the Tx block or feedthrough plateimmediately above. Two signals are combined in most Tx blocks. A third signalcan be combined using a feedthrough plate and the third input of a DDF. The Txblocks then duplex the Tx signal with the diversity Rx signal before feeding tothe antenna.

Rx/Tx duplexingon a singleantenna

Duplexers allow a single antenna to be used for both transmit (Tx) and receive(Rx) operations. Duplexers exist within several of the transmit blocks. Normallyduplexed RF signals are used through one antenna, with a second receiveantenna to provide diversity.

GSM-208-423 Suggested RF configurations

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–17

Suggested RF configurations

Overview ofconfigurationdiagrams

The following series of RF configuration diagrams show suggested ways ofconnecting together Horizonmacro SURF and Tx blocks to meet differentoperational requirements. The series of diagrams is by no means exhaustive,and numerous alternative configurations may be adopted to achieve the sameaim.

The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure may contain one or twoHorizonmacro indoor cabinets. Diagrams are therefore included to cover singlecabinet and dual cabinet configurations.

Each Horizonmacro cabinet is represented by a SURF module and three Txblocks. Interconnecting cables are identified by a label; N01, 2, 3 or 4. Furtherdetails of each cable type are shown in Table 4-3. Antenna connecting cables,not supplied as part of the Horizonmacro equipment, are shown in dotted lines.

With the exception of Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24, the diagrams are applicableto GSM850, EGSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 single band operation, althoughonly the 1800 SURF module is illustrated.

NOTE Dual band 900 and 1800 SURFs are available, but 850and 1900 SURFs are only available as single band.

Figure 4-23 shows one way of achieving dual band operation using twoHorizonmacro cabinets. A single band 1800 SURF is installed in one cabinetand a dual band 900 SURF in the other. Figure 4-24 shows another, using oneof each type of dual band SURF.

CAUTION Diversity is assumed in all the RF configuration diagramsshown here, except for Figure 4-8. If a single antenna(non-diversity) is required, the duplex antenna RF receivecable from the transmit block must be connected to the RxA path at the SURF (see Figure 4-8). Simply switching offdiversity at the OMC-R without the correct SURFconfiguration will cause a loss of reception.

Digital connectionsDigital connections between cabinets are not shown in the following diagrams.Fibre optic cables used to provide digital connections between cabinets aredescribed in Connecting fibre optic cables.

Depopulated site configurationsThe purpose of a depopulated site configuration is to allow customers to providea future expansion capability, at the time of installation. The diagram showingthe final target configuration is to be used to connect Tx blocks, SURF andantennas. Depopulated site configurations are supplied with fully equipped RFsection to achieve the target configuration, with CTUs only fitted to alternateslots. CTUs are fitted in slots 0, 2 and 4. Unused Tx block SMA connectors mustbe fitted with 50 ohm terminating loads.

GSM-208-423Single cabinet configurations



68P02902W68-A

Single cabinet configurations

Configurationfor omni 1

Figure 4-7 shows a suggested configuration for omni 1 with twin duplexed filter.

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2 0

ANT

RX

TDF

N01

1

RX

BLANKBLANK

ANT

Figure 4-7 Single cabinet omni 1 with TDF

Omni 1 or 2(withnon-diversity)

Figure 4-8 shows suggested diversity or non-diversity configurations for omni 1or omni 2 with duplexed combining bandpass filter.

Diversity configuration Non-diversity configuration

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DCF

1

N01

BLANK

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DCF

1

N01

BLANK

Figure 4-8 Single cabinet omni 1 or 2 with DCF (diversity and non-diversity)

Unused SMA connectors must be terminated as shown below.

If configured for... Then 50 ohm load required onunused SMA input to...

omni 1 DCF 0

GSM-208-423 Single cabinet configurations

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–19

Configurationfor omni 3 or 4

Figure 4-9 shows a suggested configuration for omni 3 or omni 4 with duplexedcombining bandpass filter.

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DCF

N01

ANT

RX

DCF

1

N01

Figure 4-9 Single cabinet omni 3 or 4 with DCF

Unused SMA connectors must be fitted with 50 ohm terminating loads as shownbelow.


omni 3 DCF 1


Figure 4-10 shows a suggested configuration for omni 3 with dual stageduplexed combining filter.

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANKFEEDTHRU

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

1

TXTX

N02

Figure 4-10 Single cabinet omni 3 with DDF




68P02902W68-A


Figure 4-11 shows a suggested configuration for omni 4 with dual stageduplexed combining filter and hybrid combining unit.

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

TXTX

N02

1

HCU

TX

Figure 4-11 Single cabinet omni 4 with DDF and HCU

Configurationfor omni 5 or 6

Figure 4-12 shows a suggested configuration for omni 5 or 6 with dual stageduplexed combining filter and air combining.

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N02

2

ANT

RX

DDFFEEDTHRU

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

1

TX TXTX

N02

N01

Figure 4-12 Single cabinet omni 5 or 6 with DDF and air combining



omni 5 DDF 2


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–21

Configurationfor sector 1/1 or2/2

Figure 4-13 shows a suggested configuration for sector 1/1 or 2/2 with duplexedcombining bandpass filter.

SECTOR 2 SECTOR 1

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

ANT

RX

DCF

0

ANT

RX

DCF

N01

1

N01

BLANK

Figure 4-13 Single cabinet sector 1/1 or 2/2 with DCF



sector 1/1 DCF 0 and DCF 2




68P02902W68-A

Configurationfor sector 1/1

Figure 4-14 shows a suggested configuration for sector 1/1 with twin duplexedfilter.

SECTOR 2

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2 0

ANT

RX

TDF

N01

1

RX

N01

SECTOR 1

BLANKBLANK

ANT

Figure 4-14 Single cabinet sector 1/1 with TDF

Configurationfor singlecabinet sector3/3

Figure 4-15 shows a suggested configuration for sector 3/3 with dual stageduplexed combining filter.

SECTOR 1

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N02

2

ANT

RX

DDFFEEDTHRU

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

1

TX TXTX

N02

N01

SECTOR 2

Figure 4-15 Single cabinet sector 3/3 with DDF


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–23

Configurationfor singlecabinet sector1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/2or 2/2/2

Figure 4-16 shows a suggested configuration for sector 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/2 or2/2/2 with duplexed combining bandpass filter.

SECTOR 1 SECTOR 2 SECTOR 3

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N01

2

ANT

RX

DCF

0

ANT

RX

DCF

N01

ANT

RX

DCF

1

N01

Figure 4-16 Single cabinet sector 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/2 or 2/2/2 with DCF



Sector 1/1/1 DCF 0, 1 and 2

Sector 1/1/2 DCF 1 and 2

Sector 1/2/2 DCF 2

GSM-208-423Dual cabinet configurations



68P02902W68-A

Dual cabinet configurations

Configurationfor 2 cabinetsector 3/3

Figure 4-17 shows a suggested configuration, using two Horizonmacro cabinets,for sector 3/3 with dual stage duplexed combining filter.

SECTOR 1

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

TXTX

N02

FEEDTHRU

1

SECTOR 2

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

TXTX

N02

FEEDTHRU

1

Figure 4-17 Two cabinet sector 3/3 with DDF

Configurationfor 2 cabinetsector 4/4

Figure 4-18 shows a suggested configuration for sector 4/4 with dual stageduplexed combining filter and hybrid combining unit.

SECTOR 1

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

TXTX

N02

1

HCU

TX

SECTOR 2

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

TXTX

N02

1

HCU

TX

Figure 4-18 Two cabinet sector 4/4 with DDF and HCU

GSM-208-423 Dual cabinet configurations

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–25

Configurationfor 2 cabinetsector 5/5 or 6/6

Figure 4-19 shows a suggested configuration, using two Horizonmacro cabinets,for sector 5/5 or 6/6 with dual stage duplexed combining filter and air combining.

SECTOR 2

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N02

2

ANT

RX

DDFFEEDTHRU

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

1

TX TXTX

N02

N01

SECTOR 1

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N02

2

ANT

RX

DDFFEEDTHRU

0

ANT

RX

DDF

N01

1

TX TXTX

N02

N01

Figure 4-19 Two cabinet sector 5/5 or 6/6 with DDF and air combining

Unused SMA connectors must be fitted with 50 ohm terminations as shownbelow.


sector 5/5 both DDF 2 modules




68P02902W68-A

Configurationfor 2 cabinetsector 2/2/2

Figure 4-20 shows a suggested configuration, using two Horizonmacro cabinets,for sector 2/2/2 with duplexed combining bandpass filter.


B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N01

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N01

2

ANT

RX

DCF BLANK

1

ANT

RX

DCF

0

BLANK

2

BLANK

0

ANT

RX

DCF

N01

1

Figure 4-20 Two cabinet sector 2/2/2 with DCF


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–27

Configurationfor 2 cabinetsector 3/3/3 or4/4/4

Figure 4-21 shows a suggested configuration, using two Horizonmacro cabinets,for sector 3/3/3 or sector 4/4/4 with duplexed combining bandpass filter and aircombining.


B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N01

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N01

2

ANT

RX

DCF

N03N03

1

ANT

RX

DCF

1

ANT

RX

DCF

0

ANT

RX

DCF

2

ANT

RX

DCF

0

ANT

RX

DCF

N01 N01 N01 N01

CABINET 2 CABINET 1

Figure 4-21 Two cabinet sector 3/3/3 or sector 4/4/4 with DCF and aircombining



sector 3/3/3 cabinet 1, DCF 1

cabinet 2, DCF 0 and DCF 2




68P02902W68-A

Configurationfor 2 cabinetsector 4/4/4

Figure 4-22 shows a suggested configuration, using two Horizonmacro cabinets,for sector 4/4/4 with dual stage duplexed combining filter and hybrid combiningunit.


B

EXT

0

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

ANT

RX

N01

TX

DDFHCU

N02TX

B

EXT

0

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N01

1212

ANT

RX

TX

DDFHCU

TX

HCU

TX

ANT

RX

TX

DDF

RXN02

N04

N03N03

Figure 4-22 Two cabinet sector 4/4/4 with DDF and HCU


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–29

Configurationfor dual band1/1/1-3/3/3

Figure 4-23 shows a suggested configuration, using two Horizonmacro cabinets,for dual band sector 1/1/1–3/3/3 operation, where sector 1/1/1 is EGSM900 andsector 3/3/3 is DCS1800. This dual band configuration requires one single band1800 SURF and one dual band 900 SURF.

All unused SMA connectors must be fitted with 50 ohm terminating loads.

SECTOR 3900

ANT

RX

900TDF

RX

ANT

N01 N01

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A0B1B2B

N02

2

ANT

RX

1800DDF

FEEDTHRU

0

ANT

RX

1800DDF

N01

1

TX TXTX

N02

N01

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A18001A0B1B

2 0

N01

1

1800DCF

2B18001B

RX

RX

RX

ANT

SECTOR 3 1800

N01

SECTOR 1900

SECTOR 21800DUAL

BANDTDF

N01

RXRX

SECTOR 2900

ANT

900

ANT

1800 SECTOR 11800

Figure 4-23 Two cabinet dual band sector 1/1/1-3/3/3




68P02902W68-A

Configurationfor dual band3/3/3–1/1/1

Figure 4-24 shows a suggested configuration, using two Horizonmacro cabinets,for dual band sector 3/3/3–1/1/1 operation, where sector 3/3/3 is EGSM900 andsector 1/1/1 is DCS1800. This dual band configuration requires one dual band1800 SURF and one dual band 900 SURF.

All unused SMA connectors must be fitted with 50 ohm terminating loads.

RX

RX

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A18001A

0B1B2B18001B

RX

RX

SECTOR 1900

SECTOR 3900

SECTOR 2900

900DDF

900DDF

RX

ANT

RX

FEEDTHRU

ANT

RX

TX TXTX

9001B

RX

RX

RX

ANT

RX RX

ANT

900DCF

1800TDF

SECTOR 11800

SECTOR 21800

SECTOR 31800

9001A

0B

Tx1Rx0A

DUALBANDTDF

Rx1ARx2A

2 01

B

EXT

RX

RX

RX

RX

EXT

A0A1A2A1B

2 01

2B

RX

ANT

900

RX RX

ANT

1800

Tx0 Tx2

RX

ANT

Figure 4-24 Two cabinet dual band sector 3/3/3-1/1/1

GSM-208-423 Connecting fibre optic cables

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–31

Connecting fibre optic cables

Location offibre opticconnections

In an Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure equipped with twoHorizonmacro indoor cabinets, BTS 0 is designated master and BTS 1designated as an extension cabinet.

The six transceivers of BTS 0 are supported and controlled by an MCUF modulethrough a backplane connection. Only the master cabinet, BTS 0, is fitted withan MCUF module. The extension cabinet, BTS 1, has no MCUF module and thesix transceivers of BTS 1 are supported by the MCUF of BTS 0 via a fibre opticlink.

The MCUF can be connected to three fibre optic multiplexers (FMUXs). TheMCUF is equipped with two, and the third is an external module located in theslot next to the master MCUF. Additional redundant modules may be installedfor both MCUF and external FMUX.

The extension cabinet (BTS 1) has only a single FMUX, with optionalredundancy, for fibre optic connectivity to the master cabinet.

Tx and Rx data connections to the MCUF and FMUXs are located on the frontpanel of each module.

The following fibre optic cable, coloured orange and terminated with STconnectors, is available for use.

Motorola part number:

3004946C04 5.6 m long Connects MCUF in BTS 0 to FMUX in BTS 1.

WARNING Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or the datain/out connectors of the FMUX or MCUF, with or withoutthe use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come fromeither the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibreoptic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

GSM-208-423Connecting fibre optic cables



68P02902W68-A

Care of fibresOptical fibre cables contain an inner core, which is a strand of glass coated by acladding (sometimes in two layers), and an outer protective sheath whichprovides mechanical protection.

The fibre acts as a light waveguide. In order for the link to work correctly lightmust be propagated with minimal losses from end-to-end of the fibre. A numberof problems can prevent this from happening, resulting in a potentially faulty link.Care must be taken to ensure that the following conditions are met:

Minimum bend radius

All optical fibres have a minimum bend radius. This represents the smallestcircle that is allowed to be formed from a loop of fibre, that is how tight it can becoiled, looped or bent.

CAUTION Under no circumstances should fibres be bent tighter thanthe minimum bend radius.

If fibres are bent tighter than the minimum bend radius then two possible effectscan happen:

S Excessive light loss can occur from the outside of the bend, resulting in aloss of performance.

S The fibre can fracture due to microscopic imperfections in the surface.This type of break is invisible externally. If such a break occurs, excessivelight loss would be permanent and light would be scattered and reflectedfrom the break in the fibre. Returning the fibre to straight will not help andthe whole assembly will require replacement.

For glass fibres (orange or green outer sheath) the long term minimum bendradius is approximately 30 mm, as shown in Figure 4-25.

30 mm

FIBRE OPTIC CABLE

Figure 4-25 Minimum bend radius of 30 mm

If the fibre is under tension (being stretched), the bend radius should be muchlarger, at least doubled. This is because the tension in the fibre can increase thepossibilities of damage.

If in doubt about the radius, the fibre should be allowed to form its “natural” bendradius by allowing it to bend under gravity only. This natural bend radius isnormally greater than 30 mm.

GSM-208-423 Connecting fibre optic cables

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–33

Protecting fibres and connectors

To maintain good light transmission through the fibre optic link it is essential tomaintain cleanliness of the connector end surfaces and/or bare fibre ends.

At all times when fibres are not connected into the system, the connectorprotective caps (normally red) should be fitted and kept in place. This isespecially important when routeing fibres during installation.

Cleaning fibres and connectors

Cleanliness of fibre terminations and connectors is essential. If cleaning ofcontaminated optical components is required, then all areas should be wipedgently with a lint-free cloth, soaked in a suitable cleaning solution. Care shouldbe taken to ensure the ends of the fibres are not scratched in any way.

Connecting glass fibre cables

Fibre ST (push and turn) connectors are used to terminate the fibre optic cablesat either end.

Connectingfibre optic linkbetween BTS 0and BTS 1

The fibre optic cables connecting the master cabinet (BTS 0) to the extensioncabinet (BTS 1) connect directly to the front panel ports on the MCUF andFMUX digital modules respectively. Cable access is through a hole on thecabinet top panel, in front of the interface panel, and directly to the relevantmodule.

The procedure for connecting the fibre optic link between BTS 0 and BTS 1 isas follows:

NOTE Before proceeding with the connection procedure,installers must first read the preceding section, Care offibres.

1. Connect a fibre optic cable (Motorola part 3004946C04) from BTS 0,MCUF, Tx data port, to BTS 1, FMUX Rx data port.

2. Connect a fibre optic cable (Motorola part 3004946C04) from BTS 0,MCUF, Rx data port, to BTS 1, FMUX Tx data port.

This completes the procedure for connecting the fibre optic link between BTS 0and BTS 1.

GSM-208-423Interface panel cabling



68P02902W68-A

Interface panel cabling

Interface paneldiagram andpinoutoverview

With the exception of the fibre optic connection between master and extensioncabinets, all cabinet power and data connections are made on the interfacepanel. Each cable connector is marked with the appropriate label and must beplugged into the appropriate plug or socket on the interface panel.

All external data connections, including PIX and alarms, are terminated at themaster cabinet (BTS 0) interface panel.

The only connections to the BTS 1 interface panel are the separate –48V dcpower input cables.

Figure 4-26 shows the locations of all the interface panel connectors.

ig.239.rh

T43/BIB

AC POWERSOCKET INPUT

DC POWERINPUT

GPS(if fitted)

CCB(not used)

PIX0

EXTERNAL ALARMS

PIX1ICS

VENTILATIONGRID

Figure 4-26 Interface panel connector locations

GSM-208-423 Interface panel cabling

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–35

Interface panelpinouts tablelist

CAUTION Keep the plastic connector covers (supplied by Motorola)on unused connectors to protect from damage by static orforeign matter.

The following tables list the connector pinouts:

S GPS, see Table 4-4.

S RTC, see Table 4-5.

S BIB, see Table 4-6.

S T43, see Table 4-7.

S PIX0, see Table 4-8.

S PIX1, see Table 4-9.

S ICS, see Table 4-10.

S External alarms, see Table 4-11.

GPS pinouts

Table 4-4 lists the GPS pinout connections.

NOTE The GPS connector is optional on later BTS cabinets.

Table 4-4 GPS pin connections (15-way D-type)

PinNo.


Signal/Description

1 GPS power 1 9 GPS return 1

2 Rx negative 10 GPS power 2

3 Rx positive 11 PPS positive

4 Tx negative 12 PPS negative

5 Tx positive 13 Not connected

6 Spare (not connected) 14 Not connected

7 VPP (not connected) 15 Not connected

8 GPS return 2




68P02902W68-A

RTC pinouts

Table 4-5 lists the RTC pinout connections.

Table 4-5 RTC pin connections (15-way D-type)

PinNo.


Signal/Description



3 RTC0 27 V 11 Earth





8 Not connected

NOTE CCBs cannot be fitted in the indoor cabinet if it is installedin the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–37

BIBconnections

The Balanced line Interconnect Board (BIB) provides the line isolation betweenthe E1/T1 circuit lines and the the backplane. The board provides an interfacefor up to six input and six output balanced 120 ohm lines. Twelve transformersare used to provide line isolation, while maintaining impedance matchingbetween the E1/T1 circuit lines and the NIU module. Each transformer has a 1:1turn ratio to match the external and backplane 120 ohm connections.

Connection is made using a 37-pin D-type connector to both the BIB and theexternal PCM circuit lines. Figure 4-27 shows a typical BIB and Table 4-6 liststhe BIB interconnections.

J0

J1

T2T1

T5T4

T7 T8

T10

T13T11

T14 T16

T17

Figure 4-27 Balanced line interconnect board (BIB)

Table 4-6 BIB interconnections

NIU/port

PinNo.

Equipment/Ext PinNo.

PinNo.

Equipment/Ext PinNo.

0/0 J0-1 Tx1+ J1-1 J0-20 Tx1– J1-20

J0-2 Rx1+ J1-2 J0-21 Rx1– J1-21

not J0-4 Tx4+ J1-4 J0-23 Tx4– J1-23used J0-5 Rx4+ J1-5 J0-24 Rx4– J1-24

0/1 J0-7 Tx2+ J1-7 J0-26 Tx2– J1-26

J0-8 Rx2+ J1-8 J0-27 Rx2– J1-27


1/0 J0-13 Tx3+ J1-13 J0-32 Tx3– J1-32

J0-14 Rx3+ J1-14 J0-33 Rx3– J1-33


Connector J0 and J1, pins 3,6,9,12,15,18,19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 areconnected to earth




68P02902W68-A

T43connections

The Type 43 interconnect board (T43) provides the impedance matching andline isolation between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the backplane. The boardprovides an interface for up to six input and six output unbalanced coaxial 75ohm lines. Twelve transformers are used to provide impedance matching lineisolation between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the NIU module. Each transformerhas a 1:1.25 turn ratio to match the external 75 ohm and backplane 120 ohmconnections.

Connection is made using a 37-pin D-type connector to the interconnect boardand twelve type 43 coaxial connectors to the external E1/T1 circuit lines.

Figure 4-28 shows a typical T43, and Table 4-7 lists the T43 interconnections.

J0

J1

J2

J5

J4

J7

J8

J10

J13 J11

J14

J16

J17

Figure 4-28 Type 43 interconnect board (T43)

Table 4-7 T43 interconnections

NIU/port

PinNo.

Equipment/ Ext

Pin No. PinNo.

Equipment/ Ext

Pin No.

0/0 J0-1 Tx1+ J1 centre J0-20 Tx1– J1 shield

J0-2 Rx1+ J2 centre J0-21 Rx1– J2 shield

not J0-4 Tx4+ J4 centre J0-23 Tx4– J4 shieldused J0-5 Rx4+ J5 centre J0-24 Rx4– J5 shield







Connector J0, pins 3,6,9,12,15,18,19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are notused


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–39

PIX inputs andoutputs

PIX outputsPIX outputs comprise four relay contacts controlled by the alarm module andMCUF. The relays have multiple contacts, some normally open and somenormally closed. The contacts are rated for 1 A at 30 V. The contacts may beused for control of external equipment such as fans or audible alarms.

PIX inputsPIX inputs comprise 16 connections to external sensors. These inputs reportalarms to the BSC, via the alarm module and MCUF, which forwards the alarmsto the OMC-R. The end-user supplies the external sensors. Each sensorconnects across an opto-coupled pair of PIX inputs (eight per PIX connector).

All sensors must be dry-contact type with the following specification:

S 5 kohms or greater across sense inputs for logic 1 (PIX opto-coupler off).

S 500 ohms or less across sense inputs for logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).

Table 4-8 shows PIX0 pin out connections and Table 4-9 shows PIX1 pin outconnections.

Table 4-8 PIX0 pin connections (37-way D-type)

PinNo.


Signal/Description

1 Site input Ext 1–1 19 Not connected

2 Site input Ext 2–1 20 Site input Ext 1–2







9 Not connected 27 Site input Ext 8–2

10 Not connected 28 spare

11 Site output relay 1 – NO 29 Site output relay 1 – NC

12 Site output relay 2 – NO 30 Site output relay 1 – COM

13 Site output relay 2 – NC 31 Site output relay 2 – COM

14 Site output relay 3 – NO 32 Site output relay 3 – NC

15 Site output relay 4 – NO 33 Site output relay 3 – COM

16 Site output relay 4 – NC 34 Site output relay 4 – COM


18 Not connected 36/37 Not connected




68P02902W68-A

Table 4-9 PIX1 pin connections (37-way D-type)

PinNo.


Signal/Description

1 Site input Ext 9–1 19 Not connected








9 Not connected 27 Site input Ext 16–2

Pins 10 to 18 not connected Pins 28 to 37 not connected

ICS pinouts

Table 4-10 lists the ICS pin out connections. This is a future feature.

Table 4-10 ICS pin connections (25-way D-type)

PinNo.


Signal/Description

1 ICS0 TTY earth 10 ICS3 TTY earth

2 ICS0 TTY Rx 11 ICS3 TTY Rx

3 ICS0 TTY Tx 12 ICS3 TTY Tx







Pins 19 to 25 not connected


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–41

External alarmpinouts

Table 4-11 lists the external alarms connections at BTS 0. Ten alarms are alsoshown on the alarm board front panel LEDs.

Table 4-11 External alarms pin connections (37-way D-type)


1 AC 1 fail 20 Rectifier 1 fail return

2 AC 1 fail return 21 Rectifier 2 fail

3 Linked to pin 4 22 Rectifier 2 fail return

4 Linked to pin 3 23 Linked to pin 24

5 HMS 0 fail – BTS 0 24 Linked to pin 23

6 HMS 0 fail return – BTS 0 25 BTS 0 door 2 open

7 HMS 1 fail – BTS 0 26 BTS 0 door 2 open return

8 HMS 1 fail return – BTS 0 27 BTS smoke alarm

9 – 28 BTS smoke alarm return

10 – 29 ANC cabinet overtemperature

11 Linked to pin 12 30 ANC cabinet overtemp. return




15 Low voltage alarm 34 –

16 Low voltage alarm return 35 –

17 Linked to pin 18 36 Cabinet overtemperature

18 Linked to pin 17 37 Cabinet overtemperature return

19 Rectifier 1 fail

GSM-208-423Connecting power and earth cabling



68P02902W68-A

Connecting power and earth cabling

Overview topower and earthcabling

This section describes the procedure for connecting dc power and earth cablingto each individual Horizonmacro indoor cabinet. Power and earth connectionsare provided by the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

WARNING The cabinet should already have been earthed to theenclosure chassis. See Figure 4-26 for the location of theearth stud on the interface panel.Do not daisy chain cabinet earths together.Cabinets must be earthed with a conductor capable ofcarrying the full fault current of the overcurrent protectiondevice.

Power specifications can be found in Chapter 2, Site preparation, Siterequirements and considerations.

Cable routeing

CAUTION Ensure that covers are fitted to any unused connectors onthe cabinet interconnect panel; the covers protect theconnectors from damage by static electricity or foreignmatter.Do not connect dc input power from the enclosure to theHorizonmacro indoor cabinet at this time.

Power cables are routed from the enclosure dc distribution panel (in PDU B) toeach Horizonmacro indoor cabinet via cable trays.

Cabinet andESP earthingpoints

The main earth connection point is on the top interface panel, with a 10 mm M6threaded stud, adjacent to the dc input. This connection is for protectiveearthing and functional earthing of the cabinet.

Additional internal earths are:

S Door to cabinet frame.

S Main cage to interface panel above PSM.

S Tx block top panel to interface panel, near dc input.

S AC input connector (not used with 12 carrier outdoor enclosureinstallations) to interface panel at rear of panel.

S Enclosure to interface panel, at rear, next to dc input.

An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling electronic modules,including the MCUF, FMUX, NIU, alarm module, CTU, and SURF. An ESPearthing connection point is provided above the leftmost PSM.

GSM-208-423 Connecting power and earth cabling

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–43

Cabinet dcconnections

The 12 carrier outdoor enclosure provides a –48V dc supply to eachHorizonmacro indoor cabinet.

WARNING Ensure –48V dc PSMs are fitted to match the supplysource voltage provided by the 12 carrier outdoorenclosure.

Each Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is connected via two dc input power cables,positive and negative, to a –48V dc supply from the enclosure primarydistribution unit (PDU B).

S Negative input power cables are blue.

S Positive (earth) input power cables are black.

Two circuit breakers, marked BTS 0 and BTS 1, are mounted on the enclosuredc distribution panel to provide input power isolation for the individualHorizonmacro indoor cabinets.

GSM-208-423Connecting power and earth cabling



68P02902W68-A

DC power cableconnectionprocedure

To connect dc power to the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet:

WARNING Do not wear an anti static wrist strap while servicing thepower supplies or power distribution cabling, as seriouspersonal injury can result.

1. At the enclosure dc distribution panel, identify the two circuit breakersproviding –48V dc to the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets. These arelabelled BTS0 and BTS1, where BTS0 refers to the right cabinet andBTS1 refers to the left cabinet.

2. Switch both circuit breakers to the OFF position.

3. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present on the positive(black) or negative (blue) power cables.

4. Connect the black positive (+) dc power cable from the enclosure primarydistribution unit (PDU B) to the cabinet dc power connector assembly 0 Vterminal.

NOTE Make sure that the cone-shaped plastic cover is threadedonto the cable before connection.

5. Connect the blue negative (–) dc power cable from the enclosure primarydistribution unit (PDU B) to the cabinet dc power connector assembly V INterminal.

NOTE Make sure that the cone-shaped plastic cover is threadedonto the cable before connection.

6. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal connections (nuts on studs withstar washers) to the correct torque as described in Chapter 2.

The input power and earth cable connection procedure is now complete.

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A i

Chapter 5

Installing the ancillary enclosure

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii

Chapter 5Installing the ancillary enclosure i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation Inst. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation scenarios Inst. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ancillary enclosure layout Inst. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423 Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–1

Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation

Installationscenarios

The following scenarios are possible when installing the optional ancillaryenclosure:

S Before the main enclosure is installed.

S At the same time as the main enclosure is installed.

S After the main enclosure has been installed.

The installation sequence (particularly with regard to main enclosure actions)varies slightly depending on which of the above scenarios applies.

For example:

Installation before the main enclosure

Connecting the cable conduits to the main enclosure cannot be done until themain enclosure is installed.

Installation at the same time as the main enclosure

Only proceed with main enclosure installation as far as the internal batteryinstallation before wiring-in the ancillary enclosure. This enables the ancillaryenclosure to be connected to the main enclosure before the monoblocs areinstalled in the main enclosure. (Failure to do this creates unnecessary work asthe monoblocs have to be removed to install the cable conduits.)

Installation after the main enclosure

This option assumes that the main enclosure is in an operational state prior toinstallation of the ancillary enclosure. In this case the main enclosure must beshutdown and isolated in preparation for connecting the ancillary enclosure.

The information provided in this chapter assumes that the main enclosure hasalready been installed and is operational.

GSM-208-423Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation



68P02902W68-A

Ancillaryenclosurelayout

Figure 5-1 shows the internal layout of a fully equipped ancillary enclosure, withmajor components identified.


BATTERY STRING 3

BATTERY STRING 2

BATTERY STRING 1

ADJUSTABLE SHELVING

HEATER TEST BUTTON

LIGHT (NOT VISIBLE)


HEATER UNIT

Figure 5-1 Ancillary enclosure internal layout (door removed)


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–3


Safetyprecautions

The following safety instructions must be observed when installing the ancillaryenclosure:

S The installation procedures described in this supplement must only becarried out by suitably trained personnel.

S Installation and commissioning must comply with all relevant national andregional regulations.

S The ancillary enclosure must be bolted down.

Tools requiredRefer to Table 1-1 in Chapter 1 of this category for a list of tools required forinstallation.


The structural requirements and site preparation procedures for the ancillaryenclosure are similar to those required for the main enclosure (refer to theappropriate sections of Chapter 2 in this category for further details and siteplan).

Drillingmounting holesprior toequipmentarrival

Templates for drilling the mounting holes are supplied with both the mainenclosure and the ancillary enclosure (on the inside of the packaging lids).However, if the mounting holes are to be drilled prior to the arrival of theancillary enclosure, Figure 5-2 shows the measurements required.

725 mm

1785 mm 585 mm

12 CARRIER OUTDOOR ENCLOSUREANCILLARYENCLOSURE

200 mmTO

400 mm

Figure 5-2 Mounting hole templates for the main and ancillary enclosures

GSM-208-423Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure



68P02902W68-A

Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure

Avoidingcondensationbuild up

Do not unpack the enclosure until power is available and ready to be connected.Condensation can build up inside the enclosure if it is unpacked and leftstanding without being switched on.

Safetyconsiderations

Consider the following safety information before installing the ancillaryenclosure.

WARNING Ancillary enclosures are fitted with four lifting points,designed to accommodate M16 swivel head eyebolts, builtinto the enclosure base. If swivel head eyebolts are usedto lift the enclosure, they must be manufactured to CEconformity, and must have a safe weight load of 150 kgeach.Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually checkeach one for damage. If any damage is apparent, DONOT USE. The eyebolts must not be overtightened; handtight is sufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the liftingpoint so that no thread is left exposed.The ancillary enclosure is heavy and should not beinstalled without the use of lifting equipment unlesssufficient personnel are available to ensure that Healthand Safety regulations are not breached.Handle the ancillary enclosure with extreme caution, andin accordance with any local health and safety regulations.Motorola recommend the use of slings in conjunction withhydraulic lifting apparatus for moving and positioning theancillary enclosure.Do not attempt to install the battery strings until afterthe ancillary enclosure has been moved into positionand bolted down.In addition to these points, refer to and comply with anylocal regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment.

For the subsequent use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that governthe use of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. Ifthe eyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.

The installation support procedures are described in the following sections.

GSM-208-423 Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–5

Enclosureaccessprocedure

The ancillary enclosure access procedure comprises door opening and closingonly.

NOTE The hood is fixed and cannot be opened.

The door opens to the right and has a spring loaded locking handle. A gas strut,mounted at the bottom of the door, assists in opening the door and locks thedoor open in the 120_ position. Proceed as follows to open and close the door:

1. Slide open the lock protective cover.

2. Insert the key into the lock and turn anticlockwise until the spring loadedhandle releases.


4. Open the door to the fully open 120_ position.

NOTE When the equipment is active, a door open alarm isgenerated.

5. To close the door, press down on the orange locking clip on the centre ofthe gas strut, close the door firmly and turn the handle a quarter turn tothe left and push until the handle is flush with the door. The door locksautomatically.

GSM-208-423Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure



68P02902W68-A

Procedures forunpacking andpreparing theancillaryenclosure


NOTE It is recommended that the installer reads through thefollowing procedure before starting to unpack and installthe enclosure.

Dismantling the shipping packaging and obtaining template

Proceed as follows to dismantle the shipping packaging and obtain the template(see Figure 5-3):

1. Cut the plastic banding that secures the packaging.

2. Lift the lid free of the box.

3. Deliver the lid (fixing template printed on the underside) to the site forpositioning on the concrete base.

4. Undo the taped fastening on the box side.

5. Unwrap the box from around the enclosure.

The enclosure is now ready to be prepared for lifting.

CARDBOARDDELIVERY

BOX

SECURING BAND

WOODEN PALLET

ANCILLARYENCLOSURE

CARDBOARD LID(FIXING TEMPLATE PRINTED ON UNDERSIDE)

SECURING BAND

FLEXIBLE CABLECONDUIT(COILED)

Figure 5-3 Typical shipping packaging (front of delivery box removed for clarity)

GSM-208-423 Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–7

Preparing the ancillary enclosure for lifting

WARNING The empty enclosure weighs 150 kg. Handle with extremecaution, and in accordance with local health and safetyregulations.

To prepare the enclosure for lifting and to remove it from the wooden deliverypallet:

CAUTION Care must be taken to avoid damaging the enclosure inany way, especially by scratching the outer surfaces.


2. Ensure the enclosure door is closed securely.

3. Remove the plastic inserts from the four M16 threaded lifting points at thebase of the enclosure and screw in the eyebolts.

Refer to local regulations regarding the lifting of heavy objects and refer toSafety considerations described earlier in this chapter before lifting theenclosure.

The enclosure can now be lifted gently and manoeuvred to the concrete base.


The packing material used by Motorola is non-returnable and should bedisposed of safely.




68P02902W68-A

Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template

Introduction tomounting boltanchorinstallation

The ancillary enclosure is supplied with a drilling template printed on the insideof the packaging lid. The template is laid down on the concrete base and pilotholes are drilled through the cardboard and into the concrete in the positionsindicated.

View of ancillaryenclosuretemplate

Figure 5-4 shows how the cardboard lid is marked to provide a drilling templatefor the ancillary enclosure.

DRILL POSITIONMARKER

Figure 5-4 Ancillary enclosure drilling template


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–9

Procedure formarkingancillaryenclosure bolthole positions

The procedure for marking the position of the mounting holes is as follows:

1. Lay the cardboard installation template on the concrete base, on the rightside of the main enclosure. Ensure the gap between the main enclosurebolt holes and the ancillary enclosure bolt holes is between 200 mm and400 mm.


CAUTION Drilling concrete produces cement dust, which is harmfulto equipment and wiring. Protect the enclosure and anynearby equipment from dust. Use a tarpaulin, cloth, orplastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Clean upany accumulated debris from the anchor installationcarefully before exposing the equipment. Use drillingequipment suitable for cutting steel reinforced concrete.

2. Using a 6 mm drill bit, drill four pilot holes through the cardboard and intothe concrete in the positions shown on the template. Remove thetemplate.

3. Check that the distances between the pilot holes are correct (seeFigure 5-4) before starting the procedure to install the enclosure anchorbolts.




68P02902W68-A

Procedure forinstallingancillaryenclosure boltanchors

The pilot holes in the concrete base must be drilled out to accept the M12anchor bolts. Mounting washers are supplied with the enclosure, but bushesand M12 steel bolts must be supplied by the customer.


CAUTION Drilling concrete produces cement dust, which is harmfulto equipment and wiring. Protect the enclosure and anynearby equipment from dust. Use a tarpaulin, cloth, orplastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Clean upany accumulated debris from the anchor installationcarefully before exposing the equipment. Use drillingequipment suitable for cutting steel reinforced concrete.

1. Using the four pilot holes as a guide, drill the concrete base to a depth andclearance for the M12 anchor bolts using a suitable drill bit.

2. Insert the M12 mounting anchors in the holes in the base.

3. Fit the supplied washers to the anchor bolts. Insert the anchor bolts intothe anchor.

4. Place the supplied spreader plates against each anchor bolt and tensionup the anchor bolts to expand the anchors.

5. Partially unscrew the M12 bolts from the anchors so that approximately25 mm is protruding above the base (the bolts will act as a guide for theholes in the ancillary enclosure base). Remove the spreader plates andretain for securing the enclosure to the base.

GSM-208-423 Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–11

Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base

Procedure forfitting anancillaryenclosure

Follow the procedure given below to fit the ancillary enclosure onto the concretebase. This procedure assumes that the main enclosure has already beeninstalled, and the ancillary enclosure is to be installed on the right side of it.

Installing the flexible cable conduits

WARNING The empty ancillary enclosure weighs 150 kg.Observe proper lifting precautions and handle theenclosure with extreme caution to avoid tipping.

1. Manoeuvre the ancillary enclosure close enough to the main enclosure sothat the two flexible cable conduits coiled on the left side can be unwoundand the ends fed loosely into the front access hole (see Figure 5-5).

2. Open the main enclosure doors and remove the two access plates in thefloor.

3. Using the access holes, pull the cable conduits through the base of themain enclosure until all slack has been removed.

MAINENCLOSURE

CABLE CONDUITFEEDER PLATE

(SPLIT)

CABLE CONDUIT

Figure 5-5 Fitting the cable conduits and feeder plate to the main enclosure

GSM-208-423Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base



68P02902W68-A

Bolting the ancillary enclosure to the concrete base

1. Remove the two screws that secure the left front and left rear mountingaccess plates to the bottom of the enclosure. (The mounting holes on theright side of the enclosure can be accessed through the side accessholes.)

2. Lift and then lower the enclosure onto the concrete base. As it nears theground, look through the access holes on the front and sides to ensurethat the mounting holes in the enclosure base line up with the anchor boltsin the concrete base. Also, pull the flexible cable conduits further into themain enclosure so that all slack in the conduits is removed when theancillary enclosure is in its final position.

3. For each anchor bolt, insert the supplied spreader plate through theaccess hole so that it butts up against the anchor bolt (see Figure 5-6).

NOTE If the ancillary enclosure is mounted close to the mainenclosure and is not easily accessible from the rear, it maynot be possible to gain access and tighten the left rearanchor bolt through the access hole. In this case, theancillary enclosure is designed for stability with just threeanchor bolts fitted.

ANCHOR BOLT

SPREADER PLATE

Figure 5-6 Fitting the spreader plate to the anchor bolt (right rear shown)

4. Tighten up the anchor bolts to the correct torque while holding thespreader plate in position.

NOTE Refer to the manufacturer’s data sheet for the correcttorque values for the M12 anchor bolts.

5. Fit the supplied blank access cover plates to the side access holes andrefit the front and rear mounting access plates, as appropriate.

NOTE All access cover plates and the split cable conduit plateare secured using special anti-tamper screws. A specialright angle hex head screwdriver is supplied for tighteningthese screws.

GSM-208-423 Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–13

6. Remove each of the eyebolts from their threaded holes on the base of theenclosure and return them to the tool kit for future use. Refit the plasticinserts in the eyebolt holes.

Figure 5-7 shows the ancillary enclosure mounted next to the 12 carrier outdoorenclosure.

OUTDOORENCLOSURE

FLEXIBLE CABLECONDUIT

ANCILLARYENCLOSURE

85 mm MINIMUM285 mm MAXIMUM

Figure 5-7 Ancillary enclosure installed next to 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

Existing RFcablere-routeing

If the main enclosure is already in service and the RF feeder cables enter theenclosure from the right side, they can be disconnected, removed, and fed backinto the main enclosure through the rear side access panels in the base of theancillary enclosure. Spare RF feeder plates are supplied with the ancillaryenclosure for this purpose.

GSM-208-423Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base



68P02902W68-A

Installing theancillaryenclosure onthe left of themain enclosure

The procedure for installing the ancillary enclosure on the left of the mainenclosure is very similar to the standard procedure for installing it on the right,but note the following differences:

S The distances between the two enclosures must take into accountwhether or not a shroud is fitted to the main enclosure. It may not bepractical to install the ancillary enclosure on the left of the main enclosureif a shroud is used.

S The flexible cable conduits will need to be re-routed from the left to theright side of the ancillary enclosure. The easiest way to do this is toremove the conduit feeder plate, lift the enclosure off the ground, re-routethe conduits to the right side from underneath and then refit the feederplate on the right side of the enclosure.

GSM-208-423 Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–15

Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure

Introduction towiring theancillaryenclosure to themain enclosure

All the cables required to connect the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosureare preinstalled in the two flexible cable conduits. The cable connections withinthe ancillary enclosure are made in the factory, and therefore the onlyconnections that need to be made on site are to the appropriate equipmentwithin the main enclosure.

The procedures described here should be carried out in sequence and it isassumed that the flexible cable conduits have already been fed into the base ofthe main enclosure.

WARNING If the enclosure is operational, it must be shut down andisolated from the external ac supply and the internalbattery backup isolator switch must be in the OFF positionbefore starting to wire up the cables to the enclosure.

Preparing themain enclosure

The following procedure describes how to prepare the main enclosure prior toconnecting the cables from the ancillary enclosure, when mounted to the right ofthe main enclosure.

1. Remove the battery compartment cover on the left side of the mainenclosure.

2. Remove the four monoblocs from the upper and lower shelves of thebattery compartment.

3. Remove the two vertically mounted access plates from the rear panel ofthe upper and lower shelves of the battery compartment.

4. Remove the protective cover from the underside of the battery isolatorswitch.

5. Remove the AIM module cover.

6. Disconnect the thermal probe cable from J5 on the AIM (the other end ofthe cable has already been disconnected from the positive terminal of theright monobloc on the upper shelf in step 2). Remove the cable from theenclosure, as it is used in the ancillary enclosure (see Procedure forinstalling the monoblocs later in this chapter).

GSM-208-423Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure



68P02902W68-A

AC supplyconnection tothe mainenclosure

Figure 5-8 shows the ac supply and earth cables, as installed in the flexiblecable conduit. Proceed as follows to connect the cables in the enclosure:

1. Feed the ac cable conduit across the base to the cable channel at the rearof the battery compartment.

2. Through the access holes at the rear of the battery compartment, feed thecable conduit up the cable channel.

3. Secure the conduit termination brackets to the rear of the upper accesspanel using two screws (fixings are supplied with the ancillary enclosure).Secure the conduit to one of the brackets and feed the ac supply andearth cables through the cable glands at the top of the cable channel.

4. Connect the earth cable to the Principal Ground Bar (PGB), mounted ontop of the battery compartment, behind the AIM.

5. Connect the ac supply cable to the ac connector fixed to the enclosurechassis (see Figure 5-9). Use cable ties to secure the cable in position.

EARTH CABLE(TO PGB)

AC SUPPLY CABLE(TO AC POWER

DISTRIBUTION UNIT)

FACTORY CONNECTEDIN THE ANCILLARY

ENCLOSURE

Figure 5-8 Cable conduit containing ac supply cables

LOWER ACCESSPANEL

AIM

AC CONNECTOR PLUG(FROM AC

DISTRIBUTION UNIT)

UPPER ACCESSPANEL

AC SUPPLYCABLE

Figure 5-9 Routeing the ac supply cable to the main enclosure


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–17

Connecting thedc supply andalarm cables tothe mainenclosure

Figure 5-11 shows the dc supply and alarm cables as installed in the flexiblecable conduit. Proceed as follows to connect the cables to the enclosure:

1. Feed the dc/alarm cable conduit across the base to the cable channel atthe rear of the battery compartment.

2. Through the access holes at the rear of the battery compartment, feed thecable conduit up the cable channel.

3. Secure the cable conduit in the unused conduit termination bracket on theback of the upper access panel. Feed the alarm cable through the cablegland at the top of the cable channel.

4. Feed the dc supply cables through the hole in the upper access plate.Connect the cables to the spare M6 studs on the right side of the batteryisolator switch (see Figure 5-10).

0 V BLACK CABLECONNECTS HERE

–48 V BLUE CABLECONNECTS HERE0 V BLACK

CABLE

–48 V BLUECABLE

0 V BLACK CABLE

–48 V BLUE CABLE

Figure 5-10 DC connections to the battery isolator switch

5. Refit the battery isolator switch protective cover. Refit the access plates tothe rear panel of the battery compartment.

6. Reinstall the four monoblocs on the upper and lower shelves. Refit thebattery compartment cover.

7. Refit the access plates to the floor of the enclosure.

8. Identify connectors J4 and J41 on the AIM board (see Figure 5-12).Connect the 12-pin plug on the alarm cable to J4 and the 6-pin plug toJ41.

GSM-208-423Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure



68P02902W68-A

9. Set the SW1 and SW2 DIP switch settings on the AIM as required (seethe next section, DIP switch settings on the AIM) and then refit the AIMcover.

10. Fit the supplied conduit feeder plates to the main enclosure (seeFigure 5-5). Ensure all other feeder/blanking plates are fitted to the mainand ancillary enclosures.

DC SUPPLY CABLES(TO BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH)

FACTORY CONNECTEDIN THE ANCILLARY

ENCLOSURE

ALARM CABLE(TO AIM)

Figure 5-11 Cable conduit containing dc supply and alarm cables

J7

J12

J13

J10J11

J8

J9

J25

J21 J20 J19 J18

J15 J14

J17 J16

SW 1

SW 2

J4 J1 J22

J23 J2 J24

J26

J5

J27

J28

SK1

SK2

SK3

SK4

SK5

SK6SK7

SK8

SK9

SK10

SK11

SK12

J3

J6

1

14 20

11

20

1 20 1 20

NO

NC

CO

M

NO

NC

CO

M

NO

NC

CO

M

NO

NC

CO

M

3

1

3

1

3

1

3

1

4

1

7

1

1 41 4

1 41 4

1

4

1

4

1

41

4

1

4

1

4

J404

1J41

4

1

13

1 6

1 6

Figure 5-12 J4 and J41 connector locations on the AIM


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–19

DIP switchsettings on theAIM

Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 show the settings required on DIP switch blocks SW1and SW2 on the AIM when the ancillary enclosure is connected to the mainenclosure.


SwitchNo.

Requiredsetting


1 Open 1


2 Open 2

11 Door alarm

3 Open 3


4 Open 4


5 Open 5


6 Closed 6



SwitchNo.

Requiredsetting


1 Open 1


2 Open 2


3 Closed 3


4 Closed 4


5 Open 5


6 Open 6


GSM-208-423Installing the battery strings



68P02902W68-A

Installing the battery strings

Introduction tobattery stringinstallation

For safety reasons, the battery strings are supplied separately from the ancillaryenclosure. The monoblocs should be installed and connected as soon possibleafter the enclosure is secured in its permanent location.

One, two, or three battery strings can be installed in the ancillary enclosure, onestring per shelf. Each string comprises four 12 V monoblocs, connected in seriesto produce a –48 V dc output. The design of the shelves in the ancillaryenclosure enables monoblocs from different manufacturers to be installed.

Figure 5-13 shows the shelf arrangement in the ancillary enclosure.


SHELF FOR STRING 3

SHELF FOR STRING 2

SHELF FOR STRING 1


HEATER

Figure 5-13 Empty ancillary enclosure

GSM-208-423 Installing the battery strings

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–21

Batteryinstallationsafetyprecautions

Observe the following safety precautions when installing the monoblocs:

WARNING Ensure the battery circuit breakers BATTERY 1, BATTERY2 and BATTERY 3 are set to the OFF position.

S Use insulated tools when connecting monobloc terminals together, andwhen connecting battery strings to the circuit breakers.

S Remove jewellery and watches before starting to install the monoblocs.

S Install the battery strings in numbered order, starting with string 1 on thebottom shelf.

S Do not use naked flames near the monoblocs.

S The battery cables and monobloc terminals are colour coded:

BLUE cables on the left side of the enclosure are negative (–) andmust only be connected to the blue (–) terminal of monobloc 4 oneach shelf (see Figure 5-16).

BLACK cables on the right side of the enclosure are positive (+) andmust only be connected to the red (+) terminal of monobloc 1 oneach shelf.

S Do not remove the insulated boot from each battery cable termination untilimmediately before connecting the cable to the monobloc.

S Do not leave exposed cables loose in the enclosure.

S If fewer than three battery strings are to be installed, ensure that thecables to the unused string(s) are insulated from the enclosure and eachother by fitting the insulating boots provided.

WARNING The ancillary enclosure has a positive earth chassis.




68P02902W68-A

Procedure forinstalling themonoblocs

The procedure for installing string 1 in the bottom shelf is given below. String 2and string 3 are installed in exactly the same manner.

Connect the thermal probe cable (taken from the main enclosure) between J4on the BMM and the monobloc 1 positive terminal on shelf 2 (or shelf 1,depending on how many strings are installed (see Figure 5-16)).

WARNING Observe the safety precautions given in the previoussection. There is a danger of explosion if the monoblocsare installed incorrectly.

1. Remove the bottom shelf retaining bracket mounted on the left side of theenclosure by undoing the two retaining screws (see Figure 5-14). Pull theshelf forward until it reaches the shelf stop.

SHELF RETAINING BRACKET

SHELF

Figure 5-14 Enclosure detail showing retaining bracket

2. Position the backstop bracket to the rear of the shelf, according to the typeof monobloc being installed (see Figure 5-15). Secure the backstopbracket in position by tightening the three M6 bolts.

HAWKER SBS C11 GNB MARATHON HAWKER CHLORIDEPOWERSAFE

YUASA INDEPENDENCE

Figure 5-15 Backstop bracket positions for different monobloc types

GSM-208-423 Installing the battery strings

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–23

3. If Hawker monoblocs are being installed, fit the supplied M8 to M6adapters on the monobloc terminals.

4. Lift monobloc 1 and then monobloc 4 (see Figure 5-16) into position onthe outer sides of the shelf. Locate the two supplied M8 studded bars intothe shelf inserts along the inner sides of the monoblocs and fastensecurely.

WARNING Each monobloc weighs at least 30 kg. Handle with careand observe the correct safety precautions for lifting heavyobjects.

5. Install and secure the remaining two monoblocs.

6. Mount the supplied plastic bars over each pair of monoblocs and securethem to the studded bars using the nuts and washers provided.

7. Push the shelf back into position and refit the shelf retaining bracket.

8. Apply grease (supplied) to the terminals of each monobloc.

9. Connect the supplied copper link bars between the monobloc terminals(see Figure 5-16). Six of the eight voltage sense cables are alreadyconnected to the link bars.

Note that the terminals on the Yuasa monoblocs connect using the innerscrew holes on the link bars, whereas the terminals on the monoblocsfrom the other manufacturers connect using the outer screw holes.

10. Connect the –48 V (blue) cable and the loose left-hand voltage sensecable to the negative terminal of monobloc 4.

11. Connect the 0 V (black) cable and the loose right-hand voltage sensecable to the positive terminal of monobloc 1.

12. Tighten all terminal bolts to the correct torque (see Table 5-3) and then fitthe terminal protective covers.

Table 5-3 Monobloc terminal torque settings

Monobloc type Torque setting

Hawker SBS C11 5 Nm

Hawker Chloride Powersafe 4 Nm

GNB Marathon 11.3 Nm

Yuasa Independence 4 Nm

The ancillary enclosure is now ready for commissioning (see the appropriatesection of Chapter 6).




68P02902W68-A

STRING 3

STRING 2

STRING 1

0 V(BLACK)

BLOC 2BLOC 3BLOC 4

BLOC 1BLOC 2BLOC 3BLOC 4

BLOC 1BLOC 2BLOC 3BLOC 4

0 V(BLACK)

0 V(BLACK)

–48 V(BLUE)

–48 V(BLUE)

–48 V(BLUE)

BLOC 1

STRING 3

LINK BARCONNECTIONS

HAWKERHAWKER CHLORIDE

GNB

YUASA

THERMAL PROBECONNECTS HEREIF 2 OR 3 STRINGS

ARE INSTALLED

THERMAL PROBECONNECTS HEREIF ONLY 1 STRING

IS INSTALLED

Figure 5-16 Monobloc arrangement in the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A i

Chapter 6

Horizonmacro interoperability

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii




GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423 Introduction to interoperability

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–1

Introduction to interoperability

Mixed productsites

This chapter describes how the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor can be used inconjunction with other Motorola BTS products.

Different Motorola product types can be collocated at the same physical sitewithout restriction, provided they are configured as logically separateinstallations, and in accordance with the normal product engineering rules.

When mixed product types are installed at the same logical site, a number oftechnical issues arise that restrict the hardware that can be configured, and theway it is interfaced. This chapter explains which product types can be mixed inthis way, and how they are interfaced.

NOTE This chapter only applies to the Horizonmacro GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 BTS variants.GSM850 and PCS1900 Horizonmacro BTS variantscannot be mixed with other Motorola BTS types.

Architecturalconstraints

To enable different product types to be used at the same logical site, oneproduct type is chosen as master, which is connected to the extender equipmentso that the two product types can function as a single, logical BTS. Thisapproach is viable when the product types to be interfaced have similararchitectures.

Motorola BTS product types that can be interfaced for collocation at a singlelogical site are therefore restricted to those shown in Table 6-1 below.

Table 6-1 BTS compatibility for collocation at a single logical site

Master Extender

InCell M-Cell2 M-Cell6 Horizonmacro

InCell Discontinued No No No

M-Cell2 No Yes* Yes* No

M-Cell6 No No Yes* Yes

Horizonmacro No No Yes* Yes

* Check for availability before ordering

Indoor and outdoor cabinets can be mixed, but different mechanicalarrangements may be required for routeing the inter-cabinet cabling.

GSM-208-423BTS architectures and interoperability



68P02902W68-A

BTS architectures and interoperability

M-Cell6 andHorizonmacroarchitectures

Figure 6-1 represents the high level architecture of the M-Cell6 andHorizonmacro BTSs. Both systems provide an optical interface for connection toremote transceivers, which in a normal installation would be used to connect totransceivers of the same product type.

CTU

RF coupling

MCUF FMUX

Network terminationfunctions

FMUX

Horizonmacro M-Cell6

Fibre optic links to remote radios

TCU

RF coupling

MCU

FMUX


FOX

Figure 6-1 High level architecture of M-Cell6 and Horizonmacro BTSs

However, since the optical interface is identical for both products, it can be usedto link an M-Cell6 to Horizonmacro transceivers, or a Horizonmacro to M-Cell6transceivers. The principle is shown in Figure 6-2.

GSM-208-423 BTS architectures and interoperability

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–3

CTU

Horizonmacro (Extender)

RF coupling

FMUX

Fibre optic link

TCU

RF coupling

MCU

FMUX


Cross connections

(see text)

Abis Interface

FOX

M-Cell6 (Master)

Figure 6-2 Example of interfacing different products at a single logical site

When two product types are interfaced in this way, the control function for theentire BTS is implemented by the master product. In Figure 6-2, this is theM-Cell6. In practice, either BTS can be configured as master according to theneeds of the network concerned.

Example mixedsite

A multi-cabinet mixed site can typically be achieved in several ways. Figure 6-3shows the alternatives layouts for a four cabinet mixed BTS site

M-Cell6 M-Cell6M-Cell6

M-Cell6 M-Cell6

M-Cell6Layout1

Layout3

Layout2 HorizonmacroHorizonmacro

HorizonmacroHorizonmacroHorizonmacro

Horizonmacro

Figure 6-3 Example of alternative layouts for a 4-cabinet mixed BTS site




68P02902W68-A

Technicalissues

When mixing different BTS types, the interface may be required to resolvesome or all of the following issues, depending on the site configuration:

S The interface must deliver both Rx and Rxdiv (receive diversity) signals toeach transceiver.

S The interface must not change the uplink (receive) signal level delivered toany transceiver.

S The interface must ensure that in the mixed BTS configuration, RFcombiners remain correctly loaded.

Receive path

When a cell is wholly configured within one cabinet, there is no requirement toconnect the uplink or downlink RF signals between the master and extendercabinets. The only interface between the cabinets in this type of mixed BTSconfiguration is therefore at digital level, between FMUXs via the fibre optic link.

When a cell is split between two cabinets, the uplink signals must be connectedbetween the cabinets since both Rx and Rxdiv signals are required at eachtransceiver. In this situation the downlink signal may or may not requireconnection between cabinets, depending on the site configuration. The uplinkconnectivity requirements are shown in Figure 6-4 (DCS1800) and Figure 6-5(GSM900).


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–5

DCS1800

Refer to Figure 6-4. In the Horizonmacro cabinet, low noise amplification in theSURF module first boosts the Rx signal by +13 dB. Separate Rx outputs fromthe SURF are then discretely routed to relevant transceivers in the mastercabinet, and to the LNA in the extender cabinet. Since the LNA boosts the Rxsignal by a further +13 dB, a 13 dB attenuator is placed in the signal path tooffset this additional signal gain, which would otherwise result in signal levelsoutside the permitted range for the transceivers.

The Rxdiv signal is similarly given a +13 dB boost by the LNA in the extendercabinet. Separate Rxdiv outputs from the LNA are then discretely routed torelevant receivers in the extender cabinet, and to the SURF module in themaster cabinet. Since the SURF provides a further +13 dB boost, a 13 dBattenuator is again placed in the signal path to offset this additional gain.

In this way, the arrangement shown in Figure 6-4 delivers Rx and Rxdiv signalsto the uplink path in both cabinets, at the required signal level.

To NIU and AbisInterface

Rx

Rxdiv

M-Cell6 (Master)

CTU

Cell A Cell B Cell C

RxdivRx Rx Rxdiv

Duplexer

SURF +13 dB–13 dB+13 dB

RxdivRx

LNA

Rx Rxdiv

–13 dB

TCU

Horizonmacro (Extender)

RxdivRx

FMUX

MCU

FMUXFibreopticlink

Duplexer

FOX

Figure 6-4 Functional overview of the receive path for a DCS1800 split cellconfiguration




68P02902W68-A

GSM900

Refer to Figure 6-5. In GSM900 products, RF gain for the IADU and SURF isconfigurable. A split cell configuration is therefore dealt with in the same way asthat described for DCS1800, except that the 13 dB attennuators are notrequired. Instead, the required signal level is maintained by using appropriategain settings for the IADU and SURF.

CTU

Cell A Cell B Cell C

RxdivRx Rx Rxdiv

Duplexer

IADU*SURF

*

RxdivRx

DLNB

Rx Rxdiv

TCU

Rx

Rxdiv

RxdivRx

* Configurable gain

Duplexer

To NIU and AbisInterface

M-Cell6 (Master)Horizonmacro (Extender)

FMUX

MCU

FMUXFibreopticlink

FOX

Figure 6-5 Functional overview of the receive path for a GSM900 split cellconfiguration


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–7

Transmit path

When configuring the downlink paths for a cell using three carriers or more, itmay be necessary to provide additional external RF load(s) for the combiners.

M-Cell6 combining

Figure 6-6 illustrates a typical M-Cell6 combining arrangement for a 4-carriercell. Carriers 1 and 2 are combined in a hybrid combiner (HCOMB) module. Theoutput from this module provides one of the three inputs to the 3IP CBF. TheHCOMB is equipped with an internal RF load, and is therefore self–contained.The 3IP CBF requires one RF load for each of the two hybrids it contains, but isequipped with only a single internal RF load. An additional load is thereforeprovided for this purpose on the HCOMB casing.

Hybrid

HybridHybrid

Duplexer

LoadLoad

3IP CBF

HCOMB

Externalload

One carrier from each of four transceivers

Carrier 1 Carrier 2 Carrier 3 Carrier 4

Figure 6-6 Typical M-Cell6 arrangement for combining four carriers




68P02902W68-A

Horizonmacro combining

A similar arrangement is used in the Horizonmacro, which uses a HybridCombiner Unit (HCU) and Dual stage Duplexed combining Filter (DDF), asshown in Figure 6-7. The DDF has three input ports together with two internalRF loads, and therefore does not require the addition of any external load.

Hybrid

HybridHybrid

Duplexer

LoadLoad

DDF

HCU

One carrier from each of four transceivers

Carrier 1 Carrier 2 Carrier 3 Carrier 4

Load

Figure 6-7 Typical Horizonmacro arrangement for combining four carriers


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–9

Mixed equipment combining

When the two different product types are interfaced, a situation can arise wherea 3IP CBF is connected to an HCU, as shown in Figure 6-8. In this configurationit is therefore necessary to provide an additional external RF load for this 3IPCBF. The example in Figure 6-8 shows downlink connections for a 4/4/4configuration using mixed BTS types.

3IP CBF 2

Load

Load

HCOMB

HCU 2 DDF HCU 1

5 4 3 2 1 011 10 9 8 7 6

2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A

Sector3 Sector2 Sector1

M-Cell6Horizonmacro

3IP CBF 1

Figure 6-8 Downlink configuration for a 4/4/4 mixed cabinet installation

Inputs for the DDF are carriers 8 and 9, together with the output of HCU2. TheDDF contains two RF loads and is therefore self-contained. Inputs to 3IP CBF1are carriers 0 and 1, together with the combined output of HCOMB. 3IP CBF1contains a single load and is therefore connected to the external load mountedon HCOMB. Inputs for 3IP CBF2 are carriers 4 and 5, together with the output ofHCU1, from the master cabinet. 3IP CBF2 contains a single load and thereforerequires the addition of an external 50 ohm load, as shown.




68P02902W68-A

M-Cell6 and Horizonmacrohardwareequivalents

Table 6-2 shows the RF hardware equivalents for the Horizonmacro and M-Cell6BTSs.

Table 6-2 RF hardware equivalents for Horizonmacro/M-Cell6

Horizonmacro900/1800

M-Cell 900 M-Cell 1800

DCF CBF + duplexer Hybrid + duplexer

DDF 3- input CBF* +duplexer

2 x hybrid + dup/BPF

HCU Hybrid Hybrid

Feedthrough plate Non-hybrid (no equivalent)

TDF TBF + duplexer 2 x dup/BPF

CCB master CCB master CCB master

CCB extender CCB extender CCB extender

SURF 3 x DLNB + IADU 3 x LNA

Split Sector Cable Rx Extender (no equivalent)

* 3-input CBF contains only one internal 50 ohm load.

Furtherconfigurationinformation

Provided the functional guidelines described in this chapter are followed, thesteps involved in upgrading an existing site with mixed equipment areessentially the same as with a conventional upgrade:

S Determine the number of additional carriers required in the upgraded site.

S Based on the required site configuration (for example, 4/4/4), use thefunctional guidelines provided in this chapter to decide the most effectivehardware configuration for the additional cabinet(s).

S Special upgrade kits are available for specified configurations.

S Configuration diagrams and product ordering help are available from theMotorola local office.


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–11

Exampleconfigurations

Configuration diagrams provided by the Motorola local office show top of rackcable and antenna connections for mixed product configurations, together withdetails of external RF loads required. Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10 and Figure 6-11are examples of the type of diagram that can be provided.

GSM900 2/2/2 configuration using two cabinets

In this configuration, there are no split cells, and therefore no uplink/downlinkconnections between the cabinets. The CBFs are 2-input devices, consequentlyno external RF loads are required.

Sector 2

2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A

BLANK BLANKDCFCBF BLANK CBF

EXT

Sector 3 Sector 1


Figure 6-9 GSM900 mixed Horizonmacro / M-Cell6 2/2/2 configuration usingtwo cabinets




68P02902W68-A

GSM900 5/5 configuration using two cabinets

In this configuration, there are no split cells, and therefore no uplink or downlinkconnections between the cabinets. In the M-Cell6 cabinet, both 3IP CBFs areconfigured with external loads provided by the NON HYB. In the Horizonmacro,one DDF has two direct RF inputs, plus a third input via the FEEDTHRU. Thesecond DDF has two RF inputs, one direct and one via the FEEDTHRU. Thisarrangement facilitates using the transceivers in sequence. The two 50 ohmloads are required to terminate the unused DDF/3IP CBF input ports.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ

2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A

DDF2 DDF1FEEDTHRU3IP CBF2 NON-HYB 3IP CBF1

EXT

50 ohm loads

Sector 1Sector 2


Figure 6-10 GSM900 mixed Horizonmacro / M-Cell6 5/5 configuration usingtwo cabinets


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–13

DCS1800 4/4/4 configuration using two cabinets

In this configuration, sector 2 is split between the cabinets. The uplink Rx andRxdiv signals for sector 2 are therefore connected between the BTS types toensure the availability of both signals in both cabinets. In the M-Cell6 cabinet,2-input hybrids are used for combining, each configured with a discrete externalload.

2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A

DCF HYB

EXT

DCF DCF DUP DUP DUPHYB HYB

Sector 2Sector 3 Sector 1


Figure 6-11 DCS1800 Mixed Horizonmacro / M-Cell6 4/4/4 configuration usingtwo cabinets




68P02902W68-A

Specialhardware

A range of cables is available for uplink, downlink and fibre optic connections,together with the uplink attennuators described earlier. Contact the Motorolalocal office for further details.

In addition, the mounting plate and snap-in multi cable gland shown inFigure 6-12 are required when expanding M-Cell6 outdoor sites withHorizonmacro cabinets. In this type of configuration, the Horizonmacroequipment is located to the left of the M-Cell6 cabinets.

CABLE GLAND ENTRY PORTACCEPTS SNAP-IN MULTI CABLE

GLAND

ENVIRONMENTALGASKET

Figure 6-12 Special cable gland plate required for mixed M-Cell6 andHorizonmacro installations

The mounting plate is located as shown in Figure 6-13 in place of the originalblanking plate fitted to the M-Cell6.

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

ÇÇÇÇÇÇ

MULTI CABLEGLAND

M-Cell6 CABINETS

Figure 6-13 Location of the snap-in multi cable gland and mounting plate in theM-Cell6

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A i

Chapter 7

Site commissioning

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii

Chapter 7Site commissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning overview and test equipment Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of commissioning Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC to MCUF cable pin connections Inst. 7–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test equipment Inst. 7–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .






GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423 Commissioning overview and test equipment

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–1

Commissioning overview and test equipment

Overview ofcommissioning

This chapter provides information required for the commissioning of theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and its associated indoor cabinet(s).

NOTE Some equipment at the site may not be produced byMotorola (antennas, for example). Refer to site-specificdocumentation and the non-Motorola vendor instructions.

All site preparation and equipment installation in the previous chapters must becompleted before commissioning. Commissioning consists of the following:

S Pre-power up checks.

S Powering up the enclosure.

S Testing the HMS and the heater.

S Powering up the cabinet.

PC to MCUFcable pinconnections

Figure 7-1 shows the pin connections for the PC to MCUF test cable. These arestandard null modem pin connections. There is also a TTY adapter, to attach tothe cable, for CTU use, Motorola part number 58C86540N01.

TO PC COMMUNICATIONS PORT9-WAY D-TYPE FEMALE

TO MCUF TTY PORT9-WAY D-TYPE MALE

PIN NUMBERPIN NUMBER

4 m LONG SCREENED CABLE

1

6

4

14

6

2

3 2

3

5 5

7

8

8

7

9 9

Figure 7-1 9-way to 9-way PC to MCUF cable pin connections

GSM-208-423Commissioning overview and test equipment



68P02902W68-A

Test equipment

Table 7-1 provides details of the test equipment required to perform thecommissioning procedures in this chapter.

Table 7-1 Test equipment required for commissioning

Quantity Description Comments

1 IBM compatible 486 DX2 orDX4 portable PersonalComputer (PC)

The basic requirements are:

TFT colour screen.170 Mbyte hard drive(minimum).

Minimum 4 Mbyte RAM orrecommended 8 Mbyte.

3.5 inch floppy drive.

Serial port.

CD-ROM drive (recommended)

PCMCIA (Type 2) compatibleslot.

Windows NT loaded.

Battery power.

1 Commercial terminal emulatorsoftware

PC PLUS or similar software.

1 Digital multimeter (must besensitive enough to measure0.1 ohms)

Hewlett Packard E2378A orequivalent.

1 ESD protection kit

1 9-way female D-type to 9-waymale D-type

For PC to MCUF.

Pin connections shown inFigure 7-1.

1 PAT tester Insulation and earth tester.

1 SVLN1384 test adapter For testing the HMS units.

GSM-208-423 Pre-power up checks

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–3

Pre-power up checks

Overview ofpre-power upchecks

WARNING The power system checks provided in this section must beperformed before powering up the equipment.

This section contains procedures for testing the power system prior to applyingpower to the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and associated indoorcabinets.

WARNING Up to 230 V ac is present within the enclosure when theenclosure is connected directly to an ac power supply.Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioningof the ac and dc power system. Watches and otherjewellery should be removed.Only insulated tools should be used.

CAUTION This equipment contains CMOS devices and is vulnerableto static discharge. Although the damage may not beimmediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged inthe long term due to mis-handling causing barrierbreakdown.The approved earth strap (high impedance) must be wornat all times when adjusting or handling the processorcards (but see WARNING above, regarding use of earthstraps).If the cabinet door is kept open for long periods of timeduring commissioning, an alternative method of coolingmust be provided to avoid damage to the equipmentthrough overheating.

GSM-208-423Pre-power up checks



68P02902W68-A

Visualinspection

Inspect the installation for damage in accordance with BS 7671 (16th Edition<Section 712>) or the IEC 364 equivalent.

WARNING If damage is discovered during the visual inspection, thecommissioning must not proceed further until the damagehas been inspected and rectified by the manufacturers ortheir representatives.

Enclosure exterior

Examine the exterior of the enclosure for structural, paint or mechanical damageand report any damage to Motorola.

Enclosure interior

Examine the interior of the enclosure, including the two Horizonmacro indoorcabinets, for structural, paint or mechanical damage and report any damage toMotorola.

Request forconnection

Ensure that all correct Request for connection and Completion andinspection form certificates have been sent to the local electricity supply board.

NOTE Samples of a typical Request for connection and aCompletion and inspection form are shown in Sampleform 1 and Sample form 2 on the following pages.

Apply conductive non-oxidizing grease to the earth mat connection on the earthbusbar if an earth mat connection is used.


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–5

Sample form 1: Request for connection

Address ......................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................ Telephone No. ...................................

XXXXXXXXXX ELECTRIC

REQUEST FOR A CONNECTION OF A

CUSTOMER’S INSTALLATIONThe electrical installation at the following address will be ready for connectionon (date) ......................................................................................................................................

NOTE : At least 4 full working days’ notice is required.

DETAILS OF INSTALLATION

The installation to be connected is :tick as appropriate

A completely new installation An alteration A rewire

TYPE OF EQUIPMENT CONNECTED LOAD (kW)CookerWater heaterStorage radiatorsOther list below

METHOD OF EARTHING tick as appropriate

PME

Cable Sheath

RCD

Other Give Details

NO OF PHASES

1

3

Other Give Details

DECLARATIONThe electrical installation, summarised above, complies with the current edition of the Regulations for ElectricalInstallations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers and is now ready for connection to xxxxxxxxxElectric’s supply network.It is understood that xxxxxxxxxx Electric will carry out tests, required by law, prior to connection, but these testswill NOT confirm that the installation complies with the IEE Wiring Regulations, NOR will its connection implythat it is approved by xxxxxxxxxx Electric in any way.

Electrical Installer’s Name ............................................................................................................

Address ........................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................... Telephone No. .................................

Signed ................................................................................ Date ...............................................




68P02902W68-A

PARTICULARS OF THE INSTALLATION(Delete or complete items as appropriate)

Type of Installation New/alteration/addition/to existing installation

Type of earthing (312–03): TN–C TN–S TN–C–S TT IT(Indicate in the box)

Earth Electrode Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms

Method of Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Type (542–02–01) and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Characteristics of the supply at the origin of the installation ( 313–01 ):

Nominal voltage volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency Hz Number of phases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Prospective short–circuit current kA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Earth fault loop impedance (Ze) ohms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maximum demand A per phase. . . . . . . . . .

Overcurrent protective device – Type BS Rating A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main switch or circuit–breaker (460–01–02): Type BS Rating A No of poles . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(if an r.c.d., rated residual operating current I mA.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Method of protection against indirect contact:

1. Earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply

or

2. Other (Describe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Main equipotential bonding conductors (413–02–01/02, 547–02–01): Size mm2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

schedule of Test Results: Continuation pages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Details of departures (if any) from the Wiring Regulations (120–04, 120–05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Comments on existing installation, where applicable (743–01–01): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ascertainedby

enquiry

determinedby

calculationmeasured


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–7

Sample form 2: Completion and inspection form

DETAILS OF THE INSTALLATIONClient:Address:

DESIGNI/We being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the Design of the electrical installation, particulars of which

are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and

belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition, amended

to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate.

The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate.

For the DESIGN of the installation:

Name (In block Letters): Position:

for and on behalf of:

Address:

(2.) Signature: (3.) Date

CONSTRUCTION

I / We being the person(s) responsible ( as indicated by my/our signatures below ) for the Construction of the electrical installation, particulars of

which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge

and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition,

amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate.


For the CONSTRUCTION of the installation:



Address:


INSPECTION AND TEST

I / We being the person(s) responsible ( as indicated by my / our signatures below ) for the Inspection and Test of the electrical installation,

particulars of which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/

our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th

Edition, amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate.


For the INSPECTION AND TEST of the installation:



Address:

I RECOMMEND that this installation be further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than . . . . years (5.)


(6) page 1 of . . . . pages

FORMS OF COMPLETION AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE(as prescribed in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations)

(1.) (see Notes overleaf)




68P02902W68-A

This document is intended for the initial certification of a new installation or of an alteration or addition toan existing installation and of an inspection.

The signatures appended are those of the persons authorised by the companies executing the work ofdesign, construction and inspection and testing respectively. A signatory authorised to certify more thanone category of work shall sign in each of the appropriate places.

Dates to be inserted.

Where particulars of the installation recorded herein constitute a sufficient schedule for the purpose ofRegulation 514–09–01 further drawings / schedules need not be provided. For other installations theadditional drawings/schedules listed below apply.

Insert here the time interval recommended between periodic inspections. Regard should be paid torelevant National or Local legislation and reference should be made to chapter 13.

The page numbers of each sheet should be indicated together with the total number of sheets involved.

(4) Schedule of additional records.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

(6) page 2 of . . . . pages


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–9

Earth continuitycheck

Ensure an earth continuity check has been performed on appropriate equipmentif required. Use the digital multimeter to check that the resistance of the testequipment leads is less than 0.05 ohms.

Main equipment earths

Connect the PAT tester to the enclosure principal ground bar (PGB) and to thefollowing earth points:

S Antenna feeders.

S AC supply input earth.

– The local electricity board termination point.

– AC terminal box earth terminal block.

– AC supply isolator.

NOTE The switched isolator will not be connected to earth if it isa double insulated device and will therefore not need to betested.

S Battery compartment chassis.

S Enclosure chassis.

S Horizonmacro indoor cabinet chassis.

S Power distribution unit chassis.

S Doors and hood.

S Rack members.

Check that the measured resistance is less than 0.1 ohms with the testerconnected to a conductive surface (bare metal) at extreme ends of the earthcables.

On completion of each earth check, apply conductive non-oxidizing grease tothe earth connections on the earth busbar.




68P02902W68-A

AC powersysteminsulationcheck

Ensure an insulation check has been performed on all ac power cables whichsupply the site up to the ac input to the cabinet. Testing must be carried out inaccordance with the BS 7671, 16th Edition (section 713-04–01 to 713-04-06), orIEC 364 equivalent, at the voltage levels shown in Table 7-2, using an approvedinsulation tester. Check that the resistance at each point is as shown inTable 7-2.

Table 7-2 BS7671 (16th edition) Table 71A (part of)

Parameter AC test voltage(volts)

Minimum insulation(megaohms)

Up to and including 500 V 500 0.5

When the test has been completed, sign the completion and inspectioncertificate (see Sample form 2).

GSM-208-423 Powering up the enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–11

Powering up the enclosure

PrerequisitesThis procedure assumes all previous procedures have been completed.

AC power upprocedure

The following procedure should be carried out to power up the Horizonmacro 12carrier outdoor enclosure, prior to applying dc power to the indoor cabinets.

1. Ensure all circuit breakers on the ac and dc power distribution units areswitched to OFF. Figure 7-2 shows the position of circuit breakers andindicators on the ac PDU.

HEATER AUX

AC ISOLATION SWITCHCB1

HEATERINT

HEATERAUX

CB2/2 CB2/3CB2/4

RECT 0CB1/1

RECT 1CB1/2

RECT 2CB2/1

RECT 3CB3/1

RECT 4CB3/2

1 2 3

Figure 7-2 AC power distribution unit

2. Switch the 4-pole circuit breaker (AC ISOLATION SWITCH) to ON.

3. Switch ON the required single pole circuit breakers (RECT 0 to RECT 4) toapply ac input power to the rectifier modules.

NOTE The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure maycontain between two and five rectifier modules, dependingon redundancy requirements and the number of indoorcabinets fitted.

4. Check the phase indicators are illuminated on the front panel of the acdistribution unit.

NOTE On 3-phase systems, the equipment will operate even ifone phase is lost.

5. Check that the yellow I/P HEALTHY and green O/P HEALTHY LEDs areilluminated on the front panels of the rectifiers.

6. Switch ON the single pole circuit breaker (HEATER INT) to apply ac inputpower to the thermostatically controlled heater.

7. Switch ON the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker to apply power to theAUX 1 and AUX 2 sockets.

GSM-208-423Powering up the enclosure



68P02902W68-A

DC power upprocedure

Ensure the ac power up procedure has been completed before carrying out thefollowing procedure to apply dc power to the equipment. Figure 7-3 shows adetailed view of the dc distribution unit front panel.



LVD A LVD B

FAN 1 FAN 2

FS1 T2AH FS2 T2AH

FS3 T2AH FS4 T2AH


Figure 7-3 DC distribution unit front panel

1. Switch ON the HMS 0 and HMS 1 single pole circuit breakers to applypower to the two door-mounted HMS units.

2. Switch ON either the BTS 0 single pole circuit breaker or both BTS 0 andBTS 1, depending on whether one or two indoor BTSs have beeninstalled.

3. If customer communications equipment has been installed in PDU A andconnected to the –48 V dc distribution panel, switch ON the appropriateCOM circuit breaker(s) to supply power to the sockets on the distributionpanel.

4. Switch ON the isolator switch on the top of the backup batterycompartment to connect the backup batteries to the dc circuit.

The enclosure power up sequence is now complete and the indoor cabinet(s)can now be powered up.

GSM-208-423 Testing the HMS units and the heater

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–13

Testing the HMS units and the heater

Prerequisites

These procedures assume that ac power has been applied to the enclosure, theac and dc power up procedures have been carried out and the HMS units andheater are switched on.

A test adapter (available from Rittal) is required for testing that the HMS unitsconform to the manufacturer’s specifications.

HMS unit testprocedure

The procedure for testing an HMS unit using the test adapter is as follows:

1. Connect the 9 pin D-type plug on the adapter to the D-type socket on thetop panel of the HMS unit (next to the power and signal connector). Thedisplay panel on the test adapter indicates the current internaltemperature.

2. Initiate test mode by pressing the Test button. The display panel changesto show “09” and the LEDs on the Enter and ↑ buttons flash.

3. To run manual tests, press the ↑ button. Four temperature tests (43 °C,45 °C, 57 °C and 60 °C) can be run consecutively by pressing the ↑button. When all tests have been completed, exit by pressing Enter orrestart the tests by pressing ↑.

The significance of the above temperatures is as follows:

43 °C: Speed of the internal fans increases from 45%.45 °C: External fans switch on and run at 35%.57 °C: Internal fan speeds reach 100%.60 °C: External fan speeds reach 100%.

4. Unplug the test adapter when the tests are completed. Reset the HMS byswitching off the HMS 0 or HMS 1 circuit breaker (as appropriate) and thenswitching on again.

5. Connect the test adapter to the other HMS unit and repeat the testprocedure.

If malfunctions are detected during testing, error codes in the range 1 to 9 aredisplayed in sequence on the test adapter. The HMS unit must be replaced ifany error codes are displayed (see Chapter 3 of Maintenance Information:Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor (GSM-208-523) for the replacementprocedure).

Testing theheater

Test the heater by pressing the heater test button on the front of the acdistribution unit while holding out a hand in front of the heater grille. Release thetest button as soon as warm air is felt coming from the heater.

GSM-208-423Powering up the Horizonmacro cabinets



68P02902W68-A

Powering up the Horizonmacro cabinets

Prerequisites

This procedure assumes all previous procedures have been completed.

CAUTION –48V dc PSMs must be fitted to match the supply sourcevoltage provided by the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.Ensure that there is no blockage to ventilation at the baseof the cabinet.

Power upprocedurewithout codeload

The following procedure should be carried out to power up the cabinet, with nocode load. This proves the cabinet hardware is capable of operation. Theprocedure for cabinet code load is described in the next section.

Relevant components are shown in Figure 7-4.

WARNING Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioningof the power system, and watches and other jewelleryshould be removed.Only insulated tools should be used.The power source must be supplied to the cabinet via asuitable overcurrent protective device and be isolated fromthe BTS cabinet.

Procedure to prepare the cabinet for power up without code load

To prepare the cabinet prior to power up, proceed as follows:

1. Ensure the power source isolator is switched off.

2. Disconnect all E1 lines to the BSC.

3. Remove optional PCMCIA card from MCUF slot, if fitted.

4. Set the switch of each PSM to the OUTPUT DISABLE position.

5. Press and release all push on/push off circuit breaker buttons to the out(off) position.

GSM-208-423 Powering up the Horizonmacro cabinets

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–15

Power up of cabinet without code load

To power up the cabinet, proceed as follows:

1. Switch on the external power supply to the cabinet.

2. Turn each PSM switch to the OUTPUT ENABLE position; check that eachPSM has the active (green) LED on and the alarm (red) LED off.

3. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked FANS. Check that each fanmodule is operating correctly. Activate any fan not started by the restartbutton (marked either FRONT or REAR) on the fan module.

4. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked SURF.

NOTE The two CBM circuit breakers marked CCB0 and CCB1are not used when the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet isinstalled inside a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. Both circuitbreakers should be switched off.

5. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked BPSM A and (if redundantBPSM fitted) BPSM B. Check all associated digital module LEDs operatecorrectly; green LEDs lit on BPSM, NIU and MCUF, and red LEDs off onNIU and MCUF.

NOTE Both red and green LEDs are initially lit on the NIU whilethe unit conducts a self test. After approximately 20seconds, the red LED will extinguish, indicating normalcondition.

6. Press the appropriate CBM circuit breaker buttons for the CTUs fitted, andcheck that the RADIO STATUS LED for each CTU flashes green.

7. Close the door to ensure correct ventilation.

This completes the power up of the cabinet.

Power down ofcabinet

If the cabinet is not required to remain powered up, power down the cabinet asfollows:

1. Press all circuit breaker buttons to the out (off) position.

2. Switch each PSM to the OUTPUT DISABLE position.

3. Switch off the external power supply to the cabinet.

This completes the power down of the cabinet.




68P02902W68-A

Power upprocedure withcode load

The following procedure should be carried out to power up the cabinet, withcode load. The code will be provided either direct from the BSC from E1 line orfrom a PCMCIA card installed in the PCMCIA socket of the master MCUF.

Relevant components are shown in Figure 7-4.

CAUTION This procedure should be carried out only by experiencedfield personnel.

Procedure to prepare the cabinet for power up with code load

To prepare the cabinet prior to power up, proceed as follows:

1. Make E1 connection to BSC.

2. Insert (optional) PCMCIA card in MCUF PCMCIA socket.

3. Connect the 9 to 9-way cable from the PC serial A port to MCUF TTY port.

4. At the PC start the terminal emulator program.

NOTE It may take the system up to 30 minutes to reach thispoint.

5. Change to Level 3 and at the MMI-RAM> prompt type:

CTRL N


7. Press and release all push on/push off circuit breaker buttons to the out(off) position.


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–17

Power up of cabinet with code load

To power up the cabinet, proceed as follows:

CAUTION When the two LEDs of the CTU, or the MCUF, areflashing, the boot code is downloading into non-volatilememory for software upgrade. Power should not beremoved, nor the cabinet reset, until downloading hasbeen completed, as this will corrupt the non-volatilememory. If boot code is corrupted, contact the MotorolaCustomer Network Resolution Centre (see Contactinformation in Chapter 1 of this category), requesting theboot code restoration procedure and the appropriate bootcode file.

1. Switch on the external power supply to the cabinet.

2. Turn each PSM switch to the OUTPUT ENABLE position; check that eachPSM has the active (green) LED on and the alarm (red) LED off.

3. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked FANS. Check that each fanmodule is operating correctly. Activate any fan not started by the restartbutton (marked either FRONT or REAR) on the fan module.


NOTE The two CBM circuit breakers marked CCB0 and CCB1are not used when the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet isinstalled inside a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. Both circuitbreakers should be switched off.

5. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked BPSM A and (if redundantBPSM fitted) BPSM B. Check all associated digital module LEDs operatecorrectly; green LEDs lit on BPSM, NIU and MCUF, and red LEDs off onNIU and MCUF.

MCUF initialization will commence at power up. A connection to the BSC will beestablished and code download will take place. After download the site will beinitialized.

NOTE The NIU module will initially show both red and greenLEDs lit while the unit conducts a self test. Whenrebooting due to a code download, the red LEDextinguishes after approximately 50 seconds.

CAUTION If the code is a different version, the non-volatile memorywill be upgraded at this point. Both LEDs will be flashing,and a warning message will appear on the PC terminal.Do not power down or reset the cabinet as this will corruptthe non-volatile memory. If this happens, contact theMotorola Customer Network Resolution Centre, requestingthe boot code restoration procedure and the appropriateboot code file.




68P02902W68-A

6. Press the CBM circuit breaker buttons for the appropriate CTUs fitted, andcheck that the RADIO STATUS LED for each CTU flashes green.

At this point, after the MCUF has initialized, the CTUs will download code fromthe MCUF.

CAUTION If the code is a different version, the non-volatile memorywill be upgraded at this point. Both LEDs will be flashing.Do not power down or reset the cabinet as this will corruptthe non-volatile memory. If this happens, contact theMotorola Customer Network Resolution Centre, requestingthe boot code restoration procedure and the appropriateboot code file.

7. Once fully initialized, all CTUs should have RADIO STATUS LED solidgreen, and TRANSMIT STATUS LED either off, solid yellow, or flashingyellow.

8. Disconnect the 9 to 9-way cable from the MCUF TTY port.

9. Close the door to ensure correct ventilation.

This completes the power up of the cabinet.


29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–19

Cabinet andCBM views

Figure 7-4 shows the cabinet components and enlarged view of CBM showingcircuit breaker buttons.

ig.128.rh

2 Anot used

7 A

(CCB0 AND 1)SURF

FANS

BPSMs (A AND B)7 A

CIRCUITBREAKERMODULE

TWO 2-FANUNITS

ONE 4-FANUNIT

SIXTRANSCEIVERS

(CTUs)PSM0

PSM1

PSM2

SURF

BPSM A

BPSM B

CTU 0

CTU 5

CTU 0

PSM2

12 A6 CTUs (0 TO 5)

Figure 7-4 Diagram of cabinet with expanded view of CBM

GSM-208-423Commissioning the ancillary enclosure



68P02902W68-A

Commissioning the ancillary enclosure

Pre-power upchecks

All relevant installation procedures described in Chapter 5 of this category musthave been carried out before the ancillary enclosure is commissioned. Make thefollowing pre-power up checks on the equipment:

S Ensure that the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker on the ac distributionpanel in the main enclosure is switched OFF.

S Ensure all BMM circuit breakers are switched OFF.

S Ensure the ac supply isolation switch at the bottom of the ancillaryenclosure is switched OFF.

Power upsequence

This procedure assumes that the pre-power up checks have been completed.

Proceed as follows to power up the ancillary enclosure:

1. Switch on the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker on the ac distributionpanel in the main enclosure.

2. Switch on the ac supply isolation switch in the ancillary enclosure (turn theswitch 90° clockwise).

3. Switch on the BATTERY 1 to BATTERY 3 circuit breakers, as required. Onthe front panel of the BMM, the green HEALTHY LED should illuminate foreach battery string installed in the enclosure.

NOTE A monobloc showing voltage imbalance and its position inthe enclosure is indicated by the relevant red LED beingilluminated on the MONOBLOC FAULT panel and theHEALTHY LED for that string being unlit.

4. Press the heater test button (to the right of the ac isolator switch) whileholding a hand over the heater grille. Release the button as soon as heatis felt coming from the heater.

5. Close the enclosure door.

This completes the ancillary enclosure power up procedure.

NOTE After installation of the ancillary enclosure, the monoblocsshould be given a commissioning charge for a period of 16hours to ensure full capacity before undertaking adischarge cycle. This allows the monobloc voltages toequalize, thus preventing any initial erroneous monoblocfault alarms.

GSM-208-423 Commissioning the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–21

Power downsequence

CAUTION If the ancillary enclosure is supplying dc power to the mainenclosure, first ensure that the BTS equipment is powereddown before powering down the ancillary enclosure.

Proceed as follows to power down the ancillary enclosure:

1. Switch all the ancillary enclosure circuit breakers to OFF.

2. Switch OFF the ac supply isolator switch at the bottom of the enclosure(turn the switch 90° anticlockwise).

3. Isolate the ac supply to the enclosure by switching OFF the AUXILIARIESCB2/4 circuit breaker on the ac distribution panel in the main enclosure.

This completes the ancillary enclosure power down procedure.

NOTE Minimal battery backup is still available to the BTSsthrough the internal battery string in the main enclosure.

GSM-208-423Commissioning the ancillary enclosure



68P02902W68-A

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A i

Chapter 8

Site decommissioning

GSM-208-423

29th May 02ii


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A iii

Chapter 8Site decommissioning i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of decommissioning Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prerequisites Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline of the procedure to decommission the equipment Inst. 8–1 . . . . . . . . . . . .




GSM-208-423

29th May 02iv


68P02902W68-A

GSM-208-423 Overview of decommissioning

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–1

Overview of decommissioning

Introduction

This chapter describes how to decommission the Horizonmacro 12 carrieroutdoor and the optional ancillary enclosure. To decommission equipment notsupplied by Motorola, for example E1/T1 links, power supplies and antennas,refer to the vendor’s instructions.

WARNING Hazardous voltages exist inside the Horizonmacro 12carrier outdoor enclosure.Use extreme caution when working on an enclosure withpower applied. Remove all rings, watches and otherjewellery.

Prerequisites

Read Chapter 1 of this installation section before attempting to decommissionthe equipment.

Isolate the incoming ac supply before starting decommissioning work.

Outline of theprocedure todecommissionthe equipment

Decommissioning of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor itself is basically a twostage process:

1. Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet(s).

2. Decommissioning the enclosure.

For each of the above, the procedure should be recorded using a separatechecklist to check that each action has been completed. Photocopy thechecklists contained in this chapter as often as required; do not write on theoriginal manual copies.

NOTE For enclosures with two indoor cabinets installed, thedecommissioning procedure for both cabinets is the same.A separate checklist should be used for each cabinet.

A checklist is also provided for decommissioning the optional ancillaryenclosure.

GSM-208-423Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet



68P02902W68-A

Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

Before startingtodecommissionthe indoorcabinet

Before starting to decommission a Horizonmacro indoor cabinet ensure that:

S The main ac supply is switched off and that NO power is connected to theenclosure.

S The backup batteries are isolated or disconnected.

S Sufficient packing cartons are available to pack the decommissionedequipment.

S Any unused items have been retrieved from storage elsewhere.

Procedure todecommissionan indoorcabinet

Follow this procedure to decommission an Horizonmacro indoor cabinet:

Checking and making safe from power source

1. Check the cabinet for signs of damage.

2. Ensure that the enclosure is isolated from the ac supply and the powercable has been disconnected at source and thus made safe.

3. Ensure the dc supply from the backup batteries is isolated.

4. Disconnect the dc input power cable, from the top of the indoor cabinet.

Disconnecting all external cables

1. Disconnect all cabling from the interface panel on the top of the cabinet.

2. Disconnect all RF cables to antennas or other cabinets from the SURF.

3. If applicable, disconnect fibre optic cables between the main cabinet andany extension cabinets.

4. Disconnect the earth cable from the interface panel to the enclosurechassis.

WARNING Stow disconnected cables so that they do not create ahazard to personnel using the site.

5. If the cables are not to be used again for other equipment, dispose ofsafely.

GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–3

Removing the cabinet from the enclosure

1. Ensure that all cables to the cabinet have been disconnected.

2. Stow all internal enclosure cables safely out of the way before starting toremove the cabinet from the enclosure.

3. Remove the cabinet securing brackets and plates from the enclosurechassis.

WARNING The cabinet can weigh up to 110 kg if fully equipped.Handle the cabinet with extreme caution, and inaccordance with local health and safety regulations.Eyebolts are available for attaching lifting equipment.

4. Carefully remove the cabinet from the enclosure.

NOTE The cabinet may be removed either from the top or thefront of the enclosure simply by reversing the appropriateinstallation procedure (see Installing the Horizonmacroindoor cabinets in Chapter 4). The method useddepends on the customer preference and resourcesavailable.

5. Refit the cabinet securing brackets and plates to the enclosure chassis.

6. Check the cabinet for signs of damage and record details on the checklist.

Repacking the cabinet

1. Carefully pack all bolts, washers and other removed items.

2. Pack the cabinet for storage, transport or safe disposal.

3. If sending equipment back to Motorola, seal the shipping container andreturn, as advised, by the Motorola in-country Project Manager.

GSM-208-423Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet



68P02902W68-A

Horizonmacroindoor cabinetchecklist

Copy this sheet and fill in the checklist in Table 8-1.

NAME_______________________________________DA TE_________

SIGNATURE _________________________________

SITE NAME __________________________________

EQUIPMENT TYPE ____________________________

NATIONAL ID ____________________________

Table 8-1 Checklist of completed decommissioning steps

ACTION Yes No N/A

Packing material (including polythene bag) on site

Power cable disconnected

Interface panel cables disconnected

RF cables disconnected

Extension cabinet fibre optic cables disconnected

Earth cable disconnected

All loose cables stowed and secured

Horizonmacro indoor cabinet decommissioned

Enclosure cables stowed safely

Securing brackets and plates removed

Indoor cabinet removed from enclosure

Securing brackets and plates refitted in enclosure

Is cabinet damaged? If yes, detail in comments box

Indoor cabinet packed

COMMENTS

GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–5

Decommissioning the enclosure

Before starting

Before starting to decommission the enclosure, ensure that:

S The indoor cabinet(s) have been removed and repacked.

S Suitable lifting equipment is available to lift the enclosure.

S Suitable packing crates and cartons are available to pack the enclosure,the rectifiers and backup batteries.

Procedure todecommissionthe enclosure

To decommission the enclosure:

1. Check the enclosure and its contents for signs of damage.

2. Remove the backup batteries and repack them. Refit the battery backupcompartment cover.

NOTE If an ancillary enclosure is connected to the mainenclosure, disconnect the cables and remove the cableconduits before refitting the battery backup compartmentcover (see Decommissioning the ancillary enclosurelater in this chapter).

3. Withdraw all external ac supply, RF, E1/T1, and alarm cables from theenclosure and store in suitable packaging. Do not remove the enclosureearth lead until all other cables have been removed.

CAUTION Stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute ahazard to personnel using the site.

4. Remove all rectifiers from the enclosure and repack them.

5. If installed, remove customer communications equipment from PDU A andrepack.

6. Close the hood, close and lock the doors and store the key safely.

7. Unbolt the enclosure from the floor and move it to a location where it canbe safely packed into suitable transit packing (see Lifting the enclosure).

GSM-208-423Decommissioning the enclosure



68P02902W68-A

Lifting theenclosure

The enclosure is fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M16swivel head eyebolts, built into the front and rear of the enclosure base. If swivelhead eyebolts are used to lift the enclosure, they must be manufactured to CEconformity, and must have a safe weight load of 710 kg each.

Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for damage. Ifany damage is apparent, DO NOT USE.

1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M16 threaded lifting point.

2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.

WARNING The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight issufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the lifting point sothat no thread is left exposed.

3. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.

4. Attach the lifting straps from the crane to the eyebolts and then proceed tohoist the enclosure into position for repacking.

For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern theuse of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If theeyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.

Remember to remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic inserts when the liftingoperation is complete.

GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–7

Enclosurechecklist


NAME_______________________________________DA TE_________

SIGNATURE _________________________________

SITE NAME __________________________________

EQUIPMENT TYPE ____________________________

NATIONAL ID ____________________________

Table 8-2 Checklist of completed enclosure decommissioning steps

ACTION Yes No N/A

Packing material (including polythene bag) on site

Suitable lifting equipment on site

Indoor cabinet(s) removed and packed

Optional equipment (ancillary enclosure for example)disconnected and cables removed

Securing brackets and plates refitted in enclosure

Is enclosure damaged? If yes, detail in comments box

Backup batteries removed and packed

Backup battery compartment cover refitted

Rectifiers removed and packed

Customer communications equipment removed andpacked

All external cables disconnected and packed

Earth cable disconnected

Enclosure cables stowed safely

Hood and doors closed, locked and keys safely stored

COMMENTS

GSM-208-423Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure



68P02902W68-A

Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure

Before starting

Before starting to decommission the ancillary enclosure, ensure that:

S Suitable lifting equipment is available to lift the enclosure.

S Suitable packing crates and cartons are available to pack the enclosureand the monoblocs.

Safetyprecautions

Observe the following safety precautions when decommissioning the ancillaryenclosure:

S Ensure that all the BATTERY circuit breakers are switched OFF andremove jewellery and watches before starting to disconnect themonoblocs.

S Disconnect the 0 V cable before the –48 V cable on each battery string.

S Use insulated tools for disconnecting the monoblocs.


S Each monobloc weighs at least 30 kg. Handle with care and observe thecorrect safety precautions for lifting heavy objects.

Procedure todecommissionthe ancillaryenclosure

Proceed as follows to decommission the ancillary enclosure:

Preliminary actions

1. Check the ancillary enclosure and its contents for signs of damage.

2. Switch off all circuit breakers on the BMM and switch off the ac supplyisolator switch at the bottom of the enclosure.

3. Switch off and isolate the main enclosure (assuming this is still installed)and switch off the battery isolator switch on top of the battery compartmentwithin the main enclosure.

GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–9

Disconnecting and removing the monoblocs from the ancillaryenclosure

1. Starting with the uppermost string in the ancillary enclosure, first removethe shelf retaining bracket mounted on the left side of the enclosure byundoing the two retaining screws. Pull the shelf forward until it reaches theshelf stop.

2. Where fitted, disconnect the thermal probe from J4 on the BMM and theappropriate monobloc 1 terminal.

3. Disconnect the black 0 V cable and its voltage sense cable and then theblue –48 V cable and its voltage sense cable from the outer monoblocs.Fit an insulating boot over each cable termination as soon as it isdisconnected from the monobloc.

WARNING The 0 V cable must be disconnected before the –48 Vcable on each battery string.

4. Disconnect the copper links between monoblocs 1 to 2, 2 to 3 and 3 to 4.

5. Remove the plastic monobloc securing bars and then remove the innertwo monoblocs from the shelf. Fit the terminal protective covers beforerepacking


6. .Remove the two M8 studded bars and then remove the two outermonoblocs. Fit the terminal protective covers before repacking themonoblocs.

Repeat the above procedure for each remaining string in the enclosure.

Disconnecting and removing cables from the main enclosure

1. Disconnect the ac and dc cables, the earth cable and the alarm signalcable from their connection points in the main enclosure.

2. Remove the split cable conduit plate from the side of the main enclosure.Repack and place it in the ancillary enclosure.

3. Remove the two internal monoblocs from the upper shelf and then removethe access panel at the back of the shelf.

4. Undo the retaining screws that secure the flexible cable conduit bracketsto the rear of the access panel.

5. Remove the access panels in the floor of the main enclosure. Feed theflexible cable conduits down to the base of the enclosure and then pullthem out of the enclosure from the side.

6. Fit a blanking panel over the open access hole at the side of the mainenclosure.




68P02902W68-A

Preparing the ancillary enclosure for transport

1. Remove the access panels at the base of the ancillary enclosure. Unboltthe enclosure from the floor and then refit the access panels.

2. Secure the flexible cable conduits at the side of the ancillary enclosureusing cable ties attached to the overhang on the lid.

3. Close and lock the door and store the key safely.

4. Move the enclosure to a location where it can be safely packed intosuitable transit packing (see Lifting the ancillary enclosure later in thischapter).

Lifting theancillaryenclosure

WARNING Ensure the monoblocs have been removed from theenclosure. Do not attempt to lift/transport the ancillaryenclosure with the monoblocs still in place.

The ancillary enclosure is fitted with four lifting points, designed toaccommodate M16 swivel head eyebolts, built into the front and rear of theenclosure base. If swivel head eyebolts are used to lift the enclosure, they mustbe manufactured to CE conformity, and must have a safe weight load of 150 kgeach.

Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for damage. Ifany damage is apparent, DO NOT USE.

1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M16 threaded lifting point.

2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.

WARNING The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight issufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the lifting point sothat no thread is left exposed.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.

4. Attach the lifting straps from the crane to the eyebolts and then proceed tohoist the enclosure into position for repacking.

For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern theuse of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If theeyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.

Remember to remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic inserts when the liftingoperation is complete.

GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–11

Restoring themain enclosureto operationalstate

If the main enclosure is to be used after the ancillary enclosure has beendecommissioned and moved, carry out the following procedure:

1. Check that the external access blanking plate has been refitted and thatall internal access cover plates have been refitted.

2. Refit the previously removed monoblocs.

3. Connect the temperature probe cable (removed from the ancillaryenclosure) between J5 on the AIM and the positive terminal of the rightmonobloc on the upper shelf in the battery compartment. Refit the batterycompartment cover.

4. Reset the DIP switches on SW1 and SW2 in the AIM to the defaultsettings (see Chapter 3 of this category). Refit the AIM module cover.

5. Check that all connections are secure and all access covers are in placeand secure.

The main enclosure can now be powered up using the power up proceduregiven previously in Chapter 7 of this category.




68P02902W68-A

Ancillaryenclosurechecklist


NAME_______________________________________DA TE_________

SIGNATURE _________________________________

SITE NAME __________________________________

EQUIPMENT TYPE ____________________________

NATIONAL ID ____________________________

Table 8-3 Checklist of completed ancillary enclosure decommissioning steps

ACTION Yes No N/A

Packing material on site

Suitable lifting equipment on site

Is enclosure damaged? If yes, detail in comments box

All cables disconnected from connection points in theenclosure

All monoblocs removed, terminal covers refitted, andrepacked

Insulating boots fitted to battery cables

All anchor bolts removed

Access panels refitted

Flexible cable conduits removed from enclosure andsecured to ancillary enclosure

Flexible cable conduit feeder plate removed fromenclosure and stowed safely

All cables stowed safely

Door closed, locked and key safely stored

Main enclosure restored to operational state and poweredup

COMMENTS

CHAPTER 2GENERAL MAINTENANCE

PROCEDURES

CHAPTER 3ENCLOSURE FRUREPLACEMENT

CHAPTER 4INDOOR CABINET FRU

REPLACEMENT


FRU REPLACEMENT

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO

MAINTENANCE

CHAPTER 6SITE VERIFICATION

PROCEDURES

29th May 02

Maintenance Information: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

68P02902W69-A i

Category 523

Maintenance Information (Maint.)

GSM-208-523

29th May 02ii


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A iii

Category 523Maintenance Information (Maint.) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction to maintenance i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance information introduction Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting faulty devices Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact information Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .









GSM-208-523

29th May 02iv


68P02902W69-A





Chapter 3Enclosure FRU replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to enclosure FRU replacement procedures Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolating the enclosure Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU view of the enclosure Maint. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing non-FRU parts Maint. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .








GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A v





Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM) Maint. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for CBM replacement Maint. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Views of CBM Maint. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for CBM Maint. 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-208-523

29th May 02vi


68P02902W69-A









Chapter 5Ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Introduction to FRU replacement Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU view of the ancillary enclosure Maint. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A vii












GSM-208-523

29th May 02viii


68P02902W69-A



29th May 02


68P02902W69-A i

Chapter 1

Introduction to maintenance

GSM-208-523

29th May 02ii


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A iii

Chapter 1Introduction to maintenance i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Maintenance information introduction Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting faulty devices Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contact information Maint. 1–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


GSM-208-523

29th May 02iv


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523 Maintenance information introduction

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 1–1

Maintenance information introduction

Safety

Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentiallylethal hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within these routinemaintenance procedures must be adhered to when working on the equipment.

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources arepresent in the enclosure when the external ac mainsisolator switch is set to the on position and/or batteries areconnected. Remove rings, watches and jewellery beforestarting these procedures, and exercise extreme cautionwhen working on the equipment.Maintenance procedures on this equipment must only becarried out by suitably qualified personnel.

ToolsThe tools required are those listed in Installation and Configuration:GSM-204-423 Chapter 1 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor tool kit.

Torque valuesThe torque values for Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor are listed in Table 1-1.


Size ofscrew/bolt



Reporting faultydevices

During general maintenance and FRU replacement procedures, it may bepossible to identify signs of damage caused by overheating, short circuits orsudden component failure. This may indicate a problem that could repeat, causeadditional damage, or be a symptom of a failure elsewhere. Analysis of theproblem may identify common faults and make corrective action possible.

It is recommended that:

S The OMC-R is informed if an equipment safety problem has beenidentified.

S The steps for Reporting safety issues are followed, detailed in thefrontmatter section of this manual.

Contactinformation

Contact the Motorola local office if problems are encountered when carrying outany maintenance procedures described in this manual.

GSM-208-523Weather conditions affecting access

29th May 02Maint. 1–2


68P02902W69-A

Weather conditions affecting access

Overview ofweatherconsiderations

Before beginning any maintenance procedure, it is important to read and takeinto account the following information concerning the climatic conditions at theintended site.

Weatherconditions

WARNING Due consideration should be given to the hazards of windand other inclement weather conditions.Use discretion at all times. Do not climb a ladder,scaffolding or use a similar method of access if youfeel unsafe to do so under such weather conditions.

Maintenancecover

Motorola recommend the use of a maintenance cover for access to theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure during inclement weather conditions.

NOTE The maintenance cover is not supplied with theHorizonmacro equipment and should be provided by thecustomer if required.

Installation and configuration procedures for the Horizonmacro enclosure aredependent on the weather conditions. There are three situations where therecommended guidelines should be considered before commencing work:

S No access.

S Access with maintenance cover.

S Access without maintenance cover.

GSM-208-523 Weather conditions affecting access

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 1–3

No access

Access to the enclosure should not be attempted during the following actual orimminent inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance cover:

S Winds in excess of 25 knots (30 mph).

S Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.

S During an electrical storm.

Access with maintenance cover

Access to the enclosure may be made under the following conditions with theuse of the maintenance cover:


S Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.

S Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause aproblem.

Access without maintenance cover

Access may be made under the following conditions without the use of themaintenance cover:


S No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.

S When the temperature is between –30 _C to +40 _C (–22 _F to +104 _F).

Under these conditions the cover of the enclosure may be removed.

GSM-208-523Weather conditions affecting access



68P02902W69-A

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A i

Chapter 2

General maintenance procedures

GSM-208-523

29th May 02ii


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A iii












GSM-208-523

29th May 02iv


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523 General maintenance overview

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–1

General maintenance overview

Introduction togeneralmaintenance

This chapter contains the procedures for the general maintenance of anHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, an Horizonmacro indoor cabinetBase Transceiver Station (BTS), and the optional ancillary enclosure. Theschedule for maintenance on the indoor cabinet is described in this chapter, butthere is no schedule for routine maintenance on the enclosure itself.

General maintenance procedures are to be carried out during site visits inresponse to alarms (as required), or at intervals deemed appropriate by thecustomer.

NOTE Since the equipment contained in the enclosure operatesas part of a network, the procedures in this chapter mustbe performed in conjunction with the relevant networkprocedures in the associated OMC-R manuals.

It is recommended that the following general maintenance procedures arecarried out on the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure:

S Ensure that the enclosure air inlet and outlet grilles are not blocked.

S Check normal operation, including HMS fans. Also check cable integrityand the condition of all connections.

S Inspect general mechanical condition and finish of the enclosure.

S Inspect locks, handles and hinges and door seals. Lubricate if required.

Cleaning agents

The following is a list of cleaning agents and lubricant materials required forgeneral maintenance:

S Dustpan.

S Soft brush.

S Mild detergent.

S De-ionised water.

S Soft cloth.

S Lubricant (WD40 or equivalent).

S Light grease (TBI or equivalent).

GSM-208-523Maintenance support procedures for the enclosure



68P02902W69-A

Maintenance support procedures for the enclosure

Introduction toprocedures

The maintenance support procedures include the following:

S Door opening and closing.

S Hood opening and closing.

Door openingand closing

The left and right door handles operate in a similar manner. Both doors have aspring loaded locking handle and operate as follows:



3. Turn the handle a quarter turn clockwise to open the door.




NOTE A door open alarm is generated if the equipment is active.This means that the green STATUS OK LED on the frontof the power control module will NOT be illuminated whenthe doors are opened.

7. To close the doors, press down on the orange locking clip on the centre ofthe gas strut on each door, close doors firmly and turn the handles aquarter turn anticlockwise (left door) or clockwise (right door) and push inuntil the handles are flush with the doors. The doors lock automatically.

Hood openingand closing

NOTE The hood can only be opened and closed when bothdoors are open.

The hood is opened and closed as follows:

1. Undo and remove the four hood securing screws from the front lip of thehood.

2. Lift the hood until it rests in the fully open position.

3. Close the hood by pulling on the strap fixed to the inside of the hood.Once the hood has started to close, the gas struts ensure that it lowersgently to the closed position. Refit the hood securing screws.

A microswitch fitted to the top edge of the enclosure generates an alarm signalwhen the hood is raised

GSM-208-523 General maintenance procedures for the enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–3

General maintenance procedures for the enclosure

Type ofprocedures

The general maintenance procedures involve the following:

S Cleaning air inlet and outlet grilles on the enclosure.

S Checking normal operation.

S Mechanical inspection of the cabinet, including inspection and lubricationof locks and hinges.

S Periodic check of the installation.

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources arepresent in the enclosure when the external ac supplyisolator switch is set to the on position and/or batteries areconnected. Remove rings, watches and jewellery beforestarting these procedures, and exercise extreme cautionwhen working on the equipment.

Procedures -door and hood

Any requirement to open or close a door or the hood is assumed in the followingprocedures. Shutting the door or the hood is assumed at the end of anyprocedure. Detailed descriptions of cabinet access procedures are given inMaintenance support procedures for the enclosure.

Cleaning inletand outletgrilles

Air is drawn in and expelled through the grilles on the enclosure doors.

The following procedure should be followed to clean inlets, ducts and outletgrilles:

S Examine the grilles on the doors and clean as necessary.

S Open the enclosure doors and examine the grilles on the HMS units.Clean as necessary.

S Close the doors.

Checkingnormaloperation

Check normal operation of the equipment in the enclosure by visual inspectionin the following procedure:

GSM-208-523General maintenance procedures for the enclosure



68P02902W69-A

1. Observe the inside of the enclosure and note any signs of physicaldamage, overheating, loose connections, or badly fitting components.Take appropriate action to correct the damage, and inform the OMC-R.

2. Note the LEDs lit on the power control module. All the LEDs that denotean OK function should be green.

NOTE The STATUS OK LED will be unlit if the door alarmmicroswitch buttons have not been taped down.

3. Note the LEDs on the front of the rectifiers. The INPUT HEALTHY LEDshould be yellow, and the OUTPUT HEALTHY LED should be green.

4. If any red LEDs are lit, further investigation is normally required byopening the BTS cabinet door(s) and inspecting the equipment containedwithin. See 12-monthly maintenance procedures for the indoor cabinetlater in this chapter for detailed information about checking the indoor BTSequipment.

5. Test the operation of the heater by pressing the heater test button on thefront of the ac power distribution panel.

GSM-208-523 General maintenance procedures for the enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–5

Inspection ofcabinet, locksand hinges

Inspecting the enclosure exterior

Inspect the enclosure exterior using the following procedure:

S Check exterior panels for dents and structural damage.

S Check enclosure connections for signs of overheating and security ofattachment.

S Check cabinet exterior finish for signs of damage or deterioration. Restoreexterior finish as necessary.

Inspecting the doors and hood

Inspect the doors and hood using the following procedure:

S Check enclosure doors and hood for distortion, security and correctoperation.

S Check hinges for damage, security and correct operation. Carefullylubricate the hinges. Ensure that all door seals are wiped clean of thelubricant.

S Check the hood gas struts for damage, security and correct operation.Carefully lubricate the gas struts and ensure that lubricated surfaces aredirt-free.

S Check earth connections for damage and security.

S Check door lock mechanism and inspect for ease of operation. Lubricatethe mechanism with light grease. Ensure that lubricated surfaces aredirt-free.

Inspecting the enclosure interior

Inspect the enclosure interior using the following procedure:

S Check all rack equipment for security of attachment, especially the rectifiermodule attachment screws.

S Carry out a visual check of all wiring for signs of overheating and securityof attachment.

S Check the earth connections for corrosion and tightness using a torquewrench. Tighten to the correct torque (see Installation & Configuration:GSM-208-423, Chapter 2, Site requirements and considerations).

NOTE Do not overtighten the connections.

GSM-208-523General maintenance procedures for the enclosure



68P02902W69-A

Periodic checkof theinstallation

NOTE Refer to Installation and Configuration: (GSM-204-423) tocarry out the following procedures.

It is recommended that the following be performed periodically:

S Inspection and testing in accordance with BS7671 (16th Edition Chapter73), the IEC 364 equivalent or in accordance with local regulations.

S Earth electrode test.

Return toservice

After procedures have been completed, restore the cabinet to its operationalstate, if necessary, and notify the OMC-R of base station availability.

Log the maintenance activity.

GSM-208-523 Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–7

Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

Routinemaintenanceintervals

Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is recommended atthe intervals shown in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Routine maintenance schedule

6 months 12 months 24 months

Ensure that cabinetair inlets, outletgrilles and filter (iffitted) are notblocked.

Annual check of theinstallation.

Inspect generalmechanical condition ofthe cabinet.

Check earthconnections.

Check normal operation,including fans. Also cableintegrity and state of allconnections.

Inspect locks, handles,and hinges of door.Lubricate if required.

These procedures are described in subsequent sections of this chapter, one tocover 6-monthly, one 12-monthly, and one 24-monthly.

Tools

The only tools required are torque spanners, torque wrenches, and Torxdriver,as listed in Installation and Configuration: GSM-208-423, Chapter 1,Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor tool kit requirements.

Door openingand closingprocedure

Any requirement to open or close the enclosure doors and hood (to access anindoor cabinet), and opening/closing the indoor cabinet door is assumed to bedone in procedures. Closing the hood and all doors is assumed to be done atthe end of any procedure.

GSM-208-523Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet



68P02902W69-A

Opening the indoor cabinet door

The door lock has a trigger latch mechanism. Proceed as follows to open thedoor:

1. Insert the correct key into the lock and turn.

2. Press the middle square panel by the lock to release the lock.

3. Open the door to the 95_ locking position.

CAUTION Avoid damaging the honeycomb door vent.

NOTE If the equipment is active, a door open alarm will besignalled to the OMC-R.

4. To open the door to 130_, lift up the middle of the slide arm.

Closing the indoor cabinet door

To close the door, lift up the middle of the slide arm, close the door firmly andlock it.

GSM-208-523 Indoor cabinet 6-monthly maintenance procedures

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–9

Indoor cabinet 6-monthly maintenance procedures

Type ofprocedures

The 6-monthly maintenance procedures involve the following:

S Cleaning air inlets, outlet grilles and filter (if fitted).

S Checking earth connections.

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources arepresent in the cabinet when the BTS circuit breakers onthe dc distribution panel are set to the on position.Remove rings, watches and jewellery before starting theseprocedures, and exercise extreme caution when workingon the equipment.

Cleaning airinlets and filter

CAUTION If the cabinet is operational, this maintenance procedureshould be completed without delay, in order to minimizeduration of air cooling disruption.

Inlets are along the back, sides and front at the base of the cabinet.

Air is expelled through the door vent and through the top panel.

A filter is an option and is not essential in a clean environment. The single filteris mounted under the fan units. If clogged, fan airflow may be reduced, strainingfan motors and increasing fan noise.

The following procedure should be followed to clean the air inlets and the filter:

S Use a brush to ensure the bottom inlets are clear of debris.

S Open the door and clean the aluminium door vent, taking care to avoiddamage.

S If a filter is fitted, remove the two front M6 screws to allow the filter holdingplate to drop down. Remove the filter and clean with soapy water awayfrom the enclosure and allow to dry.

S Refit the filter and lift up the holding plate, securing with the two M6screws. Tighten to the correct torque (see Installation and Configuration:(GSM-208-423), Chapter 2, Site requirements and considerations).

S Close and lock the door.

Checking earthconnections

Check all earth connections on the indoor cabinet for corrosion and tightnessusing a torque wrench. Tighten to the correct torque (see Installation andConfiguration: (GSM-208-423), Chapter 2, Site requirements andconsiderations).

GSM-208-523Indoor cabinet 12-monthly maintenance procedures



68P02902W69-A


Summary of12-monthlyprocedures


S 6-monthly procedures.

S Checking and cleaning fans.


S Annual check of the installation.


Checking andcleaning fans

CAUTION If the cabinet is operational, this maintenance procedureshould be completed without delay, in order to minimizeduration of air cooling disruption.

There are three cabinet fan modules, one 4-fan unit and two identical 2-fanunits. Table 2-2 shows the three fan positions.

Table 2-2 Fan positions

Fanreference

Type of module Cabinet position

0 4-fan unit Right side, beneath digital cage.

1 2-fan unit Middle, beneath CTUs.

2 2-fan unit Left side, beneath CTUs.

The fans can be checked and cleaned using the following procedure:

S Remove the fan module, by lifting the central slide latch and pulling out.

S Use a brush to remove any dust and dirt on the module.

S Refit the fan and check operation. Any fan not operating should be startedby pressing the appropriate RESET button.

S Observe the fans through the fan grilles to ensure they are operatingcorrectly, with no excessive noise. If there is excessive noise, identify thefan and replace (see Maintenance Information: GSM-208-523, Chapter 4,Replacing a fan module).


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–11

Cabinetmodules inoperationalpositions

Figure 2-1 shows the modules in the indoor cabinet.

ig.128.rhFMUX/NIU/BPSM(NOT VISIBLE)

MCUF

ALARMBOARD

T43/BIB

INTERFACEPANEL

CONNECTORS


SIX CTUs

ONE SURF (Rx)

HEAT SENSORSLOCATED ONBACKPLANE

THREEPSMs

CIRCUIT BREAKERMODULE (CBM)

TWO 2-FANUNITS

ONE 4-FANUNIT

Figure 2-1 Cabinet modules (door removed)




68P02902W69-A


NOTE If two indoor cabinets are installed in the enclosure,always check BTS 0 before BTS 1 as a major failure inBTS 0 will prevent BTS 1 from operating (although BTS 0can operate without BTS 1).

Check normal operation of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet by visual inspectionin the following procedure:

1. Observe the inside of the cabinet and note any signs of physical damage,overheating, loose connections, or badly fitting components. Takeappropriate action to correct the damage, and inform the OMC-R.

2. Note the LEDs lit on the modules shown in Table 2-3 to ensure correctfunctioning of the cabinet. If any red LEDs are lit, other than the door openalarm (alarm 3 on the alarm module), inform the OMC-R.

Table 2-3 Normal LED indications for cabinet modules

Equipment with LEDs Colour of LEDs lit

CTUs in locations 0 to 5 Tx status (ORANGE) oroperational status

(GREEN)

PSMs in locations 0 to 2 Top LED (GREEN)

Digital modules (NIU, MCUF, FMUX,BPSM)

GREEN

Alarm module 6, 7, 8 GREEN (fans)

3 RED (as door is open)

Annual check ofthe installation

NOTE Refer to the appropriate chapters in Installation andConfiguration: (GSM-208-423) to carry out the followingtests.

It is recommended that the following tests are performed annually:

S Earth electrode test.

S Power commissioning.

S Pre-power up.

S Cabinet power up.

Log the maintenance activity.

After procedures have been completed, restore the cabinet to operational stateand notify the OMC-R of base station availability.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–13







S Mechanical inspection of cabinet, including inspection and lubrication oflocks and hinges.




68P02902W69-A

Mechanicalinspection ofcabinet, locksand hinges

The following must be performed every 24 months.

Inspecting the cabinet exterior

The only part of the cabinet exterior (apart from the door) that can be inspectedis the top panel. Check the top panel connections for signs of overheating andsecurity of attachment.

Inspecting the door

Follow this procedure to inspect the door:

S Check the cabinet door for distortion, security and correct operation.

S Check hinges for damage, security and correct operation. Carefullylubricate the hinges and ensure that all door seals are wiped clean of thelubricant.

S Check the earth connection for damage and security.

S Check the door lock mechanism and inspect for ease of operation.Lubricate the mechanism with light grease. Ensure that lubricated surfacesare grit-free.

Inspecting the cabinet interior

Follow this procedure to inspect the cabinet interior:

S Check all rack equipment for security of attachment, especially PSM, CBMand CTU module attachment screws using a Torxdriver. Tighten to thecorrect torque (see Installation & Configuration: GSM-208-423, Chapter 2,Site requirements and considerations).

S Carry out a visual check of all wiring for signs of overheating and securityof attachment.

WARNING Do not overstress the earth connections, as this maydamage the connector and reduce the protective function.

S Check the earth connections for corrosion and tightness using a torquespanner. Tighten to the correct torque (see Installation & Configuration:GSM-208-423, Chapter 2, Site requirements and considerations).

GSM-208-523 Routine maintenance for the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–15

Routine maintenance for the ancillary enclosure

Routinemainenanceintervals

Routine maintenance for the battery backup system is recommended at theintervals shown in Table 2-4.

Table 2-4 Routine maintenance schedule

12 months 24 months

Check normal operation, includingheater. Also cable integrity and stateof all connections.

Carry out a partial discharge test onthe battery strings.

Inspect general mechanical conditionof the enclosure.

These procedures are described in subsequent sections of this chapter, one tocover 12-monthly and one for 24-monthly procedures.

Assumptions

Any requirement to open the ancillary enclosure door is assumed in theprocedures. Closing the door is assumed at the end of any procedure.

Opening andclosing theancillaryenclosure door

The door opens to the right and has a spring loaded locking handle. A gas strut,mounted at the bottom of the door, assists in opening the door and locks thedoor open in the 120_ position.

Proceed as follows to open and close the door:

1. Slide open the lock protective cover.

2. Insert the key into the lock and turn anticlockwise until the spring loadedhandle releases.


4. Open the door to the fully open 120_ position.

NOTE When the equipment is active, a door open alarm isgenerated.

5. To close the door, press down on the orange locking clip on the centre ofthe gas strut, close the door firmly and turn the handle a quarter turn tothe left and push until the handle is flush with the door. The door locksautomatically.

GSM-208-523Ancillary enclosure 12-monthly maintenance procedures



68P02902W69-A

Ancillary enclosure 12-monthly maintenance procedures


The 12-monthly maintenance procedures consist of the following:

S Checking the integrity of the cables.

S Checking the operation of the heater.


S Partial discharge test.

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources arepresent in the ancillary enclosure when the AUXILIARIESCB2/4 isolator switch in the main enclosure and the acsupply isolator switch at the bottom of the ancillaryenclosure are set to the on position and/or the batteriesare connected.Remove rings, watches and jewellery before starting theseprocedures, and exercise extreme caution when workingon the equipment.

Checking cableintegrity

Visually check all internal cables for signs of overheating and check security ofattachment. Check the external flexible cable conduits for signs of damage.

Checking theoperation of theheater

Test the operation of the heater by pressing the heater test button (mounted tothe right of the ac isolator switch) while holding a hand over the heater grille.Release the button as soon as heat is felt coming from the heater.


Check normal operation of the ancillary enclosure by visual inspection of thefront panel of the BMM. The green HEALTHY LED for each battery stringinstalled should be illuminated. If not, the corresponding red MONOBLOCFAULT LED indicates where a voltage imbalance exists in that string.

A MONOBLOC FAULT LED indicates a potential failure or degradation of amonobloc in an otherwise healthy battery string. The monobloc should bereplaced, although if the battery string has been in service for some time, it isrecommended that the complete battery string is replaced.

GSM-208-523 Ancillary enclosure 12-monthly maintenance procedures

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–17

Partialdischarge test

The partial discharge test requires that at least one battery string is installed inthe ancillary enclosure.

To carry out the test, proceed as follows:

1. Ensure the equipment in the ancillary enclosure is operating normally andthat the green HEALTHY LED is illuminated for each battery stringinstalled.

2. Ensure that the battery isolator switch in the main enclosure is set to theon position.

3. Disconnect the ac supply to the main enclosure, thus forcing dc power tobe supplied from the backup batteries.

4. Use the BMM front panel test sockets to monitor and record the operatingcurrent and battery voltage at the beginning and end of the discharge test

5. Leave the equipment operating from backup power for 45 minutes.

Periodically check the BMM front panel to ensure that none of theMONOBLOC FAULT LEDs is illuminated. If any of the LEDs is illuminated,it is recommended that the complete battery string is replaced.

NOTE Terminate the test immediately if the battery voltage dropsto 44.0 V.

6. Reconnect the ac supply to the main enclosure.

7. Log the discharge test results to provide an indication of monoblocdegradation over lifetime. Monoblocs should be replaced when theircapacity has reduced to 80% of the rated capacity.

GSM-208-523Ancillary enclosure 24-monthly maintenance procedures



68P02902W69-A

Ancillary enclosure 24-monthly maintenance procedures





S Mechanical inspection of the enclosure.

Mechanicalinspection ofthe enclosure

The following procedures must be performed every 24 months.

Inspecting the door

Inspect the door using the following procedure:

1. Check the enclosure door for distortion, security and correct operation.

2. Check hinges for damage, security and correct operation.

3. Check the door earth connection for damage and security.

4. Check the door lock mechanism and inspect for ease of operation.Lubricate the mechanism with light grease. Ensure that lubricated surfacesare grit-free.

Inspecting the enclosure interior

Inspect the interior using the following procedure:

1. Check all battery shelves and the BMM for security of attachment.

2. Carry out a visual check of all wiring for signs of overheating and securityof attachment.

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A i

Chapter 3

Enclosure FRU replacement

procedures

GSM-208-523

29th May 02ii


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A iii

Chapter 3Enclosure FRU replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to enclosure FRU replacement procedures Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolating the enclosure Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torque values Maint. 3–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU view of the enclosure Maint. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing non-FRU parts Maint. 3–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .









GSM-208-523

29th May 02iv


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523 Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–1

Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs

Introduction toenclosure FRUreplacementprocedures


This chapter provides information on the replacement of FRUs in theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. Only components classed as FRUsare described in this chapter. FRUs contained in the Horizonmacro indoorcabinet are described in Chapter 4 of this category.

Any requirement to open the enclosure is assumed in procedures. Closing thehood, doors and locking the enclosure is assumed at the end of any procedure.

Where customers wish to perform a minor repair on an FRU, in order to save thecost of full replacement, they should consult Motorola for more detailedprocedures or replacement components.

Isolating theenclosure

If a FRU replacement procedure described in this chapter requires the enclosureto be isolated from the external power source, this is achieved by switching offthe external ac supply isolator. However, equipment within the enclosure cannormally be isolated using the AC ISOLATION SWITCH circuit breaker on thefront of the ac power distribution unit and the battery isolator switch.

FRU listThe following is a list of FRUs used in this equipment:

S Fuses.

S Battery pack.

S Rectifiers.

S Power control module.

S Heater.

S Fan trays (left and right).

S HMS units.

S Alarm Interface Module (AIM).

Torque valuesFor torque values refer to Installation & Configuration: (GSM-208-423), Chapter2, Site requirements and considerations.

GSM-208-523Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs



68P02902W69-A

FRU view of theenclosure

Figure 3-1 shows the enclosure with FRUs identified.

BATTERIES

HMS

HEATERRECTIFIERS

(HIDDEN)

RECTIFIERS

FAN TRAY(HIDDEN)

FAN TRAY(HIDDEN)

POWERCONTROLMODULE

AIM

Figure 3-1 Enclosure showing FRU components

Replacingnon-FRU parts

Customers requiring the replacement of parts not classed as FRUs should:

1. Contact the local Motorola office for availability.

2. Seek Motorola expertise for fitting non-FRU parts.

GSM-208-523 Replacing fuses

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–3

Replacing fuses

Introduction tofusereplacement

Six fuses are mounted on the dc distribution panel, as shown in Figure 3-2.



LVD A LVD B

FAN 1 FAN 2

FS1 T2AH FS2 T2AH

FS3 T2AH FS4 T2AH


FUSE PANEL

Figure 3-2 DC distribution panel showing fuse locations

The circuits protected by the fuses are described in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 DC fuses

Fuse no. Circuit protected Rating / Type

FS 1 Power control module supply 2 A / HRC

FS 2 Power control module negative sense 2 A / HRC

FS3 LVD A supply 2 A / HRC

FS 4 LVD B supply 2 A / HRC

FS 5 Fan tray in PDU A 2 A / HRC

FS 6 Fan tray in PDU B 2 A / HRC

Fusereplacementprocedure

A fuse can be replaced as follows:

1. Remove the required fuse holder from the fuse panel.

2. Remove the fuse from the holder and replace with a new fuse of thecorrect type and rating.

3. Push the fuse holder firmly back into place.

GSM-208-523Replacing a battery pack



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a battery pack

Introduction tobattery packreplacement


A replacement battery pack for the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure comprises four12 V monoblocs.

The batteries can be replaced while the equipment is in service, provided theyare isolated from the rest of the system.

Figure 3-3 shows the batteries, as installed in the enclosure.

COMPARTMENTCOVER

BACKUPBATTERIES

BATTERYISOLATORSWITCH

Figure 3-3 Backup battery installation

NOTE Battery cabling between the shelves must pass over thefront of the upper shelf and not the side of the shelf,otherwise the compartment cover will not fit correctly (seeFigure 3-4).

GSM-208-523 Replacing a battery pack

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–5

Battery packreplacementprocedure

Proceed as follows to replace the battery pack:

1. Isolate the batteries by switching off the battery isolator (see Figure 3-3).

2. Undo all the retaining screws and remove the battery compartment cover.

3. Undo the isolator switch blue cable connection to the negative terminal onbattery No. 4.

4. Undo the isolator switch black cable connection to the positive terminal onbattery No. 1.

5. Disconnect the terminal links and cable between the batteries on theupper and lower shelves. Disconnect the temperature sensor cable fromthe positive terminal on battery No. 3.

6. Undo the battery retaining straps and remove the batteries.

The replacement procedure is a reversal of the removal procedure. Figure 3-4shows how the replacement batteries are connected together.


BATTERY LINK

BATTERY LINK


ISOLATOR SWITCH


Figure 3-4 Battery terminal connections

GSM-208-523Replacing a rectifier



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a rectifier

Introduction torectifierreplacement

This procedure describes how to remove and replace a rectifier in theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

Between two and five rectifiers may be installed in the enclosure, depending onthe configuration.

Figure 3-5 shows a view of the rectifier.

Figure 3-5 The rectifier

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 230 V ac, and other highenergy sources are present within the enclosure when theAC ISOLATION SWITCH circuit breaker on the acdistribution panel is set to the ON position and/or batteriesare connected.

Replacing a rectifier does not require the removal of power. However, unless aredundant rectifier is installed, it is advisable to perform this procedure duringperiods of low traffic, as available power is reduced.

Notify the OMC-R of imminent repair activity.

GSM-208-523 Replacing a rectifier

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–7

Replacementprocedure for arectifier

To remove a rectifier

1. Switch OFF the appropriate circuit breaker for the rectifier being replacedon the ac distribution panel (RECT 0 to RECT 4).

2. Unscrew the two M6 captive screws that secure the rectifier in position.

CAUTION Handle the rectifier with care; the module weighs 4.6 kg.

3. Using the handle, pull the rectifier out of its slot, supporting it from beneathwith the other hand as it emerges. Place it safely to one side.

The procedure for removing the rectifier is now complete.

To install a replacement rectifier

1. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order.

2. Ensure that the rectifier is pushed fully home into its connector on thebackplane before tightening the two M6 screws. Tighten to a torque of3.4 Nm.

3. Switch on the circuit breaker for the rectifier.

4. Check the operation of the rectifier LEDs. The yellow I/P HEALTHY andgreen O/P HEALTHY LEDs should be illuminated.

The procedure for replacing the rectifier is now complete.

Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance activity.

GSM-208-523Replacing the power control module



68P02902W69-A

Replacing the power control module

Introduction topower controlmodulereplacement

The power control module is mounted in PDU B, to the left of the ac and dcpower distribution units.

Before replacing the power control module, check that the FS1 and FS2 fuseson the dc distribution panel have not blown. If the power control module needsreplacing, this can be done without switching off the equipment.

Figure 3-6 shows the power control module in PDU B.

RETAINING SCREW

RETAINING SCREW

PULL HANDLE

BYPASS SWITCH

Figure 3-6 The power control module

GSM-208-523 Replacing the power control module

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–9

Power controlmodulereplacementprocedure

Proceed as follows to replace the power control module:

1. Set the BYPASS switch on the front panel of the power control module tothe ON position (see Figure 3-6).

2. Undo the two panel retaining screws and withdraw the module using thepull handle. Place the module safely to one side.

3. Insert the replacement module into the empty slot. Secure in positionusing the two retaining screws and tighten to the correct torque.

4. Ensure the BYPASS switch is set to OFF.

The procedure for replacing the power control module is now complete.

Battery floatchargeadjustment

The battery float charge level should be checked after replacing the powercontrol module. This is achieved by measuring the voltage across the batteryterminals and adjusting the level using the VOLT ADJ potentiometer on thepower control module front panel.

The voltage measured is temperature dependent. For example:

At 20 °C, the float charge voltage should be 54.5 V.

At 10 °C, the float charge voltage should be 55.4 V.

GSM-208-523Replacing the heater



68P02902W69-A

Replacing the heater

Introduction toheaterreplacement

The heater is mounted in the base of PDU A, below the space allocated forcustomer communications equipment. Figure 3-7 shows the heater mounted inposition in the enclosure.

HEATER UNIT

PDU A

HEATER PANEL

Figure 3-7 Location of the heater in the enclosure

GSM-208-523 Replacing the heater

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–11

Heaterreplacementprocedure

Proceed as follows to replace the heater:

1. Remove any comms equipment, thus enabling access to the rear of the acpower distribution unit.

2. Undo the four screws that secure the heater panel assembly to the PDU Achassis and partially withdraw the assembly.

3. Disconnect the power connector from the rear of the ac distribution paneland then remove the complete heater assembly from the chassis.

4. Separate the heater unit from the panel assembly by undoing the fourbolts that secure the unit to the base.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Test the new heater bypressing the heater test button on the ac distribution panel.

GSM-208-523Replacing a fan tray



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a fan tray

Introduction tofan trayreplacement

There are two fan trays installed in the enclosure. One is mounted under the tworectifier slots in the right side of the enclosure (in PDU A) and the other ismounted under the three rectifier slots in the left side of the enclosure (in PDUB). The replacement procedure is the same for either tray, only the physicallocation and size of the tray is different. (The right tray contains four fans whilethe left tray contains six fans.)

Before replacing a fan tray, check that the relevant fuse has not blown (FS5 forthe left fan tray and FS6 for the right fan tray).

Figure 3-8 shows the left fan tray.

CONTROL BOARD

FAN

POWERCONNECTOR

TIE WRAP LOCATION INTHE FAN TRAY

Figure 3-8 The left fan tray

GSM-208-523 Replacing a fan tray

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–13

Fan trayreplacementprocedure

Proceed as follows to replace a fan tray:

1. Isolate the rectifiers above the faulty fan tray by switching off theappropriate rectifier circuit breakers on the front of the ac distributionpanel.

2. Isolate power to the fan tray control board by removing fuse FS5 for theleft fan tray or FS6 for the right fan tray.

3. Carefully remove the isolated rectifiers from their slots. The fan tray cannow be accessed.

4. Undo and remove the single screw that secures the fan tray front paneland partially withdraw the tray from the chassis.

5. Reach into the tray and disconnect the power connector from the controlboard (see Figure 3-8).

6. Remove the tie wrap that secures the power cable to the right side of thefan tray (see Figure 3-8 for the location of the tie wrap). The fan tray cannow be completely withdraw from the chassis.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Make sure the powerconnector is secured out of the way while the replacement fan tray is slotted intothe chassis. Fit a new tie wrap to secure the power cable in position.

Remember to refit the fan tray fuse in the dc distribution panel.

GSM-208-523Replacing a HMS unit



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a HMS unit

Introduction toHMSreplacement

A HMS unit is mounted on the inside of each door. The HMS unit on the rightdoor is HMS 0 and the unit on the left door is HMS 1.

Replacement of either HMS unit can be carried out while the enclosureequipment is switched on.

Figure 3-9 shows the HMS unit mounted on the left enclosure door (HMS 1).

SECURING BOLTS

POWER ANDSIGNAL

CONNECTOR

MOUNTING SHELFLIFTING HANDLE

LIFTING HANDLE

LAPTOP SUPPORTBRACKET

(ON LEFT HMS ONLY)

Figure 3-9 HMS 1 mounted on the left door

GSM-208-523 Replacing a HMS unit

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–15

HMSreplacementprocedure

WARNING The HMS unit weighs 35 kg. Removal of a HMS unitrequires two persons.

Proceed as follows to replace a HMS unit:

1. Isolate the faulty HMS unit by switching off the appropriate circuit breakeron the front of the dc power distribution unit.

2. If HMS 1 is to be replaced, undo the securing bolts and remove the plasticlaptop computer holder from the front of the HMS.

3. Unplug the power and signal connector from the top panel (seeFigure 3-9).

4. Undo and remove the four Torx bolts (two on each side) that secure theHMS unit to the door.

5. Using the handles provided, lift the HMS unit off its shelf and away fromthe door.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. After replacement, theHMS may be tested as described in Chapter 7 of Installation and Configuration:(GSM-208-423).

GSM-208-523Replacing the alarm interface module



68P02902W69-A

Replacing the alarm interface module

Introduction toAIMreplacement

The AIM is mounted on the top of the battery compartment, behind the batteryisolator switch. The OMC-R must be notified, and the indoor cabinets andenclosure must be shut down and isolated before the AIM can be replaced.

AIMreplacementprocedure

The procedure for replacing the AIM is as follows (refer to Figure 3-10):

1. Ensure all equipment is switched off and isolated from the supply(including battery backup).

2. Using a cross-head screwdriver, undo the four screws on the AIM topcover and then remove the cover.

3. Make a note of the DIP switch settings on the AIM board. Remove thecover from the replacement AIM and set the switches on the new board tothe same settings.

4. Disconnect each connector in turn from the faulty AIM and connect to thereplacement AIM.

5. Undo the four cross-head AIM securing screws (mounted in the lidretaining screw holes) and remove the faulty AIM from the top of thebattery compartment.

6. Fit the replacement AIM, secure in position and then fit the cover. Checkall connections.

The procedure for fitting a replacement AIM is now complete. Power up theequipment, notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log themaintenance activity.

AIM

AIM COVERCOVER

RETAININGSCREW

Figure 3-10 The alarm interface module

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A i

Chapter 4

Indoor cabinet FRU replacement

procedures

GSM-208-523

29th May 02ii


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A iii




Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM) Maint. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for CBM replacement Maint. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Views of CBM Maint. 4–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement procedure for CBM Maint. 4–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .







GSM-208-523

29th May 02iv


68P02902W69-A









GSM-208-523 Overview of replacement procedures

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–1

Overview of replacement procedures

Fieldreplaceableunits (FRUs)

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources arepresent in the cabinet when the ac mains isolator switch isset to the on position and/or batteries are connected.Remove rings, watches and jewellery before starting theseprocedures, and exercise extreme caution when workingon the equipment.

This chapter provides information on the replacement of FRUs in theHorizonmacro indoor cabinet. Only components classed as FRUs are describedin this chapter.

Any requirement to access the cabinet by opening the enclosure is assumed inprocedures. Shutting the cabinet door and locking the enclosure is assumed atthe end of any procedure.

Where customers wish to perform a minor repair on an FRU, in order to save thecost of full replacement, they should consult Motorola for more detailedprocedures or replacement components (see Additional replacement parts).

Isolating theindoor cabinet

Many of the FRU replacement procedures described in this chapter require theindoor cabinet to be isolated from the external power source. This is achievedby switching off the appropriate circuit breaker, BTS 0 or BTS 1, on the front ofthe dc distribution panel.

FRU list

The following is a list of FRUs used in this equipment:

S Circuit breaker module (CBM).

S Power supply module (PSM).

S Fan modules.

S CTU module.

S Tx blocks, including feedthrough plate.

S SURF module.

S Digital modules (MCUFs, NIUs, FMUXs, alarm board; also BPSMs).

S Door.

S Heat sensors.

GSM-208-523Overview of replacement procedures



68P02902W69-A

Torque values

For torque values used, refer to Installation and Configuration: (GSM-208-423),Chapter 2, Site requirements and considerations

FRU view ofcabinet

Figure 4-1 shows a cabinet with FRUs identified. The door is shown in therelevant FRU section.

ig.128.rhFMUX/NIU/BPSM

MCUF

ALARMBOARD

T43/BIB

INTERFACEPANEL

CONNECTORS


SIX CTUs

ONE SURF (Rx)


THREEPSMs


TWO 2-FANUNITS

ONE 4-FANUNIT

Figure 4-1 Indoor cabinet, without door, showing FRU components

GSM-208-523 Additional replacement parts

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–3

Additional replacement parts

Policy onnon-FRU parts

Non-FRU parts are:

S Items unlikely to fail, but replacement is essential if failure occurs.

or

S Subsections of FRUs, where local conditions may make it moreeconomical to repair the FRU.

Only qualified personnel should attempt non-FRU replacement, in order tominimize risk of equipment damage. For example, the CBIA main cage requirescare in removal and installation, and Individual fans require care in ensuringcorrect direction of airflow.

List of non-FRUparts

Non-FRU parts include the following:

S Door lock.

S Individual fans within a fan module.

S Any part of the CBIA: main cage, harness, door sensor, interface panel,backplane.

Replacingnon-FRU parts

Customers requiring non-FRU replacement should:

1. Contact the local Motorola office for availability.

2. Seek Motorola expertise for fitting non-FRU parts.

CBIAattachmentscrews

The CBIA is attached to the cabinet by screws which should not be loosened:

S Seven M4 screws to SURF harness (two guide pins lock cage intoposition).

S Four M6 (left side) and five M6 (right side) screws at cabinet front.

S Eight M6 T30 screws for interface panel attachment to top panel.

GSM-208-523Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM)



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM)

Preconditionsfor CBMreplacement

The CBM controls power for the whole of the indoor cabinet, apart from thePSMs. Consequently, the replacement of a CBM can only take place after thecabinet has been taken out of service and isolated, in agreement with theOMC-R.

Views of CBM

Figure 4-2 shows views of the CBM with circuit breaker buttons identified.

6 CTUs (0 TO 5)

FRONT VIEW

BACKPLANE CONNECTOR


NOT USED SURF FANS BPSMs (A AND B)

HANDLE-BAFFLE

ig.281.rh

Figure 4-2 Views of CBM with circuit breaker buttons identified

GSM-208-523 Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM)

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–5

Replacementprocedure forCBM

The replacement procedure is as follows.

Removing the CBM

1. Verify that the cabinet is isolated from the dc supply.


3. Unscrew both CBM module attachment screws (shown in Figure 4-2)using an M4 Torxdriver and then pull out the module, using thehandle-baffle.

Installing a new CBM

1. Check that all the circuit breaker buttons on the new CBM module are inthe out (off) position. Install new module and press firmly into place.

2. Tighten both module attachment screws to 2.2 Nm using an M4 Torxdriver.

Completing the new CBM installation

1. Switch on the dc supply to the cabinet using the appropriate circuitbreaker on the dc distribution panel in the enclosure.

2. Turn each PSM switch to the OUTPUT ENABLE position. Check that eachPSM has the ACTIVE (green) light on and the ALARM (red) light off.

3. Press the CBM isolator marked FANS. Check that each fan, eight in total,is operating correctly. Any fan not started may be activated by pressingthe reset button (marked either FRONT or REAR) on the appropriate fanunit.

4. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked BPSM A and (if redundantBPSM fitted) BPSM B. Check all associated digital module indicatorsoperate correctly.


6. Press the CBM circuit breaker buttons for the appropriate CTUs fitted, andcheck that the LEDs for each CTU indicate correct operation.

7. Close the door to ensure correct air circulation.

8. Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenanceactivity.

This completes the CBM replacement and power up sequence for a cabinet.

GSM-208-523Replacing a power supply module (PSM)



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a power supply module (PSM)

Preconditionsfor PSMreplacement

There are three slots for PSMs. The PSMs installed in the indoor cabinet mustbe the –48 V type.

One PSM can power up a cabinet containing up to three CTUs. The cabinetonly requires two PSMs to be fully operational with six CTUs. The spare thirdslot (if a redundant PSM is not fitted) can be used for insertion of a replacementPSM, thereby avoiding any need to take the cabinet out of service.

View of PSM

Figure 4-3 shows a view of the PSM with key features identified.

AIR VENTS ON ENTIRETOP AND BOTTOM PANELS

GREEN LEDACTIVE

RED LEDALARM

OUTPUT DISABLESWITCH


Figure 4-3 View of PSM with key features identified

GSM-208-523 Replacing a power supply module (PSM)

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–7

Replacementprocedure fornon-redundantPSM

The following procedure should be followed if there are one or two PSMs fittedin the cabinet:

1. Verify that the switch of the new PSM is set to OUTPUT DISABLE.

2. Remove the blanking plate of spare slot, by unscrewing the attachmentscrews with an M4 Torxdriver.

3. Insert the new replacement PSM in the spare slot.

4. Ensure the replacement PSM is firmly in position and tighten both moduleattachment screws to 2.2 Nm using an M4 Torxdriver.

5. Set the replacement PSM switch to OUTPUT ENABLE. Check that thegreen ACTIVE LED is lit.

6. Set the switch of the faulty PSM to OUTPUT DISABLE. The greenACTIVE LED will go off (the green light may already be off, if PSM failurehas resulted in output failure of that PSM). The red ALARM LED, if alreadyon due to alarm state, will stay on.

7. Unscrew the faulty PSM module attachment screws using an M4Torxdriver and remove the module. The ALARM LED will go off.

8. Fit the cover plate in the empty PSM position, by tightening the attachmentscrews to 2.2 Nm using an M4 Torxdriver.

Replacementprocedure forredundant PSM

The following procedure should be followed if there are three PSMs fitted:

1. Verify that the switch of the new PSM is set to output disable.

2. Set the switch of the faulty PSM to OUTPUT DISABLE. The greenACTIVE LED will go off (the green light may already be off, if PSM failurehas resulted in output failure of that PSM). The red ALARM LED, if alreadyon due to alarm state, will stay on.

3. Unscrew the module attachment screws using an M4 Torxdriver andremove the module. The red LED will go off.

4. Insert the new replacement PSM.

5. Ensure the replacement PSM is firmly in position and tighten both moduleattachment screws to 2.2 Nm using an M4 Torxdriver.

6. Set the switch to OUTPUT ENABLE. Check that the green ACTIVE LED islit.

GSM-208-523Replacing a fan unit



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a fan unit

Preconditionsfor fanreplacement

CAUTION If the cabinet is operational, this replacement procedureshould be completed without delay, in order to minimizeduration of air cooling disruption.

The fan units can be replaced while the indoor cabinet is operational, but beaware that airflow is reduced while fans are out of service, and while door isopen. This will raise equipment temperature, and could shut down the cabinetby triggering the heat sensors.

Views of 2-fanand 4-fan units

Figure 4-4 shows a view of both a 2-fan and a 4-fan unit, including resetbuttons.

RESET BUTTONS(ONE PER FAN)

2-FANUNIT

4-FANUNIT

SLIDE LATCH FORMODULE REMOVAL

Figure 4-4 View of 2-fan and 4-fan units

GSM-208-523 Replacing a fan unit

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–9

Identifying fanunit

There are three cabinet fan units: one 4-fan unit and two identical 2-fan units.Table 4-1 shows the three fan positions.

Table 4-1 Fan positions

Fanreference

Unit type Cabinet position

0 4-fan unit Right side, underneath digital cage.

1 2-fan unit Middle, beneath CTUs.

2 2-fan unit Left side, beneath CTUs.

Replacementprocedure forfan units

To remove a fan unit and install a replacement, proceed as follows:

1. Lift the central slide latch.

2. Pull out the fan unit.

3. Insert the replacement unit firmly in place, ensuring the slide latch hasengaged.

4. Ensure all fans are operating. Any fan not operating should be started bypressing its RESET button.

GSM-208-523Replacing a CTU



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a CTU

Preconditionsfor CTUreplacement

WARNING Ensure that RF power is OFF before disconnecting RFcables. Severe burns may result if RF power is ON whencables are disconnected.

There are up to six CTUs in a cabinet. Replacing a CTU requires the removal ofRF transmitter power for that CTU. It is therefore advisable to perform thisprocedure during periods of low traffic. The OMC-R should be notified ofimminent repair activity.

NOTE The CTU replacement procedure is the same for all CTUs,regardless of frequency rating.Read the Preserving CTU calibration section later in thischapter prior to removing the CTU.

View of the CTUFigure 4-5 shows a view of a CTU with key features identified.

Tx OUTCONNECTOR

Tx STATUS LED

HANDLE



TTY INTERFACECONTROL

PROCESSOR

TEST INTERFACE

RADIO STATUS LED


Figure 4-5 CTU view with key features

GSM-208-523 Replacing a CTU

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–11

Replacementprocedure for aCTU

CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handlingCTUs. An ESP earthing connection point is providedabove the leftmost PSM.

Removing a faulty CTU

NOTE Ensure that the preserve CTU calibration data feature isenabled and determine which calibration data exchangescenario applies before proceeding further (refer toEnabling the preserve CTU calibration data feature andTable 4-2 respectively, later in this chapter).

To remove a CTU:

1. Locate the CTU to be replaced. CTUs are sequentially numbered, withCTU 0 on the right, and CTU 5 on the left, as shown in Figure 4-1.

2. Disable the CTU transmit RF power by using the lock_device orshutdown_device command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected tothe MCUF.

NOTE Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference(GSM-100-321) for information on usage and specificcommands.

3. When the CTU has been shutdown, check the Tx STATUS LED (solidyellow) is extinguished.

4. Press and release the appropriate CTU circuit breaker button on the CBMto the out (off) position. Ensure the RADIO STATUS LED is extinguished.

WARNING Ensure that RF power is OFF, before disconnecting RFcables. Severe burns may result if RF power is ON whencables are disconnected.

5. Unscrew the coaxial cable from the Tx OUT SMA connector at the top ofthe CTU front panel.

6. Unscrew the two CTU attachment screws using M4 Torx driver.

WARNING The CTU weighs 5 kg. Handle with care.

CAUTION Take care to avoid damage of CTU rear connectors whenhandling outside of the cabinet.

7. Withdraw the CTU using the handle. Support the unit from underneath asit slides out.

GSM-208-523Replacing a CTU



68P02902W69-A

Fitting a replacement CTU

To fit a replacement CTU:

1. Ensure that the correct CTU push-on/push-off circuit breaker button on theCBM has been pressed to the out (off) position.

2. Ensure that the transmit RF power of the correct CTU has been lockedusing the lock_device or shutdown_device command at the OMC-Ror from a PC connected to the MCUF.

3. Insert replacement CTU module, taking care to locate the module on theguide rails. Press firmly into place.

4. Tighten both module attachment screws to the correct torque (seeOverview of replacement procedures), using an M4 Torx driver.

NOTE The Tx cable has a at one end, and a straight SMAconnector at the other end. The 90° end is designed forconnection to the Tx port of a CTU.

5. Screw the 90° SMA connector of the coaxial cable onto the Tx OUT SMAconnector at the top of the CTU front panel. Tighten to correct torque (seeOverview of replacement procedures).

6. Press and release the appropriate CTU circuit breaker button on the CBM.The RADIO STATUS LED will flash green for about two minutes, and thenremain lit.

CAUTION If both RADIO STATUS and Tx STATUS LEDs areflashing, the bootcode is downloading into non-volatilememory for software upgrade. Power should not beremoved, nor the cabinet reset, until downloading hasbeen completed, as this will corrupt the non-volatilememory. If bootcode is corrupted, contact MotorolaCustomer Network Resolution Centre requesting thebootcode restoration procedure and the appropriatebootcode file.

7. Enable the CTU transmit RF power by using the unlock_device orins_device command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to theMCUF. The Tx STATUS LED (yellow) will be lit if the CTU is transmitting.

8. Calibrate the CTU using the appropriate procedure, as described in CTUcalibration data exchange procedures later in this chapter.


GSM-208-523 Preserving CTU calibration

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–13

Preserving CTU calibration

Introduction topreserving CTUcalibration

This section describes the preserve CTU transceiver calibration feature, whichuses commands to store, display and clear calibration data. This feature is usedon busy systems where there is a need to replace a CTU quickly and thusreduce system down time during peak hours.

NOTE After the CTU has been replaced, it will be necessary torevisit the site at an off-peak period to carry out bay leveland cell site power (CSPWR) calibration to fully optimizethe hardware. The bay level calibration procedure isdescribed later in this chapter. The CSPWR calibrationprocedure is described in Chapter 3 of this category.

Calibration dataoverview

This function enables malfunctioning CTUs to be replaced without the need toremove the cell from service. The calibration offsets can be displayed andcleared using the disp_cal_data and clear_cal_data commands.

Display calibration offsets data

The disp_cal_data command only displays offsets from the CTU if the DRI is inthe busy-unlocked (B-U) state. The GPROC CM database values are displayedwhen the CTU is locked or not busy. If the calibration values have been cleared,they will not be available on the specific RAM of the CTU or the CM database,and the response will be NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE.

GSM-208-523Preserving CTU calibration



68P02902W69-A

Store calibration data

The store_cal_data command sets a flag to indicate that when the CTU isunlocked and comes into service, the calibration values will be copied from theRAM in the CTU into the GPROC CM database. The values from the RAM inthe CTU will only be copied to the database if there are no calibration values inthe GPROC CM database, and if the CTU has values in the RAM to be copied.

If the RAM in the CTU has been cleared of all values, and the GPROC CMdatabase has calibration values for that specific CTU, when the CTU is unlockedit will get a copy of these values from the CM database. Different calibrationvalues for the same CTU can exist in the CM database and the RAM in theCTU.

Care has to be taken when calibrating a CTU. To ensure that the values in theRAM of the CTU and CM database have the same calibration data, the existingvalues have to be cleared using the clear_cal_data command before acalibration can be successful and the correct calibration data saved. Calibrationdata is stored in the master CM database at the BSC, and is used to update theCM database copy at the BTS if it is valid.

NOTE The value 80H must be cleared from all the paths(columns of data) stored in the CTU, otherwise thecalibration data will not be uploaded to the CM database.

Clear calibration data

The clear_cal_data command removes the offsets from RAM and thedatabase. To clear the data from a CTU that is B-U in the network, thecommand is issued after the CTU is locked. A new CTU being put into thenetwork must first be allowed to become B-U and then locked, only after this willthe command clear the calibration data for that CTU. This is explained in thecalibration procedure.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–15

Calibration data exchange procedures

The process of uploading/downloading calibration data between the CTU andthe CM database is automatic, but the actual procedure used is determined byone of the scenarios described in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 CTU calibration scenarios and procedures

Scenario: Siteinitialization with ...

Description Procedure Used

calibration data heldin the CM database,but with invalid/nocalibration data in theCTU.

If a CTU malfunctions and has tobe replaced, the associated DRI islocked and the malfunctioningCTU replaced with a new CTUwhile the cell remains in service.The DRI is then unlocked. Whenthe executive message RadioStandby Success is received bythe CA at the BTS, the databaseis queried to determine if any validoffset data is stored. If any isfound in the database, this isdownloaded to the new CTU andthe CTU is allowed to come intoservice (B-U).

Preserve CTUcalibration data

invalid/no calibrationdata held in the CMdatabase andinvalid/no calibrationdata in the CTU.

Once the CA at the BTS receivesthe executive message RadioStandby Success, it checks theCM database for valid offsets. Ifnone exist, the BTS then queriesthe CTU for valid data. If noneexists in the CTU, the CTU isbrought into service but theInvalid transceiver calibrationdata alarm is triggered.

CTU calibration

invalid/no calibrationdata held in the CMdatabase, but withvalid calibration datain the CTU.

Initially a CTU is calibrated andthe antenna offsets stored withinthe CTU. When the BTS initializesand enters call processing mode,the Central Authority (CA) at theBTS queries ConfigurationManagement (CM) to see if validoffset data exists. If no valid dataexists then the CTU(s) are queriedfor the offset data, which is sentvia the Radio Signalling Link(RSL) to the CM at the BSC.

CTUrecalibration

GSM-208-523Preserving CTU calibration



68P02902W69-A

Calibration data format from the CM database

The format of the calibration data output from the CM database is describedhere. This information is provided in response to the command:

disp_cal_data <location> DRI <device_id> <device_id2>[<device_id3>]

For example:

disp_cal_data 21 dri 5 3 0

Where: 21 is: site

dri dri device

5 first dev_id

3 second dev_id

0 third dev_id

System response:

DRI ID 5 3 0Data read from transceiverCalibration data (All values in Hex):Transmit Power Offset = 77Receive System Data:Antenna Number 1 2 3 4 5 6––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––

73, 77, 74, 7E, 70, 81,77, 81, 71, 76, 6D, 74,74, 6F, 68, 69, 70, 83,6D, 55, 56, 57, 55, 68,67, 65, 66, 56, 80, 77,66, 6C, 5F, 66, 78, 54,67, 66, 56, 5F, 6C, 6D,77, 5F, 66, 87, 9D, 56,66, 66, 65, 64, 62, 44,54, 5A, 5D, 5F, 60, 55,55, 43, 44, 4D, 4E, 44,65, 6F, 6D, 67, 77, 81,66, 45, 4F, 4D, 44, 4A,61, 60, 64, 66, 6D, 64,54, 5D, 55, 5F, 60, 5B,5D, 55, 5A, 67, 6F, 60,

Note that the second line of the system response indicates whether the data isread from the CTU or the database. In the example above the information isread from the CTU.

The number of rows of offset calibration data are as follows:

S GSM850 – 16

S PGSM900 – 16

S EGSM900 – 22

S DCS1800 – 47

S PCS1900 – 38


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–17

Test equipmentrequired

The following equipment is needed to carry out the CTU calibration/recalibrationprocedures:

S An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC).

S Terminal emulator software.

S A 9-way to 9-way cable (BTS).

S A 9-way to 25-way cable (BSC).

Commandsused

Table 4-3 lists the commands required to carry out this procedure.

Table 4-3 CTU calibration commands

BTS Command Function

lock_device Prevents the device being used (see Note below).

unlock_device Enables the device to be used (see Note below).

OMC-R/BSCCommand

Function

store_cal_data Stores calibration data for all transceivers in the masterCM database at the BSC, which is then used to updatethe CM database copy at the BTS.

disp_cal_data When transceiver is locked: Displays calibration data inthe CM database for the specified transceiver.

When transceiver is unlocked: Displays calibration data inthe RAM of the specified transceiver.

clear_cal_data Clears calibration data in the CM database at the BSCand BTS for a specified transceiver.

NOTE Use shutdown_device instead of lock_device if theCTU is currently active. Use ins_device instead ofunlock_device if shutdown_device was used to lockthe CTU.

NOTE If there is no RSL from the BTS to the BSC then acommand will not be executed by the BSC, as the BSChas no knowledge of the command being entered.

All calibration data is stored in the master CM database at the BSC, which isthen used to update the CM database copy at the BTS only if the data is valid.

CINDYcommissioningtool

Many of the procedures described in this chapter can be carried outautomatically using the CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDYuser documentation for details.

GSM-208-523Enabling the preserve CTU calibration data feature



68P02902W69-A

Enabling the preserve CTU calibration data feature

Introduction tothe preserveCTU calibrationdata feature

NOTE The preserve CTU calibration data feature must beenabled at either the OMC-R or the BSC, otherwise noneof the calibration data exchange procedures described inTable 4-2 will work.

Determine the BSC/BTS configuration and cage slot allocation before startingany of the calibration data exchange procedures.

Enabling thepreserve featureat the OMC-R

Proceed as follows to enable the preserve CTU calibration data feature at theOMC-R:

1. At the OMC-R man-machine interface (MMI), log in to the required basesite controller (BSC).

2. To initiate the preserve feature type:

store_cal_data <site_id>

All calibration data will be stored in the master CM database at the BSC, whichis then used to update the CM database copy at the BTS (if the data is valid).

Enabling thepreserve featureat the BSC

Proceed as follows to enable the preserve CTU calibration data feature at theBSC:

1. Connect the 9-way to 25-way cable from the PC serial A port to the BSPTTY port.


3. At the MMI prompt, enter the appropriate level change command andpasswords.

4. At the MMI prompt type:

store_cal_data <location>

GSM-208-523 CTU calibration data exchange procedures

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–19

CTU calibration data exchange procedures

Introduction toCTU calibrationdata exchangeprocedures

The procedures listed in Table 4-2 are described here in detail. All threeprocedures assume that the preserve CTU calibration data feature (describedpreviously) has been enabled.

Preserve CTUcalibration dataprocedure

NOTE This procedure assumes that the store_cal_data command has been used on the CTU at some timepreviously while it was operational.

To replace a CTU using preserved calibration data, follow the procedures forCTU replacement given previously in Replacement procedure for CTU.

The calibration data stored in the CM database is downloaded into the RAM ofthe new CTU. The data is also stored in the non-volatile CTU memory.

NOTE After the CTU has been replaced, it will still be necessaryto revisit the site at an off-peak hour, to carry out bay leveland CSPWR calibration to fully optimize the hardware.

GSM-208-523CTU calibration data exchange procedures



68P02902W69-A

CTU calibrationprocedures

Calibrating the CTU

This procedure is used to put a new CTU into service. If recalibration of aworking CTU is required, use the CTU recalibration procedures provided laterin this chapter.

Proceed as follows to calibrate the new CTU:

NOTE The CTU requires a code load prior to the calibrationprocess. Wait until the CTU finishes the code load andstops flashing (in BUSY-UNLOCKED orENABLED-UNLOCKED state) before proceeding.

1. Lock all the DRIs in the same sector of the CTU to be calibrated. Alwayslock the CTU providing the BCCH last, as this prevents the BCCHswitching to an alternative CTU. Enter the following command for eachof the DRIs.

lock_device <location> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2>[<device_id3>]

2. Display the data in the CM database for the CTU to be calibrated:

disp_cal_data <location> DRI <device_id1>

3. If valid data is present, proceed to step 4. If the response seen is:

NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE

Enter the following:


4. Check there is calibration data present in the CM database for the DRI,then clear that data for the CTU to be calibrated:

clear_cal_data <location> DRI <device_id1>

5. Confirm the data has been cleared from the CM database for the specifiedCTU:


If no problems have occurred, the response will be:

NO DATA AVAILABLE

NOTE If there is a different response, ensure the CTU is in theLOCKED state and carry out from step 2 again.

6. Carry out bay level and CSPWR procedures, as described in the relevantsection of this manual. Record the data.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–21

Checking the CTU calibration

Proceed as follows to check the CTU calibration:

1. Unlock the DRI of the calibrated CTU.

NOTE Ensure the previous calibration data has been clearedbefore unlocking the CTU.

Enter the command:

unlock_device <location> DRI <device_id1>

Check that the calibrated CTU passes into BUSY-UNLOCKED state. Thenew calibration data is uploaded to the CM database and is then used toupdate the copy at the BTS.

2. Check the calibration data of the DRI of the calibrated CTU against thevalues noted in step 6 of the previous procedure.

NOTE Allow one minute after uploading for the values in the CMdatabase at the BSC to be updated.

Enter the command:


The values seen should match the previous ones.

NOTE If the CTU is BUSY-UNLOCKED the data can be readdirectly from the CTU. In ENABLED-UNLOCKED orLOCKED state calibration data is read from the CMdatabase.

3. Make test calls in all timeslots of the new DRI to check audio quality andthen lock the tested DRI using the command:

lock_device <location> DRI <device_id1>

4. With the CTU LOCKED (or in ENABLED-UNLOCKED state), ensure thecalibration process has been carried out correctly by checking that the CMdatabase at the BSC has been updated with the new values.

Enter the command:



5. If everything is in order, the cell can be put back into service. Unlock all theDRIs in the same sector that were locked previously using the command:

unlock_device <location> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2>[<device_id3>]

GSM-208-523CTU calibration data exchange procedures



68P02902W69-A

CTUrecalibrationprocedures

Recalibrating the CTU

This procedure is used to recalibrate a working CTU when there is invalid or nocalibration data held in the CM database, but valid calibration data is present inthe CTU.

Proceed as follows to recalibrate the CTU:

1. At the site BTP, remote login to the serving BSC and enter the followingMMI command:


2. Lock all the DRIs in the same sector of the CTU to be recalibrated.Always lock the CTU providing the BCCH last, as this prevents theBCCH switching to an alternative CTU. Enter the following command foreach of the DRIs:

lock_device <location> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2>[<device_id3>]

3. Display the data in the CM database for the CTU that is to be recalibratedin the sector:


4. If valid data is present proceed to step 5. If the response seen is:

NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE

Enter the following:


5. Check there is calibration data present in the CM database for the DRI,then clear that data for the CTU to be recalibrated:

clear_cal_data <location> DRI <device_id1>

6. Confirm the data has been cleared from the CM database for the specifiedCTU:


If no problems have occurred, the response will be:

NO DATA AVAILABLE

NOTE If there is a different response, ensure the CTU is in theLOCKED state and proceed from step 3 again.

7. Carry out bay level and CSPWR procedures, as described in the relevantsection of this manual. Record the data.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–23

Checking the CTU recalibration

Proceed as follows to check the recalibration:

1. Unlock the DRI of the recalibrated CTU.

NOTE Ensure the previous calibration data has been clearedbefore unlocking the CTU.

Enter the command:

unlock_device <location> DRI <device_id1>

Check that the recalibrated CTU passes into UNLOCKED state. The newcalibration data is uploaded to the CM database and is then used toupdate the copy at the BTS (even if the DRI does not have an RTFassigned).

2. Check the calibration data of the DRI of the recalibrated CTU against thevalues noted in step 7 of the previous procedure.

NOTE Allow one minute after uploading for the values in the CMdatabase at the BSC to be updated.

Enter the command:



NOTE If the CTU is BUSY-UNLOCKED the data can be readdirectly from the CTU. In ENABLED-UNLOCKED orLOCKED state calibration data is read from the CMdatabase.

3. Lock the tested DRI using the command:

lock_device <location> DRI <device_id1>

4. With the CTU LOCKED (or in ENABLED-UNLOCKED state), ensure therecalibration process has been carried out correctly, by checking that theCM database at the BSC has been updated with the new values.

Enter the command:



5. If everything is in order, the cell can be put back into service. Unlock all theDRIs in the same sector that were locked previously using the command:

unlock_device <location> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2>[<device_id3>]

GSM-208-523Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables



68P02902W69-A

Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables

Introduction tobay level offsettablescalibration

NOTE CTU bay level offset tables calibration and VSWR checkscan be carried out automatically using the CINDYcommissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY userdocumentation for details.

Follow this procedure to calibrate the bay level offset tables to compensate forthe losses or gains due to preselectors and RF cabling from the antenna inputsat the Horizonmacro to the CTU input.

All units are factory calibrated. This procedure is thus necessary only if one ofthe following changes occur:

S A CTU is replaced.

S RF front end equipment is changed.

S The site is reconfigured.

S High power duplexers are fitted.

NOTE The procedures contained in Calibrating HorizonmacroCTU bay level offset tables are to calibrate a single CTU.Repeat the procedures for all CTUs affected by thechanges listed above.


The following test equipment is required:



S A 50 ohm 50 W dummy load.

S A signal generator (0 to 2 GHz).

S A 9-way to 9-way MCUF/CTU cable.

S A 9-way to 9-way EQCP/RSS CTU cable.

CAUTION All test equipment and test leads must be calibratedannually by a recognized laboratory. Test equipment andtest leads must not be calibrated in the field.Do not optimize Motorola cellular base stations with testequipment that is beyond its calibration due date.Allow test equipment to warm up for 30 minutes beforeuse.

GSM-208-523 Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–25

Commandsused

Table 4-4 details the MMI commands that must be used to carry out theprocedure:

NOTE 1. The symbol 0 used in the commands in this procedureis a zero. 2. BSS MMI commands may be entered in upper or lowercase. All other commands must be entered in the caseshown below.CTU passwords are not case sensitive.

Table 4-4 MMI commands for CTU bay level offset calibration

BSS MMI command Function

ins_device Initializes the device, bringing it into service.

lock_device Prevents the device being used.

unlock_device Frees the device for further use.

clear_cal_data Clears previously stored calibration data for a specifiedradio unit on a per DRI basis.

CTU TTY command Function

TEST Places the CTU into test mode.

BBH ALARM OFF Inhibits the BBH alarm.

CAL BAY @1/@2 Calibrates the bay level receive equipment.

AIC OUT Disables automatic intermodulation compensation.

ACT C Activates the Control Processor.

TS A CHAN # Sets all timeslots to channel #.

TS A ANT # Sets all timeslots to antenna #.

SYNTH 1 Stops synthesizer switching with synth 1 permanently on.

SYNTH NRM Enables synthesizer switching into normal working.

SAVE CAL BAY Transfers bay level calibration stored data in RAM toFLASH EPROM.

BAYDONE @N Informs control processor that bay level calibration isvalid for branch N and sets bay level flag.

HALT C Stops the control processor.

WRENB Write enables the FLASH EPROM.

WRPTC Write protects the FLASH EPROM.

FR BAY Reads cal bay offsets from FLASH EPROM.

MR BAY Reads cal bay offsets from RAM.

CTU command Function

tcu_clock 0 Stops the CTU hunting between fibre A and fibre B andforces the CTU to look only at fibre A.




68P02902W69-A

Preparation forbay levelcalibration

The RF path has to be prepared for bay level calibration. The CTU has to bereset and locked, a dummy load connected if no antenna and the alarmsdisabled. Proceed as follows:

1. Connect the 9-way to 9-way MCUF cable from the PC serial A port toMCUF TTY port.



ins_device # dri A * 0

Where: # is: the number of the site loggedinto.

A the antenna/relative cellnumber (0 to 5).

* DRI number on the antenna.

NOTE The CTU must be brought into service as there is no flashEPROM storage of code at the transceiver controlprocessor level.If a connection to the BSC is not available a PCMCIAcommissioning card must be used.

4. Wait for the radio to finish initializing, then lock the cell using the lockdevice command.

WARNING Failure to lock the cell could result in the BCCHtransmitting into, and causing damage to the signalgenerator. Maintenance personnel could receive RF burnswhen connecting to the antenna socket.

Type:

lock_device # dri A * 0




NOTE For ease of calibration, all CTUs in a cell should beinitialized and then locked. Always lock the transceiverproviding the BCCH last as this prevents the BCCH beingswitched to alternate transceivers.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–27

5. Type:

clear_cal_data # dri A * 0




NOTE The clear_cal_data command clears all calibration dataout of the CM database. This is required to override thepreserve calibration feature, if enabled.

6. Connect port COM1 on the PC to the TTY Interface port on the transceiverusing the 9-way to 9-way EQCP/RSS cable.

7. At the MMI-ROM prompt type:

tcu_clock 0

The system responds with the following:

WARNING: CTU must be reset to get connection to MCU.

8. If a tx antenna is not connected to the radio under test, connect a 50 ohm50 W dummy load to the Tx port of the radio under test.

CAUTION Ensure that you have entered the tcu_clock 0 commandat the RSS MMI-ROM 0000> prompt, as shown in step 7before entering call processing to avoid EQCP instabilityat step 3 of Bay level calibration (next procedure).

9. Switch the 9-way to 9-way EQCP/RSS cable from providing RSSconnectivity to providing EQCP connectivity.

10. At the EQCP prompt type:

.GSMFW

TEST


WARNING: The EQCP is now in test mode.

11. At the EQCP TEST prompt type:

BBH ALARM OFF


The alarm reporting for the BBH connection is turned off


AIC OUT


The AIC pad for branch 1 is OUT.

The AIC pad for branch 2 is OUT.




68P02902W69-A

Branch 1 RX0Abay levelcalibrationprocedure

The following procedure is used for bay level calibration of branch 1 RX0A:

1. Connect the output of the signal generator to branch 1 of the antenna portat the top of the Horizonmacro cabinet.

NOTE It is important to choose the correct number in the TS AANT command.If Rx path is 0A or 0B of SURF then antenna is TS A ANT1.If Rx path is 1A or 1B of SURF then antenna is TS A ANT2.If Rx path is 2A or 2B of SURF then antenna is TS A ANT3.For 900 MHz dual band SURF, if Rx path is 1800 1A or1800 1B of SURF then antenna is TS A ANT 2.

The antenna number can also be found by using the disp_equipment #DRI A * 0 command. The number next to antenna_select is the antennanumber.

2. Set the signal generator to the first (lowest) test frequency for the correctfrequency band under test and set the output level of the signal generatorto –65 dBm.

Table 4-5 to Table 4-8 list the test frequencies for GSM850, EGSM900,DCS1800 and PCS1900 frequency bands.


ACT C

The system responds with the following:The EQCP is in the Call Processing state

Warning: After locking carrier down, enter CTU_CLOCK 0 command at RSSMMI-ROM 0000> prompt before entering Call Processing to avoid EQCPinstability.


TS A ANT 1

The system responds with the following:All timeslots are under user control.


TS A CHAN #

Where: # is: the channel number of theselected frequency, as shownin the test frequency tables.

The system responds with the following:The data for all timeslots has been changed.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–29


SYNTH 1


Synthesizer 1 is enabled.


CAL BAY @1


BAY LEVEL OFFSET = XX

Where XX = The hex value of the bay level reading.


SYNTH NRM


The system is under real time control.

9. Set the signal generator to the next frequency and repeat steps 5 and 6for all the test frequencies in the appropriate test frequency table.




68P02902W69-A

Test frequencytables

The GSM850, EGSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900 test frequencies are listed inTable 4-5, Table 4-6, Table 4-7 and Table 4-8.

Table 4-5 GSM850 test frequencies

Channel Frequency(MHz)


132 825.001 196 837.801

140 826.601 204 839.401

148 828.201 212 841.001

156 829.801 220 842.601

164 831.401 228 844.201

172 833.001 236 845.801

180 834.601 244 847.401

188 836.201 250 848.601

Table 4-6 EGSM900 test frequencies



979 881.001 43 898.601

987 882.601 51 900.201

995 884.201 59 901.801

1003 885.801 67 903.401

1011 887.401 75 905.001

1019 889.001 83 906.601

03 890.601 91 908.201

11 892.201 99 909.801

19 893.801 107 911.401

27 895.401 115 913.001

35 897.001 123 914.601


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–31

Table 4-7 DCS1800 test frequencies



516 1711.001 708 1749.401

524 1712.601 716 1751.001

532 1714.201 724 1752.601

540 1715.801 732 1754.201

548 1717.401 740 1755.801

556 1719.001 748 1757.401

564 1720.601 756 1759.001

572 1722.201 764 1760.601

580 1723.801 772 1762.201

588 1725.401 780 1763.801

596 1727.001 788 1765.401

604 1728.601 796 1767.001

612 1730.201 804 1768.601

620 1731.801 812 1770.201

628 1733.401 820 1771.801

636 1735.001 828 1773.401

644 1736.601 836 1775.001

652 1738.201 844 1776.601

660 1739.801 852 1778.201

668 1741.401 860 1779.801

676 1743.001 868 1781.401

684 1744.601 876 1783.001

692 1746.201 883 1784.401

700 1747.801




68P02902W69-A

Table 4-8 PCS1900 test frequencies



516 1851.001 668 1881.401

524 1852.601 676 1883.001

532 1854.201 684 1884.601

540 1855.801 692 1886.201

548 1857.401 700 1887.801

556 1859.001 708 1889.401

564 1860.601 716 1891.001

572 1862.201 724 1892.601

580 1863.801 732 1894.201

588 1865.401 740 1895.801

596 1867.001 748 1897.401

604 1868.601 756 1899.001

612 1870.201 764 1900.601

620 1871.801 772 1902.201

628 1873.401 780 1903.801

636 1875.001 788 1905.401

644 1876.601 796 1907.001

652 1878.201 804 1908.601

660 1879.801


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–33


Continue the bay level calibration procedure for the second antenna port asfollows:

1. Connect the output of the generator to RX1A.

2. Set the signal generator to provide –65.0 dBm at the antenna port and tothe first channel test frequency shown in the appropriate test frequencytable.


TS A ANT 2


TS A CHAN #



SYNTH 1

CAL BAY @1

SYNTH NRM





68P02902W69-A


Continue the bay level calibration procedure for the third antenna port asfollows:

1. Connect the output of the generator to RX2A.



TS A ANT 3


TS A CHAN #



SYNTH 1

CAL BAY @1

SYNTH NRM



29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–35

900 (dual band)SURF Rx18001A bay levelcalibrationprocedure

For the 900 MHz dual band SURF modules, two additional antenna ports, 18001A and 1800 1B, are available for 1800 MHz use.

NOTE On earlier dual band SURFs the 1A and 1B secondfrequency ports are designated 0A and 0B respectively.

Continue the bay level calibration procedure for the branch 1 1800 antenna portas follows:

1. Connect the output of the generator to RX1800 1A.



TS A ANT 2


TS A CHAN #



SYNTH 1

CAL BAY @1

SYNTH NRM





68P02902W69-A

Branchcompletion

To complete the bay level procedure for the branch:


BAYDONE @1


BAY LEVEL CALIBRATION IS DONE


HALT C


The EQCP is in the Active Standby state


WRENB


Device OK. Flash is now write enabled.


SAVE CAL BAY


Save Cal Completed.


WRPTC


Flash is now write protected.

Branch 2procedure

Repeat the procedures Bay level calibration branch 1 RX0A, Bay levelrepeat for RX1A, Bay level repeat for RX2A and Bay level repeat forRX1800 1A for branch 2 by connecting to RX0B, RX1B, RX2B and RX1800 1Balternately. Enter @2 instead of @1 in the cal bay and baydone commands.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–37

Calibrationcheckprocedure

The following procedure should be used to check the bay level calibration hasbeen successful.

1. To verify that the bay level offset values have been stored in EPROM, usethe read command with the required offset address as an argument.

Offset addresses for the relevant frequency band can be found inTable 4-9 to Table 4-12.

FR BAY To verify writes to flash.

MR BAY To verify writes to RAM.

Table 4-9 lists the CTU frequency offset addresses for GSM850frequencies.

Table 4-9 CTU frequency offset addresses (GSM850)

Bay Level Calibration Storage Flash Address

Branch 1 Valid Flag A000700


Branch 1 Checksum A000706


Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 1 A00070C – A00073B

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 2 A00073C – A00076B

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 3 A00076D – A00079B

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 1 A00079C – A0007CB

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 2 A0007CC – A0007FB

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 3 A0007FC – A00082B

GSM850 CTUs store offsets in 16 locations in each memory area perantenna per branch.




68P02902W69-A

Table 4-10 lists the CTU frequency offset addresses for EGSM900frequencies.

Table 4-10 CTU frequency offset addresses (EGSM900)






Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 1 A00070C – A00074D

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 2 A00074E – A00078F

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 3 A000790 – A0007D1

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 1 A0007D2 – A000813

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 2 A000814 – A000855


EGSM900 CTUs store offsets in 22 locations in each memory area perantenna per branch.

Table 4-11 lists the CTU frequency offset addresses for DCS1800frequencies.

Table 4-11 CTU frequency offset addresses (DCS1800)






Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 1 A00070C – A000798


Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 3 A000826 – A0008B2

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 1 A0008B3 – A00093F

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 2 A000940 – A0009CC

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 3 A0009CD – A000A59

DCS1800 CTUs store offsets in 47 locations in each memory area perantenna per branch.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–39

Table 4-12 lists the CTU frequency offset addresses for PCS1900frequencies.

Table 4-12 CTU frequency offset addresses (PCS1900)






Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 1 A00070C – A00077D

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 2 A00077E – A0007EF

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 3 A0007F0 – A000861

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 1 A000862 – A0008D3

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 2 A0008D4 – A000945

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 3 A000946 – A0009B7

PCS1900 CTUs store offsets in 38 locations in each memory area perantenna per branch.

NOTE Each location consists of three bytes. For example, thebranch 1 valid flag data is stored in address locationsA000700, A000701 and A000702.

2. The following is an example of the first line of the FLASH BAY LEVELOFFSET table when using the FR BAY command, and a description of thefields displayed:

Addres

s

BR1 BR2

flag

BR1

Cksum

BR2

Cksum

BL

offse

t

BL

offse

t

BL

offse

t

BL

offse

t

A000700 00000

1

000001 000595 000595

000060 000002 000005 000002

The remaining rows of the table contain BL offset values

3. If the bay level calibration is successful, each appropriate table locationwill contain valid offsets, and not the factory default of 80.

NOTE Any value from 81 to FF and 00 to 7F except 80 is a validoffset.

4. The value 80 indicates an unsuccessful calibration procedure or anuncalibrated antenna port and will result in error alarm DRI 218: InvalidTransceiver Calibration Data being reported when the unit is unlocked.The calibration procedure will have to be repeated after checking theconfiguration and RF cables.

NOTE Unused data columns in a site configuration may havevalue 80. No alarm will be reported as such table locationsare inappropriate to the site.




68P02902W69-A

Site restoration

After the bay level calibration procedure is completed, restore the site by thefollowing:

1. Remove the signal generator and dummy load and refit the site RF cables.

2. Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the TTY interface port on the CTU.

3. Connect the 9-way to 9-way cable from the PC serial A port to a MCUFTTY port.

CAUTION The following step must be carried out to initialize softwareand so ensure the CTU is correctly brought into service.

4. Press the reset button on the front panel of the CTU.

5. Type:

unlock_device # dri A * 0




The CTU is now in the unlocked_busy state.

6. Type:

disp_act_alarm # dri A * 0




Confirm that there is no DRI 218 alarm. If there is a DRI 218 alarm, redothe whole bay level calibration procedure

7. Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the MCUF TTY port.

GSM-208-523 Replacing a Tx block module or plate

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–41

Replacing a Tx block module or plate

Preconditionsfor Tx blockreplacement

WARNING Ensure that RF power is OFF before disconnecting RFcables. Severe burns may result if RF power is ON whencables are disconnected.

CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digitalmodules. An ESP earthing connection point is providedabove the leftmost PSM.

There are three slots for Tx blocks in the top panel basket of a cabinet, abovethe CTUs. There are four types of Tx block; DCF, TDF, DDF and HCU.

Replacing a Tx block requires removal of RF transmitter power for the CTU(s)that connect with the faulty Tx block; it is therefore advisable to perform thisprocedure during periods of low traffic. The OMC-R should be notified ofimminent repair activity.

It is important to ensure that all unused Tx block M6 screw locations have ascrew in place and are tightened to the correct torque (3.4 Nm). This is toensure maximum quality of EMC and general containment.

Views of Txblocks

Figure 4-6 shows a typical Tx block module used in this cabinet.

SMA Tx CONNECTORS FROMTRANSCEIVERS.

7/16 CONNECTOR TOANTENNAN-TYPE CONNECTOR

TO SURF

Figure 4-6 Views of typical Tx block

GSM-208-523Replacing a Tx block module or plate



68P02902W69-A

Replacementprocedure forTx blocks

Removing a faulty Tx block

WARNING Ensure that RF power is OFF before disconnecting RFcables. Severe burns may result if RF power is ON whencables are disconnected. Ensure that all associated CTUsare identified, such as inputs to an HCU which may in turnconnect to the faulty Tx block.

To remove a Tx block module proceed as follows:

1. Locate the faulty Tx module, and note the RF cable connections to it toenable correct reconnection to the replacement module.

2. Identify the two CTUs that make the Tx connections attached underneaththe module (plus a third Tx on top of a DDF). See Table 4-13.

Table 4-13 Connectors for each type of Tx block module

Txblock

SMA from transceiver Tx 7/16 Rx/Txto antenna

N-type Rx toSURF

DCF 2 (beneath Tx block) 1 1

TDF 2 (beneath Tx block) 2 2

DDF 3 (2 beneath Tx block)

(1 on top of Tx block from HCU)

1 1

HCU 2 0 1 to next Tx block

3. Disable each CTU transmit RF power by using the shutdown_devicecommand at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the MCUF.

NOTE Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference(GSM–100–321) for information on usage and specificdevice codes.

4. When each CTU has been locked, check that the Tx status LED (yellow) isextinguished.

5. Press and release each CTU circuit breaker button on the CBM to the out(off) position. Ensure each RADIO STATUS LED is extinguished.

6. Disconnect all coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing and pulling themout of the module sockets. Note the positions for correct replacement.

7. Using a Torxdriver, unscrew and retain the two M6 Torx screws holding themodule to the top of the cabinet.

WARNING Tx blocks can weigh as much as 5 kg. Handle with care.

8. Using the handles, lift the Tx block from the basket.

GSM-208-523 Replacing a Tx block module or plate

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–43

Fitting a replacement Tx block

To install a replacement Tx block proceed as follows:

1. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacementmodule to the faulty module.

2. Carefully install the replacement Tx block module into its basket locationon the top panel, adjusting alignment for retaining screws. Take care toavoid trapping cables as the Tx block is seated.

3. Fit the two M6 Torx screws to hold the module to the top of the cabinetand tighten to 3.4 Nm.

4. Reconnect the coaxial RF cables to the positions noted in the removalprocedure. Carefully place them into the module sockets and screw down.Tighten to the correct torque.

5. Press each appropriate CTU circuit breaker button on the CBM. EachRADIO STATUS LED will flash green for about two minutes, and then stayilluminated.

6. Enable the CTU transmit RF power by using the ins_device commandat the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the MCUF. The Tx STATUS LED(yellow) will be lit if the CTU is transmitting.


Blanking plate,feedthroughplate or HCUreplacement

The procedure for plates is the same as for Tx blocks, but the plates are held bysix M4 screws in the base of the Tx block basket. The two M6 Tx block screwlocations are not used for plate attachment.

It is important to ensure that all unused Tx block M6 screw locations have ascrew in place and tightened to 3.4 Nm. This is to ensure maximum quality ofEMC and general containment.

GSM-208-523Replacing a SURF module



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a SURF module

Preconditionsfor SURFreplacement

The cabinet contains only one SURF module, either a dual band SURF or asingle band SURF. Consequently, the replacement of a SURF module can onlytake place after the cabinet has been taken out of service, in agreement with theOMC-R.

CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling SURFmodules. An ESP earthing connection point is providedabove the leftmost PSM.

View of theSURF module

Figure 4-7 shows a single band SURF module (later type). Where RX-Pnappears in Figure 4-7, the n may be 850, 900, 1800 or 1900, depending on thefrequency of the SURF module.

RX-Pn1B

RX-Pn2B

GUIDES FORINSERTION


EXTENSION PORTSTO OTHERCABINETS


HARNESS


RX-Pn0A

RX-Pn1ARX-Pn

2A

RX-Pn0B

Single Band SURF

M6 MODULEATTACHMENT

SCREWS

Figure 4-7 View of a later type single band SURF module

NOTE The dual band SURF replacement procedure is almostidentical, with the addition of the extra two secondfrequency antenna connections.

GSM-208-523 Replacing a SURF module

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–45

Replacement ofa SURF module

Removing a faulty SURF module

To remove a SURF module, proceed as follows:

1. Note the RF cable connections to the SURF module to enable correctreconnection to the replacement module.

WARNING Before disconnecting RF cables, ensure that RF power isOFF. Severe burns may result if RF power is ON whencables are disconnected.

2. Disable all CTU transmit RF power by using the shutdown_devicecommand at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the MCUF.

NOTE Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference(GSM-100-321) for information on usage and specificdevice codes.

3. When each CTU has been locked, check that the Tx STATUS LED(yellow) is extinguished.

4. Press and release the CTU circuit breaker buttons on the CBM to the out(off) position. Ensure each RADIO STATUS LED is extinguished.

5. Press and release the SURF circuit breaker button on the CBM to the out(off) position.

6. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing and pullingthem out of the module sockets. Note the positions for correctreplacement.

7. Using a Torxdriver, unscrew the four M6 Torx captive screws holding theSURF module to the top of the cabinet.

8. Using the handles, lift the SURF block from the slot.

GSM-208-523Replacing a SURF module



68P02902W69-A

Fitting a replacement SURF module

To install a replacement SURF module, proceed as follows.

1. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacementmodule to the faulty module.

2. Insert the replacement SURF module firmly into place. Take care to avoidtrapping cables as the module is seated.

3. Tighten the four captive M6 Torx screws to 3.4 Nm.

4. Reconnect the coaxial RF cables to the positions noted in the removalprocedure, and screw down. Tighten to the correct torque.

5. Press the SURF circuit breaker button on the CBM.

6. Press the CTU circuit breaker buttons on the CBM. Each RADIO STATUSLED will flash green for about two minutes, and then stay illuminated.

7. Enable the CTU transmit RF power by using the ins_device commandat the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the MCUF. The Tx STATUS LED(yellow) will be lit if the CTU is transmitting.


The SURF module is now installed and working.

GSM-208-523 Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm)

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–47

Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm)

Introduction todigital modulereplacement

CAUTION MCUF removal during flash memory programming mayresult in MCUF module boot code corruption. This is onlyrepairable by returning to Motorola. For this reason, theMCUF should not be removed while the code load istaking place, indicated by a flashing LED.

A faulty master MCUF, FMUX or BPSM will cause a redundant module (if fitted)to take over until the faulty module is replaced. Faulty MCUF, FMUX and BPSMmodules can be hot swapped without harm to the module or effect on normaloperation, provided the equivalent redundant module has taken over.

Removal of a faulty digital module that has not had its function taken over by aredundant module, and is still partially functional, will affect service. Inform theOMC-R before replacing out such modules.

Diagram ofdigital modules

Figure 4-8 shows the location of modules within the digital module shelf.

ig.322.rh

ALARMMODULE

NIU B0NIU B1

BPSM

BPSM

FMUX

FMUX

MCUF A

MCUF B

NIU A0

NIU A1

REDUNDANT (B)

MASTER (A)

DIGITALMODULE SHELF

Figure 4-8 Digital and BPSM module locations, including optional redundancy

GSM-208-523Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm)



68P02902W69-A

Replacementprocedures fordigital modules

Removing a faulty digital module

To remove a digital module:

WARNING There is a possibility of laser radiation when fibre opticcables are disconnected. Do not look directly into cableswith or without the use of optical aids. Radiation can comefrom either the data in/out connectors or unterminatedfibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digitalmodules. An ESP earthing connection point is providedabove the leftmost PSM.

1. If the faulty digital module is still partially operating, due to no redundantalternative module, inform the OMC-R before proceeding.

2. Locate the faulty module, as shown in Figure 4-8.

3. Note location of any fibre optic cable connections to the module, (MCUF orFMUX modules only), to enable correct reconnection to the replacementmodule.

4. Disconnect each fibre optic cable by gently pushing the knurled connectorin and rotating it through a quarter-turn anticlockwise to disengage, andthen carefully withdrawing the cable.

NOTE It is advisable to protect the tips of the fibre optic cableswith a protective cover, and secure the cables to one side.

5. Unseat the module by gripping the upper and lower pair of ejectorsbetween the thumb and first finger of each hand, then gently squeezingand pulling on the ejectors until the module unclips at the top and bottomof the front panel and unplugs from the rear connector.

6. Carefully slide the module from its location and place it in an anti-staticstorage container.

GSM-208-523 Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm)

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–49

Fitting a replacement digital module

To install a replacement digital module:

1. Remove the replacement module from the anti-static storage container. Inthe case of the NIU, ensure it is of the correct type (E1 or T1).

2. Slide the module into the guide rails and push firmly into place. Theejectors will audibly click into place as confirmation of correct insertion.

3. Connect any fibre optic cables by inserting the connector and rotating aquarter-turn clockwise to engage.

NOTE Ensure fibre optic cables are correctly connected to thelocations noted during module removal.

4. Ensure the appropriate LEDs indicate correct operation.

CAUTION When the two LEDs of the MCUF, are flashing, the bootcode is downloading into non-volatile memory for softwareupgrade. Power should not be removed, nor the cabinetreset, until downloading has been completed, as this willcorrupt the non-volatile memory. If the boot code iscorrupted, contact Motorola Customer Network ResolutionCentre requesting the boot code restoration procedureand the appropriate boot code file.

NOTE Following an NIU switch on or reboot, both red and greenLEDs are initially lit. After approximately 20 seconds, thered LED will extinguish, indicating normal condition. Thiswaiting period may be extended to 50 seconds afterrebooting due to a code download.

5. When fitting a redundant MCUF refer to Redundant MCUF firmwarecompatibility for details of further checks required.


GSM-208-523Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility



68P02902W69-A

Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility

Overview ofMCUF firmwarecompatibility

In many installations a redundant MCUF is fitted and configured to assumecontrol in the event of a failure of the master MCUF. Under normalcircumstances, the redundant MCUF accepts code downloads from the masterMCUF and so remains updated and available for use.

If the redundant MCUF is replaced with a module containing firmware which isincompatible with the master MCUF firmware, then the communicating linkbetween MCUFs will not be established. The redundant MCUF will therefore notbe updated and will not be available to take over when required.

Checking MCUFfirmwarecompatibility

To check firmware compatibility between MCUFs, check the state of the basetransceiver processor (BTP) within each MCUF as follows:

1. Connect a PC to the TTY connection on the master MCUF.

2. At the CUST MMI prompt, enter:

state <site #> btp * *

Where <site #> is the site number.

The status of both BTPs will be displayed as follows:

BTP 0 0 0 B–U NO REASON

BTP 1 0 0 E–U NO REASON

or,


BTP 1 0 0 D–U No Redundant Link

If No Redundant Link is indicated then the master MCUF is not in communicationwith the redundant MCUF and firmware incompatibility may be assumed. Referto Updating redundant MCUF firmware.

UpdatingredundantMCUF firmware

The following procedure to update firmware in the redundant MCUF requires aPCMCIA card containing current network configuration data. The procedureassumes that the PCMCIA card is already in the master MCUF.

NOTE No call processing can take place during the MCUFfirmware update process. The entire process should takeapproximately one hour.

GSM-208-523 Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–51

Site preparationTo prepare for the firmware update the site must first be taken out-of-service asfollows:


2. At the CUST MMI prompt, disable all CTUs in turn by typing:

shutdown_device <site #> dri * * * <seconds>

Where <site #> is the site number, * * * is the DRI identifier and<seconds> is the time delay before shutdown occurs.

3. Confirm this action by observing each CTU Tx status LED, which shouldextinguish shortly after issuing the shutdown command.

4. Disconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s link

Redundant MCUF firmware update procedureThe following procedure describes how to update redundant MCUF firmware byplacing the redundant MCUF into the master position and downloading codefrom a PCMCIA card.

1. Remove the uploaded PCMCIA card from the master MCUF, and ensurethat write protect is switched to OFF.

2. Remove both MCUFs. Insert the PCMCIA card into the original redundantMCUF then insert this MCUF into the master position.

3. Connect a PC to the TTY connection on the MCUF front panel.

4. At the MMI-ROM prompt, type:

burn

This will flash object 8, the MCUF boot object, from the PCMCIA card ontothe MCUF card. The flash download takes approximately 30 seconds,then the MCUF will reset.

5. At the MMI ROM prompt, type:

set_site <site #>


The MCUF now carries out a system initialization using data from thePCMCIA card. After a short wait the screen displays:Initialization complete. All commands accepted.

The MCUF firmware update is complete and both MCUFs now holdidentical firmware. The MCUF originally removed from the master positionmay now be used in the redundant position.

6. Insert the original master MCUF into the redundant position.

The redundant MCUF now requires a 15 minute sync warm up period,followed by a further delay of four minutes while the two MCUFs achievephase lock. Once phase lock is achieved the master MCUF immediatelybegins codeloading to the redundant MCUF. Codeloading takes a further15 minutes.

The process is complete when the following message is displayed onscreen:Redundant MSW is INS

<*><*><*> NEW STANDBY Switch CONFIGURED <*><*><*>

GSM-208-523Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility



68P02902W69-A

7. To confirm correct MCUF status, at the CUST MMI prompt, enter:






Where B–U is busy unlocked (master) and E-U is enabled unlocked(redundant).

8. Reconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s link.

NOTE There is no need to unlock the CTUs as these areautomatically unlocked during the initialization procedure.

NOTE If a PCMCIA card is not available then the firmware in theredundant MCUF may be updated by removing the masterMCUF and placing the redundant MCUF in the masterposition. Code download from the BSC will ensure thenewly installed MCUF is fully updated. This procedurehowever is likely to take up to 30 minutes longer than theprocedure involving a PCMCIA card, resulting in a longerout of service time for the BTS.

GSM-208-523 Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–53

Testing MCUFredundancy

The following procedure tests MCUF redundancy by forcing the master andredundant MCUFs to swap roles. The commands refer to the base transceiverprocessors (BTPs) within each MCUF.


2. At the CUST MMI prompt, type:






Where B–U is busy unlocked (master) and E-U is enabled unlocked(redundant).

3. At the CUST MMI prompt type:

swap_devices <site #> btp 0 0 0 btp 1 0 0

Where <site #> is the site number, btp 0 0 0 is the master MCUF and btp1 0 0 is the redundant MCUF.

This command will swap MCUF roles by forcing:

S the redundant MCUF into a busy state , and making it master.

S the master MCUF into an enabled state, and making it redundant.

4. At the CUST MMI prompt, confirm the swap by typing:



The status of both BTPs will now show changed roles:



5. Make test calls on the site to verify the new master MCUF.

6. At the CUST MMI prompt type, swap the MCUFs back to their originalstates by typing:

swap_devices <site #> btp 1 0 0 btp 0 0 0

Where <site #> is the site number, btp 1 0 0 is the master MCUF and btp0 0 0 is the redundant MCUF.

7. At the CUST MMI prompt, confirm the swap by typing:



Both BTPs have now reverted to their original roles:



8. Make test calls on the site to verify the new master MCUF.

GSM-208-523Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK)



68P02902W69-A

Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK)

Introduction toMCUF (GLCK)calibration

NOTE GCLK calibration can be carried out automatically usingthe CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevantCINDY user documentation for details.

This procedure explains how to calibrate the Ovenized Crystal Oscillator(OCXO) in the MCUF GCLK in the Horizonmacro product at a BSS site.

When tocalibrate theGCLK

The calibration procedure is to be used on the following occasions:

S When more than one frame slip per hour is observed at the OMC-R(typically more than 34/day).

S Whenever calibration is required. (Display the active alarms for a site - ifcalibration is required, there will be an alarm stating this.)

CAUTION This procedure should only be carried out by by fullytrained, GSM qualified personnel. Under NOcircumstances should this procedure be undertaken,unless all the correct test equipment is readily available.

NOTE The command gclk_cal_mode used in this procedureshould only be executed at the BTS where the calibrationis being carried out.No call processing can occur involving the MCUF duringcalibration mode.Allow a period of 15 minutes to elapse after switching theOCXO power on, to give sufficient time for the unit toreach operating temperature and achieve frequencystabilization.


The test equipment required to carry out the GCLK calibration is as follows:

S An IBM compatible personal computer (PC).

S A 9-way to 9-way TTY cable.

S A caesium or rubidium clock standard with 1 or 10 MHz output frequency.

S A Universal counter with external reference, for example, the HewlettPackard model HP5385A or equivalent.

S A BNC to 3-way MCUF test lead, part number 3086144E01.

GSM-208-523 Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK)

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–55

Preparation forGCLKcalibration

The following procedure is used to prepare the MCUF (GCLK) for calibration:

1. Connect the serial A port of the PC to the MCUF TTY port using the 9-wayto 9-way TTY cable (see Figure 4-9).

2. Start the terminal emulator program.

3. Connect the output from the 10 MHz standard to the reference input of thefrequency counter, select external standard.

4. Set the frequency gate time to 10 seconds and the display to 10significant digits.

5. Connect the test cable extracting the 8 kHz output signal from the front ofthe MCUF to the input of the frequency counter.

Pin 3 – Earth (top pin)

Pin 1 – 8 kHz signal (bottom pin)

8000.000000

MCUF

MCUF TTY

8 kHz OUT

UNIVERSAL COUNTER

10 MHz REFERENCE

Figure 4-9 Horizonmacro GCLK calibration cable connections




68P02902W69-A

GCLKcalibrationprocedure

The following procedure is used to calibrate the MCUF (GCLK):

1. At the MMI-RAM 1015 prompt type:

clear_gclk_avgs <location>

Where <location> is the site number

2. A prompt for a mms id appears. Enter:

0 0

3. To start the GCLK calibration mode, enter the command:

gclk_cal_mode

The gclk_cal_mode command is used to tell the sync function andMCUF software that a calibration is to be performed.

NOTE The gclk_cal_mode command is used to tell the syncfunction and MCUF software that a calibration is to beperformed and can only be executed at Horizonmacrosites outside sysgen mode. The command is NOT allowedon a master MCUF when a standby MCUF is available.

When the command is executed the system will prompt for verification:

Site <Local site number> starting GCLK CALIBRATION MODE. If this isa single MCU site, the site will be down until calibration iscomplete.

Are you sure (y=yes, n=no)?

Enter:

y

The MCUF will begin calibration mode. The command is aborted if thereply is anything other than y.

4. The following prompt will appear:

Frequency Counter Connected, Enter y when ready, or a to abort test.

Enter:

y

The command is aborted and calibration mode exited if the reply isanything other than y.

GSM-208-523 Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK)

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–57

5. Adjust the OCXO control voltage using the +/– and 0 to 3 keys until themeasured frequency is exactly 8000,000000 Hz.

The values entered here, change the frequency by varying degrees. Forexample:

– +0 will increase the output by a small amount.

– +1 will increase the frequency by approximately 10 times.



These are not exact values as every OCXO has a different gain. Thismethod gives sufficient control to correct the frequency within a short time.

A typical sequence of numbers may look as follows:

Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >–3(7.99999898)

Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >+3(8.00000020)

Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >–0(8.00000019 - 8.00000020)




Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >–2(8.00000002 -8.00000003)

Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >–1(8.000000--)

Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >+0(8.000000-)


6. A prompt will appear for saving the results:

Enter a to abort, s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >

Enter:

s

CAL OFFSET is 23654 DAC bits.

After calibration, the MCUF applies a set of voltages to the DAC that feedsthe OCXO, requiring the user to input the corresponding output frequency.This is necessary because the OCXO frequency/voltage characteristic isnot linear and the MCUF adjusts for this by taking readings across a rangeof DAC voltages.




68P02902W69-A

7. To calibrate the OCXO, gain, enter the measured frequency value from thecounter after the value has settled in response to the MMI prompts.

NOTE When taking frequency measurements, ensure that a fullgate period elapses from the time the new value is set toreading the counter. This wait may be several secondsdepending on the counter.

A typical sequence of frequency measurements may be presented asfollows:

Dac set to 1.0 volts, Enter Freq Value or a to abort > 7999.99853







Calibration Gain 3.865560e-01

SYNC>

NOTE The MCUF is reset when the calibration is complete.

8. On completion, the MCUF will automatically reject the calibration if it isoutside the threshold and the following message will be displayed:

Computed Gain > Max WILL RETRY GAIN

Calibration must be performed again. If calibration fails the second timewith the same or similar value, the OCXO may be operating outside theMotorola specification, in which case the MCUF is deemed faulty andshould be replaced.

GSM-208-523 Replacing a door

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–59

Replacing a door

Introduction todoorreplacement

The door is essential to the correct operation of the air circulation system. Thedoor also provides protection to equipment inside. For these reasons, thereplacement procedure should be completed in one session, and the cabinetthen secured.

Views of thedoor

Figure 4-10 shows an inside and outside view of the door.

ig.266.rh

VENTILATIONGRID

EXTERNAL VIEW

TRIGGERLATCH

INTERNAL VIEW

VERTICAL AIRBAFFLE

DOOR ALARMBRACKET

HONEYCOMBVENTILATION

DOOR STOPBRACKET

Figure 4-10 Inside and outside views of the door

GSM-208-523Replacing a door



68P02902W69-A

Replacing adoor

Removing a faulty door

To remove a door, open and proceed as follows:

1. At the cabinet, unscrew the M6 nut, holding the door earth cable to thecabinet. Retain the nut for re-use.

2. Unscrew the M6 holding screw on the slide arm several turns, thenunhook the slide arm from the cabinet attachment point by lifting up.

3. Open the door to about 90° and lift off its hinges.

Fitting a replacement door

CAUTION Avoid damaging the honeycomb door vent.

To install a replacement door:

1. Hold the door at about 90° to the cabinet and lift onto its hinges.

2. Attach the door earth cable to the cabinet using the M6 nut. Tighten thenut to 3.4 Nm.

3. Place the slide arm onto the cabinet attachment holding point and turn theM6 holding screw several times.

GSM-208-523 Replacing a cabinet heat sensor

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–61

Replacing a cabinet heat sensor

Overview ofheat sensors

Heat sensors plug into the backplane from the front, above the CTUs. Each onecan be detached separately and a replacement inserted. CTUs are removed togain access for this procedure.

There is one 70 _C sensor and two 85 _C sensors. Each sensor is marked withthe appropriate temperature.

Procedure forheat sensorreplacement

The procedure for replacing heat sensors is as follows:

WARNING Before disconnecting RF cables, ensure that the RFpower is OFF by turning off the cabinet PSMs. Severeburns may result if RF power is ON when cables aredisconnected.

1. Remove the CTUs (see Replacing a CTU).

2. Identify the faulty heat sensor.

3. Remove the faulty heat sensor by unplugging from the backplane.

4. Install a replacement heat sensor by pushing firmly into place.

5. Install the CTUs (see Replacing a CTU).

The heat sensors should now be operational.

GSM-208-523Replacing a cabinet heat sensor



68P02902W69-A

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A i

Chapter 5

Ancillary enclosure FRU

replacement procedures

GSM-208-523

29th May 02ii


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A iii

Chapter 5Ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to FRU replacement Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU list Maint. 5–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRU view of the ancillary enclosure Maint. 5–2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .






GSM-208-523

29th May 02iv


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523 Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–1

Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures

Introduction toFRUreplacement


This part of the chapter provides information on the replacement of fieldreplaceable units (FRUs) in the ancillary enclosure. Only components classedas FRUs are described here

All FRUs may be hot swapped while the BBS is operational. There is norequirement to power down the BBS.

NOTE Customers requiring replacement of items not classed asFRUs should contact their local Motorola office foravailability of parts, and seek Motorola advice forreplacement procedures.

Any requirement to open the enclosure door is assumed in procedures. Closingand locking the door is assumed at the end of any procedure.

Where customers wish to perform a minor repair on a FRU to save the cost offull replacement, they should consult Motorola for more detailed procedures orreplacement components.

FRU list

The following is a list of FRUs used in the ancillary enclosure:

S Battery strings.

S Heater unit.

S Voltage sense boards.

S Voltage sense cables.

S Fuses.

GSM-208-523Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures



68P02902W69-A

FRU view of theancillaryenclosure

Figure 5-1 shows the ancillary enclosure with all FRUs identified, except thevoltage sense cables.

BATTERY STRING 3

BATTERY STRING 2

BATTERY STRING 1

3 x VOLTAGE SENSE BOARDS(BEHIND PANEL ON BMM)

HEATER UNIT

Figure 5-1 Ancillary enclosure FRU components, excluding voltage sensecables

GSM-208-523 Replacing a battery string

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–3

Replacing a battery string

Introduction tobattery stringreplacement

The ancillary enclosure may contain four, eight, or twelve 12 V monoblocs,arranged in one, two, or three strings of four monoblocs each. The replacementprocedure given here applies to any battery string installed in the ancillaryenclosure.

WARNING There is a danger of explosion if monoblocs are incorrectlyfitted.Replace only with the same type, or equivalentrecommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of usedmonoblocs in accordance with manufacturers instructionsand local safety regulations.

Internal batteryreplacementprocedure

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources arepresent in the ancillary enclosure when the AUXILIARIESCB2/4 isolator switch in the main enclosure and the acsupply isolator switch at the bottom of the ancillaryenclosure are set to the on position and/or the batteriesare connected.

A battery string can be replaced while the equipment is in service, provided it isisolated from the rest of the system by switching the associated battery circuitbreaker to OFF.

GSM-208-523Replacing a battery string



68P02902W69-A

Safety precautions

Observe the following safety precautions when removing monoblocs andinstalling replacements:

WARNING Ensure the appropriate battery circuit breaker BATTERY1, BATTERY 2 or BATTERY 3 is set to the OFF position.

S Use insulated tools when disconnecting/connecting monobloc terminalstogether.

S Remove jewellery and watches before starting work.


S The battery cables and monobloc terminals are colour coded:

BLUE cables on the left side of the enclosure are negative (–) andmust only be connected to the blue (–) terminal of monobloc 4 oneach shelf (see Figure 5-3).

BLACK cables on the right side of the enclosure are positive (+) andmust only be connected to the red (+) terminal of monobloc 1 oneach shelf.

S Do not remove the insulated boot from each battery cable termination untilimmediately before connecting the cable to the monobloc.

S Do not leave exposed cables loose in the enclosure.

S If a battery string is to be removed and not replaced, ensure that thecables to the unused string are insulated from the enclosure and eachother by fitting the insulating boots provided.



29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–5

Removing the old monoblocs

The following procedure describes how to disconnect and remove themonoblocs:

1. Switch off the circuit breaker on the front of the BMM for the battery stringto be replaced.

2. Remove the shelf retaining bracket mounted on the left side of theenclosure by undoing the two retaining screws (see Figure 5-2). Pull theshelf forward until it reaches the shelf stop.

3. Referring to Figure 5-3, disconnect the black 0 V cable and its voltagesense cable and then the blue –48 V cable and its voltage sense cablefrom the outer monoblocs. Fit an insulating boot over each cabletermination as soon as it is disconnected from the monobloc.

WARNING The 0 V cable must be disconnected before the –48 Vcable on each battery string.

4. Disconnect the copper links between monoblocs 1 to 2, 2 to 3 and 3 to 4.

5. Remove the plastic monobloc securing bars and then remove the innertwo monoblocs from the shelf.


6. Remove the two M8 studded bars and then remove the two outermonoblocs.

SHELF RETAINING BRACKET

SHELF

Figure 5-2 Battery shelf detail showing retaining bracket




68P02902W69-A

0 V(BLACK)

LINK BAR

THERMALPROBE CABLE

(IF FITTED)

–48 V(BLUE)

VOLTAGESENSE CABLES

VOLTAGESENSECABLE

Figure 5-3 Battery string connections


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–7

Installing new monoblocs

CAUTION All four monoblocs within a battery string must be of thesame type. However, each complete battery string maycontain different monobloc types from those contained inthe other battery strings.

1. If different monoblocs are to be installed, adjust the position of thebackstop bracket to the rear of the shelf accordingly (see Figure 5-4).Secure the backstop bracket in position by tightening the three M6 bolts.

HAWKER SBS C11 GNB MARATHON HAWKER CHLORIDEPOWERSAFE

YUASA INDEPENDENCE

Figure 5-4 Backstop bracket positions for different monobloc types

2. If Hawker monoblocs are being installed, fit the supplied M8 to M6adapters on the monobloc terminals.

3. Lift monobloc 1 and then monobloc 4 into position on the outer sides ofthe shelf. Locate the two supplied M8 studded bars into the shelf insertsalong the inner sides of the monoblocs and fasten securely.


4. Install and secure the remaining two monoblocs.

5. Mount the supplied plastic bars over each pair of monoblocs and securethem to the studded bars using the nuts and washers provided.

6. Push the shelf back into position and refit the shelf retaining bracket.

7. Apply grease (supplied) to the terminals of each monobloc.

8. Connect the supplied copper link bars between the monobloc terminals.

Note that the terminals on the Yuasa monoblocs connect using the innerscrew holes on the link bars, whereas the terminals on the monoblocsfrom the other manufacturers connect using the outer screw holes.




68P02902W69-A

Connecting monobloc cables

1. Refer to Figure 5-3 and connect the –48 V (blue) cable and the looseleft-hand voltage sense cable to the negative terminal of monobloc 4.

2. Connect the 0 V (black) cable and the loose right-hand voltage sensecable to the positive terminal of monobloc 1.

3. Tighten all terminal bolts to the correct torque (see Table 5-1) and then fitthe terminal protective covers.

Table 5-1 Monobloc terminal torque settings

Monobloc Type Torque Setting

Hawker SBS C11 5 Nm

Hawker Chloride Powersafe 4 Nm

GNB Marathon 11.3 Nm

Yuasa Independence 4 Nm

4. Switch on the circuit breaker for the new battery string and press theRESET button on the front of the BMM. Check that the green HEALTHYLED for the new battery string is illuminated.

GSM-208-523 Replacing the heater unit

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–9

Replacing the heater unit

Introduction toheaterreplacement

The heater unit is mounted in the base of the ancillary enclosure. Replacementcan be carried out while the enclosure is in service, provided the ac supply isisolated using the ac isolator switch (also mounted in the base of the enclosure).

Replacementprocedure forthe heater

To remove the heater

1. Isolate the ac supply to the ancillary enclosure by turning the ac isolatorswitch 90° anticlockwise.

2. Unplug the heater power connector from the front of the ac box (seeFigure 5-5).

3. Undo the two mounting screws (one on either side) that secure the heaterto the floor of the enclosure and lift the heater out of the enclosure.

HEATER UNIT

HEATER UNIT MOUNTING SCREW

HEATER TEST BUTTON

AC ISOLATOR SWITCH

Figure 5-5 Enclosure detail showing the heater, test button and ac isolatorswitch

GSM-208-523Replacing the heater unit



68P02902W69-A

To install a replacement heater

1. Repeat the heater removal procedure in reverse order.

2. Switch on the ac supply using the isolator switch.

3. Test the heater by pressing the heater test button while holding a handover the grille. Release the button as soon as heat is felt coming from theheater.

GSM-208-523 Replacing a voltage sense board

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–11

Replacing a voltage sense board

Introduction tovoltage senseboardreplacement

Three voltage sense boards are installed horizontally in the BMM, behind aremovable panel. Replacement of any of these boards can be carried out whilethe ancillary enclosure is in service.

Replacementprocedure for avoltage senseboard

To remove a voltage sense board

1. Switch off the circuit breaker for the battery string which has the faultyvoltage sense board.

2. Label the D-type connectors for identification and then unplug them fromthe front panel of the BMM.

3. Undo the four screws that secure the voltage sense board front panel tothe BMM (see Figure 5-6) and remove the panel.

4. Carefully withdraw the faulty board from its slot in the BMM.

PANELRETAININGSCREWS

PANELRETAININGSCREWS

VOLTAGE SENSE BOARDBEHIND FRONT PANEL

Figure 5-6 Voltage sense board front panel on the BMM

GSM-208-523Replacing a voltage sense board



68P02902W69-A

To install a replacement voltage sense board

1. Insert the new voltage sense board into its slot and push home firmly.

2. Refit the front panel cover and tighten the four screws.

3. Reconnect all the D-type connectors to the correct sockets.

4. Switch on the appropriate battery string circuit breaker.

5. Press the RESET button on the front of the BMM. Check that the greenHEALTHY LED on the new voltage sense board is illuminated.

GSM-208-523 Replacing a voltage sense cable set

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–13

Replacing a voltage sense cable set

Introduction toreplacingvoltage sensecables

Three sets of voltage sense cables are installed in the ancillary enclosure – oneset for each battery string. Each cable set connects between one of the voltagesense boards in the BMM and the monobloc terminals in one of the batterystrings. Replacement of any of these cable sets can be carried out while theancillary enclosure is in service.

NOTE A voltage sense cable set is supplied complete with theterminal link bars already fitted.

WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources arepresent in the enclosure when the AUXILIARIES CB2/4isolator switch in the main enclosure and the ac supplyisolator switch at the bottom of the enclosure are set to theon position and/or batteries are connected. Remove rings,watches and jewellery before starting this procedure, andexercise extreme caution when working on the equipment.

Replacementprocedure

To remove a voltage sense cable set

1. Switch off the circuit breaker for the battery string which has the faultyvoltage sense cable.

2. Unplug the D-type connector for the faulty voltage sense cable set fromthe front panel of the BMM.

3. Disconnect the black 0 V cable and its voltage sense cable and then theblue –48 V cable and its voltage sense cable from the outer monoblocs.Fit an insulating boot over each cable termination as soon as it isdisconnected from the monobloc. Remove the copper links from betweenthe monoblocs.


4. Remove the complete cable set (with monobloc links) from the enclosure.

To install a replacement voltage sense cable set

1. Apply grease to the monobloc terminals.

2. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order. Remember to connect theblue –48 V cable before the black 0 V cable.

3. Press the RESET button on the front of the BMM. Check that the greenHEALTHY LED for the affected battery string is illuminated.

GSM-208-523Replacing a fuse



68P02902W69-A

Replacing a fuse

Introduction tofusereplacement

Five fuses are fitted in the BMM front panel, as shown in Figure 5-7 below.

Figure 5-7 Fuse locations on the BMM

The circuits protected are described in Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Fuses

Designation Rating Circuit protected

FS1 8 A BMM internal supply

FS2 2 A Fan (not used)

FS3 100 mA Smoke alarm detector

FS4 2 A LVD contactor

FS5 4 A Customer equipment

Fusereplacementprocedure

A fuse can be replaced as follows:

1. Insert a suitable size blade screwdriver into the fuse holder. Turnanticlockwise to unscrew the fuse holder.

2. Withdraw the fuse holder from the BMM.

3. Remove the fuse from the holder and replace with a new fuse of thecorrect rating.

4. Refit the fuse holder into the BMM front panel and turn clockwise totighten.

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A i

Chapter 6

Site verification procedures

GSM-208-523

29th May 02ii


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A iii









GSM-208-523

29th May 02iv


68P02902W69-A

GSM-208-523 Introduction to Horizonmacro verification procedures

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–1

Introduction to Horizonmacro verification procedures

Purpose of thischapter

This chapter provides information required for the verification of Horizonmacrohardware equipment.

The procedures described in this chapter are as follows:

S Checking the antenna VSWR and calibrating the transmit output power.

S Checking the database equipage.

S Checking the E1/T1 link.

S Checking the PIX connections and alarm test.

CINDYcommissioningtool

Many of the procedures described in this chapter can be carried outautomatically using the CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDYuser documentation for details.

GSM-208-523Test equipment, leads and plugs



68P02902W69-A

Test equipment, leads and plugs

Introduction totest equipment,leads and plugs

This section provides information on the test equipment required for theprocedures in this chapter.

CAUTION Ensure that all test equipment associated withcommissioning of Motorola Cellular Base Stations is withincalibration date.


Table 6-1 provides details of the test equipment required to perform the hardwareverification procedures provided in this chapter:

Table 6-1 Hardware verification equipment

Quantity Description Comments

1 PC To have a serial comms port forsending or configuringmessages to the BSC and/orBTS

1 Signal generator Up to 2 GHz

1 Commercial terminal emulatorsoftware

PC PLUS or similar software

1 Digital multimeter Hewlett Packard E2378A orequivalent

1 30dB attenuator 100 W minimum

1 RF adapter kit RTLXQ98088 or equivalent

2 N to 7/16 inch adapter

1 N to N barrel adapter

1 RF wattmeter with 5 W, 10 W25 W and 50 W elements

Bird model 43 or equivalent

1 2 metres of N to N male coaxialcable

Must be calibrated

1 4 metres of N to N male coaxialcable

Must be calibrated

2 9-way to 9-way cable Compatible with PC to TTY porton CTU/MCUF

1 9-way to 9-way cable (CTUonly)

EQCP/RSS cable, connectingPC to CTU TTY port

GSM-208-523 Test equipment, leads and plugs

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–3

Test leadsrequired

Test lead calibration

To minimize variations in test results, ensure that all appropriate test leads usedin hardware verification procedures are calibrated.

CAUTION A recognized laboratory must calibrate all test equipmentand associated test leads annually.Do not calibrate test equipment or test leads in the field.

9-way to 9-way CTU/MCUF cable

2

23

3

55

4

6

7

8

PIN NUMBER PIN NUMBER

9-WAY D-TYPEPC COMMUNICATIONS PORT

9-WAY D-TYPECTU CONNECTOR

4 m SCREENED CABLE

Figure 6-1 Horizonmacro 9-way to 9-way hardware verification cableconnections

GSM-208-523Test equipment, leads and plugs



68P02902W69-A

9-way to 9-way CTU cable

EQCP PINS

RSS PINS

25-WAY D-TYPE M CONNECTOR(CTU TTY PORT)

9-WAY D-TYPE F CONNECTOR(PC COMMUNICATIONS PORT)

4 m SCREENEDCABLE

PIN NUMBER

SELECTORSWITCH

PIN NUMBER

2

2

3

3

8

5

9

5

Figure 6-2 Horizonmacro 9-way to 9-way CTU cable connections

NOTE TCU-B test lead 3086240N01 may alternatively be usedinstead of CTU test lead 3086299N01, but adapter(58C86540N01) is required to attach the 25-way cableconnector to the 9-way CTU port.

Connections for a PIX test lead

Table 6-2 shows pinout details to make a PIX test lead.

Table 6-2 Test plug pin connections

From Pin To Pin

1 20

2 21

3 22

4 23

5 24

6 25

7 26

8 27

9 and 10 not used n/a

11 29

NOTE When making the PIX test lead:Normally open (N/O) PIX inputs should be connectedthrough a 50 ohm resistor.Normally closed (N/C) PIX inputs should be connectedthrough a 50 kohm resistor.Details of N/O and N/C site inputs can be found in theequip_eas file in the site commissioning database.

GSM-208-523 CTU VSWR and cell site offset information

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–5

CTU VSWR and cell site offset information

Introduction tooutput powercalibration andVSWR check

NOTE CTU cell site offset calibration and VSWR checks can becarried out automatically using the CINDY commissioningtool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation fordetails.

The objective of the VSWR check and output power calibration procedure is toensure that antenna feeders and connectors are properly terminated and thenset the pre-defined maximum transmitter output power at the top of the cabinet.

When a transceiver is manufactured, it undergoes comprehensive transmit andreceive calibration procedures. These procedures aim to produce a transceiverthat exhibits a flat frequency response over the GSM band. In the case of thetransmitter, this is performed by distributing the channels over three detectorgroups (the detector being the device that maintains a steady output powerlevel).

In the field, the procedure for setting the transmit output power involves using aset of commands called Cell Site Power (CSPWR). During CSPWR the user cantrim the cabinet output power to account for any abnormalities that may occurbetween the CTU and the top of the cabinet. The offset is effectively subtractedfrom the requested power level, such that for whatever channel is selected, asteady output is maintained at the top of the cabinet.


The following test equipment is required during the VSWR and output powercalibration procedure:



S A Bird model 43P (Thru-line) wattmeter, or equivalent, with 5 W and 50 Welements.

S A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in the Testequipment, leads and plugs section).

S A 9-way to 9-way EQCP/RSS cable.

S A 7/16 N-type adapter.

S A 50 ohm/100 W power attenuator.

CAUTION All test equipment and test leads must be calibratedannually by a recognized laboratory. Test equipment andtest leads must not be calibrated in the field.Do not optimize Motorola cellular base stations with testequipment that is beyond its calibration due date.Allow test equipment to warm up for 30 minutes before use.

GSM-208-523CTU VSWR and cell site offset information



68P02902W69-A

Commandsused

Table 6-3 lists the commands for the VSWR and output power calibrationprocedure.

Table 6-3 VSWR and power calibration commands

BSS MMI Command Function

ins_device Initializes the device, bringing it into service.

lock_device Prevents the device being used.

unlock_device Frees the device for further use.

clear_cal_data Clears previously stored calibration data for aspecified radio unit on a per DRI basis.

CTU Command Function

tcu_clock 0 Stops the CTU hunting between link A and link Band forces the CTU to look only at link A.

CTU Command Emulator Function

TEST Places the CTU in test mode.

ACT C Activates the control processor.

BBH ALARM OFF Inhibits the BBH alarm.

CSPWR Cell site power. Allows the cell site power to beset to the maximum output power.

HALT C Stops the control processor.

TS <T> CHAN XXXandTS <T> TXPWR <nn>

Timeslot set up.

Where: <T> = Timeslot no. or A = ALL XXX = ARFCN to tune timeslot to. nn = Attenuation level from max.

U and D Used with the CSPWR command to increase (U) ordecrease (D) the power level by a factor of 0.2 dB.

ESC (key)or CTRL-Y orCTRL-C

Used to exit the CSPWR command and store theresulting offset to RAM.

WRENB Write enables the FLASH EPROM.

SAVE CAL TX Used to store the resulting offset in FLASHEPROM.

WRPTC Write protects the FLASH EPROM.

FR TX Reads Tx offset for FLASH EPROM.

MR TX Reads Tx offset for RAM.

SNDCMB Emulates combiner control processor messaging.

NOTE 1. The symbol 0 used in the commands is a zero. 2. BSS MMI commands may be entered in upper or lowercase. All other commands must be entered in the caseshown.

GSM-208-523 CTU VSWR and cell site offset information

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–7

Test stages

There are four stages to the procedure:

S Preparing for test.

S Checking the VSWR.

S Calibrating the transmit output power.

S Restoring the site.

NOTE VSWR checks ensure correct antenna matching and canprove the serviceability of the antenna. Repeat theprocedures for all antennas on site, including receiveantennas.

Preparation foroutput powercalibration andVSWR check

The following procedure is used to prepare for the VSWR check and outputpower calibration:

1. Connect the 9-way to 9-way cable from the PC serial A port to MCU TTYport.



ins_device # dri A *




NOTE The transceiver must be brought into service as there isno flash EPROM storage of code at the radio controlprocessor level.If a connection to the BSC is not available a PCMCIAcommissioning card must be used.

GSM-208-523CTU VSWR and cell site offset information



68P02902W69-A

4. Wait for the transceiver to finish initializing, then lock the DRI using thelock device command.

WARNING An RF hazard exists during DRI transmissions. As oneantenna may be connected to a number of DRIs, the lockcommand must be repeated for all DRIs on the antennabeing worked on before connecting the wattmeter.

Type:

lock_device # dri A *




NOTE For ease of calibration, all CTUs in a cell should beinitialized and then locked. Always lock the transceiverproviding the BCCH last, as this prevents the BCCH beingswitched to alternate transceivers.

5. Type:

clear_cal_data # dri A * 0




NOTE The clear_cal_data command clears all calibrationdata out of the CM database. This is required to overridethe preserve calibration feature, if enabled.

6. Connect port COM1 on the PC to the TTY Interface port on the transceiverusing the 9-way to 9-way RSS cable.

7. At the MMI-ROM prompt type:

tcu_clock 0

The system will respond with the following:

WARNING: TCU must be reset to get connection to MCU.

NOTE Do not reset the CTU at this time. The reset is carried outon completion of the CTU VSWR and cell site powercalibration procedure, as described in Site restoration.

8. Remove the 9-way to 9-way RSS cable from the transceiver and replace itwith the 9-way to 9-way EQCP cable.

GSM-208-523 Normal CTU VSWR and cell site power calibration

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–9

Normal CTU VSWR and cell site power calibration

Introduction tonormal VSWRand cell sitepowercalibration

NOTE CTU cell site power calibration and VSWR checks can becarried out automatically using the CINDY commissioningtool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation fordetails.

Two methods available for normal VSWR checking are described in this section;one automatic and one manual. The reason for the two methods is as follows:

VSWR method 1 (automatic)

When typing the CSPWR command at the EQCP prompt, it effectively executesa small script containing the following commands:

TS A CHAN 31 Set all timeslots to channel 31 (CTU900).




TS A TXP 00 Set all timeslots to full power.

MDLTR UC Turn the modulation off.

Prior to executing the CSPWR command, it assumes that the synthesizers arein normal mode (not locked), as is the case after the unit is powered up for thefirst time.

VSWR method 2 (manual)

To allow a specific channel to be specified (instead of defaulting to channels 31,196, 668 or 700) additional commands must be entered, rather than using theCSPWR command. One command sets the appropriate channel and the otherswitches the CTU output power on and off.

GSM-208-523Normal CTU VSWR and cell site power calibration



68P02902W69-A

AutomaticVSWR testprocedure

The first method for normal VSWR checking uses automatic channel selection.The CSPWR command automatically selects a midpoint channel number,however if required manual channel selection can be performed following thesteps detailed in method 2.

WARNING Full power is transmitted during VSWR checks. Ensure allpersonnel are clear of the antenna. Do not carry out thischeck unless antenna installation is complete.

CAUTION To reduce the possibility of interference with other users,minimize the time that the CTU is powered up.

The following procedure automatically checks the VSWR of the transmission path:

1. Disconnect antenna. Connect a dummy load to the meter, ensuring themeter is fitted with a 50 W element and connect the meter to the Tx output.


.GSMFWTESTACT CBBH ALARM OFFCSPWR

3. Monitor and record the wattmeter reading (the forward output power).

4. Press ESC or CTRL-Y or CTRL-C

5. Replace the 50 W element in the wattmeter with a 5 W element andreverse the direction on the power meter.

6. Remove the dummy load and connect the power meter through to theantenna.


CSPWR

8. Monitor and record the reverse power reading indicated on the powermeter.

NOTE Readings should show reflected (reverse) power of nomore than 5% of the forward power at the point ofmeasurement, and less than 1 W.If the ratio of the forward and reverse readings isunacceptable, suspect an improper termination of theantenna feeder and connector.

9. Press ESC or CTRL-Y or CTRL-C


HALT C

11. Remove the power meter and reconnect the antenna.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–11

Manual VSWRtest procedure

The second method for normal VSWR checking allows the manual selection of achannel.

The following procedure is used to manually check the VSWR of thetransmission path through to the antenna:

1. Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load to the meter, ensuring themeter is fitted with a 50 W element and connect the meter to the Txoutput.


.GSMFWTESTACT CBBH ALARM OFF

3. Enter the following command:

TS A CHAN nnn

Where: A is: all timeslots (TS).

nnn the specified channel number.

4. To switch the power on, enter the following command:

TS A TXPWR 00


00 maximum output power.

5. Monitor and record the wattmeter reading (the forward output power).

6. To switch the power off, enter the following command:

TS A TXPWR FF


FF zero output power.




68P02902W69-A

VSWR reversepower testprocedure

WARNING Full power is transmitted during VSWR checks. Ensure allpersonnel are clear of the antenna. Do not carry out thischeck unless antenna installation is complete.

CAUTION To reduce the possibility of interference with other users,minimize the time that the CTU is powered up.

The following procedure is used to manually check the VSWR reverse power:

1. Replace the 50 W element in the wattmeter with a 5 W element andreverse the direction on the power meter.

2. Remove the dummy load and connect the power meter through to theantenna.

3. To switch the power on, enter:

TS A TXPWR 00

4. Monitor and record the reverse power reading indicated on the powermeter.

NOTE Readings should show reflected (reverse) power of nomore than 5% of the forward power at the point ofmeasurement, and less than 1 W.If the ratio of the forward and reverse readings isunacceptable, suspect an improper termination of theantenna feeder and connector.

5. To switch the power off, enter:

TS A TXPWR FF

6. Repeat the forward and reverse power checks for the required number ofchannels.


HALT C



29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–13

Tx output powercalibrationprocedure

NOTE Calibration is not required unless the desired configurationis different to the shipped configuration.

The following procedure is used to calibrate CTU transmit output power:

1. Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load to the meter ensuring themeter is fitted with a 50 W element and connect the meter to the Txoutput.


.GSMFWTESTACT CBBH ALARM OFF


CSPWR

The following message is displayed:Hit U or D until desired max is measured thenhit ESC, CTRL-Y or CTRL-C

4. Enter U or D to adjust the CTU Tx power to achieve the appropriate value,as detailed in Table 6-4:

Table 6-4 Achievable Tx RF power output

RF configuration CTU900/850 CTU1800 CTU1900

TDF 40 W (46.0 dBm) 32 W (45.1 dBm) 32 W (45.1 dBm)

DCF 20 W (43.0 dBm) 16 W (42.1 dBm) 16 W (42.1 dBm)

DDF 8.5 W (39.3 dBm) 7 W (38.5 dBm) 6 W (38 dBm)

All Or the customer-specified value at the top of the cabinet,taking cable losses into account.

5. As U or D is typed, a message similar to the following example, indicatingthe CTU output power and offset value, is displayed:D P: 46.8 dBm Cell Site Offset: 1

When the required output level is achieved, press ESC or CTRL-Y orCTRL-C


HALT CWRENBSAVE CAL TXWRPTC

NOTE The cell site offset can be checked by reading the memorylocation:

S Use FR TX to verify writes to FLASH.

S Use MR TX to verify writes to RAM.




68P02902W69-A

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until all transceivers have been calibrated.


9. Use the Site restoration procedure to return the site to service.

Site restorationAfter all installed CTUs have been checked and calibrated, perform the followingsteps to restore the site: This is done in two stages:

S RF output power check.

S Returning the CTUs to call processing mode.

RF outputpower check

To check RF output power:

1. Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load to the meter and ensurethe meter is fitted with a 50 W element. Connect the meter to the Txoutput.

2. Remove the 9-way to 9-way EQCP cable from the TTY port and connectthe 9-way to 9-way cable to the MCU MMI port.

CAUTION The following step must be carried out to initialize softwareand so ensure the CTU is correctly brought into service.

3. Press the reset button on the front panel of the CTU.

4. Unlock the DRI under test using the following commands:

unlock_device # dri A *

state # DRI A *




This returns the CTU to the Unlocked_Busy state (confirmed by the statecommand).

5. Monitor and record the wattmeter reading. This should be the same as themaximum power set up in step 3 of Calibrating cell site power.

6. Lock the CTU by entering:

lock_device # dri A * 0




Repeat steps 4 to 6 for all CTUs.


29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–15

Returning theCTUs to callprocessingmode

To return the CTUs to call processing mode:

1. Remove the wattmeter and reconnect the antenna lead to the Tx port.

2. Unlock all CTUs tested using the command detailed in step 5 of RFoutput power check.

3. Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the MCUF MMI port.

4. Inform the OMC-R the VSWR and cell site power calibration has beencompleted.

GSM-208-523Checking the database equipage



68P02902W69-A

Checking the database equipage

Introduction tochecking thedatabase

The database equipage checks determine what devices and functions havebeen equipped in the BSC/Horizonmacro database.

There are two stages to the procedure:

S Preparing for the test.

S Checking the database equipage.


The following test equipment is required during the procedure:



S A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in Figure 6-1of the Test equipment, leads and plugs section).


Commandsused

The following commands are used during the procedure:

disp_site Displays the site number.

disp_equipment Displays the active equipment at a specified site.

Preparation fordatabasechecks

To prepare for the database equipage checks:

1. Ensure that the site is in call processing mode.

2. Connect the serial A port on the PC to a MCUF TTY port using the 9-wayto 9-way cable.

3. Start the terminal emulator program at the PC.

GSM-208-523 Checking the database equipage

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–17

Databaseequipage checkprocedure

To check the database for devices and functions:


disp_site

The following message (from the MCUF) is displayed:

current site is #where # = the number of the site logged into.


disp_equipment #

where # = the number of the site logged into.

A complete list of the equipment and functions in the database isdisplayed. For example:

GPROC 0 0 0

GPROC 1 0 0

BSP 0 0 0

DRI 0 0 0

DRI 0 1 0

MSI 0 0 0

MMS 0 0 0

MMS 0 1 0

GCLK 0 0 0

KSW 0 0 0

CAB 0 0 0

SITE 0 0 0

RTF 0 0 0

RTF 0 1 0

3. To check the MSI configuration at the CUST MMI prompt type:

disp_equipment # MSI 1 0 0

Where: # = site number.

A message similar to the following example is displayed:

MSI identifier 1Cage number 0Slot number 16MSI type 0 (0 = MSI)

GSM-208-523Checking the E1/T1 link



68P02902W69-A

Checking the E1/T1 link

Introduction tochecking theE1/T1 link

The E1/T1 link checks verify the integrity of the links back to the BSC/MSC.



S Checking the E1/T1 link.


The E1/T1 link checks require the following test equipment:



S A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in Figure 6-1of the Test equipment, leads and plugs section).


Commandsused

The following command is used to carry out the procedure:

state Displays the status of specified devices or functions.

Preparation forthe E1/T1 linkcheck

The following procedure is used to set up the equipment to check the E1/T1links:

1. Make sure the site is in call processing mode.

2. Connect the serial A port on the PC to an MCUF TTY port using the 9-wayto 9-way cable.

3. Start the terminal emulator program at the PC.

The system and the hardware are set up to check the E1/T1 links.

GSM-208-523 Checking the E1/T1 link

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–19

E1/T1 link testprocedure

The following procedure is used to check the E1/T1 link:

1. Contact the BSC/MSC of the E1/T1 link to be tested, and request aloopback on the relevant Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) port.

NOTE Repeat for all NIUs and E1/T1 links.S If the E1/T1 link has not been installed, perform this

test at the DDF in the site.

S If no DDF is fitted, do this test at the top of thecabinet.

2. Ascertain the site number, equipment list and MMS configuration.

3. At the CUST MMI prompt enter:

state # MMS * * *

Where: # is: location.

* dev/func id.

* dev/func id.

* dev/func id.

For example:

state 1 MMS 1 0 0

The system displays the following message from the MCU:

STATUS INFORMATION

Device: MMS 1 0 0

Administration state : Unlocked

Operational state : Busy

Reason code is : 0

Time of last transition : Wed Jan 5 01:43:13 1994

Related Device/Function:

Assigned to:

END OF STATUS REPORT

If this display shows Unlocked and Busy, then the NIU port (MMS), T43, cablingand the E1/T1 link are all good.

If the loop is removed and the command re-entered, the result will be Unlockedand Disabled.

NOTE The NIU requires a minimum of 20 seconds after receivingthese commands before it registers a change in status.If the display continues to show Unlocked and Busy, thismay be because:1. The wrong connection is looped, if the cabling isdirect.2. The MMS may be terminated by a device generatingan E1/T1 link.

GSM-208-523Checking PIX connections and alarms



68P02902W69-A

Checking PIX connections and alarms

Introduction tochecking thePIX connectionsand alarms

The alarm tests check the serial connections and alarm status.



S Testing the PIX connections using the database external alarm system(EAS).


The serial and alarm tests require the following test equipment:



S A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in Figure 6-1of the Test equipment, leads and plugs section.

CAUTION All test equipment and test leads must be calibratedannually by a recognized laboratory. Test equipment andtest leads must not be calibrated in the field.Do not optimize Motorola Cellular Base Stations with testequipment that is beyond its calibration due date.Allow test equipment to warm up for 30 minutes beforeuse.

Commandsused

The following command is used to test the PIX connections:

enable_alarm Enables alarm reporting for a specified site.

GSM-208-523 Checking PIX connections and alarms

29th May 02


68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–21

Preparing forthe PIXconnectionsand alarms test

The following procedure is used to prepare for the PIX connections and alarmstest:

1. Make sure the software download has been completed.

2. Connect the serial A port on the PC to the master MCUF using the 9-wayto 9- way cable.

3. Start the terminal emulator program at the PC.The system displays the CUST MMI prompt.

4. Enter the password at the CUST MMI prompt.The equipment is set up for the test.

PIX connectiontest procedure

The following procedure is used to test the PIX connections:

1. Apply suitable test plug to PIX input on cabinet top panel.

NOTE Wait at least six seconds before continuing the testing.The time is required to allow polling to detect the presenceof the test plug.


enable_alarm #

Where: # is: the site number.

The system displays all 8 alarms.

NOTE The display depends on the database settings, that is,whether a fault condition is indicated by a closed loop oran open loop.

3. Remove the test plug.

The system clears the alarm display.

GSM-208-523Checking PIX connections and alarms



68P02902W69-A


CABINET PARTS LIST


PARTS LIST

CHAPTER 1 ENCLOSURE PARTS LIST

29th May 02

Parts Information: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

68P02902W70-A i

Category 623

Parts Information (Parts)

GSM-208-623

29th May 02ii


68P02902W70-A

GSM-208-623

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A iii

Category 623Parts Information (Parts) i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .








GSM-208-623

29th May 02iv


68P02902W70-A

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A i

Chapter 1

Enclosure parts list

GSM-208-623

29th May 02ii


68P02902W70-A

GSM-208-623

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A iii




GSM-208-623

29th May 02iv


68P02902W70-A

GSM-208-623 Parts information introduction

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A Parts 1–1

Parts information introduction

Parts listgeneralinformation

The parts lists for this manual reflect the current availability of parts for theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor and the optional ancillary enclosure.

Each item consists of a description and an order number. This uniquelyidentifies the required component. Some components are used in differentequipment in addition to the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor. Some items arecommon to both Horizonmacro and M-Cell6.

Enclosure partslist

The parts list for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and itsassociated equipment, excluding the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet and ancillaryenclosure, is described in this chapter.

Indoor cabinetparts list

The parts list for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is described in Chapter 2.

Ancillaryenclosure partslist

The parts list for the optional ancillary enclosure is described in Chapter 3.

FRU itemsAll items in the spares table (see Table 1-2) are Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).It is not intended that sub-units of these parts will be supplied.

Orderingmethod

Contact the local Motorola office for ordering information, including cost anddelivery.

If an item in a parts list is marked TBA, this means that the part number for theitem was not available at the time of publication of this manual.

NOTE Motorola reserves the right to change the design of theproduct without notice. The information provided in theseparts lists is intended as a guide. Consult the Motorolalocal office for the latest information. They will check theweb site and confirm the current situation.

GSM-208-623Parts information introduction

29th May 02Parts 1–2


68P02902W70-A

Diagram ofHorizonmacro12 carrieroutdoorenclosure FRUs

Figure 1-1 shows the location of the FRUs in the enclosure.

BATTERIES

HMS

HEATER

RECTIFIERS(HIDDEN)

RECTIFIERS

FAN TRAY(HIDDEN)

FAN TRAY(HIDDEN)

POWERCONTROLMODULE

AIM

Figure 1-1 Location of FRUs in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

GSM-208-623 Parts for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A Parts 1–3

Parts for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

Enclosurestandardequipment

The available Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosures are described inTable 1-1.

Table 1-1 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosures

Description Order No.

12 carrier outdoor enclosure, 2-tone dark grey,NCS6010/NCS4010

SVLN1290

12 carrier outdoor enclosure, M-Cell match, RAL7044/RAL9002 SVLN1291

12 carrier outdoor enclosure, dark green, RAL6028 SVLN1292

12 carrier outdoor enclosure, dark brown, RAL8028 SVLN1293

12 carrier outdoor enclosure, brick red, RAL2001 SVLN1294

Each enclosure is supplied in standard form with the following equipmentalready installed, except where stated otherwise:

S 2 HMS units.

S AC power distribution unit.

S DC power distribution unit.

S Power control module.

S 2 fan trays.

S Heater.

S Alarm Interface Module (AIM).

S –48 V dc distribution panel.

S Smoke detector.

S Lights.

S Power distribution box.

S Heat sensors.

S Backup battery pack (packed separately).

NOTE The rectifiers and Horizonmacro indoor cabinets are notsupplied as part of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoorenclosure equipment. Two rectifiers are required to powera partially equipped enclosure (one BTS). Four rectifiersare required to power a fully equipped enclosure (twoBTSs). A fifth rectifier may be added to provide systemredundancy.

GSM-208-623Parts for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure



68P02902W70-A

Spares table

Items classed as FRUs within the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosureare listed in Table 1-2.

Table 1-2 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor FRUs


HMS unit SVLN1284

AIM SVLN1285

Fan tray (for left side) SVLN1286

Fan tray (for right side) SVLN1287

Fuse pack SVLN1288

Power control module SVLN1289

Heater unit SVLN1383

Battery pack (4 x 12 V monoblocs) SVPN1282

Rectifier SWPN5996

Optionalequipment

Table 1-3 lists optional equipment that can be ordered for use with theHorizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

Table 1-3 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor optional equipment


High level feeder cable kit (per sector)

(Includes 1 x 7/16 to N-type cable and 2 x 7/16 to 7/16 cables)

SVLN1283

High level hardware kit SVLN1440

Shroud kit, dark grey SVLN1442

Shroud kit, M-Cell match SVLN1443

Shroud kit, dark green SVLN1444

Shroud kit, dark brown SVLN1445

Shroud kit, brick red SVLN1446

Antenna cable termination bracket kit SVLN1483

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A i

Chapter 2

Horizonmacro indoor cabinet parts

list

GSM-208-623

29th May 02ii


68P02902W70-A

GSM-208-623

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A iii



GSM-208-623

29th May 02iv


68P02902W70-A

GSM-208-623 Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A Parts 2–1

Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

Diagram ofHorizonmacroindoor cabinetFRUs

Figure 2-1 shows the major FRUs in the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet. The doorhas been removed for clarity.

ig.128.rh

FMUX/NIU/BPSM

MCUF

ALARMBOARD

T43/BIB

INTERFACEPANEL

CONNECTORS


SIX CTUs

ONE SURF (Rx)


THREEPSMs


TWO 2-FANUNITS

ONE 4-FANUNIT

Figure 2-1 Diagram of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet, showing major FRUs

GSM-208-623Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet



68P02902W70-A

Spares table

The FRUs for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet are listed in Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 List of Horizonmacro indoor spares

Description Order No

Indoor cabinet SW1053

1900 CTU TBA

1900 SURF TBA

1900 DCF TBA

1900 DDF TBA

1900 TDF TBA

1900 HCU TBA

1800 CTU SWRG5197

1800 SURF (single band) SWRG2880H

1800 SURF (dual band) SVRG1179H

1800 DCF SVLG1224

1800 DDF SVLG1225

1800 TDF SVLG1226

1800 HCU SVLG1227

900 CTU SWRF5193

900 SURF (single band) SWRF8352H

900 SURF (dual band) SWRF2879H

900 DCF SVLF1224

900 DDF SVLF1225

900 TDF SVLF1226

900 HCU SVLF1227

850 CTU TBA

850 SURF TBA

850 DCF TBA

850 DDF TBA

850 TDF TBA

850 HCU TBA

Dual band TDF SVLX1198

Feedthrough plate assembly SVLN1243

SMA 50 ohm load SVLN1230

MCUF SWLN5227

PCMCIA memory card SWLN5239

GSM-208-623 Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A Parts 2–3

Description Order No

NIU-E1 SWLN4403

NIU-T1 SWLN4404

FMUX SWLN4406

BPSM SWPN2567

2nd (Extension) Cabinet Fibre SVKN1244

3rd (Extension) Cabinet Fibre SVKN1245

4th (Extension) Cabinet Fibre SVKN1246

BIM/BIB SWLN4024

CIM/T43 SWLN4025

Indoor –48 V PSM SVPN1221

CBM SWHN5519

2-Fan tray SWHN5289B

4-Fan tray SWHN5790B

Alarm board SWLN5228

Door for indoor cabinet SWHN5556

Indoor blanks set SVLN1219

GSM-208-623Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet



68P02902W70-A

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A i

Chapter 3

Ancillary enclosure parts list

GSM-208-623

29th May 02ii


68P02902W70-A

GSM-208-623

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A iii



GSM-208-623

29th May 02iv


68P02902W70-A

GSM-208-623 Parts for the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02


68P02902W70-A Parts 3–1

Parts for the ancillary enclosure

Diagram of theancillaryenclosure FRUs

Figure 3-1 shows the location of the FRUs in the optional ancillary enclosure.The voltage sense cables are not shown.

BATTERY STRING 3

BATTERY STRING 2

BATTERY STRING 1

3 x VOLTAGE SENSE BOARDS(BEHIND PANEL ON BMM)

HEATER UNIT

Figure 3-1 Location of FRUs in the ancillary enclosure

GSM-208-623Parts for the ancillary enclosure



68P02902W70-A

Enclosurestandardequipment

The available ancillary enclosures are described in Table 3-1. The colours areexternal only – the internal colour is dark grey (NCS6010-R70B).

Table 3-1 Ancillary enclosure options


Ancillary enclosure, dark grey, NCS4010–R70B SVLN1277

Ancillary enclosure, M-Cell match, RAL7044 SVLN1278

Ancillary enclosure, dark green, RAL6028 SVLN1279

Ancillary enclosure, dark brown, RAL8028 SVLN1280

Ancillary enclosure, brick red, RAL8023 SVLN1281

Each enclosure is supplied in standard form with the following equipmentalready installed, except where stated otherwise:

S Battery Management Module (BMM), including 3 x voltage sense boards.

S Heater unit.

S AC isolator switch box.

S Smoke detector.

S Voltage sense cables (x 3), with link bars attached.

S Flexible cable conduits (ac, dc and alarm/control cables preinstalled).

S Light.

Spares table

Items classed as FRUs within the ancillary enclosure are listed in Table 3-2.

Table 3-2 Ancillary enclosure FRUs


Voltage sense cable (x 1) SVKN1488

Fuse pack SVLN1288

Heater unit SVLN1383

Voltage sense board (x 1) SVLN1487

Battery string (4 x 12 V Hawker SBS–C11 monoblocs) SVPN1282

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A I–1

Index

GSM-208-020

29th May 02 I–2


68P02902W66-A

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A I–3

AAC isolator switch, ancillary enclosure, Tech.

10–9

AC power, system insulation check, Inst. 7–10

AC power distribution, Tech. 3–1enclosure, Tech. 3–3

AC power up, main enclosure, Inst. 7–11

AC supplycable identification, Inst. 3–31requirements, Tech. 1–10

AC supply connection, ancillary enclosure, Inst.5–16

AC terminal box, Tech. 2–15

Acronymsenclosure, Tech. 1–2indoor cabinet, Tech. 1–4

AIM, DIP switch settings when ancillaryenclosure used, Inst. 5–19

Alarm interface moduleconnector pinouts, Tech. 2–5default DIP switch settings, Inst. 3–36DIP switch settings, Tech. 2–13interconnection diagram, Tech. 2–3replacement procedure, Maint. 3–16

Alarm module, out of service alarm, Tech. 9–24

AlarmsAC 1 fail, Tech. 3–11ANC smoke, Tech. 3–11BTS disable, Tech. 3–11CTU front panel, Tech. 8–8door open, Tech. 2–19HMS, Tech. 4–1, Tech. 4–2hood open, Tech. 2–20indoor cabinet pinouts, Inst. 4–41low voltage, Tech. 3–11overtemperature, Tech. 3–10power system, Tech. 3–10PSM, Tech. 7–2rectifier, Tech. 3–15rectifier 1 fail, Tech. 3–11rectifier 2 fail, Tech. 3–11rectifier fail, Tech. 2–16smoke, Tech. 2–17, Tech. 3–11

Anchor bolts, Inst. 3–14

Ancillary enclosureac supply requirements, Inst. 2–3alarm management, Tech. 10–8battery installation, Inst. 5–20checking normal operation, Maint. 2–16circuit diagram, Tech. 10–3door opening and closing, Maint. 2–15FRU identification, Parts 3–1installation, Inst. 5–11internal layout, Inst. 5–2maintenance schedule, Maint. 2–15mechanical design, Tech. 10–1packaging, Inst. 5–6site plan, Inst. 2–8structural requirements, Tech. 1–19template, Inst. 5–8wiring to main enclosure, Inst. 5–15

BBackup batteries

replacement, Maint. 3–5terminal connections, Maint. 3–5

Batteriesfloat charge adjustment, Maint. 3–9float charge voltage, Tech. 3–8partial discharge test, Maint. 2–17

Battery backupcircuit breaker, Tech. 3–19internal, Tech. 3–19power duration, Tech. 1–12power duration using ancillary enclosure,

Tech. 1–18thermal probe, Tech. 3–20

Battery backup (external), power duration, Inst.2–5

Battery backup (internal), power duration, Inst.2–5

Battery installation, ancillary enclosure, Inst.5–20

Battery installation procedure, ancillaryenclosure, Inst. 5–22

Battery management module, ancillaryenclosure, Tech. 10–4

Battery string replacement, ancillary enclosure,Maint. 5–3

Battery types and specifications, ancillaryenclosure, Tech. 1–17

GSM-208-020

29th May 02 I–4


68P02902W66-A

Bay level offset calibration, CTU, Maint. 4–24

BIB connections, Inst. 4–37

BMM, connector pinouts, Tech. 10–6

Bolt anchor installation, Inst. 3–13

BPSM, dc outputs, Tech. 7–3

BTS architectures, Horizonmacro and M–Cell6,Inst. 6–2

CCabinet fans, reset button, Tech. 6–2

Cable entrybeneath the enclosure, Inst. 3–24high level, Inst. 3–25high level using cable termination bracket,

Inst. 3–28high level using shroud, Inst. 3–27low level, Inst. 3–22

Cable entry plateshigh level, Tech. 2–23low level, Tech. 2–21

Cable shroudcolours, Tech. 1–14installation, Inst. 3–27

Cable shroud kit, Tech. 2–24

Cable termination bracket kit, Tech. 2–25installation, Inst. 3–28

Cables, routeing, Inst. 3–20

Calibrationpreserving on a CTU, Maint. 4–13Tx output power, Maint. 6–13

CBIA, Tech. 5–7

CBM, Inst. 7–19fuse ratings, Tech. 7–5replacement procedure, Maint. 4–5

Cell site power (CSPWR), Maint. 4–13calibration, Maint. 6–9

checking, E1/T1 link, M–Cell2/6, Maint. 6–18

CINDY tool, Maint. 6–1

Circuit breakersAC power distribution, Tech. 3–4DC power distribution, Tech. 3–6

CM database, viewing calibration data, Maint.4–16

Combining arrangement, Horizonmacro andM–Cell6, Inst. 6–9

Commissioning, test equipment, Inst. 7–2Component identification

ancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–7enclosure, Tech. 1–3indoor cabinet, Tech. 1–5

Condensation, within the enclosure, Inst. 3–7CSFP, code loading, Tech. 9–9CTU

automatic gain control, Tech. 8–12block diagram, Tech. 8–11calibration procedure, Maint. 4–20calibration requirements, Inst. 4–8CCCP processor, Tech. 8–17configuration at the OMC–R, Tech. 8–29EQCP processor, Tech. 8–16FMUX fibre optic links, Tech. 8–15front panel connectors, Tech. 8–10front panel LEDs, Tech. 8–8IF and exciter stages, Tech. 8–13IQ modulator, Tech. 8–13power amplifier, Tech. 8–14preserve calibration data procedure, Maint.

4–19preserving calibration, Maint. 4–13recalibration procedure, Maint. 4–22replacement, Maint. 4–10RSS processor, Tech. 8–16Rx function, Tech. 8–2shutdown response to overheating, Tech.

6–1traffic data flow, Tech. 8–18Tx function, Tech. 8–2

Customer communications equipment, Inst.7–12

DDC connector panel, Tech. 3–18DC power distribution, Tech. 3–2

enclosure, Tech. 3–5DC power up, main enclosure, Inst. 7–12DC supply connection, ancillary enclosure, Inst.

5–17Digital module shelf, equipment locations, Tech.

9–1Digital modules

hot pull replacement, Maint. 4–47location diagram, Maint. 4–47replacement procedures, Maint. 4–48

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A I–5

Dimensions, Inst. 2–2ancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–18enclosure, Tech. 1–12indoor cabinet, Tech. 1–12

Diversity, Inst. 4–17

Door, indoor cabinet, Tech. 5–12

Door (indoor cabinet), replacement procedure,Maint. 4–60

Duplexers, Inst. 4–16

Duplexing, Tech. 8–2

EE1/T1 link, checking, M–Cell2/6, Maint. 6–18

Earthingmain and ancillary enclosures, Inst. 2–14main enclosure, Inst. 3–21

Electricity supplyCompletion and inspection, Inst. 7–7Request for connection, Inst. 7–4, Inst. 7–5

Enclosureac supply requirements, Inst. 2–3cable entry options, Inst. 3–21colours, Tech. 1–14decommissioning checklist, Inst. 8–7earthing, Inst. 3–15FRU identification, Maint. 3–2, Parts 1–2functional areas, Tech. 2–1internal view, Tech. 2–2isolation procedure, Maint. 3–1lifting, Inst. 3–10mechanical inspection, Maint. 2–5normal LED conditions, Maint. 2–3separately packed equipment, Inst. 3–3shipping packaging, Inst. 3–4site plan, Inst. 2–7structural requirements, Tech. 1–15template, Inst. 3–10template dimensions, Inst. 3–11

Enclosure door, opening and closing, Inst. 3–9,Maint. 2–2

Enclosure doors, locks, Tech. 2–19

Enclosure hood, opening and closing, Inst. 3–9,Maint. 2–2

Enclosure temperatureancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–19environmental limits, Tech. 1–9

Environmental requirements, Inst. 2–6

Extension cabinet, alarm processing, Tech. 9–24

Eyebolts, Inst. 3–8

FFan tray, Tech. 2–16

replacement procedure, Maint. 3–13

Fan unit (indoor cabinet), replacementprocedure, Maint. 4–9

FansHMS, Tech. 4–1indoor cabinet, Tech. 6–2

Fibre optic cables, Inst. 4–31

Fibre optic extension, top panel routeing hole,Tech. 5–6

FMUX, BTS cabinet extensions, Tech. 9–21

Foundation, preparation, Inst. 2–17

Frequency band characteristics, Tech. 1–13

Frequency hopping, Tech. 1–13

FRU listancillary enclosure, Maint. 5–1indoor cabinet, Maint. 4–1main enclosure, Maint. 3–1

Fusesancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–18dc supply, Tech. 3–7replacement, Maint. 3–3

Fuses (ancillary enclosure), replacementprocedure, Maint. 5–14

HHeat management system, Tech. 4–1

airflow, Tech. 4–3

Heat sensor, replacement procedure, Maint.4–61

Heat sensors, indoor cabinet, Tech. 6–1

Heater, replacement procedure, Maint. 3–11

Heater replacement, ancillary enclosure, Maint.5–9

GSM-208-020

29th May 02 I–6


68P02902W66-A

Heater thermostat, Tech. 4–3

Heater unit, ancillary enclosure, Tech. 10–9

HMSfan temperature setpoints, Tech. 4–5replacement, Maint. 3–14specifications, Tech. 4–4

HMS testing, Inst. 7–13

HMS unitreplacement procedure, Maint. 3–15test adapter, Inst. 7–13

Hood, indoor cabinet, Inst. 4–6

Hood operation, Tech. 2–20

Horizonmacro, combining arrangement, Inst.6–8

IIndoor cabinet

alarm module LEDs, Tech. 9–25backplane connectors, Tech. 5–8CBIA cage functional areas, Tech. 5–9component identification, Inst. 4–3dc power connections, Inst. 4–43decommissioning checklist, Inst. 8–4door opening and closing, Maint. 2–7fan locations, Maint. 2–10, Maint. 4–9FRU identification, Maint. 4–2, Parts 2–1heat sensor ratings, Maint. 4–61identification, Inst. 4–2interface panel connections, Inst. 4–35interface panel connectors, Tech. 5–11lifting, Inst. 4–10main components, Tech. 5–3maintenance schedule, Maint. 2–7module locations, Maint. 2–11normal LED conditions, Maint. 2–12power and earth cabling, Inst. 4–42removal from the enclosure, Inst. 8–3RF connector types, Inst. 4–15securing bracket and plate locations, Inst.

4–12shipping crate, Inst. 4–6

Interface panel cabling, Inst. 4–34

Interface panel connectors, indoor cabinet,Tech. 5–11

Internal batteriesconnections, Tech. 3–20installation diagram, Inst. 3–19installation procedure, Inst. 3–18

LLaptop support bracket, Tech. 4–1

Lightingancillary enclosure, Tech. 10–10enclosure, Tech. 2–18

Lightning protection, Inst. 4–4E1/T1 lines, Inst. 3–15

MM–Cell6

cable gland for connection to Horizonmacro,Inst. 6–14

combining arrangement, Inst. 6–7Horizonmacro hardware equivalents, Inst.

6–10

Maintenance cover, Inst. 3–6

MCUFcode loading, Tech. 9–9connections between BTS0 and BTS1, Tech.

9–4fibre optic links, Tech. 9–3, Inst. 4–31firmware compatibility, Tech. 9–2, Maint.

4–50M–Cell2/6 functionality, Tech. 9–4PCMCIA interface, Tech. 9–8reset and boot code corruption, Tech. 9–8

MCUF (GCLK), calibration, Maint. 4–54

Mixed product configurations, Horizonmacro andM–Cell6, Inst. 6–11

MSC, E1/T1 line testing, Inst. 3–1

NNIU

database identity, Tech. 9–14, Tech. 9–19E1/T1 links, Tech. 9–14, Tech. 9–15front panel LEDs, Tech. 9–15setting link type at OMC–R, Tech. 9–18

Non–diversity, RF configuration diagram, Inst.4–18

GSM-208-020

29th May 02


68P02902W66-A I–7

OOMC–R

loopback test, Tech. 8–4reporting faulty devices, Maint. 1–1

PPhase lock loop, operating modes, Tech. 9–12

PIX, test lead connections, Maint. 6–4

PIX alarms, checking, Maint. 6–20

PIX inputs and outputs, Inst. 4–39

Plinth, indoor cabinet, Inst. 4–6

Power, consumption, Tech. 1–10

Power control module, Tech. 3–8bypass switch, Maint. 3–9controls and indicators, Tech. 3–9replacement procedure, Maint. 3–9

Power specifications, ancillary enclosure, Tech.1–17

Power supply module (indoor cabinet), types of,Tech. 7–1

Power up procedure, ancillary enclosure, Inst.7–20

Power up procedures, indoor cabinet, Inst. 7–14

Preserve CTU calibration data feature, Maint.4–18

Principal ground bar (PGB), Tech. 2–15

PSMLED functions, Tech. 7–2module options, Tech. 7–1replacement procedure, Maint. 4–7replacement type, Maint. 4–6

RRectifier

configurations, Inst. 3–16external monitoring, Tech. 3–15front panel LEDs, Tech. 3–13identification, Inst. 3–17internal monitoring, Tech. 3–14redundancy, Inst. 3–16replacement procedure, Maint. 3–7

Rectifier module, Tech. 3–12pinout connections, Tech. 3–17

RFloopback test modes, Tech. 8–6loopback/VSWR test functions, Tech. 8–5main components, Tech. 8–3output power, Tech. 1–11, Inst. 2–4

RF configurations, Inst. 4–17

RF functional diagram, Tech. 8–5

RF link cable kits, Inst. 3–25

RF plates, replacement procedure, Maint. 4–43

SSafety

during maintenance, Maint. 1–1lifting the enclosure, Inst. 3–8on site, Inst. 2–11pre–power up checks, Inst. 7–3using eyebolts, Inst. 3–8

Safety precautionsbattery installation, Inst. 5–21battery string replacement, ancillary

enclosure, Maint. 5–4

Sensitivity, Tech. 1–11, Inst. 2–5

Sensors, indoor cabinet shutdown, Tech. 6–1

Site plan, Tech. 1–16ancillary enclosure with main enclosure,

Tech. 1–20

SMA inputs, unused, Tech. 8–32

Smoke alarmpower source, Tech. 3–8reset, Tech. 2–17

Smoke detector, ancillary enclosure, Tech. 10–9

Software requirements, Tech. 1–10

Specificationsancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–17Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor, Tech. 1–9

Structural requirementsancillary enclosure, Inst. 2–7main enclosure, Inst. 2–6

SURFmodule variants, Tech. 8–23receive path, Inst. 4–16replacement procedure, Maint. 4–45

GSM-208-020

29th May 02 I–8


68P02902W66-A

SURF harness, Tech. 5–4

SURF module, dual band description, Tech.8–29

SURF/Tx block, connecting cable types, Inst.4–15

TT43, connection to NIU, Tech. 9–20

T43 connections, Inst. 4–38

Templateancillary enclosure, Inst. 5–3, Inst. 5–8installation, Inst. 3–11

Test leads, verification, Maint. 6–3

Thermal dissipation, Tech. 1–11, Inst. 2–4

Thermal probe, Inst. 3–18

Timeslots, Tech. 8–19, Tech. 8–21

Tools, list, Inst. 1–3

Torque settings, screws, bolts, connectors, Tech.1–12, Inst. 2–3, Maint. 1–1

Tx blockconnector types, Maint. 4–42replacement procedure, Maint. 4–42types, Tech. 8–31

Tx block connectors, Tech. 8–33

Type approval, enclosure, Tech. 1–9

UUnpacking

enclosure, Inst. 3–10indoor cabinet, Inst. 4–7

VVerification, Maint. 6–1

Voltage sense board, replacement procedure,Maint. 5–11

Voltage sense cables, replacement procedure,Maint. 5–13

VSWR, checking, Maint. 6–9

WWeather, conditions for maintenance, Maint. 1–2

Weather conditions for installation, Inst. 3–5

Weightancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–18, Inst. 2–2enclosure, Tech. 1–12, Inst. 2–2indoor cabinet, Tech. 1–12, Inst. 2–2

Wiring diagram230 V ac 3–phase (star), Inst. 3–33230 V ac single phase, Inst. 3–35

68p02902w66-a-uk

Documents

Transcript of 68p02902w66-a-uk